JP7517847B2 - Gaming Machines - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine that can perform variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.

Some conventional gaming machines, when a predetermined condition (the game ball entering the starting area) is met, display a specific display (a pending display or an active display) based on the fulfillment of the predetermined condition on the display means, and can also execute a look-ahead prediction that suggests that a variable display based on the fulfillment of the predetermined condition will be controlled to an advantageous state even before the variable display begins.

Furthermore, some conventional gaming machines are capable of executing pre-reading predictions (specific light-emitting effects) by illuminating light-emitting means provided on the gaming machine (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2016-105941 A

However, in Patent Document 1, depending on the timing when the display of the specific display starts and the timing when the specific light-emitting effect starts, it may be difficult for the player to recognize the specific display that is the target of the specific light-emitting effect.

The present invention was made with an eye on these problems, and aims to provide a gaming machine that makes it easier for players to recognize the specific display that is the target of a specific light-emitting effect.

The gaming machine of means A is
A gaming machine capable of executing variable display and controlling the display to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A light emitting means capable of emitting light;
A display means capable of displaying a specific display corresponding to the variable display;
a performance execution means capable of executing a specific display performance for displaying the specific display and a specific light emission performance for causing the light emission means to emit light based on the establishment of a start condition;
the effect execution means executes the specific light-emitting effect so that light emission from the light-emitting means is recognizable by a player before the display of the specific display is completed in the specific display effect;
The rate at which the specific light-emitting performance is controlled to an advantageous state is higher when the specific light-emitting performance is executed than when the specific light-emitting performance is not executed,
The specific light-emitting performance is a performance in which, during a first period from when the specific light-emitting performance is started to a predetermined timing, the light-emitting means emits light in a predetermined manner that is a manner corresponding to the specific light-emitting performance, and during a second period from the predetermined timing to a specific timing of a variable display that is a target of the specific light-emitting performance, the light-emitting means emits light in a specific manner that is less emphasized than the predetermined manner,
The second period includes a period before the variable display that is the target of the specific light-emitting performance is executed and a period during which the variable display that is the target of the specific light-emitting performance is executed,
The specific timing is a timing prior to a timing at which a variable display result in a variable display that is a target of the specific light-emitting performance is derived,
The light emitting means includes a first light emitting means and a second light emitting means different from the first light emitting means,
the second light-emitting means emits light in a predetermined manner during the first period, and emits light in a specific manner different from the predetermined manner during the second period;
It is characterized by the following.
Furthermore, the gaming machine of the first means is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of executing a variable display and capable of being controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player,
Light-emitting means capable of emitting light (for example, a main lamp 9a, a frame lamp 9b, an attacca lamp 9c, a movable body lamp 9d, a winning flash lamp 135SG009F),
A display means (e.g., an image display device 5) capable of displaying a specific display (e.g., a hold display and an active display) corresponding to the variable display;
A presentation execution means (e.g., a presentation control CPU 120) capable of executing a specific display presentation (e.g., a portion that displays a reserved display or an active display in one of display patterns α to γ) that displays the specific display based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (e.g., the occurrence of a start winning), and a specific light emission presentation (e.g., a flash presentation at the time of winning) that causes the light emitting means to emit light;
Equipped with
The effect execution means executes the specific light-emitting effect so that the light emitted by the light-emitting means is recognizable to the player before the display of the specific display is completed in the specific display effect (for example, as shown in Figs. 10-28, 10-29(A) to 10-32(H), and 10-49(A) to 10-50(D), a portion that lights up the winning flash lamp 135SG009F before the display of the pending display is completed),
The proportion of the game being controlled to the advantageous state is higher when the specific light-emitting effect is executed than when the specific light-emitting effect is not executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-24, when the flash effect at the time of winning is executed, the proportion of the game being controlled to the jackpot game state is higher than when the flash effect at the time of winning is not executed),
The light emitting means includes a first light emitting means (e.g., a winning flash lamp 135SG009F) and a second light emitting means different from the first light emitting means (e.g., a main lamp 9a, a frame lamp 9b, an attacca lamp 9c, and a movable body lamp 9d),
The first light-emitting means emits light in a manner corresponding to the specific light-emitting effect during a first period from the start of the specific light-emitting effect to a predetermined timing (e.g., a period from the start of the early-stage winning flash effect to the end timing of the early-stage winning flash effect) and a second period from the predetermined timing to a specific timing of the variable display that is the target of the specific light-emitting effect (e.g., a period from the start of the late-stage winning flash effect to the start timing of the reach effect of the variable display that is the target of the winning flash effect) (e.g., as shown in FIG. 10-28, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F flashes with brightness C1 and cycle T1 during the execution period of the early-stage winning flash effect, and flashes with brightness C2 and cycle T2 during the execution period of the late-stage winning flash effect).
The second light-emitting means emits light in a manner corresponding to the specific light-emitting performance during the first period, and emits light in a manner corresponding to the variable display being executed during the second period (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-28, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacca lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d flash with a brightness of C1 and a cycle of T1 during the execution period of the early winning flash performance, and flash with a brightness of C2 and a cycle of T0 during the execution period of the late winning flash performance).
The specific display performance is composed of an appearance performance section where the appearance performance of the specific display is executed (for example, as shown in Fig. 10-15, Fig. 10-30(D) to Fig. 10-32(H), Fig. 10-49(B) to Fig. 10-50(D), a section where an appearance animation is displayed in which the reserved display or active display gradually appears from the bottom to the top as a result of the performance control CPU 120 executing a specific display display start performance execution process), and a periodic performance section where a periodic performance is executed in which the display mode of the specific display periodically changes at a predetermined position after the appearance performance (for example, as shown in Fig. 10-15, Fig. 10-30(D) to Fig. 10-32(H), Fig. 10-49(B) to Fig. 10-50(D), a section where the reserved display or active display is displayed as a rotation animation as a result of the performance control CPU 120 executing a specific display rotation display performance execution process),
moreover,
A group performance execution means (for example, a group preview performance) for executing a group performance that displays an image in which a plurality of characters progress in a group (for example, a group preview execution process shown in FIG. 47, a six-person group preview performance shown in FIG. 94 to FIG. 100) is provided;
The display period of the image in the group performance includes a first display period, a second display period, and a third display period (for example, the period shown in FIG. 59 ),
The first display period is a period from when the display of the first character in the group performance begins, when a new character is displayed, until the display of any character ends first (for example, the period shown in FIG. 94 (a23) to FIG. 96 (a30)),
The second display period is a period longer than the first display period, during which a state in which a new character is displayed and the display of a currently displayed character is terminated continues (for example, the period shown in FIG. 97 (a31) to FIG. 98 (a36)),
The third display period is a period during which the display of the currently displayed character is terminated without any new display of the character (for example, the period shown in FIG. 99 (a37) to FIG. 100 (a42)),
In the first display period, a first situation in which a part of the character displayed first is displayed is changed to a second situation in which a part of the character displayed first is displayed in the first situation and a part of the character displayed second is displayed (for example, the examples shown in FIG. 57 and FIG. 94).
It is characterized by:
According to this feature, since the light emitting means emits light before the display of the specific display is completed, it becomes easier for the player to recognize the specific display that is the target of the specific light emitting performance, and since the specific light emitting performance can be made more prominent by causing not only the first light emitting means but also the second light emitting means to emit light in a manner corresponding to the specific light emitting performance during the first period of the specific light emitting performance, it becomes even easier for the player to recognize the specific display that is the target of the specific light emitting performance.Furthermore, the group performance can be executed more preferably.

The embodiments for implementing the invention described below include the invention relating to the following means A. Conventionally, gaming machines that execute group effects that display images of multiple characters progressing in a group, as shown in JP2019-050851A, are known. For example, gaming machines that can execute group effects in which images of multiple characters or objects appear have been disclosed.

The gaming machine described above can add excitement to the game by implementing group effects, but there is still room for improvement in this type of group effect.

This invention was conceived in light of this situation, and its purpose is to provide a gaming machine that can more effectively execute group performances.

(Method A)

(1) A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is favorable to a player when the display result of a variable display becomes a specific display result,
A group performance execution means (for example, a group preview performance) for executing a group performance that displays an image in which a plurality of characters progress in a group (for example, a group preview execution process shown in FIG. 47, a six-person group preview performance shown in FIG. 94 to FIG. 100) is provided;
The display period of the image in the group performance includes a first display period, a second display period, and a third display period (for example, the period shown in FIG. 59 ),
The first display period is a period from when the display of the first character in the group performance begins, when a new character is displayed, until the display of any character ends first (for example, the period shown in FIG. 94 (a23) to FIG. 96 (a30)),
The second display period is a period longer than the first display period, during which a state in which a new character is displayed and the display of a currently displayed character is terminated continues (for example, the period shown in FIG. 97 (a31) to FIG. 98 (a36)),
The third display period is a period during which the display of the currently displayed character is terminated without any new display of the character (for example, the period shown in FIG. 99 (a37) to FIG. 100 (a42)),
During the first display period, a first situation in which a part of the first displayed character is displayed changes to a second situation in which a part of the first displayed character is displayed further than the first situation and a part of the second displayed character is displayed (for example, the examples shown in Figures 57 and 94).
With this configuration, it is possible to more effectively execute the group performance.

The present invention may have only the invention-specific matters described in the claims of the present invention, or may have the invention-specific matters described in the claims of the present invention as well as configurations other than the invention-specific matters.

FIG. 2 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 2 is a rear perspective view of the pachinko game machine according to this embodiment. 1 is a configuration diagram showing various control boards etc. installed in a pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a game control main process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a timer interrupt process for game control. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol process. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a performance control main process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a performance control process. FIG. 2 is a front view of the pachinko game machine. 1 is a configuration diagram showing various control boards etc. installed in a pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 2 is a front view of the image display device. 13A and 13B are diagrams illustrating examples of performance control commands. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. 1A is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table 1, and FIG. 1B is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table 2. FIG. 1A is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of a jackpot type determination table, and FIG. 1B is a diagram showing the contents of various jackpots. FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating a variation pattern. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between variable display results and fluctuation patterns. FIG. A block diagram showing an example of the configuration of a game control data retention area. (A) is a block diagram showing an example of the configuration of a data holding area for performance control, (B) is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of a command buffer received at the time of start winning, and (C) is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of an active display buffer. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a start winning determination process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a random number value determination process when a prize is won. 13 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a command analysis process. 11 is a part of a flowchart showing an example of a performance control process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a pre-reading notice setting process. This figure shows whether or not a pending display preview is executed as a pre-reading preview, and the decision ratio of the display pattern. 13 is a part of a flowchart showing an example of a specific display start performance execution process. A diagram showing the presentation mode of specific display start presentation A. A figure showing the presentation mode of specific display start presentation B. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a flash effect execution process when a prize is won. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a flash effect execution process when a prize is won. An explanatory diagram showing the presentation modes of the flash presentation when an early prize is won and the flash presentation when an late prize is won. A diagram showing the execution rate of flash effects when a prize is won. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a variable display performance process. (A) is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine with the game effect lamp lit at high brightness (C1), and (B) is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine with the game effect lamp turned off. This is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine with the game effect lamp lit at a low brightness (C2), and a front view of a pachinko gaming machine showing the transition of the light emission mode of the game effect lamp when the game effect lamp is lit at a low brightness. This is a timing chart showing the output of the winning flash effect corresponding sound when a start winning occurs that is the subject of the winning flash effect, the lighting of the winning flash lamp, the game effect lamp and the start port lamp, and the display of the effect image and silhouette image. This figure shows the presentation mode when a starting winning event that is the subject of a winning flash presentation occurs during variable display. This figure shows the presentation mode when a starting winning event that is the subject of a winning flash presentation occurs during variable display. This figure shows the presentation mode when a starting winning event that is the subject of a winning flash presentation occurs during variable display. This figure shows the presentation mode when a starting winning event that is the subject of a winning flash presentation occurs during variable display. This figure shows the presentation mode when a starting winning event that is the subject of a winning flash presentation occurs during variable display. This figure shows the presentation mode when a starting winning event that is the subject of a winning flash presentation occurs during variable display. This figure shows the presentation mode when a starting winning event that is the subject of a winning flash presentation occurs during variable display. This figure shows the presentation mode when a starting winning event that is the subject of a winning flash presentation occurs during variable display. This figure shows the presentation mode when a starting winning event that is the subject of a winning flash presentation occurs during variable display. This figure shows the presentation mode when a starting winning event that is the subject of a winning flash presentation occurs during variable display. This figure shows the presentation mode when a starting winning event that is the subject of a winning flash presentation occurs during variable display. This figure shows the presentation mode when a starting winning event that is the subject of a winning flash presentation occurs during variable display. This figure shows the presentation mode when a starting winning event that is the subject of a winning flash presentation occurs during variable display. This figure shows the presentation mode when a starting winning event that is the subject of a winning flash presentation occurs during variable display. This figure shows the presentation mode when a starting winning event that is the subject of a winning flash presentation occurs during variable display. This figure shows the presentation mode when a starting winning event that is the subject of a winning flash presentation occurs during variable display. This figure shows the presentation mode when a starting winning event that is the subject of a winning flash presentation occurs during variable display. This figure shows the presentation mode when a starting winning event that is the subject of a winning flash presentation occurs during variable display. This figure shows the presentation mode when a starting winning event that is the subject of a winning flash presentation occurs during variable display. This figure shows the presentation mode when a starting winning event that is the subject of a winning flash presentation occurs during variable display. This figure shows the presentation mode when a starting winning event that is the subject of a winning flash presentation occurs during variable display. This figure shows the presentation mode when a starting winning event that is the subject of a winning flash presentation occurs during variable display. This figure shows the presentation mode when a starting winning event that is the subject of a winning flash presentation occurs during variable display. This figure shows the presentation mode when a starting winning event that is the subject of a winning flash presentation occurs during variable display. This figure shows the presentation mode when a starting winning event that is the subject of a winning flash presentation occurs during variable display. This figure shows the presentation mode when a starting winning event that is the subject of a winning flash presentation occurs during variable display. This figure shows the presentation mode when a starting winning event that is the subject of a winning flash presentation occurs during variable display. This figure shows the presentation mode when a starting winning event that is the subject of a winning flash presentation occurs during variable display. This figure shows the presentation mode when a starting winning event that is the subject of a winning flash presentation occurs during variable display. This figure shows the presentation mode when a starting winning event that is the subject of a winning flash presentation occurs during variable display. This figure shows the presentation mode when a starting winning event that is the subject of a winning flash presentation occurs during variable display. This figure shows the presentation mode when a starting winning event that is the subject of a winning flash presentation occurs during variable display. This figure shows the presentation mode when a starting winning event that is the subject of a winning flash presentation occurs during variable display. This figure shows the presentation mode when a starting winning event that is the subject of a winning flash presentation occurs during variable display. This figure shows the presentation mode when a starting winning event that is the subject of a winning flash presentation occurs during variable display. This figure shows the presentation mode when a starting winning event that is the subject of a winning flash presentation occurs during variable display. This figure shows the presentation mode when a starting winning event that is the subject of a winning flash presentation occurs during variable display. This figure shows the presentation mode when a starting winning event that is the subject of a winning flash presentation occurs during variable display. This figure shows the presentation mode when a starting winning event that is the subject of a winning flash presentation occurs during variable display. This figure shows the presentation mode when a starting winning event that is the subject of a winning flash presentation occurs during variable display. This is a timing chart showing the output of the winning flash effect corresponding sound when a start winning occurs that is the subject of the winning flash effect in the modified example, the lighting of the winning flash lamp, the game effect lamp, and the start port lamp, and the display of the effect image and silhouette image. A figure showing the presentation mode when a starting winning event that is the subject of a winning flash presentation occurs during variable display in a modified example. A figure showing the presentation mode when a starting winning event that is the subject of a winning flash presentation occurs during variable display in a modified example. A figure showing the presentation mode when a starting winning event that is the subject of a winning flash presentation occurs during variable display in a modified example. A figure showing the presentation mode when a starting winning event that is the subject of a winning flash presentation occurs during variable display in a modified example. A figure showing the presentation mode when a starting winning event that is the subject of a winning flash presentation occurs during variable display in a modified example. A figure showing the presentation mode when a starting winning event that is the subject of a winning flash presentation occurs during variable display in a modified example. A figure showing the presentation mode when a starting winning event that is the subject of a winning flash presentation occurs during variable display in a modified example. A figure showing the presentation mode when a starting winning event that is the subject of a winning flash presentation occurs during variable display in a modified example. A figure showing the presentation mode when a starting winning event that is the subject of a winning flash presentation occurs during variable display in a modified example. A figure showing the presentation mode when a starting winning event that is the subject of a winning flash presentation occurs during variable display in a modified example. A figure showing the presentation mode when a starting winning event that is the subject of a winning flash presentation occurs during variable display in a modified example. A figure showing the presentation mode when a starting winning event that is the subject of a winning flash presentation occurs during variable display in a modified example. A figure showing the presentation mode when a starting winning event that is the subject of a winning flash presentation occurs during variable display in a modified example. A figure showing the presentation mode when a starting winning event that is the subject of a winning flash presentation occurs during variable display in a modified example. A figure showing the presentation mode when a starting winning event that is the subject of a winning flash presentation occurs during variable display in a modified example. A figure showing the presentation mode when a starting winning event that is the subject of a winning flash presentation occurs during variable display in a modified example. A figure showing the presentation mode when a starting winning event that is the subject of a winning flash presentation occurs during variable display in a modified example. A figure showing the presentation mode when a starting winning event that is the subject of a winning flash presentation occurs during variable display in a modified example. A figure showing the presentation mode when a starting winning event that is the subject of a winning flash presentation occurs during variable display in a modified example. A figure showing the presentation mode when a starting winning event that is the subject of a winning flash presentation occurs during variable display in a modified example. 13 is a timing chart showing the timing of lighting of the winning flash lamp, game effect lamp and starting gate lamp, display of the effect image and silhouette image, and operation of the movable body in the modified example. A figure showing the presentation form in a variable display that is the subject of a flash presentation when a prize is won in a modified example. A figure showing the presentation form in a variable display that is the subject of a flash presentation when a prize is won in a modified example. A figure showing the presentation form in a variable display that is the subject of a flash presentation when a prize is won in a modified example. A figure showing the presentation form in a variable display that is the subject of a flash presentation when a prize is won in a modified example. A figure showing the presentation form in a variable display that is the subject of a flash presentation when a prize is won in a modified example. A figure showing the presentation form in a variable display that is the subject of a flash presentation when a prize is won in a modified example. A figure showing the presentation form in a variable display that is the subject of a flash presentation when a prize is won in a modified example. A figure showing the presentation form in a variable display that is the subject of a flash presentation when a prize is won in a modified example. A figure showing the presentation form in a variable display that is the subject of a flash presentation when a prize is won in a modified example. A figure showing the presentation form in a variable display that is the subject of a flash presentation when a prize is won in a modified example. A figure showing the presentation form in a variable display that is the subject of a flash presentation when a prize is won in a modified example. A figure showing the presentation form in a variable display that is the subject of a flash presentation when a prize is won in a modified example. A figure showing the presentation form in a variable display that is the subject of a flash presentation when a prize is won in a modified example. A figure showing the presentation form in a variable display that is the subject of a flash presentation when a prize is won in a modified example. A figure showing the presentation form in a variable display that is the subject of a flash presentation when a prize is won in a modified example. A figure showing the presentation form in a variable display that is the subject of a flash presentation when a prize is won in a modified example. A figure showing the presentation form in a variable display that is the subject of a flash presentation when a prize is won in a modified example. 13 is a timing chart showing the timing of displaying the winning flash lamp and silhouette image in the modified example. A figure showing the presentation form in a variable display that is the subject of a flash presentation when a prize is won in a modified example. A figure showing the presentation form in a variable display that is the subject of a flash presentation when a prize is won in a modified example. A figure showing the presentation form in a variable display that is the subject of a flash presentation when a prize is won in a modified example. A figure showing the presentation form in a variable display that is the subject of a flash presentation when a prize is won in a modified example. A figure showing the presentation form in a variable display that is the subject of a flash presentation when a prize is won in a modified example. A figure showing the presentation form in a variable display that is the subject of a flash presentation when a prize is won in a modified example. A figure showing the presentation form in a variable display that is the subject of a flash presentation when a prize is won in a modified example. A figure showing the presentation form in a variable display that is the subject of a flash presentation when a prize is won in a modified example. A figure showing the presentation form in a variable display that is the subject of a flash presentation when a prize is won in a modified example. A figure showing the presentation form in a variable display that is the subject of a flash presentation when a prize is won in a modified example. 13 is a timing chart showing the timing of operation of the winning flash lamp and the movable body in a modified example, and a diagram showing the determination ratio of the timing at which the light emission mode of the winning flash lamp changes. FIG. A diagram showing the display modes of the pending display and active display in the modified example, the suggested contents of each display mode, and the selection ratio when deciding to execute the slash performance when a winning combination is won. A figure showing the presentation patterns for pending display and active display when a flash presentation is executed when a prize is won in a modified example. A figure showing the presentation patterns for pending display and active display when a flash presentation is executed when a prize is won in a modified example. A figure showing the presentation patterns for pending display and active display when a flash presentation is executed when a prize is won in a modified example. A figure showing the presentation mode when a starting winning event that is the subject of a winning flash presentation occurs during variable display in a modified example. A figure showing the presentation mode when a starting winning event that is the subject of a winning flash presentation occurs during variable display in a modified example. A figure showing the presentation mode when a starting winning event that is the subject of a winning flash presentation occurs during variable display in a modified example. A figure showing the presentation mode when a starting winning event that is the subject of a winning flash presentation occurs during variable display in a modified example. A figure showing the presentation mode when a starting winning event that is the subject of a winning flash presentation occurs during variable display in a modified example. A figure showing the presentation mode when a starting winning event that is the subject of a winning flash presentation occurs during variable display in a modified example. A figure showing the presentation mode when a starting winning event that is the subject of a winning flash presentation occurs during variable display in a modified example. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine according to this embodiment. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine according to this embodiment. 1 is a rear perspective view of the pachinko game machine according to this embodiment. FIG. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining a frame lamp. A diagram to explain the special pattern LED board and the fourth pattern unit. 13 is a view looking between the game board and the image display device. FIG. FIG. 2 is a diagram for explaining a display mode of a screen in an image display device. A diagram to explain the various boards and the like installed in a pachinko gaming machine. A diagram to explain the types of wins. FIG. 2 is a diagram for explaining each random number. A diagram to explain the jackpot determination table and the jackpot type determination table. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining an example of a performance control command. A diagram to explain an example of a front fluctuation pattern on the main side. A figure to explain an example of a subsequent fluctuation pattern on the main side. This is a diagram to explain the subsequent fluctuation pattern determination table when a miss occurs. This is a diagram to explain the subsequent fluctuation pattern determination table at the time of a jackpot. 13 is a diagram for explaining the previous fluctuation pattern determination table. FIG. A diagram to explain an example of a total fluctuation pattern on the main side. A diagram to explain an example of a total variation pattern on the sub side. A diagram to explain the lottery table for each preview performance. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a game control main process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a timer interrupt process for game control. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol process. 13 is a flowchart showing the start winning determination process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of normal special symbol processing. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a variation pattern setting process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special pattern change process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol stopping process. A flowchart showing an example of processing before a jackpot is released. A flowchart showing an example of processing during a jackpot opening. A flowchart showing an example of processing after a jackpot is released. A flowchart showing an example of a jackpot end process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a performance control main process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a performance control process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a variable display start setting process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a group preview setting process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a group announcement execution process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a group advance notice work process. FIG. 1 is a diagram for explaining an example of the video production process. FIG. 1 is a diagram for explaining an example of the video production process. FIG. 1 is a diagram for explaining an example of the video production process. FIG. 1 is a diagram for explaining an example of the video production process. This is a diagram showing the overall picture of the six-person group preview. A diagram to explain the auxiliary display used in the group preview performance. A diagram to explain the motion blur processing used in the group preview performance. A diagram to explain the shape of the contours when characters overlap in a group preview performance. This is a view looking into the space between the game board and the image display device while the group preview performance is being performed. This is a diagram showing the overall picture of the Bakuchu group preview. A diagram to explain the volume changes and brightness data table during the group preview performance. This is a diagram to explain the timing of the occurrence of the six-person group announcement in stage A. This is a diagram to explain the timing of the Bakuchu swarm announcement in stage B. 13 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table in a group preview brightness data table. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table in a group preview brightness data table. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in a group preview brightness data table. FIG. A figure to explain an example of a grandchild table for reel lamps in a group preview brightness data table. A figure to explain an example of a grandchild table for the left panel lamp in the group preview brightness data table. A figure to explain an example of a grandchild table for on-board lamps in a group preview brightness data table. A figure to explain an example of a grandchild table for the attacca lamp in the group preview brightness data table. 13 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table in a reach line luminance data table; FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table in a reach line luminance data table; FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining an example of a frame lamp grandchild table in the reach line luminance data table; FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a reel lamp in a reach line brightness data table. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for the left panel lamp in the reach line brightness data table. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for an on-board lamp in a reach line brightness data table. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for an attacca lamp in a reach line brightness data table. FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating an example of a parent table in a background preview brightness data table. FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating an example of a child table in a background preview brightness data table. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in a background preview brightness data table. FIG. A figure to explain an example of a grandchild table for reel lamps in a background preview brightness data table. A figure to explain an example of a grandchild table for the left panel lamp in the background preview brightness data table. A figure to explain an example of a grandchild table for on-board lamps in a background preview brightness data table. A figure to explain an example of a grandchild table for the attacca lamp in the background preview brightness data table. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining an example of a full-light-on luminance data table. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining an example of a brightness data table during a PUSH performance. 13 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table in a group preview luminance data table relating to a modified example. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in a group preview brightness data table relating to a modified example. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining the performance mode on stage A. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining the performance mode on stage A. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining the performance mode on stage A. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining the performance mode on stage A. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining the performance mode on stage A. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining the performance mode on stage A. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining the performance mode on stage A. FIG. A diagram to explain the presentation mode when a group of six is announced on stage A. A diagram to explain the presentation mode when a group of six is announced on stage A. A diagram to explain the presentation mode when a group of six is announced on stage A. A diagram to explain the presentation mode when a group of six is announced on stage A. A diagram to explain the presentation mode when a group of six is announced on stage A. A diagram to explain the presentation mode when a group of six is announced on stage A. A diagram to explain the presentation mode when a group of six is announced on stage A. This is a diagram to explain the presentation style of a comparative example when a six-person group announcement is executed on stage A. A diagram to explain the presentation mode when a background preview is executed on stage A. A diagram to explain the presentation mode when a lamp announcement is executed on stage A. 13 is a diagram for explaining the performance mode on stage A. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining the performance mode on stage A. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining the performance mode on stage A. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining the performance mode on stage A. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining the performance mode on stage A. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining the performance mode on stage A. FIG. A diagram to explain the presentation pattern in the first half of the SP reach. A diagram to explain the presentation pattern in the first half of the SP reach. A diagram to explain the presentation pattern in the first half of the SP reach. A diagram to explain the presentation pattern in the first half of the SP reach. A diagram to explain the presentation pattern in the first half of the SP reach. A diagram to explain the presentation pattern in the first half of the SP reach. A diagram to explain the presentation pattern in the first half of the SP reach. A diagram to explain the presentation pattern in the first half of the SP reach. A diagram to explain the presentation pattern in the first half of the SP reach. A diagram to explain the presentation pattern in the latter half of the SP reach. A diagram to explain the presentation pattern in the latter half of the SP reach. A diagram to explain the presentation pattern in the latter half of the SP reach. A diagram to explain the presentation pattern in the latter half of the SP reach. A diagram to explain the presentation pattern in the latter half of the SP reach. A diagram to explain the presentation pattern in the latter half of the SP reach. A diagram to explain the presentation pattern in the latter half of the SP reach. A diagram to explain the presentation mode in the final reach. A diagram to explain the presentation mode in the final reach. A diagram to explain the presentation mode in the final reach. A diagram to explain the presentation mode in the final reach. A diagram to explain the presentation mode in the final reach. A diagram to explain the presentation mode in the final reach. A diagram to explain the presentation mode in the final reach. A diagram to explain the presentation mode in the final reach. A diagram to explain the presentation mode in the final reach. A diagram to explain the presentation mode in the final reach. A diagram to explain the presentation mode in the final reach. A diagram for explaining the presentation mode on stage B. A diagram for explaining the presentation mode on stage B. A diagram for explaining the presentation mode on stage B. A diagram for explaining the presentation mode on stage B. A diagram for explaining the presentation mode on stage B. A diagram for explaining the presentation mode on stage B. A diagram for explaining the presentation mode on stage B. A diagram for explaining the presentation mode on stage B. A diagram for explaining the presentation mode on stage B. A diagram for explaining the presentation mode on stage B. A diagram for explaining the presentation mode on stage B. A diagram for explaining the presentation mode on stage B. A diagram for explaining the presentation mode on stage B. A diagram for explaining the presentation mode on stage B. This is a diagram to explain the presentation mode when the Bakuchu Group announcement is executed on stage B. This is a diagram to explain the presentation mode when the Bakuchu Group announcement is executed on stage B. This is 3 to explain the presentation mode when the Bakuchu Group announcement is executed on stage B. This is a diagram to explain the presentation mode when the Bakuchu Group announcement is executed on stage B. This is a diagram to explain the presentation mode when the Bakuchu Group announcement is executed on stage B. This is a diagram to explain the presentation mode when the Bakuchu Group announcement is executed on stage B. This is a diagram to explain the presentation mode when the Bakuchu Group announcement is executed on stage B. This is a diagram to explain the presentation mode when the Boingo Group announcement is executed on stage A. This is a diagram to explain the presentation mode when the Boingo Group announcement is executed on stage A. This is a diagram to explain the presentation mode when the Boingo Group announcement is executed on stage A. This is a diagram to explain the presentation mode when the Boingo Group announcement is executed on stage A. This is a diagram to explain the presentation mode when the Boingo Group announcement is executed on stage A. This is a diagram to explain the presentation mode when the Boingo Group announcement is executed on stage A. This is a diagram to explain the details of the Boingo Group announcement. This is a diagram to explain the presentation style of a comparative example when a Boingo Group announcement is executed on stage A. This is a diagram to explain the presentation style of a comparative example when a Boingo Group announcement is executed on stage A. A figure to explain the presentation mode when a Boingo Group announcement related to a modified example is executed. A figure to explain the presentation mode when a dog pack announcement in a modified example is executed. A figure to explain the presentation mode when a dog pack announcement in a modified example is executed. This is a diagram to explain the comparison between the six-person group forecast and the dog group forecast. This is a diagram to explain the presentation mode when a group preview performance is executed during a reach line. This is a diagram to explain the presentation mode when a group preview performance is executed during a reach line.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (which is also the configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be described.

(form)
The gaming machine of form 1 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of executing a variable display and capable of being controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player,
Light-emitting means capable of emitting light (for example, a main lamp 9a, a frame lamp 9b, an attacca lamp 9c, a movable body lamp 9d, a winning flash lamp 135SG009F),
A display means (e.g., an image display device 5) capable of displaying a specific display (e.g., a hold display and an active display) corresponding to the variable display;
A presentation execution means (e.g., a presentation control CPU 120) capable of executing a specific display presentation (e.g., a portion that displays a reserved display or an active display in one of display patterns α to γ, a specific display display start presentation) that displays the specific display based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (e.g., the occurrence of a start winning), and a specific light emission presentation (e.g., a flash presentation at the time of winning) that causes the light emitting means to emit light;
Equipped with
The effect execution means executes the specific light-emitting effect so that the light emitted by the light-emitting means is recognizable to the player before the display of the specific display is completed in the specific display effect (for example, as shown in Figs. 10-28, 10-29(A) to 10-32(H), and 10-49(A) to 10-50(D), a portion that lights up the winning flash lamp 135SG009F before the display of the pending display is completed),
The proportion of the game being controlled to the advantageous state is higher when the specific light-emitting effect is executed than when the specific light-emitting effect is not executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-24, when the flash effect at the time of winning is executed, the proportion of the game being controlled to the jackpot game state is higher than when the flash effect at the time of winning is not executed),
The light emitting means includes a first light emitting means (e.g., a winning flash lamp 135SG009F) and a second light emitting means different from the first light emitting means (e.g., a main lamp 9a, a frame lamp 9b, an attacca lamp 9c, and a movable body lamp 9d),
The first light-emitting means emits light in a manner corresponding to the specific light-emitting effect during a first period from the start of the specific light-emitting effect to a predetermined timing (e.g., a period from the start of the early-stage winning flash effect to the end timing of the early-stage winning flash effect) and a second period from the predetermined timing to a specific timing of the variable display that is the target of the specific light-emitting effect (e.g., a period from the start of the late-stage winning flash effect to the start timing of the reach effect of the variable display that is the target of the winning flash effect) (e.g., as shown in FIG. 10-28, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F flashes with brightness C1 and cycle T1 during the execution period of the early-stage winning flash effect, and flashes with brightness C2 and cycle T2 during the execution period of the late-stage winning flash effect).
The second light-emitting means emits light in a manner corresponding to the specific light-emitting performance during the first period, and emits light in a manner corresponding to the variable display being executed during the second period (for example, as shown in Figure 10-28, the main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacca lamp 9c, and movable body lamp 9d flash with brightness C1 and cycle T1 during the execution period of the early winning flash performance, and flash with brightness C2 and cycle T0 during the execution period of the late winning flash performance).
According to this feature, the light-emitting means emits light before the display of the specific display is completed, making it easier for the player to recognize the specific display that is the target of the specific light-emitting effect, and during the first period of the specific light-emitting effect, not only the first light-emitting means but also the second light-emitting means are caused to emit light in a manner corresponding to the specific light-emitting effect, making the specific light-emitting effect stand out more, making it even easier for the player to recognize the specific display that is the target of the specific light-emitting effect.

A gaming machine according to a second aspect is the gaming machine according to the first aspect,
The specific display performance is composed of an appearance performance section where the appearance performance of the specific display is executed (for example, as shown in Fig. 10-15, Fig. 10-30(D) to Fig. 10-32(H), Fig. 10-49(B) to Fig. 10-50(D), a section where an appearance animation is displayed in which the reserved display or active display gradually appears from the bottom to the top as a result of the performance control CPU 120 executing a specific display display start performance execution process), and a periodic performance section where a periodic performance is executed in which the display mode of the specific display periodically changes at a predetermined position after the appearance performance (for example, as shown in Fig. 10-15, Fig. 10-30(D) to Fig. 10-32(H), Fig. 10-49(B) to Fig. 10-50(D), a section where the reserved display or active display is displayed as a rotation animation as a result of the performance control CPU 120 executing a specific display rotation display performance execution process),
The timing at which the display of the specific display is completed is the timing at which the periodic performance starts (for example, as shown in Figures 10-19 and 10-20, the timing at which the appearance animation of the pending display or active display is completed and the rotation animation of these pending display or active display starts).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature can increase the player's attention to the particular display.

A gaming machine according to a third aspect is the gaming machine according to the first or second aspect,
The effect execution means is capable of starting the specific light emission effect before the start of the specific display effect (for example, as shown in Fig. 10-29 (A) to Fig. 10-32 (H), when executing the specific display display start effect B, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacca lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d are illuminated as the winning flash effect from a timing before the display start of the pending display or the active display).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the specific light emitting effect starts before the specific display effect starts, so that the specific light emitting effect can be made to stand out more.

A gaming machine according to a fourth aspect is a gaming machine according to any one of the first to third aspects,
The specific display effect includes an appearance effect in which the specific display appears (for example, a specific display start effect),
The display means is capable of displaying the specific display in a plurality of different display modes (for example, a specific display start performance A in which only an appearance animation is executed in which the pending display or the active display gradually appears from the bottom to the top, and a specific display start performance B in which an appearance animation is executed in which the pending display or the active display gradually appears from the bottom to the top after the character A acts on the first pending memory display area 135SG005D or the active display area 135SG005A),
The duration of the appearance effect varies depending on the display mode of the specific display (for example, the specific display display start effect A is 0.2 seconds, and the specific display display start effect B is 1.2 seconds),
The specific light emission effect is started before the end timing of the shortest appearance effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-28 and FIG. 10-49 (A) to FIG. 10-50 (D), the winning flash effect is started before the end timing of the specific display display start effect A).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, regardless of the display mode of the specific display, the specific light-emitting effect can be started before the appearance effect ends, so that the player can reliably recognize the specific display that is the target of the specific light-emitting effect.

A gaming machine according to a fifth aspect is a gaming machine according to any one of the first to fourth aspects,
The effect execution means controls the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means to a low brightness state once, and then starts the specific light emitting effect (for example, as shown in Figs. 10-28, 10-29(A), 10-29(B), 10-49(A), and 10-49(B), when it is determined to execute a flash effect at the time of winning based on the start winning, a part that temporarily turns off the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacca lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature makes it easier for the player to recognize the start of a specific light-emitting effect.
In the present invention, the "low luminance state" includes not only a state in which light is emitted at a low luminance, but also a state in which no light is emitted.

A gaming machine according to a sixth aspect is a gaming machine according to any one of the first to fifth aspects,
The effect execution means controls the display means to a low visibility state once and then starts the specific light emission effect (for example, as shown in modified example 135SG-11, when executing a flash effect when winning, the brightness of a backlight or the like built into the image display device 5 is temporarily reduced to reduce the visibility of the image displayed on the image display device 5, and then the flash effect when winning is started).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature makes it easier for the player to recognize the start of a specific light-emitting effect.
In addition, the "low visibility state" in the present invention includes a state in which the visibility of the display means is reduced compared to the immediately preceding state, and also includes a state in which the visibility of the display is reduced by means other than a reduction in the brightness of the display means.

A gaming machine according to a seventh aspect is a gaming machine according to any one of the first to sixth aspects,
The effect execution means is capable of executing a suggestive effect (e.g., a preview effect) that suggests that the variable display will be controlled to an advantageous state while the variable display is being executed, and is capable of executing the specific light emission effect when the suggestive effect is being executed and when the suggestive effect is not being executed (for example, as shown in Figs. 10-29(A) to 10-48(n) and Figs. 10-49(A) to 10-68(n), a portion that can execute a flash effect at the time of winning when the preview effect is being executed and when it is not being executed).
A sound output means (e.g., speakers 8L, 8R) is provided that can output a variable display corresponding sound (variable display corresponding sound shown in FIG. 10-28) corresponding to the variable display, a suggestive performance corresponding sound (preview performance corresponding sound shown in FIG. 10-29(A)) corresponding to the suggestive performance, and a specific light-emitting performance corresponding sound (winning flash performance corresponding sound shown in FIG. 10-29(B)) corresponding to the specific light-emitting performance,
The sound output means includes:
When the specific light-emitting effect is being executed while the variable display corresponding sound is being output, the specific light-emitting effect corresponding sound can be output in priority to the variable display corresponding sound being output (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-29(B), when a flash effect is executed during the execution of the variable display, the variable display corresponding sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R at a volume V2, while the flash effect corresponding sound is output at a volume V1 (V1>V2)).
When the specific light-emitting effect is executed while the suggestive effect corresponding sound is being output, the specific light-emitting effect corresponding sound can be output in priority to the suggestive effect corresponding sound being output (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-29(B), when a winning flash effect is executed during the execution of a preview effect, the preview effect corresponding sound is output from speakers 8L and 8R at volume V2, while the winning flash effect corresponding sound is output at volume V1 (V1>V2)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, even if a variable display corresponding sound or a suggestion effect corresponding sound is being output, the specific light-emitting effect corresponding sound becomes easier to hear, and the output of the specific light-emitting effect corresponding sound makes it easier for the player to recognize that a specific light-emitting effect is being executed.

The gaming machine of aspect 8 is the gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1 to 7,
A sound output means (e.g., speakers 8L and 8R) capable of outputting sound is provided,
The effect execution means outputs a sound corresponding to a specific light-emitting effect from the sound output means in the specific light-emitting effect before the completion of the display of the specific display and the light emission of the light-emitting means (for example, as shown in Fig. 10-28, Fig. 10-29(A) to Fig. 10-32(H), Fig. 10-49(A) to Fig. 10-50(D), when it is determined that a winning flash effect is to be executed in response to a start winning, the winning flash effect corresponding sound starts to be output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and then the winning flash lamp 135SG009F starts to blink, and the appearance animation of the pending display and the active display is completed).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the output of the sound corresponding to the specific light-emitting effect allows the player to quickly recognize that a predetermined condition has been met, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

A gaming machine according to a ninth aspect is the gaming machine according to any one of the first to seventh aspects,
A sound output means (e.g., speakers 8L and 8R) capable of outputting sound is provided,
The performance execution means, in the specific light emission performance,
A sound corresponding to a specific light emission effect can be output from the sound output means (for example, a part capable of outputting a sound corresponding to a flash effect when a prize is won from speakers 8L and 8R),
The light emitting means is caused to emit light before the completion of the display of the specific display and the output of the sound corresponding to the specific light emitting effect (for example, as shown in modified example 135SG-12, when it is determined that a flash effect is to be executed in response to the start of winning, the flash lamp 135SG009F for winning starts to blink, and then the sound corresponding to the flash effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the appearance animation of the pending display and the active display is completed).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the light emitted by the light emitting means can make the player quickly recognize that the predetermined condition has been met, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

A gaming machine according to a tenth aspect is a gaming machine according to any one of the first to ninth aspects,
The specific light emitting effect is an effect in which the first light emitting means emits light in a predetermined manner that is a manner corresponding to the specific light emitting effect during the first period, and the first light emitting means emits light in a specific manner that is less emphasized than the predetermined manner during the second period (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-28, during the execution period of the early winning flash effect, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is blinked at a brightness C1, and during the execution period of the late winning flash effect, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is blinked at a brightness C2 (C1>C2)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by causing at least the first light-emitting means to emit light in a predetermined manner, it is possible to make the player aware of the start of a specific light-emitting effect, and it is also possible to prevent the first light-emitting means from continuing to emit light in the predetermined manner during the second period from interfering with other effects and reducing interest in the game.
In addition, the "specific mode with a low degree of emphasis" in the present invention includes a slow blinking mode with a low degree of emphasis due to a slow blinking speed.

A gaming machine according to an eleventh aspect is the gaming machine according to the tenth aspect,
The second period includes a period before the variable display that is the target of the specific light-emitting effect is executed and a period during which the variable display that is the target of the specific light-emitting effect is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-28, the execution period of the later winning flash effect is a portion that includes a period during which the variable display before the variable display that is the target of the winning flash effect is executed and a period during which the variable display that is the target of the winning flash effect is executed).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the first light-emitting means emits light in a specific manner both before and after the start of the variable display that is the subject of the specific light-emitting performance, making it easier for the player to recognize that it is a variable display of the subject, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

A gaming machine according to a twelfth aspect is the gaming machine according to the tenth or eleventh aspect,
The first light emitting means emits light in the predetermined manner when the variable display that is the target of the specific light emitting effect starts (for example, as shown in the modified example 135SG-13, when the variable display that is the target of the flash effect when winning starts, the part that causes the winning flash lamp 135SG009F to flash with brightness C1 and cycle T1).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible for the player to easily recognize that the variable display is the subject of a specific light-emitting effect, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

A gaming machine according to a thirteenth aspect is the gaming machine according to any one of the first to twelfth aspects,
The display means displays a specific light-emitting effect corresponding image corresponding to the specific light-emitting effect in a first display mode during the first period, and displays the specific light-emitting effect corresponding image in a second display mode in which the degree of emphasis is lower than that of the first display mode during the second period (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-28, a portion that displays an effect image 135SG005E on the image display device 5 during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of early winning, and displays a silhouette image 135SG005S on the image display device 5 during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of late winning).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, during the first period, the display means displays the specific light-emitting performance corresponding image in a first display mode, thereby making the player aware of the start of the specific light-emitting performance, and during the second period, the display means displays the specific light-emitting performance corresponding image in a second display mode, thereby preventing the display means from continuing to display the specific light-emitting performance corresponding image in the first display mode, thereby preventing a decrease in interest in the game.

A gaming machine according to a fourteenth aspect is the gaming machine according to the thirteenth aspect,
The display means displays the specific light-emitting effect corresponding image in a first display mode when a variable display that is the target of the specific light-emitting effect starts (for example, as shown in modified example 135SG-13, a part that displays an effect image 135SG005E on the image display device 5 when a variable display that is the target of the winning flash effect starts).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible for the player to easily recognize that the variable display is the subject of a specific light-emitting effect, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

A gaming machine according to a fifteenth aspect is the gaming machine according to any one of the first to fourteenth aspects,
A sound output means (e.g., speakers 8L, 8R) capable of outputting a specific light-emitting effect corresponding sound corresponding to the specific light-emitting effect is provided;
The sound output means outputs the specific light-emitting effect corresponding sound in a first output mode during the first period, and does not output the specific light-emitting effect corresponding sound or outputs the specific light-emitting effect corresponding sound in a second output mode having a lower intensity than the first output mode during the second period (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-28, during the execution period of the early winning flash effect, the winning flash effect corresponding sound is output from speakers 8L and 8R at a volume V1, and during the execution period of the late winning flash effect, the winning flash effect corresponding sound is output from speakers 8L and 8R at a volume V2 (V1>V2)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by outputting the specific light-emitting effect corresponding sound in the first output mode, it is possible to easily allow the player to recognize that the specific light-emitting effect has started, and by not outputting the specific light-emitting effect corresponding sound or outputting it in the second output mode while the specific light-emitting effect is being executed, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game due to other effects being hindered by the specific light-emitting effect corresponding sound.

A gaming machine according to a sixteenth aspect is the gaming machine according to the fifteenth aspect,
The sound output means outputs the specific light-emitting effect corresponding sound in the first output mode when the variable display that is the target of the specific light-emitting effect starts (for example, as shown in modified example 135SG-13, when the variable display that is the target of the winning flash effect starts, a part that outputs the winning flash effect corresponding sound from speakers 8L and 8R at volume V1).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature makes it easier for the player to recognize that the variable display is the subject of a specific light-emitting effect, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

A gaming machine according to a seventeenth aspect is a gaming machine according to any one of the first to sixteenth aspects,
The first light emitting means stops emitting light in a manner corresponding to the specific light emitting performance during a display period of the display result of the variable display in the second period before the variable display that is the target of the specific light emitting performance is started (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-69 as modified example 135SG-1, the performance control CPU 120 stops output of the winning flash performance corresponding sound from the speakers 8L and 8R, turns off the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, makes the silhouette image 135SG005S on the image display device 5 invisible, and clears the process timer for the late winning flash performance, based on receiving a pattern determination command during the execution of the late winning flash performance. During the pattern determination period, the output of the winning flash effect corresponding sound, the illumination of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, and the display of the silhouette image 135SG005S are not executed as the late winning flash effect, and based on the reception of the first variable display start command, the selection of the late winning flash effect process table and the resetting and starting of the late winning flash effect process timer are performed again, thereby starting the late winning flash effect (the output of the winning flash effect corresponding sound, the illumination of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, and the display of the silhouette image 135SG005S) in response to the start of a new variable display.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by temporarily stopping the emission of light from the light-emitting means, it is possible to prevent the player from mistaking that the variable display is continuing.

The gaming machine of aspect 18 is the gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1 to 17,
A gaming machine capable of executing a re-variable display effect (e.g., a pseudo consecutive effect) in which the display is temporarily stopped after the start of the variable display before the display result is derived, and then the display is re-variable displayed,
The first light-emitting means continues to emit light in a manner corresponding to the specific light-emitting performance during the provisional stop when the re-variable display performance executed in the second period before the variable display that is the target of the specific light-emitting performance is started (for example, as shown in Fig. 10-69 and Fig. 10-70(A) to Fig. 10-89(n) as modified example 135SG-1, during the provisional stop period of the decorative pattern in the variable display that is executed before the variable display that is the target of the winning flash performance, a portion that continues to flash at brightness C2 and cycle T2 of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the player from mistakenly believing that the variable display has ended, even though it is actually a temporary stop.

A gaming machine according to a nineteenth aspect is the gaming machine according to any one of the first to eighteenth aspects,
A gaming machine capable of executing a re-variable display effect (e.g., a pseudo consecutive effect) in which the display is temporarily stopped after the start of the variable display before the display result is derived, and then the display is re-variable displayed,
The first light emitting means is
Even during the variable display that is the target of the specific light-emitting effect, light is emitted in a manner corresponding to the specific light-emitting effect in the second period (for example, as shown in Figs. 10-69 and 10-70(A) to 10-89(n) as modified example 135SG-1, a portion in which the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is flashed at brightness C1 and cycle T2 even during the variable display that is the target of the winning flash effect),
Even during the provisional stop when the variable display that is the target of the specific light-emitting performance is executed, the light emission in the manner corresponding to the specific light-emitting performance continues (for example, as shown in Fig. 10-69 and Fig. 10-70(A) to Fig. 10-89(n) as modified example 135SG-1, during the provisional stop period of the decorative pattern in the variable display that is the target of the winning flash performance, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F continues to flash at brightness C2 and cycle T2).
19. The gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1 to 18,
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the player from mistakenly believing that the variable display has ended, even though it is actually a temporary stop.

A gaming machine according to a 20th aspect is the gaming machine according to any one of the 1st to 16th aspects,
The first light-emitting means continues to emit light in a manner corresponding to the specific light-emitting performance during a display period of the display result of the variable display in the second period before the variable display that is the target of the specific light-emitting performance is started (for example, as shown in Figures 10-29 (A) to 10-48 (n), during the execution of the later winning flash performance, during a pattern determination period of the variable display before the variable display that is the target of the winning flash performance is started, a portion that continues to blink the winning flash lamp 135SG009F).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, since the light emission continues even during the display period of the display results of the variable display in the second period, the player's anticipation of being controlled to an advantageous state can be accurately maintained until the start of the variable display that is the target of the specific light emission performance, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

A gaming machine of aspect 21 is the gaming machine according to aspect 20,
In the display means, a game machine capable of executing a variable display of a first performance identification information (e.g., a decorative pattern) and a variable display of a second performance identification information (e.g., a small pattern) having a lower visibility than the first performance identification information,
During the result display period, the second performance identification information in a stopped state is displayed on the display means (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-33(J), during the symbol determination period, the small symbol is displayed in a state where the variable display is stopped).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, even if the light emission continues during the result display period, the second effect identification information in a stopped state is displayed, so that the player can recognize that it is the result display period.

A gaming machine according to a twenty-second aspect is the gaming machine according to the twenty-first aspect,
The display means is capable of displaying a specific light-emitting effect corresponding display corresponding to the specific light-emitting effect during the second period so as not to overlap with the display of the second effect identification information (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-33(J) etc., during the execution of the winning flash effect, a silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the right side of a first display area 135SG005F of the image display device 5, while a small pattern 135SG005M is displayed on the left end of the first display area 135SG005F of the image display device 5).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the specific light-emitting effect corresponding display is overlapped with the display of the second effect identification information, making it difficult for the player to recognize the end of the variable display.

A gaming machine of aspect 23 is the gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1 to 22,
The effect execution means is capable of executing a specific effect (for example, a reach effect of a super reach) that suggests that the game will be controlled to an advantageous state,
The first light-emitting means, when the specific light-emitting effect is executed in the variable display that is the target of the specific light-emitting effect, emits light in a manner corresponding to the specific light-emitting effect until the specific light-emitting effect starts, and starts emitting light in a manner corresponding to the specific effect when the specific effect starts (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-90 as modified example 135SG-2, in the variable display of the Super Reach that is the target of the win-time flash effect, before the start of the reach effect of the Super Reach, the winning time flash lamp 135SG009F is blinked with brightness C2 and cycle T2, and from the start timing of the reach effect of the Super Reach, the winning time flash lamp 135SG009F is turned on with brightness C2).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, when the specific performance is started, the light emitting means changes the mode according to the specific performance and emits light in a mode according to the specific performance, thereby increasing the interest in the specific performance.

A gaming machine of aspect 24 is the gaming machine according to aspect 23,
The display means is capable of displaying a specific effect start image corresponding to the start of the specific effect when the specific effect starts (for example, a portion that displays the first display area 135SG005F in white (whiteout) as shown in Figs. 10-96(K) to 10-98(O) and Figs. 10-104(K) to 10-106(O)),
The first light-emitting means is in a low-luminance state when the display of the display means is switched to the specific performance start image, and emits light in a manner corresponding to the specific performance after being in the low-luminance state (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-90, during a white-out period, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is turned off, and the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is turned on at a luminance C2 from the start timing of the reach performance of the super reach thereafter).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the light emission mode of the first light-emitting means changes with a low brightness state accompanying the switch to the specific performance start image in between, so that it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable due to these changes in the light emission mode, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

A gaming machine of aspect 25 is the gaming machine of aspect 23 or aspect 24,
A movable body (e.g., movable body 32) is provided,
The performance execution means is capable of executing, as the specific performance, a motion performance that moves the movable body at the start of the specific performance (e.g., a movable body motion performance shown in FIG. 10-90) and a motion suggestion performance that suggests the execution of the motion performance (e.g., a movable body motion suggestion performance shown in FIG. 10-90);
The first light-emitting means is in a low-luminance state when the action suggestion performance is executed, and after being in the low-luminance state, emits light in a manner corresponding to the action performance, which is a manner corresponding to the specific performance (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-90, a portion in which the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is turned off during the execution period of the movable body action suggestion performance, which is a white-out period, and the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is turned on at a luminance C2 from the start timing of the reach performance of the super reach thereafter).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the light emission mode of the first light-emitting means changes between low brightness states associated with the execution of a suggestive performance, and therefore it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable due to these changes in the light emission mode, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

A gaming machine of aspect 26 is a gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1 to 25,
The first light emitting means is
When a special effect different from the specific light-emitting effect is executed by the effect execution means, the special effect can be illuminated in a manner corresponding to the special effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-108(A) as modified example 135SG-3, when a step-up effect is executed during a variable display in which a flash effect at the time of winning is not being executed, a portion capable of lighting up the winning flash lamp 135SG009F in a manner corresponding to the step-up effect).
When the specific light-emitting effect is started during the execution of the special effect, the light is emitted in a manner corresponding to the specific light-emitting effect in priority to the manner corresponding to the special effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-108(B) as modified example 135SG-3, when a step-up effect is executed during a variable display in which a flash effect at the time of winning is being executed, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F continues to light up (blink) in a manner corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent light emission in a manner corresponding to a specific light emission effect from starting at an inappropriate timing, such as the timing at which a special effect ends.

A gaming machine of aspect 27 is a gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1 to 26,
The light emission of the first light-emitting means in a mode corresponding to the specific light-emitting performance may end at a first timing during the variable display that is the target of the specific light-emitting performance, and at a second timing that is later than the first timing (for example, as shown in Fig. 10-119(A) and Fig. 10-119(B) as modified example 135SG-4, the timing for ending the light-emitting mode corresponding to the winning flash performance of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F includes the timing for starting the movable body operation performance during the variable display that is the target of the winning flash performance, and the timing for starting the reach performance of the super reach).
The ratio of being controlled to the advantageous state is different between when the light emission of the first light-emitting means in the mode corresponding to the specific light-emitting performance ends at the first timing and when the light emission of the first light-emitting means in the mode corresponding to the specific light-emitting performance ends at the second timing (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-119(C) as modified example 135SG-4, the part where the expectation of a jackpot is different when the light emission mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is changed from the light emission mode corresponding to the winning flash performance to the light emission mode corresponding to the movable body operation performance from the start timing of the movable body operation performance and when the light emission mode corresponding to the reach performance is changed from the start timing of the reach performance),
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the timing at which the light emission in a manner corresponding to a specific light emission presentation ends, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

A gaming machine according to a twenty-eighth aspect is the gaming machine according to a twenty-seventh aspect,
The effect executed by the effect execution means at the time of the end of the light emission in the mode corresponding to the specific light emission effect is different between when the light emission ends at the first timing and when the light emission ends at the second timing (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-119 as modified example 135SG-4, depending on the timing at which the light emission mode corresponding to the winning flash effect of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F ends, the effect may be during the execution of a movable body operation effect or during the execution of a super reach reach effect).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible for the player to easily recognize whether the end timing is the first timing or the second timing.

A gaming machine of aspect 29 is the gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1 to 28,
The performance execution means is capable of executing a first performance (for example, a movable body operation performance shown in FIG. 10-119 as modified example 135SG-4) and a second performance different from the first performance (for example, a reach performance of a super reach shown in FIG. 10-119 as modified example 135SG-4) during the variable display,
The first light emitting means is
The light emission mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is changeable from a light emission mode corresponding to the winning flash performance to a light emission mode corresponding to the first performance in association with the execution of the first performance during the variable display that is the target of the specific light emission performance (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-119(A) as modified example 135SG-4, a portion that changes the light emission mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F from a light emission mode corresponding to the winning flash performance to a light emission mode corresponding to the movable body movement performance from the start timing of the movable body movement performance),
The light emission can be changed from a state corresponding to the specific light emission performance to a state corresponding to the second performance in association with the execution of the second performance during the variable display that is the target of the specific light emission performance (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-119(B) as modified example 135SG-4, a portion that changes the light emission state of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F to a light emission state corresponding to the reach performance from the start timing of the reach performance),
The rate at which the advantageous state is controlled is different when the light emission mode corresponding to the specific light emission performance changes to the light emission mode corresponding to the first performance and when the light emission mode corresponding to the specific light emission performance changes to the light emission mode corresponding to the second performance (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-119(C) as modified example 135SG-4, the expectation of a jackpot is different when the light emission mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is changed from the light emission mode corresponding to the winning flash performance to the light emission mode corresponding to the movable body operation performance from the start timing of the movable body operation performance and when the light emission mode corresponding to the reach performance is changed from the light emission mode corresponding to the reach performance from the start timing of the reach performance).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the effect being executed when the light emission mode of the first light-emitting means changes, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

A gaming machine according to a 30th aspect is a gaming machine according to any one of the 1st to 28th aspects,
A movable body (e.g., movable body 32) is provided,
The effect execution means is capable of executing an action effect (e.g., a movable body action effect) that causes the movable body to move, an action suggestion effect (e.g., a movable body action suggestion effect) that suggests the execution of the action effect, and a specific effect (e.g., a reach effect for a super reach) that suggests being controlled to an advantageous state,
The first light emitting means is
The light emission mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is changeable from a light emission mode corresponding to the winning flash performance to a light emission mode corresponding to the action suggestion performance when the action suggestion performance is being executed during the variable display that is the target of the specific light emission performance (for example, as shown in modified example 135SG-4, a portion that changes the light emission mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F from a light emission mode corresponding to the winning flash performance to a light emission mode corresponding to the movable body action suggestion performance from the start timing of the movable body action suggestion performance),
The light emission can be changed from a light emission mode corresponding to the specific light emission performance to a light emission mode corresponding to the specific performance in association with the execution of the specific performance during the variable display that is the target of the specific light emission performance (for example, as shown in modified example 135SG-4, a part that changes the light emission mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F from a light emission mode corresponding to the winning flash performance to a light emission mode corresponding to the reach performance from the start timing of the reach performance of the super reach),
The rate at which the advantageous state is controlled is different when the light emission mode corresponding to the specific light emission effect is changed to the mode corresponding to the action suggestion effect and when the light emission mode is changed to the mode corresponding to the specific effect (for example, as shown in modified example 135SG-4, the expectation of a jackpot is different when the light emission mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is changed from the light emission mode corresponding to the winning flash effect to the light emission mode corresponding to the movable body action suggestion effect from the start timing of the movable body action suggestion effect and when the light emission mode corresponding to the reach effect is changed to the light emission mode corresponding to the reach effect from the start timing of the reach effect).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the effect being executed when the light emission mode of the first light-emitting means changes, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

A gaming machine of aspect 31 is the gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1 to 30,
The display mode of the specific display includes a normal mode (e.g., display pattern α), a special mode (e.g., display pattern δ and display pattern ε shown in FIG. 10-120 as modified example 135SG-5), and a special mode (e.g., display pattern β and display pattern γ),
The special pattern includes a first special pattern (e.g., a display pattern γ) and a second special pattern (e.g., a display pattern β) different from the first special pattern,
When the specific display is displayed in the first special mode, the probability of being controlled to a favorable state is higher than when the specific display is displayed in the second special mode (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-17, when the reserved display or active display is displayed in the display pattern γ, the probability of being controlled to a jackpot game state is higher than when the display pattern β is displayed).
The specific display of the special mode can be changed to either the first special mode or the second special mode (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-120 as modified example 135SG-5, a portion in which a hold display or an active display displayed in display pattern δ or display pattern ε can be changed to a hold display or an active display in display pattern β or display pattern γ),
The rate at which the specific light emitting effect is executed is higher when the specific display is displayed in the special mode than when the specific display is displayed in the special mode (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-120 as modified example 135SG-5, the rate at which the winning flash effect is executed is higher when the pending display or the active display is displayed in display pattern δ or display pattern ε than when the pending display or the active display is displayed in display pattern β or display pattern γ).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, when a specific display is displayed in a special mode, a specific light-emitting effect is executed at a high rate, thereby drawing the player's attention to whether the special mode will change to the first special mode or the second special mode, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

A gaming machine according to a thirty-second aspect is the gaming machine according to a thirty-first aspect,
The special mode is a mode of a specific color (for example, a white flashing mode as shown in FIG. 10-120 as modified example 135SG-5),
The special mode is a mode of a special color different from the specific color (for example, blue or red as shown in FIG. 10-17 ),
The normal mode is a mode of a color other than the specific color and the special color (for example, white color),
The specific display of the specific color has a higher probability of changing to the special color when the specific light-emitting effect is being executed than when the specific light-emitting effect is not being executed (for example, as shown in modified example 135SG-5, when the pending display or active display is displayed in display pattern δ or display pattern ε, the probability of the display pattern of the specific display changing to display pattern β or display pattern γ differs depending on whether or not the winning flash effect is being executed).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the difference in the form of the specific display can be easily grasped by the difference in color, and when a specific display of a specific color is displayed, the player can pay attention to whether or not a specific light-emitting effect is being executed, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

A gaming machine according to aspect 33 is the gaming machine according to aspect 31 or 32,
The effect execution means is capable of executing a change suggestion effect, which suggests that a specific display displayed in the special mode will change to the special mode, in a first mode and a second mode different from the first mode (for example, a portion capable of executing the first action effect and the second action effect shown in modified example 135SG-5),
When the change suggestion effect is executed in the second mode, the special mode changes to the special mode at a higher rate than when the change suggestion effect is executed in the first mode (for example, as shown in modified example 135SG-5, the second action effect is a part that acts on a specific display displayed in display pattern δ to change the specific display to display pattern β or display pattern γ at a higher rate than the first action effect),
The rate at which the specific light emitting effect is executed is higher when the change suggestion effect is executed in the second mode than when the change suggestion effect is executed in the first mode (for example, as shown in modified example 135SG-5, when the second action effect is executed, the winning flash effect is executed at a higher rate than when the first action effect is executed).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to draw the player's attention to whether the change suggestion effect will be executed in the first mode or the second mode, and by executing the specific light-emitting effect, it is possible to increase the player's anticipation that the change suggestion effect will be executed in the second mode.

A gaming machine of aspect 34 is the gaming machine according to aspect 33,
The special mode includes a first special mode in which the change suggestion effect is executed in the second mode and the rate at which the change suggests the effect changes to the special mode is low (for example, the display pattern δ shown in FIG. 10-120 as modified example 135SG-5), and a second special mode in which the change suggestion effect is executed in the second mode and the rate at which the change suggests the effect changes to the special mode is higher than that of the first special mode (for example, the display pattern ε shown in FIG. 10-120 as modified example 135SG-5),
When the specific display is displayed in the second special mode, the specific light emission effect is executed at a higher rate than when the specific display is displayed in the first special mode (for example, when the specific display is displayed in the display pattern ε, the flash effect is executed at the time of winning at a higher rate than when the specific display is displayed in the display pattern δ).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to draw the player's attention to whether the specific display is displayed in the first special mode or the second special mode, and since the specific light-emitting effect is executed at a high rate when the second special mode is displayed, which has a high probability of changing into a special mode, the execution of the specific light-emitting effect can heighten the player's anticipation of the specific display being displayed in the second special mode.

A gaming machine of aspect 35 is a gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1 to 34,
The display means is capable of displaying a specific light-emitting effect corresponding display corresponding to the specific light-emitting effect during the specific light-emitting effect so as to overlap the specific display corresponding to the variable display of the target of the specific light-emitting effect (for example, as shown in modified example 135SG-7, a portion capable of displaying a silhouette image 135SG005S displayed on the image display device 5 as a flash effect at the time of winning so as to overlap the active display in the active display area 135SG005A).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible for the player to easily recognize the specific display corresponding to the specific light-emitting effect, and since the specific display is hidden by the display corresponding to the specific light-emitting effect, it is possible to provide the player with an element of surprise and increase his/her interest in the game.

A gaming machine of aspect 36 is the gaming machine according to aspect 35,
The display means is capable of displaying a plurality of different types of specific light-emitting effect corresponding displays (for example, as shown in modified example 135SG-7, a portion capable of displaying silhouette images 135SG005S of different sizes on the image display device 5 as a flash effect when a prize is won),
The overlapping manner with respect to the specific display differs depending on the type of the specific light-emitting performance-compatible display (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-129(L) and FIG. 10-130(N) as modified example 135SG-7, the overlapping manner between silhouette image 135SG005S and active display area 135SG005A differs depending on the size of silhouette image 135SG005S to be displayed).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, a plurality of specific light-emitting effect corresponding displays are displayed, and the overlapping manner with the specific display changes depending on the specific light-emitting effect corresponding display that is displayed, thereby increasing interest in the game.

A gaming machine according to a thirty-seventh aspect is the gaming machine according to a thirty-fifth or thirty-sixth aspect,
The specific display includes a first specific display (e.g., a hold display) corresponding to a variable display that has not yet been executed, and a second variable display (e.g., an active display) corresponding to a variable display that is being executed,
The display means is capable of displaying the specific light-emitting effect-corresponding display so as to overlap the first specific display corresponding to the specific light-emitting effect before the variable display that is the target of the specific light-emitting effect is started, and is capable of displaying the specific light-emitting effect-corresponding display so as to overlap the second specific display corresponding to the specific light-emitting effect during the variable display that is the target of the specific light-emitting effect (for example, as shown in modified example 135SG-7, a portion that displays a silhouette image 135SG005S so as to overlap the pending display that is the target of the winning flash effect displayed in a first pending memory display area 135SG005D before the variable display that is the target of the winning flash effect is started, and displays the silhouette image 135SG005S so as to overlap the active display that is the target of the winning flash effect displayed in an active display area 135SG005A during the execution of the variable display that is the target of the winning flash effect).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible for the player to easily recognize the first specific display and the second specific display corresponding to the specific light-emitting performance, and since not only the first specific display but also the second specific display are hidden by the display corresponding to the specific light-emitting performance, it is possible to provide the player with an even greater sense of surprise and increase his or her interest in the game.

A gaming machine of aspect 38 is a gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1 to 37,
A gaming machine capable of executing a re-variable display effect (e.g., a pseudo consecutive effect) in which the display is temporarily stopped after the start of the variable display before the display result is derived, and then the display is re-variable displayed,
The display means is capable of displaying a re-variable related display related to the re-variable display performance, and is capable of displaying a specific light-emitting performance corresponding to the specific light-emitting performance during the specific light-emitting performance, superimposed on the re-variable related display (for example, in the case where a pseudo consecutive performance is executed in the variable display during the execution of the winning flash performance, a portion in which a silhouette image 135SG005S as a winning flash performance can be displayed superimposed on a special pattern (see FIG. 10-40, etc.) that stops in the "middle" decorative pattern display area 5C when the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the re-variable related display is hidden by the specific light emitting performance corresponding display, which gives the player an element of surprise and increases his/her interest in the game.

A gaming machine of aspect 39 is the gaming machine according to any one of aspects 35 to 38,
The display means is capable of displaying the specific light-emitting effect corresponding display even during the variable display that is the target of the specific light-emitting effect (for example, as shown in Figs. 10-28 and 10-42(a) to 10-47(l), the portion where the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the image display device 5 even during the variable display that is the target of the flash effect when winning).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it becomes easier for the player to recognize that it is a variable display that is the subject of a specific light-emitting effect, and interest in the variable display that is the subject of a specific light-emitting effect can also be increased.

A gaming machine of aspect 40 is a gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1 to 39,
The performance execution means includes:
It is possible to control the performance so that the first light-emitting means continues to emit light in a manner corresponding to the specific light-emitting performance even during the variable display corresponding to the specific light-emitting performance, and the light emission ends at a predetermined end timing before the variable display corresponding to the specific light-emitting performance ends (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-28, during the variable display that is the target of the win-time flash performance, the winning time flash lamp 135SG009F is flashed at a brightness C2 and a cycle T2 before the start of the reach performance, and the winning time flash lamp 135SG009F is turned off at the start timing of the reach performance).
If the light emission of the first light-emitting means in a manner corresponding to the specific light-emitting performance is not terminated at the specified end timing due to the occurrence of a specified event, special end control is performed to terminate the light emission of the first light-emitting means at a specific end timing after the specified end timing (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-22, if the performance control CPU 120 is unable to determine that it is the start timing of the reach performance of the variable display of the performance target due to the generation of static electricity, etc., a part that terminates the late winning flash performance including the blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F at the end timing of the variable display (the reception timing of the pattern determination command), which is a timing after the start timing of the reach performance).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to reduce the sense of discomfort felt when the light emission in a manner corresponding to a specific light emission effect does not end normally.

A gaming machine according to a 41st aspect is the gaming machine according to a 40th aspect,
A game control means (e.g., a CPU 103) capable of controlling the progress of a game is provided;
The game control means is capable of transmitting variable display end information notifying the end of the variable display when the variable display ends to the performance execution means (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-4(A), a portion in which the CPU 103 can transmit a pattern determination command for designating the end of the variable display of the decorative pattern);
The performance execution means performs the specific end control based on the reception of the variable display end information as the specific end timing (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-22, the performance control CPU 120 ends the flash performance at the time of late winning based on the reception of a pattern determination command).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the sense of discomfort felt when terminating the light emission in a manner corresponding to a specific light emission effect can be further reduced.

A gaming machine of aspect 42 is the gaming machine according to any one of aspects 39 to 41,
The predetermined end timing includes a first predetermined end timing and a second predetermined end timing (for example, as shown in the modified example 135SG-4, a portion in which the blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F can be ended at the start timing of the movable body operation suggestion performance and the start timing of the reach performance),
The specific end timing is a timing later than the predetermined end timing and the second predetermined end timing (for example, as shown in modified example 135SG-4, if the performance control CPU 120 cannot stop the blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F due to the generation of static electricity or the like, the later winning flash performance including the blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is ended at the end timing of the variable display, which is a timing later than the start timing of the movable body operation suggestion performance and the start timing of the reach performance).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, even if the light emission cannot be ended at the second predetermined end timing, the light emission in a manner corresponding to the specific light emission performance can be ended at the specific end timing.

The gaming machine of aspect 43 is the gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1 to 42,
The performance execution means includes:
It is possible to execute a specific effect (for example, a reach effect of a super reach) that suggests that the game will be controlled to an advantageous state,
When the predetermined condition is satisfied while the specific performance is being executed, the specific light emitting performance is not executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-21, when a start winning occurs at the first start port during the execution of the reach performance of the Super Reach, the part that does not determine the execution of the winning flash performance).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game due to a decrease in attention to a specific presentation.

The gaming machine of aspect 44 is the gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1 to 43,
The effect execution means does not execute the specific light emitting effect when the specified condition is satisfied when the remaining period of the variable display is equal to or shorter than the specified period, and is capable of executing the specific light emitting effect when the specified condition is satisfied when the remaining period of the variable display is longer than the specified period (for example, as shown in modified example 135SG-8, when a start winning occurs in the first start port during execution of the variable display, the remaining period of the variable display is specified, and if the specified period is equal to or shorter than the execution period of the flash effect at the time of the previous winning, the part that does not decide to execute the flash effect at the time of the winning).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the specific display that is the target of the specific light-emitting performance from becoming difficult to understand due to the specific light-emitting performance being executed when the remaining period of the variable display is short.

A gaming machine of aspect 45 is a gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1 to 44,
The performance execution means includes:
A specific effect that suggests that the game will be controlled to an advantageous state can also be executed in a variable display that is not controlled to an advantageous state (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-9, a portion in which a reach effect of a super reach can be executed even in a variable display in which the variable display result is a miss).
When the predetermined condition is satisfied during the execution of the specific effect in a variable display that is not controlled to an advantageous state, the specific light emitting effect can be executed in response to the start of the next variable display of the variable display (for example, as shown in modified example 135SG-8, when a start winning occurs in the first start port during the execution of a variable display, the remaining period of the variable display is specified, and if the specified period is equal to or shorter than the execution period of the flash effect at the time of the previous winning, the flash effect at the time of the winning can be executed from the start timing of the next variable display, provided that the variable display result of the variable display is a miss).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the special effects and the special light-emitting effects due to the special effects and the special light-emitting effects being executed at the same time.

A gaming machine of aspect 46 is a gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1 to 45,
A specific area through which the predetermined condition is satisfied when the game medium passes through (for example, a winning ball device 6A that forms a first start winning hole);
A specific light-emitting means (e.g., a starting lamp 135SG009S) provided around the specific area and capable of emitting light in different light-emitting modes;
Equipped with
The display means can display the specific display in any one of a plurality of display modes having different rates of control of the specific display to an advantageous state (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-17, a portion in which a reserved display or an active display can be displayed in any one of display patterns α to γ having different jackpot expectancies);
The specific light-emitting means is capable of emitting light in a light-emitting manner corresponding to the display manner of the specific display, regardless of whether the specific light-emitting performance is executed or not (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-28, when it is determined that the display is in the display pattern β or the display pattern γ, the start gate lamp 135SG009S is a portion that emits light in a color corresponding to the display pattern β or the display pattern γ from the occurrence of the start winning to the end of the variable display based on the start winning, regardless of the light-emitting manner of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F blinking as the winning flash performance or the game effect lamp 9, etc.)
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the display mode of the specific display can be recognized from the light emission mode of the specific light-emitting means provided around the specific area, thereby increasing interest in the game.

A gaming machine of aspect 47 is the gaming machine according to aspect 46,
The number of light emission modes that the specific light emitting means can emit is greater than the number of light emission modes that the first light emitting means can emit in the specific light emission performance (for example, as shown in modified example 135SG-9, a portion in which the number of light emission modes of the start gate lamp 135SG009S in the start gate lamp light emission performance is greater than the number of light emission modes of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F in the winning flash performance).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the light emission variation of the specific light emitting means is increased, which can increase the interest in the game.

A gaming machine of aspect 48 is the gaming machine of aspect 46 or aspect 47,
The light-emitting area of the first light-emitting means is larger than the light-emitting area of the specific light-emitting means (for example, as shown in modified example 135SG-10, the light-emitting area in which the winning flash lamp 135SG009F emits light as the winning flash performance is larger than the light-emitting area in which the starting gate lamp 135SG009S emits light as the starting gate lamp light-emitting performance).
The period during which the specific light-emitting means emits light according to the display mode of the specific display based on the establishment of the predetermined condition 1 is longer than the period during which the first light-emitting means emits light according to the specific light-emitting effect based on the establishment of the predetermined condition (in the case where the execution of both the winning flash effect and the hold display notice effect is determined based on the start winning, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F emits light from the occurrence of the starting winning to the start timing of the reach effect of the variable display that is the target of the starting winning flash effect, while the start opening lamp 135SG009S emits light from the occurrence of the starting winning to the end of the variable display that is the target of the hold display notice effect (the variable display that is the target of the winning flash effect)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, a decrease in interest in the game can be prevented due to the first light-emitting means emitting light in response to a specific light-emitting effect for an excessively long period of time, while the player's anticipation of an advantageous state being achieved through the light-emitting state of the specific light-emitting means can be maintained for a long period of time.

A gaming machine of aspect 49 is the gaming machine according to any one of aspects 46 to 48,
Both the first light-emitting means and the specific light-emitting means are capable of flashing (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-28, a portion in which a winning flash lamp 135SG009F can flash, and as shown in modified example 135SG-10, a portion in which a starting port lamp 135SG009S can flash),
The blinking cycle of the first light-emitting means is different from the blinking cycle of the specific light-emitting means (for example, as shown in modified example 135SG-10, the blinking cycle of the starter lamp 135SG009S is different from the blinking cycle of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F as a winning flash effect),
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, since the blinking cycles are different, it is possible to draw the player's attention to both the first light-emitting means and the specific light-emitting means, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

(Configuration of Pachinko Game Machine 1, etc.)
1 is a front view of a pachinko game machine 1, showing the layout of the main components. The pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is broadly composed of a game board (gauge board) 2 that constitutes the game board surface, and a game machine frame (base frame) 3 that supports and fixes the game board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and game balls as game media are shot into this game area by a predetermined ball shooting device.

Note that the "variable display" of special symbols means, for example, a variable display of multiple types of special symbols (the same applies to other symbols described below). Variations include updating the display of multiple symbols, scrolling the display of multiple symbols, transforming one or more symbols, and enlarging/reducing one or more symbols. In the variation of special symbols and normal symbols described below, multiple types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of decorative symbols described below, multiple types of decorative symbols are scrolled or updated, or one or more decorative symbols are transformed or enlarged/reduced. Note that variations also include a mode in which a certain symbol is displayed flashing. At the end of the variable display, a specified special symbol is displayed stationary (also called derived or derived display) as the display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described below). Note that the variable display may be expressed as a variable display or variation.

The special pattern variably displayed on the first special pattern display device 4A is also called the "first special pattern," and the special pattern variably displayed on the second special pattern display device 4B is also called the "second special pattern." A special pattern game using the first special pattern is also called the "first special pattern game," and a special pattern game using the second special pattern is also called the "second special pattern game." There may be only one type of special pattern display device that variably displays the special patterns.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the play area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device) or an organic EL (electro luminescence) device, and displays various presentation images. The image display device 5 may also be composed of a projector and a screen. Various presentation images are displayed on the image display device 5.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronization with the first special game or the second special game, multiple types of decorative patterns (such as patterns showing numbers, etc.) that are different from the special patterns are variably displayed as decorative identification information. Here, in synchronization with the first special game or the second special game, decorative patterns are variably displayed (for example, scrolled up and down or updated) in each of the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R. The special game and the variable display of decorative patterns that are executed in synchronization are collectively referred to as simply variable display.

The screen of the image display device 5 may be provided with a display area for displaying a pending display corresponding to a variable display whose execution is pending, and an active display corresponding to a variable display that is being executed. The pending display and the active display are collectively referred to as a variable display-compatible display corresponding to the variable display.

The number of reserved variable displays is also called the reserved memory number. The reserved memory number corresponding to the first special game is also called the first reserved memory number, and the reserved memory number corresponding to the second special game is also called the second reserved memory number. The sum of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number is also called the total reserved memory number.

A first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B, each of which includes a number of LEDs, are provided at predetermined positions on the game board 2. The first hold indicator 25A displays the first hold memory number by the number of lit LEDs. The second hold indicator 25B displays the second hold memory number by the number of lit LEDs.

A winning ball device 6A is provided below the image display device 5, and a variable winning ball device 6B is provided to the right of the winning ball device 6A.

The winning ball device 6A forms a first start winning hole that is always kept in a constant open state so that game balls can enter, for example, by a specified ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first start winning hole, a specified number of prize balls (for example, three) are paid out and the first special game can be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (normal electric device) forms a second start winning hole that changes between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 3). The variable winning ball device 6B is, for example, an electric tulip-type device having a pair of movable wings, and when the solenoid 81 is in the off state, the movable wings are in a vertical position, so that the tip of the movable wings approaches the winning ball device 6A, and the second start winning hole is in a closed state in which the game ball does not enter (also referred to as the second start winning hole being in a closed state). On the other hand, when the solenoid 81 is in the on state, the movable wings of the variable winning ball device 6B are in a tilted position, so that the second start winning hole is in an open state in which the game ball can enter (also referred to as the second start winning hole being in an open state). When a game ball enters the second start winning hole, a predetermined number of prize balls (for example, three) are paid out and the second special game can be started. The variable winning ball device 6B may be any device that can change between a closed state and an open state, and is not limited to devices that include an electric tulip-type device.

At predetermined positions on the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, three locations are provided at the lower left of the game area and one location is provided above the variable winning ball device 6B), general winning openings 10 are provided which are always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. In this case, when a game ball enters one of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) are paid out as prize balls.

Between the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B, a special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning opening is provided. The special variable winning ball device 7 has a large winning opening door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see Figure 3), and the large winning opening door forms the large winning opening as a specific area that can be switched between an open state and a closed state.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large prize opening door (for the special electric device) is in the OFF state, the large prize opening door closes the large prize opening, and game balls cannot enter (pass through) the large prize opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large prize opening door is in the ON state, the large prize opening door opens the large prize opening, and game balls can easily enter the large prize opening.

When a game ball enters the large prize opening, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 14 balls) are paid out as prize balls. When a game ball enters the large prize opening, more prize balls are paid out than when a game ball enters the first start prize opening, the second start prize opening, or the general prize opening 10, for example.

The entry of a game ball into each winning port, including the general winning port 10, is also called a "winning". In particular, a winning ball into the starting port (first starting winning port, second starting winning port) is also called a starting winning port.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 (the lower left of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 1). As an example, the normal symbol display 20 is made up of a 7-segment LED or the like, and performs a variable display of normal symbols as multiple types of normal identification information different from the special symbols. The normal symbols are represented by numbers showing "0" to "9" or lighting patterns such as "-". The normal symbols may also include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of normal symbols is also called a normal symbol game.

A pass gate 41 through which the game ball can pass is provided to the right of the image display device 5. When the game ball passes through the pass gate 41, a regular game is executed.

A regular symbol pending display 25C is provided below the regular symbol display 20. The regular symbol pending display 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the regular symbol pending memory number, which is the number of regular symbol games that are pending execution, by the number of lit LEDs.

In addition to the above features, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with windmills that change the direction and speed of the game balls, as well as numerous obstacle nails. At the very bottom of the game area, there is an outlet that takes in game balls that do not enter any of the winning holes.

Speakers 8L, 8R for playing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the upper left and right positions of the gaming machine frame 3. A main lamp 9a is provided above the image display device 5 on the gaming machine frame 3, and frame lamps 9b are provided on the left and right of the main lamp 9a so as to surround the playing area. Furthermore, an attacca lamp 9c is provided near the special variable winning ball device 7 on the gaming board 2.

A movable body 32 that operates according to the presentation is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 (a position above the image display device 5 in FIG. 1). The movable body 32 is also provided with a movable body lamp 9d. The movable body lamp 9d and the aforementioned main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, and attacca lamp 9c may be collectively referred to as the game effect lamp 9. The main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacca lamp 9c, and movable body lamp 9d are each configured to include an LED.

At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, a ball-hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 is provided, which is operated by the player or the like to launch the gaming ball toward the gaming area using the ball-hitting device.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the playing area, a ball supply tray (upper tray) is provided to hold (store) gaming balls dispensed as prize balls or game balls lent by a predetermined ball lending machine so that they can be supplied to the ball launching device. In addition to the upper tray, the gaming machine frame 3 may also be provided with a payout section (ball supply tray) from which prize balls are paid out when the upper tray is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by the player is attached to a predetermined position on the gaming machine frame 3 below the playing area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed by the player. Operations on the stick controller 31A are detected by the controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 3).

At a predetermined position on the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a push button 31B is provided that the player can press to give a predetermined command. The operation of the push button 31B is detected by a push sensor 35B (see FIG. 3).

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B are provided as detection means for detecting the player's actions (operations, etc.), but other detection means may also be provided.

Figure 2 is a rear perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The main board 11, housed in a board case 201, is mounted on the rear of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The main board 11 is provided with a setting key 51 and a setting change switch 52. The setting key 51 functions as a lock switch for switching to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state. The setting change switch 52 functions as a setting switch for changing settings such as the probability of winning a jackpot and the payout rate in the setting change state. The setting key 51 and the setting change switch 52 may be attached to the outside of the main board 11, for example, at a predetermined position on the power supply board 17.

A display monitor 29 is disposed in the center of the back surface of the main board 11, and a display changeover switch 31 is disposed to the side of the display monitor 29. The display monitor 29 may be configured, for example, using a seven-segment LED display device. The display monitor 29 and the display changeover switch 31 are disposed directly in front of the main board 11 when the back surface of the game board 2 is viewed with the game machine frame 3 open.

The display monitor 29 can display winning information such as consecutive win ratio, winning ratio, and base. The consecutive win ratio is the ratio of the number of winning balls that have entered the large winning port (attacker) to the total number of winning balls. The winning ratio is the ratio of the number of winning balls that have entered the second start winning port (electric chute) and the number of winning balls that have entered the large winning port (attacker) to the total number of winning balls. The base is the ratio of the total number of winning balls to the number of game balls shot out. When in the setting change state or setting confirmation state, the display monitor 29 can display the setting values in the pachinko game machine 1. When in the setting change state or setting confirmation state, the display monitor 29 only needs to be able to display the setting values to be changed or confirmed.

When the gaming machine frame 3 is closed, the setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 cannot be operated from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The gaming machine frame 3 is provided with a rotatable glass door frame 3a having a glass window, and is configured so that the gaming area can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 3a. When the glass door frame 3a is closed, the gaming area can be seen through the glass window.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a security cover 50A is attached to the right end of the outer frame 1a, which is formed in a vertically long rectangular frame shape. When the gaming machine frame 3 is closed, the security cover 50A covers the right side of the board case 201, including the setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52, from the rear side. The security cover 50A is a roughly L-shaped member including a short piece 50Aa and a long piece 50Ab, and may be made of a transparent synthetic resin.

(Outline of game progress)
The game ball is launched toward the game area by the player rotating the ball hitting operation handle 30 provided on the pachinko game machine 1. When the game ball passes through the passing gate 41, a normal game is started by the normal symbol display 20. If the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 during the period during which the previous normal game is being played (if the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 but the normal game based on the passing cannot be played immediately), the normal game based on the passing is put on hold up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In this normal game, if a specific normal symbol (a normal winning symbol) is displayed as a fixed normal symbol, the display result of the normal symbol will be "normal winning". On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than a normal winning symbol (a normal losing symbol) is displayed as a fixed normal symbol, the display result of the normal symbol will be "normal losing". When a "normal winning" occurs, an opening control is performed to keep the variable winning ball device 6B in an open state for a predetermined period of time (the second starting winning port is opened).

When a game ball enters the first start winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game is started by the first special symbol display device 4A.

When a game ball enters the second start winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game is started by the second special symbol display device 4B.

In addition, if the game ball enters (wins) the start winning hole during the period when the special game is being played or during the period when the game is controlled to a big win game state or a small win game state (when a start winning occurs but the special game based on the start winning cannot be played immediately), the special game based on that entry will be put on hold until a specified upper limit number (for example, 4).

In special game, if a specific special symbol (a big win symbol, for example, "7"; the actual symbol varies depending on the type of big win, as described below) is displayed as the confirmed special symbol, it is a "big win", and if a specific special symbol different from the big win symbol (a small win symbol, for example, "2") is displayed as a "small win". Also, if a special symbol different from the big win or small win symbol (a losing symbol, for example, "-") is displayed as a "losing" symbol, it is a "losing".

After the display result in the special game becomes "big win", the game state is controlled to a big win game state, which is advantageous for the player. After the display result in the special game becomes "small win", the game state is controlled to a small win game state.

In the jackpot game state, the large prize opening formed by the special variable prize ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. This open state continues until either a predetermined period of time (e.g., 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) has elapsed, or the number of game balls that have entered the large prize opening reaches a predetermined number (e.g., 9), whichever comes first. The predetermined period is the maximum period during which the large prize opening can be opened in one round, and is hereinafter also referred to as the maximum opening period. This cycle in which the large prize opening is open is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeated until the predetermined maximum number of times (15 times or 2 times) is reached.

In the jackpot gaming state, the player can get prize balls by making the gaming ball enter the big prize opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The more rounds there are in the jackpot gaming state, and the longer the upper limit opening period, the more advantageous it is for the player.

A jackpot type is set for a "jackpot." For example, there are multiple types of opening modes of the jackpot opening (number of rounds or maximum opening period) and game states after a jackpot game state (normal state, time-saving state, special state, etc.), and the jackpot type is set according to these. There may be jackpot types that offer many prize balls, jackpot types that offer few prize balls, or jackpot types that offer almost no prize balls.

In the small win game state, the large prize opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening state. For example, in the small win game state, the large prize opening is opened in the same opening state as the large prize opening in the large prize game state for some large prize types (the number of times the large prize opening is opened is the same as the number of rounds, and the timing of closing the large prize opening is also the same, etc.). Note that, like the large prize types, small prize types may also be set for "small wins".

After the jackpot game state ends, the game may be controlled to a time-saving state or a special state depending on the type of jackpot mentioned above.

In the time-saving state, control (time-saving control) is executed to shorten the average special symbol fluctuation time (period during which the special symbol fluctuates) more than in the normal state. In the time-saving state, control (high opening control, high base control) is also executed to make it easier for the game ball to enter the second start winning hole by shortening the average regular symbol fluctuation time (period during which the regular symbol fluctuates) more than in the normal state and by improving the probability of a "regular symbol hit" in the regular symbol game more than in the normal state. The time-saving state is an advantageous state for the player because it is a state in which the fluctuation efficiency of special symbols (especially the second special symbol) is improved.

In the probability variable state (probability fluctuating state), in addition to time-saving control, probability variable control is executed, which increases the probability that the display result will be a "jackpot" compared to the normal state. The probability variable state is an even more advantageous state for the player, as it not only improves the efficiency of special symbol fluctuation, but also makes it easier to get a "jackpot."

The time-saving state or the probability of a special bonus state will continue until one of the end conditions is met first, such as the specified number of special games being played or the start of the next big win game state. The end condition of the state in which the specified number of special games have been played is also called a count-cut (count-cut time-saving state, count-cut probability of a special bonus state, etc.).

The normal state refers to a game state other than advantageous states such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, and special states such as a time-saving state and a probability-varying state, and is a state in which the pachinko game machine 1, such as the probability that the display result in the normal game will be a "normal hit" and the probability that the display result in the special game will be a "jackpot", is controlled in the same way as the initial setting state of the pachinko game machine 1 (for example, when a system reset is performed and the specified return process is not executed after the power is turned on).

The state in which probability variable control is being executed is also called a high probability state, and the state in which probability variable control is not being executed is also called a low probability state. The state in which time-saving control is being executed is also called a high base state, and the state in which time-saving control is not being executed is also called a low base state. Combining these, the time-saving state is also called a low probability high base state, the probability variable state is a high probability high base state, and the normal state is a low probability low base state. The high probability state and low base state are also called a high probability low base state.

After the small win game state ends, the game state is not changed, and the game state before the display result of the special game becomes "small win" is continued (however, if the special game when the "small win" occurs is the special game of the specified number of times in the number cut, the game state will naturally change). Note that the display result of the special game does not have to be "small win".

The game state may change based on the game ball passing through a specific area (e.g., a specific area in a big prize hole) during the big win game state. For example, when the game ball passes through the specific area, the game state may be controlled to a probability variable state after the big win game state.
(Progression of the performance, etc.)

In the pachinko game machine 1, various effects (effects that notify the progress of the game or liven up the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The effects are described below. The effects are performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, but in addition to or instead of the display, the effects may be performed using audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting or extinguishing of the game effect lamp 9, the operation of the movable body 32, or any other effect device that includes some or all of these.

As an effect that is executed according to the progress of the game, in the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R provided on the image display device 5, a variable display of decorative patterns begins in response to the start of the first or second special pattern game. At the timing when the display result (also called the determined special pattern) in the first or second special pattern game is displayed statically, the determined decorative pattern (a combination of three decorative patterns) which is the display result of the variable display of the decorative patterns is also displayed statically (derived).

During the period from when the variable display of the decorative symbols starts to when it ends, the state of the variable display of the decorative symbols may become a predetermined reach state (a reach is achieved). Here, a reach state refers to a state in which the decorative symbols that have not yet been stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 continue to be variable displayed when the decorative symbols that have not yet been stopped and displayed form part of a jackpot combination, which will be described later.

In addition, when the above-mentioned reach state occurs during the variable display of the decorative symbols, a reach effect is executed. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, multiple types of reach effects are executed with different rates (also called jackpot reliability or jackpot expectation) of the display result (the display result of the special game or the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbols) becoming a "jackpot" depending on the performance state. Reach effects include, for example, a normal reach and a super reach, which has a higher jackpot reliability than a normal reach.

When the display result of the special game is a "jackpot", a fixed decorative pattern that is a predetermined jackpot combination is derived as the display result of the variable display of decorative patterns on the screen of the image display device 5 (the display result of the variable display of decorative patterns is a "jackpot"). As an example, the same decorative patterns (for example, "7") are displayed stopped in line on a predetermined effective line in the "left", "center", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

In the case of a "probability jackpot" that is controlled to a probability jackpot state after the end of the jackpot game state, odd decorative symbols (e.g., "7") are displayed in a line, and in the case of a "non-probability jackpot (normal jackpot)" that is not controlled to a probability jackpot state after the end of the jackpot game state, even decorative symbols (e.g., "6") may be displayed in a line. In this case, odd decorative symbols are also called probability jackpot symbols, and even decorative symbols are also called non-probability jackpot symbols (normal symbols). After a reach state is reached with non-probability jackpot symbols, a promotion effect may be executed that ultimately results in a "probability jackpot".

When the display result of the special game is a "small win", a fixed decorative pattern (such as "1 3 5") that is a predetermined small win combination is derived on the screen of the image display device 5 as a display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is a "small win"). As an example, decorative patterns that constitute chance eyes are displayed stationary on a predetermined effective line in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Note that a common fixed decorative pattern may be derived and displayed when the display result of the special game is a "big win" of some big win types (big win types in a big win game state that are the same as a small win game state) and when it is a "small win".

When the display result of the special game is a "miss," the state of the variable display of the decorative pattern does not become a reach state, and the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may display a fixed decorative pattern of a non-reach combination (also called a "non-reach miss") as a "non-reach miss" (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be a "non-reach miss"). Also, when the display result is a "miss," after the state of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes a reach state, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may display a fixed decorative pattern of a predetermined reach combination (also called a "reach miss") that is not a jackpot combination as a "reach miss" (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be a "reach miss").

The effects that the pachinko gaming machine 1 can execute include displaying the variable display compatible display (reserved display or active display) described above. In addition, as other effects, for example, a preview effect that predicts the jackpot reliability is executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern. Preview effects include a preview effect that predicts the jackpot reliability in the variable display currently being executed, and a pre-reading preview effect that predicts the jackpot reliability in the variable display before execution (variable display whose execution is on hold). As a pre-reading preview effect, an effect that changes the display mode of the variable display compatible display (reserved display or active display) to a mode different from normal may be executed.

In addition, in the image display device 5, a pseudo consecutive performance may be executed in which a single variable display appears to be multiple variable displays by temporarily pausing the decorative pattern during the variable display and then restarting the variable display.

During a big win game state, a big win performance is executed to notify the player of the big win game state. As a big win performance, a performance to notify the number of rounds or a promotion performance to indicate that the value of the big win game state will increase may be executed. Also, during a small win game state, a small win performance to notify the player of the small win game state is executed. In addition, a common performance may be executed during a small win game state and a big win game state for some big win types (a big win type of a big win game state in the same manner as a small win game state, for example, a big win type in which the game state after that is a high probability state), so that the player cannot know whether he is currently in a small win game state or a big win game state. In such a case, a common performance may be executed after the end of the small win game state and after the end of the big win game state, so that it is not possible to distinguish whether the state is a high probability state or a low probability state.

In addition, for example, when a special game or the like is not being executed, a demo (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demo performance is executed).

(Board configuration)
The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, a performance control board 12, a sound control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, and the like, as shown in Fig. 3. In addition, various boards, such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, and a launch control board, are arranged on the back of the pachinko game machine 1. Furthermore, a power supply board 17 is also equipped. The various control boards are not only electronic circuit boards such as printed wiring boards on which conductor patterns are formed and on which electrical components can be mounted, but also electronic circuit mounting boards configured to realize specific electrical functions by mounting electrical components on the electronic circuit board.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, power from an AC power source, such as an external power source such as a commercial power source, at 100V AC, can be supplied to electrical components including the main board 11 and various control boards such as the performance control board 12 via the power supply board 17. The power supply board 17 includes, for example, a rectifier circuit for converting alternating current (AC) to direct current (DC), and a power supply circuit for converting a predetermined DC voltage to a specific DC voltage (for example, 12V DC or 5V DC).

The main board 11 is the main control board, and has the function of controlling the progress of the above-mentioned games in the pachinko game machine 1 (execution of the special game (including management of reserved balls), execution of the regular game (including management of reserved balls), big win game state, small win game state, game state, etc.). The main board 11 has a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, etc.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103, a random number circuit 104, and an I/O (Input/Output port) 105.

The CPU 103 executes the programs stored in the ROM 101 to perform processes that control the progress of the game (processes that realize the functions of the main board 11). At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (such as data on fluctuation patterns, performance control commands, and tables referenced when making various decisions) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. The RAM 102 serves as a backup RAM in which the stored contents are preserved for a predetermined period of time even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped in part or in whole. Note that all or part of the programs stored in the ROM 101 may be deployed to the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random number values (gaming random numbers) used to control the progress of the game. The gaming random numbers may be updated by the CPU 103 executing a specific computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 105 is configured to include, for example, an input port to which various signals (detection signals described below) are input, and an output port for transmitting various signals (signals for controlling (driving) the first special pattern display device 4A, the second special pattern display device 4B, the normal pattern display device 20, the first hold display device 25A, the second hold display device 25B, the normal hold display device 25C, etc., solenoid drive signals).

The switch circuit 110 takes in detection signals (such as a detection signal indicating that a game ball has passed or entered and the switch has been turned on) from various switches for detecting game balls (gate switch 21, start port switch (first start port switch 22A and second start port switch 22B), count switch 23) and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal indicates that the game ball has passed or entered.

The switch circuit 110 receives a reset signal, a power-off signal, and a clear signal from the power supply board 17 and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100. The reset signal is an operation stop signal for stopping the operation of control circuits such as the game control microcomputer 100, and can be output using either a power supply monitoring circuit, an IC with a built-in watchdog timer, or a system reset IC. The power-off signal is turned off when the specified power supply voltage used in the pachinko game machine 1 exceeds a specified value, and is turned on when the period during which the specified power supply voltage remains below the specified value continues for longer than the power-off reference time. The clear signal is turned on in response to, for example, pressing a clear switch provided on the power supply board 17.

The solenoid circuit 111 transmits solenoid drive signals (such as signals to turn on solenoid 81 and solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for the normal electric device and the solenoid 82 for the large prize opening door.

The main board 11 is connected to a display monitor 29, a display changeover switch 31, a setting key 51, a setting changeover switch 52, and a door open sensor 90. The door open sensor 90 detects the opening of the gaming machine frame 3, including the glass door frame 3a.

As part of controlling the progress of the game, the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) supplies presentation control commands (commands that specify (notify) the progress of the game, etc.) to the presentation control board 12 according to the progress of the game. The presentation control commands output from the main board 11 are relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the presentation control board 12. The presentation control commands include, for example, commands that specify various determination results in the main board 11 (for example, the display results of the special game (including the type of jackpot), the variable pattern used when executing the special game (described in detail later)), the game status (for example, the start or end of the variable display, the opening status of the jackpot opening, the occurrence of a win, the number of reserved memories, the game status), the occurrence of an error, etc.

The performance control board 12 is a sub-control board independent of the main board 11, and has the function of receiving performance control commands and executing performances (various performances according to the progress of the game, including various notifications such as driving the movable body 32, notifying errors, and notifying of power outage recovery) based on the received performance control commands.

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control unit 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125.

The performance control CPU 120 executes the programs stored in the ROM 121 to perform processing for executing performances together with the display control unit 123 (processing for realizing the above-mentioned functions of the performance control board 12, including determining the performance to be executed). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The presentation control CPU 120 may instruct the display control unit 123 to execute a presentation based on detection signals from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (signals that are output when an operation by the player is detected and that appropriately indicate the content of the operation).

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), CGROM (Character Generator ROM), VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes the performance based on instructions to execute the performance from the performance control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 displays a performance image on the image display unit 5 by supplying a video signal corresponding to the performance to be executed to the image display unit 5 based on an instruction to execute the performance from the performance control CPU 120. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal designating the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 and a lamp signal (a signal designating the on/off state of the lamp) to the lamp control board 14 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the performance image and to turn on/off the game effect lamp 9. The display control unit 123 also supplies a signal to operate the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or to a drive circuit that drives the movable body 32.

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits that drive the speakers 8L and 8R, and drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, causing the speakers 8L and 8R to output the sound designated by the sound designation signal.

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits that drive the game effect lamp 9, and drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, turning the game effect lamp 9 on and off in the manner specified by the lamp signal. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the sound output and the turning on and off of the lamp.

The performance control CPU 120 may be configured to execute control of audio output, turning on/off the lamp (such as supplying a sound designation signal or a lamp signal), and controlling the movable body 32 (such as supplying a signal to operate the movable body 32).

The random number circuit 124 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random number values (random numbers for performance) used to execute various performances. The random numbers for performance may be updated by the performance control CPU 120 executing a specific computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 125 mounted on the performance control board 12 includes an input port for taking in performance control commands transmitted from, for example, the main board 11, and an output port for transmitting various signals (video signals, sound designation signals, lamp signals).

The boards other than the main board 11, such as the performance control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also called sub-boards. As with the pachinko game machine 1, multiple sub-boards may be provided for different functions, or one sub-board may be configured to have multiple functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (function) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Main Operations of Main Board 11)
First, a description will be given of the main operations of the main board 11. When power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is started, and a game control main process is executed by the CPU 103. Fig. 4 is a flowchart showing the game control main process executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 4, the CPU 103 first sets interrupts to be prohibited (step S1). Then, it performs the necessary initial settings (step S2). The initial settings include setting the stack pointer, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output port, etc.), and setting the RAM 102 to be accessible.

Next, it is determined whether the recovery condition is met (step S3). The recovery condition can be met when the clear signal is in the OFF state, backup data is present, and the backup RAM is normal. When power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, if the clear switch provided on the power supply board 17 is pressed, for example, an ON clear signal is input to the game control microcomputer 100. If such an ON clear signal is input, it is determined in step S3 that the recovery condition is not met. The backup data only needs to be capable of being stored in the RAM 102, which serves as the backup RAM for game control. In step S3, it is determined whether the recovery condition can be met by checking or inspecting the presence or absence of backup data and the presence or absence of data errors.

If the recovery condition is met (step S3; Yes), recovery processing (step S4) is executed, followed by setting confirmation processing (step S5). The recovery processing in step S4 sets a working area based on the contents stored in RAM 102. By setting the working area using the backup data stored in RAM 102, the game state when the power supply was stopped is restored, and if, for example, a special symbol was changing, it is sufficient if the change of the special symbol can be resumed from the state before the stoppage.

If the recovery condition is not met (step S3; No), an initialization process (step S6) is executed, and then a setting change process (step S7) is executed. The initialization process in step S6 includes a clearing process that clears flags, counters, and buffers stored in RAM 102, and the execution of the clearing process sets initial values in the working area.

In the setting confirmation process of step S5, it is determined whether a predetermined setting confirmation condition is met. The setting confirmation condition is met, for example, when power supply is started, the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is in the ON state and the setting key 51 is turned ON. The setting confirmation process of step S5 is executed when the recovery condition is met in step S3, including the clear signal being in the OFF state. Therefore, since the setting confirmation condition can be met only when the clear signal is in the OFF state, the clear signal being in the OFF state can also be included in the setting confirmation condition.

When the setting confirmation condition is met in the setting confirmation process of step S5, the pachinko gaming machine 1 enters a setting confirmation state in which the setting values set therein can be confirmed, and a setting confirmation start command is sent from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. In the setting confirmation state, the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be confirmed by viewing them on the display monitor 29. When the setting confirmation state is to end, a setting confirmation end command is sent from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12.

When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the setting confirmation state, it may be in a game stop state in which the progress of the game on the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped. In the game stop state, the launch of game balls by operating the ball-hitting handle, the detection of game balls by various switches, etc. are stopped, and the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, and the normal symbol display device 20 may be controlled to stop displaying a losing symbol or the like, or to display a symbol corresponding to a game stop state other than a losing symbol. When the setting confirmation state ends, the game stop state associated with it may also end.

In the setting change process of step S7, it is determined whether a predetermined setting change condition is met. The setting change condition is met, for example, when power supply is started, the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is in the ON state, and the setting key 51 is turned ON. The setting change condition may also include the clear signal being in the ON state.

When the setting change condition is met in the setting change process of step S7, the pachinko gaming machine 1 enters a setting change state in which the setting value set therein can be changed, and a setting change start command is sent from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. In the setting change state, the setting value is displayed on the display monitor 29, and the numerical value displayed on the display monitor 29 is updated and displayed sequentially each time the setting change switch 52 is operated. After that, when the setting key 51 is turned off by an attendant at the game center or the like, the setting value displayed on the display monitor 29 is stored (updated and stored) in the backup area of the RAM 102, and the display monitor 29 is turned off. When the setting change state is to be ended, a setting change end command is sent from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12.

When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the setting change state, the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be in a play stop state, just as when it is in the setting confirmation state. When the setting change state ends, the associated play stop state may also end.

When the performance control board 12 receives a setting check start command or a setting change start command, control may be performed to notify the user that a setting check or change is in progress. For example, a predetermined image may be displayed on the image display device 5, a predetermined sound may be output from the speakers 8L and 8R, or a light-emitting component such as the game effect lamp 9 may be illuminated in a predetermined manner.

The clear signal is turned on by, for example, pressing a clear switch provided on the power supply board 17. Therefore, when power supply is started, if the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is on, if the clear switch is on, the initialization process of step S6 and the setting change process of step S7 are executed, making it possible to control the device to the setting change state, and if the clear switch is off, the recovery process of step S4 and the setting confirmation process of step S5 are executed, making it possible to control the device to the setting confirmation state. When power supply is started, if the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is off or the setting key 51 is off, if the clear switch is on, the initialization process of step S6 is executed but the device is not controlled to the setting change state, and if the clear switch is off, the recovery process of step S4 is executed but the device is not controlled to the setting confirmation state.

After executing the setting confirmation process or setting change process, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process to initialize the random number circuit 104 (step S8). Then, the register of the CTC built into the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that a timer interrupt occurs periodically at a predetermined time (e.g., every 2 ms) (step S9), and the interrupt is permitted (step S10). After that, a loop process is entered. After that, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined time intervals (e.g., every 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can execute the timer interrupt process periodically.

When the CPU 103 that has executed the game control main process receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. 5. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 5 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process to determine whether or not detection signals have been received from various switches such as the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, and the count switch 23 via the switch circuit 110 (step S21). Next, by executing a predetermined main side error process, it performs an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko game machine 1, and can issue a warning if necessary depending on the diagnosis result (step S22). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, it outputs data such as jackpot information (information indicating the number of jackpots), start information (information indicating the number of start winnings), and probability fluctuation information (information indicating the number of times the probability fluctuation state has occurred) that are supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko game machine 1 (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process is executed to update at least a portion of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software (step S24). After this, the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process process (step S25). By the CPU 103 executing the special symbol process process at each timer interrupt, management of the execution and reservation of the special symbol game, control of the big win game state and small win game state, control of the game state, etc. are realized.

Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S26). The CPU 103 executes the normal symbol process at each timer interrupt, enabling the execution and reservation management of the normal symbol game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the game ball passing through the passing gate 41), and the opening control of the variable winning ball device 6B based on a "normal symbol hit". The normal symbol game is executed by driving the normal symbol display 20, and the number of reserved normal symbols is displayed by lighting the normal symbol reservation display 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process processing, as part of the game control timer interrupt processing, processing when a power outage occurs, processing for paying out prize balls, etc. may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes a command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may set a performance control command for transmission in each of the above processes. In the command control processing of step S27, a process is performed to transmit the performance control command set for transmission to a sub-side control board such as the performance control board 12. After executing the command control processing, the interrupt is permitted and then the game control timer interrupt processing is terminated.

Figure 6 is a flow chart showing an example of the special symbol process executed in step S25 shown in Figure 5. In this special symbol process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S101).

In the start winning judgment process, a process is executed to detect the occurrence of a start winning, store the reserved information in a specified area of the RAM 102, and update the reserved memory number. When a start winning occurs, a random number value for determining the display result (including the type of big win) and the variation pattern is extracted and stored as reserved information. In addition, a process for predicting and judging the display result and the variation pattern based on the extracted random number value may be executed. After the reserved information and the reserved memory number are stored, a transmission setting is performed to transmit a performance control command to the performance control board 12 to specify the judgment results such as the occurrence of a start winning, the reserved memory number, and the predictive judgment. The performance control command at the time of the start winning that has been transmitted and set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12, for example, after the special pattern process is completed, by executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. 4.

After executing the start winning determination process in step S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes one of the processes in steps S110 to S120 depending on the value of the special symbol process flag provided in the RAM 102. Note that in each step of the special symbol process (steps S110 to S120), a transmission setting is made to transmit a performance control command corresponding to each step to the performance control board 12.

The normal special pattern processing in step S110 is executed when the value of the special pattern process flag is "0" (initial value). In this normal special pattern processing, a determination is made as to whether or not to start the first special pattern game or the second special pattern game based on the presence or absence of reserved information. In addition, in the normal special pattern processing, based on a random number value for determining the display result, whether or not the display result of the special pattern or the decorative pattern is to be a "big win" or a "small win", and if it is a "big win", the type of big win is determined (pre-determined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Furthermore, in the normal special pattern processing, a determined special pattern (either a big win pattern, a small win pattern, or a miss pattern) to be stopped and displayed in the special pattern game is set in response to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "1", and the normal special pattern processing is terminated. Note that the special pattern game using the second special pattern may be executed in priority over the special pattern game using the first special pattern (also called special pattern 2 priority consumption). Also, the order in which the game balls enter the first start winning slot and the second start winning slot may be stored, and the conditions for starting the special game may be met in the order in which the balls enter (also known as winning order consumption).

When making various decisions based on random number values, various tables stored in ROM 101 (tables in which decision values compared with random number values are assigned to decision results) are referenced. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the performance control board 12. On the performance control board 12, various tables are stored in ROM 121.

The fluctuation pattern setting process of step S111 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "1". This fluctuation pattern setting process includes a process of determining the fluctuation pattern to one of multiple types using a random number value for determining the fluctuation pattern based on a pre-determined result of whether the display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit". In the fluctuation pattern setting process, when the fluctuation pattern is determined, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "2" and the fluctuation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern specifies the execution time of the special game (special game variation time) (which is also the execution time of the variable display of the decorative symbols), the manner of the variable display of the decorative symbols (whether or not there is a reach, etc.), and the content of the presentation during the variable display of the decorative symbols (type of reach presentation, etc.), and is also called the variable display pattern.

The special pattern change process of step S112 is executed when the value of the special pattern process flag is "2". This special pattern change process includes a process for making settings to change the special pattern in the first special pattern display device 4A and the second special pattern display device 4B, and a process for measuring the elapsed time since the special pattern started to change. It also determines whether the measured elapsed time has reached the special pattern change time corresponding to the change pattern. Then, when the elapsed time since the special pattern started to change reaches the special pattern change time, the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "3", and the special pattern change process ends.

The special pattern stop process of step S113 is executed when the value of the special pattern process flag is "3". This special pattern stop process includes a process for setting the first special pattern display device 4A or the second special pattern display device 4B to stop the fluctuation of the special pattern and to stop displaying (deriving) the confirmed special pattern that is the display result of the special pattern. If the display result is a "big win", the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, if the big win flag is off and the display result is a "small win", the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "8". If the display result is a "miss", the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "0". If the display result is a "small win" or "miss", when the time-saving state or the probability change state is controlled and the end of the number of times is established, the game state is also updated. When the value of the special pattern process flag is updated, the special pattern stop process ends.

The pre-opening process for the jackpot in step S114 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "4". This pre-opening process for the jackpot includes a process for starting the execution of a round in the jackpot game state and setting the jackpot opening port to an open state, based on the display result being "jackpot", etc. When the jackpot opening port is opened, a process for supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the jackpot opening port is executed. At this time, for example, depending on the type of jackpot, the maximum open period for the jackpot opening port and the maximum number of rounds to be executed are set. When these settings are completed, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "5", and the pre-opening process for the jackpot is completed.

The jackpot opening process of step S115 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "5". This jackpot opening process includes a process for measuring the time that has elapsed since the jackpot opening was opened, and a process for determining whether or not it is time to return the jackpot opening from an open state to a closed state based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23. When the jackpot opening is to be returned to a closed state, a process for stopping the supply of a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the jackpot opening door is executed, and then the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "6", and the jackpot opening process is terminated.

The post-jackpot release process of step S116 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "6". This post-jackpot release process includes a process for determining whether the number of times the round that opens the big prize opening has been executed has reached a set upper limit, and a process for making settings to end the jackpot game state when the upper limit has been reached. When the number of times the round has been executed has not reached the upper limit, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "5", whereas when the number of times the round has been executed has reached the upper limit, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "7". When the value of the special chart process flag is updated, the post-jackpot release process ends.

The jackpot end process of step S117 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "7". This jackpot end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to the period during which an ending presentation is executed as a presentation operation that notifies the end of the jackpot game state has elapsed, and a process of making various settings for starting special rate control or time-saving control in response to the end of the jackpot game state. When such settings are made, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot end process ends.

The small win pre-opening process in step S118 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "8". This small win pre-opening process includes a process for setting the large prize opening to an open state in the small win game state based on the display result being "small win". At this time, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "9", and the small win pre-opening process ends.

The small win open processing of step S119 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "9". This small win open processing includes a process for measuring the time that has elapsed since the large prize opening was opened, and a process for determining whether or not it is time to return the large prize opening from an open state to a closed state based on the measured elapsed time. When the large prize opening is returned to a closed state and it is time to end the small win game state, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "10" and the small win open processing ends.

The small win end process of step S120 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "10". This small win end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to the period during which the presentation operation that notifies the end of the small win game state is executed has elapsed. Here, when the small win game state ends, the game state in the pachinko game machine 1 before the small win game state is entered is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small win game state has elapsed, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "0", and the small win end process ends.

The pachinko game machine 1 is configured so that the winning probability of a jackpot and the ball payout rate change according to the setting value. For example, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, the winning probability of a jackpot and the ball payout rate change by using a display result judgment table (winning probability) according to the setting value. For example, the setting value is made up of six levels from 1 to 6, with 6 being the highest winning probability of a jackpot, and the winning probability of a jackpot decreasing as the value decreases in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1. In this example, when the setting value is set to 6, the player has the highest advantage, and the advantage decreases stepwise as the value decreases in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1. If the winning probability of a jackpot changes according to the setting value, the ball payout rate may also change according to the setting value. The winning probability of a jackpot is constant regardless of the setting value, while the number of rounds in the jackpot game state may change according to the setting value. The pachinko gaming machine 1 may be configured to be able to set one of a number of setting values that have different degrees of advantage for the player. The setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is notified by sending a setting value designation command from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12.

Figure 7 shows an example of the configuration of a display result judgment table. Figure 7 (A) shows an example of the configuration of a display result judgment table for the first special symbol used when the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, and Figure 7 (B) shows an example of the configuration of a display result judgment table for the second special symbol used when the variable special symbol is the second special symbol. The display result judgment table is a collection of data stored in ROM 101. In the display result judgment table, a winning judgment value compared with the random number value MR1 according to a set value is assigned to the special symbol display result, which is the variable display result of the special symbol. The random number value MR1 is a random number value for determining the display result, and the value is updated randomly within the range of 0 to 65535. As the display result judgment table, a display result judgment table common to the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be used.

In the display result judgment table, when the game state is a probability variable state (high probability state), more judgment values are assigned to the special chart display result of "jackpot" than when the game state is a normal state or a time-saving state (low probability state). As a result, when the pachinko game machine 1 is in a high probability state such as a probability variable state where probability variable control is performed, the probability of determining that it will be controlled to a jackpot game state is higher than when the game state is a low probability state such as a normal state or a time-saving state.

In the first special chart display result judgment table, judgment values are assigned so that the probability of determining that the special chart display result is a "small hit" and controlled to a small hit game state is the same regardless of the game state or the setting value. In the second special chart display result judgment table, judgment values are assigned so that the probability of determining that the special chart display result is a "small hit" and controlled to a small hit game state is the same value different from that in the first special chart display result judgment table, regardless of the game state or the setting value. Note that the probability of determining that the special chart display result is a "small hit" and controlled to a small hit game state may be different depending on the setting value. The probability of determining that the special chart display result is a "small hit" and controlled to a small hit game state may be the same regardless of the variable special chart.

In the first special chart display result judgment table and the second special chart display result judgment table, when the game state is normal or time-saving, the range of hit judgment values from 1020 to 1237 is set as the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value for determining a jackpot regardless of the setting value. When the setting value is 1, 1020 to 1237 is assigned to "jackpot" and only the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value for determining a jackpot is set, while when the setting value is 2 to 6, the numerical range corresponding to each setting value from 1238 is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value.

In the first special chart display result judgment table and the second special chart display result judgment table, when the game state is a probability variable state, the range of hit judgment values from 1020 to 1346 is set as the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value for determining a jackpot regardless of the setting value. When the setting value is 1, 1020 to 1346 is assigned to "jackpot", and only the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value for determining a jackpot is set, while when the setting value is 2 to 6, the numerical range corresponding to each setting value from 1346 is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value.

In the display result judgment table for the first special chart, when the game state is normal or time-saving, the range of hit judgment values from 32767 to 33094 is set as the common numerical range of small hit judgment values for determining small hits regardless of the set value. The small hit judgment value is set to a numerical range that is different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the big hit judgment value regardless of whether the set value is 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit judgment value from overlapping with the range of the big hit judgment value that changes depending on each set value.

In the display result judgment table for the first special chart, when the game state is a special probability state, the range of 32767 to 33094 among the hit judgment values is set as a common numerical range of small hit judgment values for determining small hits regardless of the set value, just as when the game state is a normal state or a time-saving state. The small hit judgment value is set to a numerical range that is different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the big hit judgment value regardless of whether the set value is 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit judgment value from overlapping with the range of the big hit judgment value that changes according to each set value.

In the display result judgment table for the second special chart, when the game state is normal or time-saving, the range of hit judgment values from 32767 to 33421 is set as a common numerical range of small hit judgment values for determining small hits regardless of the set value. The small hit judgment value is set to a numerical range that is different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the big hit judgment value regardless of whether the set value is 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit judgment value from overlapping with the range of the big hit judgment value that changes according to each set value.

In the second special chart display result judgment table, when the game state is a special probability state, the range of 32767 to 33421 among the hit judgment values is set as a common numerical range of small hit judgment values for determining small hits regardless of the set value, just as when the game state is a normal state or a time-saving state. The small hit judgment value is set to a numerical range that is different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the big hit judgment value regardless of whether the set value is 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit judgment value from overlapping with the range of the big hit judgment value that changes according to each set value.

The set values that can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be five or less or seven or more. The smaller the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous it may be for the player. The game characteristics may be changed according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the game characteristics are such that the probability of a jackpot in the normal state is 1/320, and the probability of ... On the other hand, the game may be of a type in which the rate at which the game ball passes through a predetermined switch during a jackpot game varies depending on the variable special chart (so-called V-type), and when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 3, the probability of a jackpot is 1/320 and the probability of a small jackpot is 1/50, and the game may be of a type in which the game ball passes through a predetermined switch provided inside the special variable winning ball device 7 during a high base (during time-saving control) (so-called one-type two-type mixed type). When the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any of 1 to 3, the game is the same, but a setting may be provided in which the probability of a jackpot or small jackpot is higher than when these set values are any of 1 to 3, but the number of prize balls that can be obtained during a jackpot game is smaller (for example, when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any of 4 to 6). When the game is changed depending on the set value, a common switch may be used for different purposes. Specifically, when the setting value is 1 to 3, a predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 is used as a presentation switch (a switch for executing a predetermined presentation each time the game ball passes through a predetermined area), and when the setting value is 4 to 6, the predetermined switch may be used as a game switch (a switch for controlling the game state to a special bonus state or a jackpot game state based on the game ball passing through the predetermined switch).

The jackpot type may be determined at different rates depending on the set value, based on the allocation of judgment values in the jackpot type judgment table. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined at a common rate regardless of the set value. The fluctuation pattern may be determined at different rates depending on the set value, based on the allocation of judgment values in the fluctuation pattern judgment table. Alternatively, the fluctuation pattern may be determined at a common rate regardless of the set value. The execution rate of normal reaches and super reaches may differ depending on the set value, so that the setting value may be suggested by the frequency at which normal reaches and super reaches are executed. Alternatively, the execution rate of normal reaches and super reaches may be common regardless of the set value. In addition, any setting suggestion performance may be possible at different rates depending on the set value.

(Main operations of the performance control board 12)
Next, the main operations of the performance control board 12 will be described. When the performance control board 12 receives a power supply voltage from a power supply board or the like, the performance control CPU 120 starts up and executes the performance control main process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 8. When the performance control main process shown in FIG. 8 starts, the performance control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71), clears the RAM 122, sets various initial values, and sets the registers of the CTC (counter/timer circuit) mounted on the performance control board 12. In addition, it executes an initial operation control process (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control is executed to perform the initial operation of the movable body 32, such as control to drive the movable body 32 to return it to its initial position and control to perform a predetermined operation check.

Then, it is determined whether the timer interrupt flag is on or not (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to the on state every time a predetermined time (e.g., 2 milliseconds) elapses, for example based on the register setting of the CTC. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and the system waits.

In addition, on the performance control board 12 side, an interrupt occurs to receive a performance control command from the main board 11, in addition to a timer interrupt that occurs every time a predetermined time has elapsed. This interrupt occurs, for example, when the performance control INT signal from the main board 11 becomes ON. When an interrupt occurs due to the performance control INT signal becoming ON, the performance control CPU 120 automatically sets the interrupt to be prohibited, but if a CPU that does not automatically become interrupt prohibited is used, it is desirable to emit an interrupt prohibition command (DI command). In response to an interrupt due to the performance control INT signal becoming ON, the performance control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process. In this command reception interrupt process, a performance control command is taken in from a predetermined input port that receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15, among the input ports included in the I/O 125. The performance control command taken in at this time is stored in a performance control command reception buffer provided in, for example, the RAM 122. The performance control CPU 120 then sets the interrupt to permitted and ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared to an off state (step S74), and a command analysis process is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, various presentation control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the presentation control command reception buffer are read, and then settings and controls corresponding to the read presentation control commands are performed. For example, the read presentation control command is stored in a specified area of the RAM 122, or a reception flag provided in the RAM 122 is turned on so that which presentation control command was received and the contents specified by the presentation control command can be confirmed by the presentation control process process, etc. In addition, if the presentation control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background corresponding to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the performance control process is executed (step S76). In the performance control process, for example, control is performed to operate various performance devices, such as the display operation of the performance image in the display area of the image display device 5, the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation of the decorative light-emitting elements such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LEDs, and the driving operation of the movable body 32. In addition, judgments, decisions, settings, etc. are made regarding the control contents of the performance operations using the various performance devices in accordance with the performance control commands, etc. transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the performance control process processing of step S76, a performance random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a portion of the performance random numbers used on the performance control board 12 side is updated by software. Then, the process returns to step S73. Before returning to step S73, other processes may be executed.

Figure 9 is a flow chart showing an example of the processing executed in step S76 of Figure 8 as the performance control process processing. In the performance control process processing shown in Figure 9, the performance control CPU 120 first executes a look-ahead preview setting process (step S161). In the look-ahead preview setting process, for example, judgments, decisions, settings, etc. for executing the look-ahead preview performance are made based on the performance control command at the time of the start winning transmitted from the main board 11. In addition, processing is executed to display the hold display based on the number of hold memories identified from the performance control command.

After executing the processing of step S161, the performance control CPU 120 selects and executes one of the processing of steps S170 to S177 as described below, depending on the value of a performance process flag provided in, for example, RAM 122.

The variable display start waiting process of step S170 is executed when the value of the presentation process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process includes a process of determining whether or not to start the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command specifying the start of variable display has been received from the main board 11. If it is determined that the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5 should be started, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to "1" and the variable display start waiting process ends.

The variable display start setting process of step S171 is a process executed when the value of the performance process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (determined decorative pattern), the mode of the variable display of the decorative pattern, whether or not various performances such as reach performances and various advance notice performances are executed, and the mode and execution start timing are determined based on the display result and the change pattern specified by the performance control command. Then, a performance control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute a performance) that reflects the determined result is set. After that, based on the set performance control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is terminated. In response to the instruction to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the display control unit 123 starts the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5.

The variable display performance process of step S172 is a process executed when the performance process flag is "2". In this variable display performance process, the performance control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display a performance image based on the performance control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5, to drive the movable body 32, to output voice and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the voice control board 13, and to turn on/off/blink the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED by outputting a command (illumination signal) to the lamp control board 14, thereby executing various performance controls during the variable display of the decorative pattern. After performing such performance control, for example, in response to the reading of an end code indicating the end of the variable display of the decorative pattern from the performance control pattern, or the reception of a command specifying the stop display of the fixed decorative pattern from the main board 11, the fixed decorative pattern, which is the display result of the decorative pattern, is stopped. When the final decorative pattern is displayed in a stopped state, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "3" and the performance process during variable display ends.

The special winning waiting process of step S173 is a process executed when the value of the performance process flag is "3". In this special winning waiting process, the performance control CPU 120 judges whether or not a performance control command specifying the start of a big win game state or a small win game state has been received from the main board 11. Then, when a performance control command specifying the start of a big win game state or a small win game state is received, if the command specifies the start of a big win game state, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "6". On the other hand, if the command specifies the start of a small win game state, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "4", which is a value corresponding to the small win performance process. Also, when a command specifying the start of a big win game state or a small win game state is not received and the waiting time for receiving the command has elapsed, it is judged that the display result in the special game was "miss", and the value of the performance process flag is updated to the initial value "0". Once the value of the performance process flag is updated, the special drawing hit waiting process ends.

The small win presentation process of step S174 is a process executed when the presentation process flag value is "4". In this small win presentation process, the presentation control CPU 120 sets, for example, a presentation control pattern corresponding to the presentation content in the small win game state, and executes various presentation controls in the small win game state based on the set content. In addition, in the small win presentation process, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 specifying that the small win game state is to be ended, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to "5", which is a value corresponding to the small win end presentation, and the small win presentation process is ended.

The small win end presentation process in step S175 is executed when the presentation process flag value is "5". In this small win end presentation process, the presentation control CPU 120 sets a presentation control pattern corresponding to, for example, the end of a small win game state, and executes various presentation controls at the end of the small win game state based on the settings. After that, the presentation process flag value is updated to the initial value "0", and the small win end presentation process ends.

The jackpot performance process of step S176 is executed when the performance process flag value is "6". In this jackpot performance process, the performance control CPU 120 sets, for example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the performance content in the jackpot gaming state, and executes various performance controls in the jackpot gaming state based on the set content. In addition, in the jackpot performance process, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 specifying that the jackpot gaming state is to end, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "7", which is a value corresponding to the ending performance process, and the jackpot performance process ends.

The ending presentation process of step S177 is executed when the value of the presentation process flag is "7". In this ending presentation process, the presentation control CPU 120 sets a presentation control pattern corresponding to, for example, the end of a jackpot gaming state, and executes various presentation controls for the ending presentation at the end of the jackpot gaming state based on the set contents. After that, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending presentation process is terminated.

(Modification of the basic explanation)
This invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the basic description above, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the present invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 described above is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of gaming media as prizes when a prize is won, but it may also be an enclosed type gaming machine that encloses gaming media and awards points when a prize is won.

Only one type of pattern (for example, a symbol showing "- ") may be displayed during the variable display of the special pattern, and the variable display may be achieved by repeatedly displaying and extinguishing the pattern. Furthermore, even if the pattern is displayed during the variable display, the pattern may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the display result may not include the symbol showing "- ").

In the above basic explanation, a pachinko gaming machine 1 was shown as the gaming machine, but the present invention can also be applied to slot machines (e.g., slot machines equipped with one or more of big bonus, regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, CZ (hereinafter, bonus, etc.)) that can play a game in which medals are inserted and a predetermined bet amount is set, multiple types of symbols are rotated in response to the player's operation of the control lever, and when the symbols are stopped in response to the player's operation of the stop button, a specific combination of symbols is formed, and a predetermined number of medals is paid out to the player.

The programs and data for implementing the present invention are not limited to being distributed or provided to the computer device included in the pachinko gaming machine 1 by a removable recording medium, but may be distributed by being pre-installed in a storage device of the computer device or the like. Furthermore, the programs and data for implementing the present invention may be distributed by being downloaded from another device on a network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communications processing unit.

The game can be executed not only by inserting a removable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing a program and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory, or by directly executing the game using the hardware resources of another device on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game can be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In this specification, expressions of comparison of various percentages such as the execution percentage of effects (such as "high", "low", "different", etc.) may include one being a "0%" percentage. For example, this also includes one being a "0%" percentage and the other being a "100%" percentage or a percentage less than "100%".

(Description of Feature 135SG)
Next, the characteristic part 135SG (hereinafter, abbreviated as the present characteristic part 135SG) in the embodiment of the present invention will be described. Fig. 10-1 is a front view of the pachinko game machine 1 in the present characteristic part 135SG. As shown in Fig. 10-1, in the pachinko game machine 1 in the present characteristic part 135SG, a winning flash lamp 135SG009F imitating the character A is provided on the right side of the image display device 5, and a starting hole lamp 135SG009S for illuminating the winning ball device 6A (first starting hole) is provided near the winning ball device 6A.

Furthermore, a stick lamp 135SG009X for illuminating the stick controller 31A is provided within the stick controller 31A, and a button lamp 135SG009Y for illuminating the push button 31B is provided within the push button 31B. These stick lamps 135SG009X and button lamps 135SG009Y, together with the main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacca lamp 9c, and movable body lamp 9d described above, constitute the game effect lamps 9 in this feature section 135SG.

As shown in FIG. 10-2, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, the starting lamp 135SG009S, the stick lamp 135SG09X, and the button lamp 135SG009Y are connected to the lamp control board 14, and can be lit (blinked) by control from the performance control CPU 120 via the lamp control board 14.

Figure 10-3 is an explanatory diagram showing the image display device 5 in this characteristic part 135SG. Most of the display area of the image display device 5 in this characteristic part 135SG constitutes the first display area 135SG005F for displaying effects such as variable display of decorative symbols and reach effects. In addition, the lower end of the image display device 5 constitutes the second display area 135SG005Sa including the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D capable of displaying the number of reserved first special symbols by the number of reserved circular symbols, the second reserved memory display area 135SG005U capable of displaying the number of reserved second special symbols by the number of reserved circular symbols, and the caption display area 135SG005T capable of displaying captions showing the game status, the effects being performed, etc.

The upper right corner of the image display device 5 constitutes a third display area 135SG005Sb that includes a fourth pattern 135SG005J, which indicates that the special pattern is being variably displayed, and a display of the number of reserved first special patterns and the number of reserved second special patterns.

In the center of the first display area 135SG005F, the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R are arranged, and variable display of the decorative patterns can be performed. In addition, small patterns 135SG005M, which are smaller than the decorative patterns, are displayed at the left end of the first display area 135SG005F. The small patterns correspond to the decorative patterns displayed in the "left" decorative pattern display area 5L, the decorative patterns displayed in the "middle" decorative pattern display area 5C and the decorative patterns displayed in the "right" decorative pattern display area 5R, and are arranged vertically. In addition, the small patterns 135SG005M are not hidden during variable display, and are always displayed in the first display area 135SG005F of the image display device 5.

In addition, in this characteristic part 135SG, as shown in FIG. 10-3, the decorative pattern is arranged in the center of the first display area 135SG005F of the image display device 5, and the small pattern 135SG005M is arranged at the left end of the first display area 135SG005F of the image display device 5 in a size smaller than the decorative pattern. Therefore, the visibility of the small pattern 135SG005M is lower than the visibility of the decorative pattern.

Furthermore, an active display area 135SG005A is provided at the bottom center of the first display area 135SG005F in this characteristic section 135SG for displaying a pending display corresponding to the variable display currently being executed as an active display.

Hereafter, in this feature section 135SG, the pending display and the active display may be collectively referred to as the specific display.

Figure 10-4 (A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of a performance control command used in this feature unit 135SG. The performance control command is, for example, two bytes in length, with the first byte indicating MODE (command classification) and the second byte indicating EXT (type of command). The first bit of the MODE data (bit 7) is always set to "1", and the first bit of the EXT data is set to "0". Note that the command format shown in Figure 10-4 (A) is only an example, and other command formats may be used. Also, in this example, the control command is composed of two control signals, but the number of control signals that make up the control command may be one, or may be three or more.

In the example shown in FIG. 10-4(A), command 8001H is a first variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display in a special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A. Command 8002H is a second variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display in a special symbol game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B. Command 81XXH is a variable pattern designation command that specifies the variable pattern (variable time (variable display time)) of the decorative symbols (also called performance symbols) that are variably displayed in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of the special symbols in the special symbol game. Here, XXH indicates an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be any value that is set according to the instructions by the performance control command. In addition, in the variable pattern designation command, different EXT data is set according to the specified variable pattern, etc.

Command 8CXXH is a variable display result specification command, which is a presentation control command that specifies a variable display result such as a special pattern or a decorative pattern. In the variable display result specification command, different EXT data is set depending on the result of the determination (predetermination result) of whether the variable display result (also called the variable display result) is a "miss", "big win", or "small win", and the result of the determination of which of several types of big wins the big win type will be if the variable display result is a "big win", as shown in FIG. 10-4 (B), for example.

For example, as shown in FIG. 10-4(B), in the variable display result designation command, command 8C00H is a first variable display result designation command indicating a pre-determined result that the variable display result will be "miss". Command 8C01H is a second variable display result designation command notifying the pre-determined result and jackpot type determination result that the variable display result will be "jackpot" and the jackpot type will be "variable jackpot A". Command 8C02H is a third variable display result designation command notifying the pre-determined result and jackpot type determination result that the variable display result will be "jackpot" and the jackpot type will be "variable jackpot B". Command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result designation command notifying the pre-determined result and jackpot type determination result that the variable display result will be "jackpot" and the jackpot type will be "variable jackpot C". Command 8C04H is a fifth variable display result specification command that notifies the predetermined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "non-variable jackpot" and the jackpot type determination result. Command 8C05H is a sixth variable display result specification command that notifies the predetermined result that the variable display result is "small jackpot".

Command 8F00H is a pattern determination command that specifies the stop (determination) of the change in the decorative patterns in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R on the image display device 5. Command 95XXH is a game state designation command that specifies the current game state of the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the game state designation command, different EXT data is set depending on the current game state of the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example. As a specific example, command 9500H is a first game state designation command corresponding to a game state in which neither time-saving control nor probability variable control is performed (low probability low base state, normal state), and command 9501H is a second game state designation command corresponding to a game state in which time-saving control is performed but probability variable control is not performed (low probability high base state, time-saving state). In addition, command 9502H is a third game state designation command corresponding to a game state in which high probability bonus control is performed but time-saving control is not performed (high probability low base state, high probability bonus state without time-saving), and command 9503H is a fourth game state designation command corresponding to a game state in which time-saving control and high probability bonus control are both performed (high probability high base state, high probability bonus state with time-saving).

Command A0XXH is a start of jackpot command (also called a "fanfare command") that specifies the display of an effect image indicating the start of a jackpot or small jackpot game. Command A1XXH is a large prize opening open notification command that notifies the player that the large prize opening is in an open state during a jackpot game. Command A2XXH is a large prize opening post-open notification command that notifies the player that the large prize opening has changed from an open state to a closed state during a jackpot game. Command A3XXH is a end of jackpot command that specifies the display of an effect image at the end of a jackpot game or small jackpot game.

In the hit start specification command and hit end specification command, for example, EXT data similar to that of the variable display result specification command may be set, so that different EXT data is set according to the pre-determined result and the result of the big win type determination. Alternatively, in the hit start specification command and hit end specification command, the correspondence between the pre-determined result and the big win type determination result and the EXT data set may be made different from the correspondence in the variable display result specification command. In the big win opening notification command and the big win opening after notification command, for example, different EXT data is set according to the number of rounds executed in the big win state (for example, "1" to "10") described later.

Command B100H is a first start port entry designation command that notifies the first start condition for executing a special symbol game using a first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A has been established based on the occurrence of a start winning (first start winning) caused by a game ball passing through (entering) the first start winning port formed by the winning ball device 6A being detected by the first start port switch 22A. Command B200H is a second start port entry designation command that notifies the second start condition for executing a special symbol game using a second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B has been established based on the occurrence of a start winning (second start winning) caused by a game ball passing through (entering) the second start winning port formed by the variable winning ball device 6B being detected by the second start port switch 22B.

Command C1XXH is a first reserved memory number notification command that notifies the first reserved memory number so that the reserved memory number of special charts can be specified. Command C2XXH is a second reserved memory number notification command that notifies the second reserved memory number so that the reserved memory number of special charts can be specified. The first reserved memory number notification command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12 when the first start port entry designation command is transmitted based on, for example, the game ball passing (entering) the first start port and the first start condition being satisfied. The second reserved memory number notification command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12 when the second start port entry designation command is transmitted based on, for example, the game ball passing (entering) the second start port and the second start condition being satisfied. In addition, the first pending memory number notification command and the second pending memory number notification command may be sent in response to the start of execution of the special game when either the first start condition or the second start condition is met (when the pending memory number is reduced).

Instead of the first pending memory number notification command and the second pending memory number notification command, a total pending memory number notification command that notifies the total pending memory number may be sent. In other words, the total pending memory number notification command may be used to notify an increase (or decrease) in the total pending memory number.

Commands C4XXH and C6XXH are presentation control commands (commands specifying the judgment result at the time of winning) that indicate the content of the judgment result at the time of winning. Of these, command C4XXH is a pattern specification command that indicates whether the variable display result will be a "jackpot" or not, the judgment result of the type of jackpot (probable hit or non-probable hit), and whether it will be a small hit, as the judgment result at the time of winning. In addition, command C6XXH is a variable category command that indicates the judgment result at the time of winning, that is, whether the random number value for judging the fluctuation pattern will be a "non-reach", "super reach", or "other".

The commands shown in FIG. 10-4(A) are merely examples, and some of these commands may not be included, or different commands may be used instead of these commands, or different commands may be added to these commands. For example, a prize ball number notification command may be provided to specify the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the game balls having entered each winning slot, a gate passage notification command to notify that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41, and a notification command to notify the number of remaining times that the special bonus control or time-saving control will be executed.

Figure 10-5 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the random number values counted on the main board 11 side. As shown in Figure 10-5, in this feature section 135SG, on the main board 11 side, the numerical data indicating each of the random number value MR1 for determining the special chart display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the type of jackpot, the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, and the random number value MR4 for determining the normal chart display result are controlled so as to be countable. Note that random number values other than these may be used to enhance the game effect. Such random numbers used to control the progress of the game are also called game random numbers.

The random number circuit 104 may count numerical data indicating some or all of these random number values MR1 to MR4. The CPU 103 may count numerical data indicating some of the random number values MR1 to MR4 by updating various numerical data by software using a random counter different from the random number circuit 104, such as a random counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 135SG154 shown in FIG. 10-10.

The random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result is a random number value used to determine whether or not to control the game state to a jackpot by treating the variable display result of a special symbol or the like in a special symbol game as a "jackpot", and takes a value in the range of "1" to "65536", for example. The random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type is a random number value used to determine the jackpot type as either "Probable jackpot A", "Probable jackpot B", "Probable jackpot C", or "Non-probable jackpot" when the variable display result is a "jackpot", and takes a value in the range of "1" to "100", for example.

The random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is a random number value used to determine the variation pattern in the variable display of special patterns and decorative patterns to one of several types prepared in advance, and can take a value in the range of "1" to "997", for example.

The random number value MR4 for determining the normal symbol display result is a random number value used to determine whether the variable display result in the normal symbol game by the normal symbol display device 20 is a "normal symbol hit" or a "normal symbol miss", and takes a value in the range of "3" to "13", for example.

Figure 10-6 (A) shows an example of the configuration of the special chart display result judgment table 1 stored in the ROM 101. In this feature section 135SG, a common special chart display result judgment table is used for the first special chart and the second special chart as the special chart display result judgment table, but the present invention is not limited to this, and separate special chart display result judgment tables may be used for the first special chart and the second special chart.

The special pattern display result determination table 1 is a table that is referenced to determine whether or not to control the variable display result to a jackpot game state as a "jackpot" before a determined special pattern that is a variable display result is derived and displayed in a special pattern game using a first special pattern by the first special pattern display device 4A or a special pattern game using a second special pattern by the second special pattern display device 4B, based on a random number value MR1 for determining the special pattern display result.

In the special chart display result judgment table 1 in this feature section 135SG, a numerical value (judgment value) that is compared with the random number value MR1 for judging the special chart display result is assigned to the special chart display result of "jackpot" or "miss" depending on whether the game state of the pachinko game machine 1 is a normal state or time-saving state (low probability state), or a probability change state (high probability state).

In the special chart display result judgment table 1, the table data indicating the judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for judging the special chart display result is judgment data assigned to the decision result of whether or not to control the special chart display result to a jackpot game state as a "jackpot". In the special chart display result judgment table 1 in this feature unit 135SG, when the game state is a probability variable state (high probability state), more judgment values are assigned to the special chart display result of "jackpot" than when it is in a normal state or a time-saving state (low probability state). As a result, in the probability variable state (high probability state) in which the probability variable control is performed in the pachinko game machine 1, the probability of determining that the special chart display result is a "jackpot" and controlled to a jackpot game state is higher (about 1/30 in this feature unit 135SG) than the probability of determining that the special chart display result is a "jackpot" and controlled to a jackpot game state when it is in a normal state or a time-saving state (low probability state) (about 1/300 in this feature unit 135SG). That is, in the special chart display result judgment table 1, when the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in a probability variable state (high probability state), the judgment data is assigned to the decision result of whether or not to control to a jackpot gaming state so that the probability of deciding to control to a jackpot gaming state is higher than when it is in a normal state or a time-saving state.

In addition, FIG. 10-6(B) shows an example of the configuration of the special symbol display result determination table 2 stored in the ROM 101. The special symbol display result determination table 2 is a table that is referenced to determine whether or not to control the variable display result to a small win game state as a "small win" based on the random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result before a determined special symbol that is a variable display result is derived and displayed in a special symbol game using a first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A or a special symbol game using a second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B.

In the special chart display result judgment table 2 in this feature section 135SG, regardless of whether the game state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal state or a time-saving state (low probability state), or a probability change state (high probability state), a numerical value (judgment value) that is compared with the random number value MR1 for judging the special chart display result is assigned to the special chart display result of "small win."

In the special chart display result determination table 2, the table data indicating the determination value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special chart display result is the determination data assigned to the decision result of whether or not to control the special chart display result to a small win game state as a "small win". In the special chart display result determination table 2 in this feature unit 135SG, the number of determination values assigned to a "small win" differs between the first special chart special chart game and the second special chart game. Specifically, in the first special chart special chart game, a determination value is assigned to a "small win", but in the second special chart special chart game, no determination value is assigned to a "small win". Therefore, as described below, the variable display of the second special chart is executed with priority over the variable display of the first special chart, and in a high base state in which the time-saving control is executed, a win occurs in the second start winning hole formed by the variable winning ball device 6B, and the variable display of the second special chart is executed frequently, so that "small wins" hardly occur. In a high base state in which game balls are likely to enter the second start winning hole formed by the variable winning ball device 6B, the occurrence of small wins in which many game balls cannot be obtained can be avoided, and a decrease in interest in the game can be prevented.

Figure 10-7 (A) shows an example of the configuration of a jackpot type determination table stored in ROM 101. The jackpot type determination table in this feature unit 135SG is a table that is referenced to determine the jackpot type as one of multiple types based on the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination when it is determined that the special symbol display result is a "jackpot" and the jackpot game state is controlled. In the jackpot type determination table, a number (determination value) that is compared with the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination is assigned to multiple types of jackpot types such as "non-variable jackpot", "variable jackpot A", "variable jackpot B", and "variable jackpot C" depending on whether the special symbol that is variably displayed (variably displayed) in the special symbol game is the first special symbol (special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A) or the second special symbol (special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B).

Now, the types of jackpots in this feature section 135SG will be explained with reference to FIG. 10-7(B). In this feature section 135SG, the jackpot types are set to "Probable variable jackpot A" and "Probable variable jackpot B", in which high probability control and time-saving control are executed after the jackpot game state ends, transitioning to a high probability, high base state; "Probable variable jackpot C", in which high probability control is executed but time-saving control is not executed after the jackpot game state ends, transitioning to a high probability, low base state; and "Non-probable variable jackpot", in which only time-saving control is executed after the jackpot game state ends, transitioning to a low probability, high base state.

The jackpot game state by "probable jackpot A" is a normal opening jackpot in which the rounds that change the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state that is advantageous to the player are repeated 10 times (so-called 10 rounds). On the other hand, the jackpot game state by "probable jackpot B" is a normal opening jackpot in which the rounds that change the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state that is advantageous to the player are repeated 5 times (so-called 5 rounds). And the jackpot game state by "probable jackpot C" is a normal opening jackpot in which the rounds that change the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state that is advantageous to the player are repeated 2 times (so-called 2 rounds). Also, the jackpot game state by "probable jackpot C" and "non-probable jackpot" is a normal opening jackpot in which the rounds that change the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state that is advantageous to the player are repeated 2 times (so-called 2 rounds). Therefore, "Chance Special Jackpot A" may be referred to as a 10-round (10R) chance special jackpot, "Chance Special Jackpot B" may be referred to as a 5-round (5R) chance special jackpot, and "Chance Special Jackpot C" may be referred to as a 2-round (2R) chance special jackpot.

Although not shown in the figure, the small win game state in this feature section 135SG changes the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state, which is advantageous to the player, twice, and the opening time is 0.1 seconds. After the small win game ends, the game state immediately before the small win game is carried over.

The high probability control and time-saving control executed after the end of the jackpot game state of a special jackpot will continue to be executed until another jackpot occurs after the end of the jackpot game state. Therefore, if the jackpot that occurs again is a special jackpot, the high probability control and time-saving control will be executed again after the jackpot game state ends, resulting in a so-called consecutive jackpot state in which jackpot game states occur consecutively without going through the normal state.

On the other hand, the time-saving control that is executed after the end of the jackpot game state due to a "non-variable jackpot" ends when a specified number of special game games (100 times in this feature part 135SG) are played, or when the jackpot game state is reached before the specified number of special game games are played.

In the example of the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 10-7(A), the allocation of determination values to the jackpot types "Probable variable jackpot A", "Probable variable jackpot B", "Probable variable jackpot C", and "Non-probable variable jackpot" differs depending on whether the variably displayed special chart is the first special chart or the second special chart. In other words, when the variably displayed special chart is the first special chart, a predetermined range of determination values (values in the range of "81" to "100") are assigned to the jackpot types "Probable variable jackpot B" and "Probable variable jackpot C" with fewer rounds, whereas when the variably displayed special chart is the second special chart, no determination value is assigned to the jackpot types "Probable variable jackpot B" and "Probable variable jackpot C". With this setting, the ratio of determining the jackpot type to "probable jackpot B" or "probable jackpot C" with fewer rounds can be made different between the case where the first start condition for starting a special game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A is satisfied and the case where the jackpot type is determined to be one of the multiple types based on the second start condition for starting a special game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B being satisfied. In particular, in a special game using the second special symbol, the jackpot type is not determined to be "probable jackpot B" or "probable jackpot C" and controlled to a normal opening jackpot state or a high-speed opening jackpot state with fewer rounds, so that, for example, in a game state where game balls are likely to enter the second start winning hole formed by the variable winning ball device 6B due to high opening control accompanying time reduction control, frequent occurrence of a jackpot state with fewer winning balls can be avoided, preventing a decline in game interest.

In the example of the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 10-7(A), the allocation of the determination value for the "non-probability variable" jackpot type is the same regardless of whether it is the first special chart game or the second special chart, so the probability of a non-probability variable jackpot and the probability of a probability variable jackpot are the same regardless of whether it is the first special chart game or the second special chart.

As described above, the allocation of judgment values for "Probable Variable Jackpot B" and "Probable Variable Jackpot C" differs depending on whether it is the first special chart game or the second special chart, and accordingly, the allocation of judgment values for "Probable Variable Jackpot A" also differs depending on whether it is the first special chart game or the second special chart, and for "Probable Variable Jackpot A" which has a larger number of rounds, it is set up so that it is easier to determine in the second special chart game than in the first special chart game.

In addition, in the case of the special chart game of the second special chart, a predetermined range of judgment values different from that in the case of the special chart game of the first special chart may be assigned to the jackpot type of "Probable jackpot B" or "Probable jackpot C". For example, in the case of the special chart game of the second special chart, a smaller judgment value than that in the case of the special chart game of the first special chart may be assigned to the jackpot type of "Probable jackpot B" or "Probable jackpot C" compared to the case of the special chart game of the first special chart. Alternatively, regardless of whether it is the special chart game of the first special chart or the second special chart, the jackpot type may be determined by referring to common table data.

Figure 10-8 shows the variation patterns in this feature section 135SG. In this feature section 135SG, a plurality of variation patterns are prepared in advance for the cases where the variable display result is a "miss" and the variable display state of the decorative pattern is a "non-reach" and a "reach", and for the cases where the variable display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit". The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a "miss" and the variable display state of the decorative pattern is a "non-reach" is called a non-reach variation pattern (also called a "non-reach miss variation pattern"), and the variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a "miss" and the variable display state of the decorative pattern is a "reach" is called a reach variation pattern (also called a "reach miss variation pattern"). The non-reach variation pattern and the reach variation pattern are included in the miss variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a "miss". The variation pattern that corresponds to the variable display result being "jackpot" is called the jackpot variation pattern.

The jackpot variation pattern and the reach variation pattern include a normal reach variation pattern in which a normal reach reach performance is executed, and a super reach variation pattern in which a super reach reach performance is executed. In addition, in this feature section 135SG, the normal reach variation pattern is a normal reach variation pattern in which a pseudo consecutive performance described later is not executed, and a normal reach variation pattern in which a pseudo consecutive performance described later is executed once, and a common normal reach reach reach performance is executed. Furthermore, the super reach variation pattern is a super reach variation pattern in which a pseudo consecutive performance described later is executed twice, and a super reach variation pattern in which a pseudo consecutive performance described later is executed three times, and a common super reach reach reach performance is executed. In other words, in this feature section 135SG, an example is shown in which only one type of reach performance is provided for each of the normal reach reach performance and the super reach reach performance, but the present invention is not limited to this, and multiple reach performances may be provided for the normal reach reach performance and the super reach reach performance.

The variation patterns in this feature section 135SG also include a special winning variation pattern (PC1-1) that corresponds to the case where the variable display result is a "small win" or the variable display result is a "jackpot" and the jackpot type is a "high probability jackpot C."

As shown in Figure 10-8, the special chart variable display time of the normal reach fluctuation pattern in which the reach performance of the normal reach is executed in this feature part 135SG is set shorter than that of the super reach fluctuation pattern.

The normal reach variation pattern in this feature unit 135SG includes a variation pattern that does not execute a pseudo consecutive performance in which the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and then re-variably displayed during the variable display, and a variation pattern in which the pseudo consecutive performance is executed once during the variable display. In addition, in the normal reach variation pattern, the variation pattern in which the pseudo consecutive performance is not executed during the variable display is set to have a shorter special symbol variation time than the variation pattern in which the pseudo consecutive performance is executed once during the variable display.

Furthermore, the super reach variation pattern in this feature section 135SG includes a variation pattern in which the pseudo consecutive performance is executed twice during the variable display, and a variation pattern in which the pseudo consecutive performance is executed three times during the variable display. In the super reach variation pattern, the variation pattern in which the pseudo consecutive performance is executed twice during the variable display is set to have a shorter special chart variation time than the variation pattern in which the pseudo consecutive performance is executed three times during the variable display.

In addition, in this feature section 135SG, the variable display result is set in the order of super reach, normal reach, and non-reach so that the probability of a jackpot increasing, and therefore in the normal reach variation pattern and super reach variation pattern, the longer the special chart variation time, the higher the probability of a jackpot.

In other words, for the normal reach variation pattern and super reach variation pattern in this feature section 135SG, the more pseudo consecutive effects that are executed during the variable display, the higher the chance of a big win.

In addition, in this characteristic section 135SG, as described below, instead of first determining the type of the fluctuation pattern, such as the non-reach type, normal reach type, super reach type, etc., and then determining the fluctuation pattern to be executed from the fluctuation patterns belonging to the determined type, the fluctuation patterns are determined using only the random number value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination without determining these types, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, in addition to the random number value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination, a random number value for fluctuation pattern type determination may be provided, and the type of fluctuation pattern may be determined first from these random number values for fluctuation pattern type determination, and then the fluctuation pattern to be executed may be determined from the fluctuation patterns belonging to the determined type.

Figure 10-9 is an explanatory diagram of how the variation pattern is determined in this feature section 135SG. In this feature section 135SG, the variation pattern determination table to be selected varies depending on the display result of the variable display to be executed and the number of reserved memories.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 10-9, when the variable display result is a non-probable jackpot, jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table A is selected, and the fluctuation pattern is determined using this jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table A from PB1-1 (fluctuation pattern of a normal reach jackpot), PB1-2 (fluctuation pattern of a normal reach pseudo-consecutive performance 1 jackpot), PB1-3 (fluctuation pattern of a super reach pseudo-consecutive performance 2 jackpot), or PB1-4 (fluctuation pattern of a super reach pseudo-consecutive performance 3 jackpot). Also, if the variable display result is a sure-win jackpot, the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table B is selected, and the fluctuation pattern is determined using the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table B from PB1-1 (fluctuation pattern for a normal reach jackpot), PB1-2 (fluctuation pattern for a normal reach pseudo consecutive performance 1 jackpot), PB1-3 (fluctuation pattern for a normal reach pseudo consecutive performance 2 jackpots), and PB1-4 (fluctuation pattern for a normal reach pseudo consecutive performance 3 jackpots).

As shown in FIG. 10-9, the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table A and the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table B have different determination rates for PB1-1 to PB1-4. Specifically, in the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table A, PB1-1 is determined at a rate of 30%, PB1-2 at a rate of 45%, PB1-3 at a rate of 20%, and PB1-4 at a rate of 5%. On the other hand, in the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table B, PB1-1 is determined at a rate of 5%, PB1-2 at a rate of 20%, PB1-3 at a rate of 30%, and PB1-4 at a rate of 45%. In other words, in this feature part 135SG, when the variable display result is a sure-variable jackpot, the variable display result is determined to be a super reach fluctuation pattern at a higher rate than when the variable display result is a non-sure-variable jackpot. Furthermore, when looking at the number of times the pseudo consecutive performances are performed, if the variable display result is a jackpot with a high probability of winning, it is easier for more pseudo consecutive performances to be performed during the variable display than if the variable display result is not a jackpot with a high probability of winning. For this reason, this feature unit 135SG makes it possible to draw the player's attention to the change patterns in the variable display and the number of times the pseudo consecutive performances are performed.

In addition, if the variable display result is a small win, the special win fluctuation pattern determination table is selected, and the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PC1-1 (special win fluctuation pattern) using the special win fluctuation pattern determination table.

In addition, in the normal game state (low base state), if the variable display result is "miss" and the number of reserved memories of the variable special chart is two or less, the miss fluctuation pattern determination table A is selected, and the miss fluctuation pattern determination table A is used to determine the fluctuation pattern from PA1-1 (non-reach miss fluctuation pattern), PA2-1 (normal reach miss fluctuation pattern), PA2-2 (normal reach pseudo consecutive performance one miss fluctuation pattern), PA2-3 (super reach pseudo consecutive performance two miss fluctuation pattern), and PA2-4 (super reach pseudo consecutive performance three miss fluctuation pattern).

In addition, in the normal game state (low base state), if the variable display result is "miss" and the number of reserved memories of the variable special chart is three, the miss fluctuation pattern determination table B is selected, and the miss fluctuation pattern determination table B is used to determine the fluctuation pattern from PA1-2 (shortened fluctuation pattern of non-reach miss), PA2-1 (fluctuation pattern of normal reach miss), PA2-2 (fluctuation pattern of normal reach pseudo consecutive performance one miss), PA2-3 (fluctuation pattern of super reach pseudo consecutive performance two misses), and PA2-4 (fluctuation pattern of super reach pseudo consecutive performance three misses).

In addition, in the normal game state (low base state), if the variable display result is "miss" and the number of reserved memories of the variable special chart is three, the miss fluctuation pattern determination table B is selected, and the miss fluctuation pattern determination table B is used to determine the fluctuation pattern from PA1-2 (shortened fluctuation pattern of non-reach miss), PA2-1 (fluctuation pattern of normal reach miss), PA2-2 (fluctuation pattern of normal reach pseudo consecutive performance one miss), PA2-3 (fluctuation pattern of super reach pseudo consecutive performance two misses), and PA2-4 (fluctuation pattern of super reach pseudo consecutive performance three misses).

In addition, in the normal game state (low base state), if the variable display result is "miss" and the number of reserved memories of the variable special chart is four, the miss fluctuation pattern determination table C is selected, and the miss fluctuation pattern determination table C is used to determine the fluctuation pattern from PA1-3 (shortened fluctuation pattern of non-reach miss), PA2-1 (normal reach miss fluctuation pattern), PA2-2 (normal reach pseudo consecutive performance one miss fluctuation pattern), PA2-3 (super reach pseudo consecutive performance two miss fluctuation pattern), and PA2-4 (super reach pseudo consecutive performance three miss fluctuation pattern).

In addition, if the variable display result is a "miss" in the time-saving state (high base state), the miss fluctuation pattern determination table D is selected, and the fluctuation pattern is determined using the miss fluctuation pattern determination table D from PA1-4 (time-saving shortened fluctuation pattern for non-reach miss), PA2-1 (normal reach miss fluctuation pattern), PA2-2 (normal reach pseudo consecutive performance one miss fluctuation pattern), PA2-3 (super reach pseudo consecutive performance two miss fluctuation pattern), and PA2-4 (super reach pseudo consecutive performance three miss fluctuation pattern).

In other words, when the variable display result in this feature unit 135SG is a "miss," the percentage of variable display being executed using a shortening variable pattern (PA1-2, PA1-3, PA1-4) in which the special chart variable display time is shorter than the normal non-miss variable pattern (PA1-1) based on the number of reserved variable charts stored in memory being 3 or 4, or the time-saving state, making it possible to prevent the game from becoming protracted while shortening the period until the next variable display result is a jackpot.

The RAM 102 in this characteristic section 135SG is provided with a game control data holding area 135SG150 as shown in FIG. 10-10, for example, as an area for holding various data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. The game control data holding area 135SG150 shown in FIG. 10-10 includes a first special chart reserve memory section 135SG151A, a second special chart reserve memory section 135SG151B, a regular chart reserve memory section 135SG151C, a game control flag setting section 135SG152, a game control timer setting section 135SG153, a game control counter setting section 135SG154, and a game control buffer setting section 135SG155.

The first special symbol reservation memory unit 135SG151A stores reservation data for a special symbol game (a special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A) that has not yet started, but in which a game ball has passed (entered) through the first start winning port formed by the winning ball device 6A and a start winning (first start winning) has occurred. As an example, the first special symbol reservation memory unit 135SG151A associates reservation numbers with the order of winning (the order of detection of the game ball) into the first start winning port, and stores, as reservation data, random number values MR1 for determining the special symbol display result, random number values MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and numerical data indicating random number values MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, which are extracted by the CPU 103 from the random number circuit 104, etc., based on the establishment of the first start condition when the game ball passes (enters), until the number of memories reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4"). The reserved data stored in the first special chart reserved memory unit 135SG151A thus indicates that the execution of a special chart game using the first special chart is on hold, and serves as reserved information that makes it possible to determine whether or not a jackpot will be reached based on the variable display result (special chart display result) in this special chart game.

The second special symbol reservation memory unit 135SG151B stores reservation data of a special symbol game (a special symbol game using a second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B) that has not yet started, but in which a game ball has passed (entered) through the second start winning port formed by the variable winning ball device 6B and a start winning (second start winning) has occurred. As an example, the second special symbol reservation memory unit 135SG151B associates reservation numbers with the order of winning (the order of detection of the game ball) into the second start winning port, and stores, as reservation data, the random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, which are extracted by the CPU 103 from the random number circuit 104, etc., based on the establishment of the second start condition when the game ball passes (enters), until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"). The reserved data stored in the second special chart reserved memory unit 135SG151B thus indicates that the execution of a special chart game using the second special chart is on hold, and serves as reserved information that makes it possible to determine whether or not a jackpot will be reached based on the variable display result (special chart display result) in this special chart game.

The reserved information (first reserved information) based on the establishment of the first start condition by the game ball passing (entering) the first start winning port, and the reserved information (second reserved information) based on the establishment of the second start winning condition by the game ball passing (entering) the second start winning port may be stored in a common reserved memory unit in association with the reserved number. In this case, start port data indicating whether the game ball passed (entered) the first or second start winning port may be included in the reserved information and stored in association with the reserved number.

The regular symbol reserve memory unit 135SG151C stores reserve information for regular symbol games that have not yet been started by the regular symbol display device 20, even though the game ball that passed through the passing gate 41 has been detected by the gate switch 21. For example, the regular symbol reserve memory unit 135SG151C associates the game balls with reserve numbers in the order in which they passed through the passing gate 41, and stores numerical data indicating the random number value MR4 for determining the regular symbol display result extracted by the CPU 103 from the random number circuit 104, etc. based on the passage of the game ball as reserved data, until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4").

The game control flag setting unit 135SG152 is provided with multiple types of flags whose states can be updated depending on the progress of the game on the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control flag setting unit 135SG152 stores data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the on or off state for each of the multiple types of flags.

The game control timer setting unit 135SG153 is provided with various timers used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control timer setting unit 135SG153 stores data indicating the timer values of multiple types of timers.

The game control counter setting unit 135SG154 is provided with multiple types of counters for counting count values used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control counter setting unit 135SG154 stores data indicating the count values of each of the multiple types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting unit 135SG154 may be provided with a random counter for counting some or all of the game random numbers in a manner that allows the CPU 103 to update them by software.

In the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 135SG154, random numbers not generated by the random number circuit 104, for example, numerical data indicating random numbers MR2 to MR4, are stored as random count values, and the numerical data indicating each random number is updated periodically or irregularly according to the execution of software by the CPU 103. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be for updating the random count value separately from the updating operation of the numerical data in the random number circuit 104, or may be for updating the random count value by performing a predetermined process such as scrambling or arithmetic processing on all or part of the numerical data extracted from the random number circuit 104.

The game control buffer setting unit 135SG155 is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control buffer setting unit 135SG155 stores data indicating the buffer values in each of multiple types of buffers.

The RAM 122 mounted on the performance control board 12 is provided with a performance control data holding area 135SG190 as shown in FIG. 10-11(A) as an area for holding various data used to control performance operations. The performance control data holding area 135SG190 shown in FIG. 10-11(A) includes a performance control flag setting unit 135SG191, a performance control timer setting unit 135SG192, a performance control counter setting unit 135SG193, and a performance control buffer setting unit 135SG194.

The performance control flag setting unit 135SG191 is provided with multiple types of flags whose states can be updated according to the performance operation state, such as the display state of the performance image on the screen of the image display device 5, and the performance control commands transmitted from the main board 11. For example, the performance control flag setting unit 135SG191 stores data indicating the flag value and data indicating the on or off state for each of the multiple types of flags.

The performance control timer setting unit 135SG192 is provided with multiple types of timers that are used to control the progress of various performance operations, such as the display operation of a performance image on the screen of the image display device 5. For example, the performance control timer setting unit 135SG192 stores data indicating the timer values of each of the multiple types of timers.

The performance control counter setting unit 135SG193 is provided with multiple types of counters used to control the progress of various performance operations. For example, the performance control counter setting unit 135SG193 stores data indicating the count values of each of the multiple types of counters.

The performance control buffer setting unit 135SG194 is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used to control the progress of various performance operations. For example, the performance control buffer setting unit 135SG194 stores data indicating the buffer values for each of multiple types of buffers.

In this feature section 135SG, data constituting the start winning time receiving command buffer 135SG194A as shown in FIG. 10-11 (B) is stored in a predetermined area of the performance control buffer setting section 135SG194. The start winning time receiving command buffer 135SG194A is provided with a storage area (area corresponding to buffer numbers "1-1" to "1-4") corresponding to the maximum value of the total reserved memory number of the first special chart reserved memory (for example, "4"). In addition, the start winning time receiving command buffer 135SG194A is provided with a storage area (area corresponding to buffer numbers "2-1" to "2-4") corresponding to the maximum value of the total reserved memory number of the second special chart reserved memory (for example, "4"). When a start winning occurs in the first start winning port or the second start winning port, a set of four commands, namely, a start winning port winning designation command (first start winning port winning designation command or second start winning port winning designation command), a pattern designation command, a variable category designation command, and a reserved memory number notification command (first reserved memory number notification command or second reserved memory number notification command), are transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. The storage area corresponding to the first special pattern reserved memory and the storage area corresponding to the second special pattern reserved memory in the start winning receiving command buffer 135SG194A are provided with storage areas (entries) for storing these start winning port winning designation commands, the area for storing pattern designation commands, the area for storing variable category designation commands, the area for storing reserved memory number notification commands, the area for storing reserved display flags, and the area for storing winning flash performance target flags indicating whether or not the winning flash performance is the target of the winning flash performance described later, in association with the reserved memory number, and for storing them separately as the first special pattern reserved memory and the second special pattern reserved memory.

When the start condition is met and the variable display of the top reserved memory (buffer number "1-1" or buffer number "2-1") begins, the contents (data) of the reserved memory for which the start condition is met are copied to the active display buffer 135SG194B in FIG. 10-11 (C), and the contents of the copied reserved memory are themselves deleted from the start winning time reception command buffer 135SG194A. The contents of the storage areas lower than the deleted reserved memory are then shifted one by one to the higher storage areas.

As described above, when the variable display of the reserved memory (buffer number "1-1" or "2-1") begins, the contents (data) of the reserved memory for which the start condition is met are copied to the active display buffer 135SG194B, so as shown in FIG. 10-11 (C), a storage area similar to that of the start winning reception command buffer 135SG194A is provided. That is, an area for storing the start winning designation command, an area for storing the designation command, an area for storing the variable category command, an area for storing the reserved memory number notification command, an area for storing the reserved display flag, and an area for storing the winning flash effect target flag that indicates whether or not the winning flash effect described below is the target.

In this feature section 135SG, if a start win occurs when variable display is not being executed and there is no reserved memory, the start win designation command, pattern designation command, variable category command, and reserved memory number notification command based on the start win are stored in the active display buffer 135SG194B without passing through the start win reception command buffer 135SG194A. The reserved display flag is set by the performance control CPU 120 executing the advance notice setting process (S161) described below.

The contents stored in the active display buffer 135SG194B are cleared (deleted) during the special chart hit waiting process that is executed when the variable display ends.

The reserved display flag is a flag that indicates the display mode of the reserved display or the active display that corresponds to the variable display being executed. Details will be described later, but in this feature unit 135SG, the display mode of these reserved displays and active displays (the value of the reserved display flag) can suggest the rate at which the game will be controlled to a jackpot game state.

Next, the start winning judgment process of this feature part 135SG executed in step S101 of Fig. 6 will be described based on Fig. 10-12. In the start winning judgment process, the CPU 103 first judges whether the first start hole switch 22A, which is provided corresponding to the first start winning hole formed by the winning ball device 6A, is in the ON state based on the detection signal from the first start hole switch 22A (step 135SGS101a). At this time, if the first start hole switch 22A is in the ON state (step 135SGS101a; Y), it judges whether the first special symbol reserved memory number, which is the reserved memory number of the special symbol game using the first special symbol, is a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4" as the upper limit memory number) (step 135SGS102). The CPU 103 can specify the first reserved memory number by, for example, reading the first reserved memory number count value, which is the stored value of the first reserved memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 135SG154. When the first reserved memory number is not the upper limit value in step 135SGS102 (step 135SGS102; N), for example, the stored value of the start port buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 135SG155 is set to "1" (step 135SGS103).

When the first start port switch 22A is off in step 135SGS101a (step 135SGS101; N), or when the first special symbol reserved memory number has reached the upper limit in step 135SGS102 (step 135SGS102; Y), the second start port switch 22B is determined to be on or not based on a detection signal from the second start port switch 22B provided corresponding to the second start port formed by the variable winning ball device 6B (step 135SGS101b). At this time, if the second start port switch 22B is on (step 135SGS101b; Y), it is determined whether the second special symbol reserved memory number, which is the reserved memory number of the special symbol game using the second special symbol, has reached a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4" as the upper limit memory number) (step 135SGS105). The CPU 103 can specify the number of reserved second special symbols by, for example, reading the second reserved memory count value, which is the stored value of the second reserved memory count counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 135SG154. When the second reserved memory count is not the upper limit value in step 135SGS105 (step 135SGS105; N), for example, the storage value of the start port buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 135SG155 is set to "2" (step 135SGS106).

After executing either the process of step 135SGS103 or step 135SGS106, the number of reserved memories corresponding to the start port buffer value, which is the stored value of the start port buffer, is updated to add 1 (step 135SGS107). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1", the first reserved memory count value is added by 1, while when the start port buffer value is "2", the second reserved memory count value is added by 1. Thus, the first reserved memory count value is updated to increase by 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning port and the first start condition corresponding to the special game using the first special game is established. In addition, the second reserved memory count value is updated to increase by 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning port and the second start condition corresponding to the special game using the second special game is established. At this time, the total reserved memory number is also updated to add 1 (step 135SGS108). For example, the total reserved memory count value, which is the stored value of the total reserved memory count counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 135SG154, can be updated to add 1.

After executing the process of step 135SGS108, the CPU 103 extracts numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special chart display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the type of big win, and the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern from the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104 and the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 135SG154 (step 135SGS109). The numerical data indicating each random number value thus extracted is stored by being set as reserved information at the beginning of an empty entry in the special chart reserved memory unit according to the start port buffer value (step 135SGS110). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1", the numerical data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR3 are stored in the first special chart reserved memory unit 135SG151A, while when the start port buffer value is "2", the numerical data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR3 are stored in the second special chart reserved memory unit 135SG151B.

The numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result and the random number value MR2 for determining the type of jackpot are used to determine whether the variable display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is a "jackpot" or not, and further to determine the type of jackpot if the variable display result is a "jackpot". The random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is used to determine the variation pattern including the variable display time of the special symbol or decorative symbol. By executing the processing of step 135SGS109, the CPU 103 extracts numerical data indicating all of the random number values used to determine the variable display mode including the variable display result and the variable display time of the special symbol or decorative symbol.

Following the processing of step 135SGS110, the sending setting of the start port winning designation command according to the start port buffer value is performed (step 135SGS111). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1", the storage address of the first start port winning designation command table in ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer, and the setting is performed to send the first start port winning designation command to the performance control board 12. On the other hand, when the start port buffer value is "2", the storage address of the second start port winning designation command table in ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area of the transmission command buffer, and the setting is performed to send the second start port winning designation command to the performance control board 12. The start port winning designation command thus set is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12, for example, after the special pattern process processing is completed, by executing the command control processing of step S27 shown in FIG. 4.

Following the processing of step 135SGS111, a random number value determination process is executed at the time of winning (step 135SGS112). After that, a setting is made to send a pending memory number notification command to the performance control board 12, for example by storing the storage address of the pending memory number notification command table in ROM 101 in a buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer (step 135SGS113). The pending memory number notification command thus set is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12, for example by executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. 5 after the special pattern process process is completed.

After executing the process of step 135SGS113, it is determined whether the start port buffer value is "1" (step 135SGS114). At this time, if the start port buffer value is "1" (step 135SGS114; Y), the start port buffer is cleared and its stored value is initialized to "0" (step 135SGS115), and then the process proceeds to step 135SGS104. On the other hand, if the start port buffer value is "2" (step 135SGS114; N), the start port buffer is cleared and its stored value is initialized to "0" (step 135SGS116), and then the start winning process is terminated. As a result, even if both the first start port switch 22A and the second start port switch 22B simultaneously detect the start winning of a valid game ball, the process based on the detection of both valid start winnings can be completed reliably.

Figure 10-13 (A) is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step 135SGS112 in Figure 10-12 as a winning random number value determination process. In this feature section 135SG, when the variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols is started, the normal special symbol process (step S110 in Figure 6) determines whether or not to control the special symbol display result (variable display result of special symbols) to a "jackpot" and to control the game to a jackpot game state. In addition, the variable pattern setting process (step S111 in Figure 6) determines the variable pattern that specifically specifies the variable display mode of the decorative symbols.

On the other hand, apart from these judgments, when the game ball is detected in the start winning hole (first start winning hole or second start winning hole), the CPU 103 executes the winning random number judgment process of step 135SGS112 to judge whether or not it is judged that the jackpot pattern is to be displayed as the special symbol display result, and judge whether or not the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is a predetermined display mode accompanied by a super reach. As a result, before the variable display of the special symbol or decorative symbol based on the detection of the game ball that entered the start winning hole is started, that is, before it is decided whether or not it is a jackpot at the start of the variable display, it is judged that the special symbol display result will be a "jackpot" and which category of variable display mode the variable display mode of the decorative symbol will be, and based on this judgment result, the performance control CPU 120 etc. will execute a preview performance such as a pre-reading preview performance as described later.

In the winning random number determination process shown in FIG. 10-13(A), the CPU 103 first identifies the current game state of the pachinko game machine 1 by, for example, checking the state of the time-saving flag and the special probability flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 135SG152 (step 135SGS121). The CPU 103 identifies the special probability state when the special probability flag is on, identifies the time-saving state when the special probability flag is off and the time-saving flag is on, and identifies the normal state when both the special probability flag and the time-saving flag are off.

Following the processing of step 135SGS121, the special chart display result judgment table 1 shown in FIG. 10-6 is selected and set (step 135SGS122). After that, it is judged whether the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for judging the special chart display result extracted in step 135SGS109 of FIG. 10-12 is within a predetermined jackpot judgment range (step 135SGS123). In the jackpot judgment range, individual judgment values assigned to the special chart display result of "jackpot" in the special chart display result judgment table 1 selected by the processing of step 135SGS122 are set, and the CPU 103 can compare the random number value MR1 with each judgment value one by one to judge whether there is a judgment value that matches the random number value MR1. Alternatively, numerical values indicating the minimum (lower limit) and maximum (upper limit) judgment values included in the jackpot judgment range may be set, and the CPU 103 may compare the random number value MR1 with the minimum and maximum values of the jackpot judgment range to determine whether the random number value MR1 is within the jackpot judgment range. In this case, by determining that the random number value MR1 is within the jackpot judgment range, it can be determined that the variable display result based on the reserved data including the random number value MR1 is determined to be a "jackpot".

If it is determined in step 135SGS123 that the result is not within the jackpot determination range, i.e., if it is determined that the variable display will not result in a jackpot (step 135SGS123; N), the special chart display result determination table 2 shown in FIG. 10-6 is selected and set (step 135SGS124). After that, it is determined whether the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special chart display result extracted in step 135SGS109 in FIG. 10-12 is within a predetermined small win determination range (step 135SGS125).

If the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 is within a predetermined small win determination range, that is, if it is determined that a small win will occur in the variable display (step 135SGS125; Y), the transmission setting of the sixth pattern designation command, which is a pattern designation command corresponding to the variable display result being a "small win", is executed (step 135SGS126), a variable pattern determination table for special wins is selected and set (step 135SGS127), and the process proceeds to step 135SGS138.

If the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 is not within the predetermined small win judgment range, that is, if the variable display result in the variable display is "miss", the transmission setting of the first pattern designation command, which is a pattern designation command corresponding to the variable display result being "miss" (step 135SGS128), is executed, and it is judged whether the time-saving flag is on or not, that is, whether the current game state is in the time-saving state or not (step 135SGS129). If the time-saving flag is off (step 135SGS129; N), the miss fluctuation pattern judgment table A is selected and set, and if the time-saving flag is on (step 135SGS129; Y), the miss fluctuation pattern judgment table D is selected and set (step 135SGS131). The miss fluctuation pattern judgment table A is a miss fluctuation pattern judgment table used when the number of reserved memories is 2 or less. In addition, the loss fluctuation pattern determination table D is a loss fluctuation pattern determination table that is used when the game state is a high base state in which time-saving control is being executed.

In addition to these miss fluctuation pattern determination tables A and D, this feature unit 135SG also has miss fluctuation pattern determination table B, which is used when the number of reserved memories is three, and miss fluctuation pattern determination table C, which is used when the number of reserved memories is four, prepared in advance. As shown in FIG. 10-9, of these miss fluctuation pattern determination tables A to C, in miss fluctuation pattern determination table A, 600 determination values from 0 to 599 within the range that the random number value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination can take are assigned to non-reach fluctuation patterns, in miss fluctuation pattern determination table B, 700 determination values from 0 to 699 within the range that the random number value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination can take are assigned to non-reach fluctuation patterns, and in miss fluctuation pattern determination table C, 800 determination values from 0 to 799 within the range that the random number value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination can take are assigned to non-reach fluctuation patterns. On the other hand, in the loss fluctuation pattern determination tables A to C, 97 determination values from 901 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach, which is within the possible range of the random number value MR3 used to determine the fluctuation pattern.

For this reason, in step 135SGS126, the fluctuation pattern is determined using the miss fluctuation pattern determination table A, and the determination of non-reach and super reach will always result in a non-reach or super reach fluctuation pattern even if the number of reserved memories changes after the determination, so the determination at the time of the initial winning is made using the miss fluctuation pattern determination table A.

Also, if it is determined in step 135SGS123 that the value is within the jackpot determination range, that is, if it is determined that a jackpot will occur during variable display (step 135SGS123; Y), as shown in FIG. 10-13 (A), the jackpot type is determined based on the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination (step 135SGS132). At this time, the CPU 103 selects table data for jackpot type determination from the table data constituting the jackpot type determination table according to the variable special chart (the "first special chart" corresponding to "1" or the "second special chart" corresponding to "2") specified in response to the start port buffer value. Then, by referring to the selected table data for jackpot type determination, it is determined which of the multiple types the jackpot type is determined to be.

The controller 100 also executes the setting to send the symbol designation command according to the determined jackpot type, that is, the second symbol designation command if it is a sure-variable jackpot A, the third symbol designation command if it is a sure-variable jackpot B, the fourth symbol designation command if it is a sure-variable jackpot C, and the fifth symbol designation command if it is a non-variable jackpot (step 135SGS133), and then determines whether the determined jackpot type is a non-sure-variable jackpot (step 135SGS134). If the determined jackpot type is a non-sure-variable jackpot (step 135SGS134; Y), the controller 100 selects and sets the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table A as a table for determining the jackpot fluctuation pattern (step 135SGS135), and proceeds to step 135SGS138.

Also, if the determined jackpot type is a guaranteed jackpot (step 135SGS134; N), select and set jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table B (step 135SGS136), and proceed to step 135SGS138.

After executing any of the processes of step 135SGS127, step 135SGS130, step 135SGS131, step 135SGS135, and step 135SGS136, the variable category according to the range of judgment values including the random number MR3 is determined using each of the variable pattern judgment tables set in each of these steps and the numerical data indicating the random number MR3 for the variable pattern judgment (step 135SGS138). In this characteristic part 135SG, as shown in FIG. 10-13 (B), at least when the variable display result is "miss", a variable category that is a variable display mode of "non-reach" in common regardless of the total reserved memory number, a variable category that is a variable display mode of "super reach", and a variable category of "other" that is a variable display mode other than "non-reach" and "super reach" (for example, normal reach) are provided, and it is sufficient to determine whether such a variable category is determined based on the random number MR3.

After that, a variable category designation command according to the result of the processing in step 135SGS138 is set up to be sent to the performance control board 12 (step 135SGS139), and the winning random number value determination process is terminated.

Figure 10-14 is a flow chart showing an example of the command analysis process executed in step S75 of Figure 8. In the command analysis process shown in Figure 10-14, the performance control CPU 120 first determines whether or not there is a received command from the main board 11 transmitted via the relay board 15 by checking the memory contents of the performance control command receiving buffer (step 135SGS221). At this time, if there is no received command (step 135SGS221; N), the command analysis process ends.

If a command is received in step 135SGS221 (step 135SGS221; Y), it is determined whether the received command is a command to designate winning at the first starting port, for example by checking the MODE data of the received command (step 135SGS222).

If the received command in step 135SGS222 is not a first start port winning designation command (step 135SGS222; N), it is determined whether the received command is a second start port winning designation command (step 135SGS224).

If the received command in step 135SGS224 is not a second start port winning designation command (step 135SGS224; N), it is determined whether the received command is a pattern designation command (step 135SGS226). If the received command in step 135SGS226 is not a pattern designation command (step 135SGS226; N), it is determined whether the received command is a variable category command (step 135SGS227). If the received command in step 135SGS227 is not a variable category command (step 135SGS227; N), it is determined whether the received command is a first pending memory count notification command (step 135SGS228).

If the received command in step 135SGS228 is not the first pending memory count notification command (step 135SGS228; N), it is determined whether the received command is the second pending memory count notification command (step 135SGS230).

If the command received in step 135SGS222 is a first start port winning designation command (step 135SGS222; Y), if the command received in step 135SGS224 is a second start port winning designation command (step 135SGS224; Y), if the command received in step 135SGS226 is a pattern designation command (step 135SGS226; Y), or if the command received in step 135SGS227 is a variable category command (step 135SGS227; Y), If the command received in step 135SGS228 is the first pending memory count notification command (135SGS228; Y), or if the command received in step 135SGS230 is the second pending memory count notification command (step 135SGS230; Y), the received command is stored at the beginning of the free space in the start winning time received command buffer 135SG194A or active display buffer 135SG194B shown in Figure 10-11 (step 135SGS233), and processing returns to step 135SGS221.

In step 135SGS233, specifically, if there is no pending memory and the variable display is not in progress, the received command is stored in the active display buffer 135SG194B, and if there is pending memory or the variable display is in progress, the received command is stored at the beginning of the free area in the start winning time received command buffer 135SG194A.

In addition, when a pending memory number notification command (first pending memory number notification command or second pending memory number notification command) is received together with a variable display start command (first variable display start command or second variable display start command), the pending memory number notification command may not be stored in the start winning reception command buffer 135SG194A. In other words, it is sufficient if the performance control commands received in response to the occurrence of a start winning can be stored sequentially from the beginning of the free area in the start winning reception command buffer 135SG194A.

If the received command in step 135SGS230 is not the second pending memory count notification command (step 135SGS230; N), settings are made according to other received commands (step 135SGS234), and processing returns to step 135SGS221.

In addition, in the command analysis process of this characteristic part 135SG, if the received command is a start port winning designation command, a pattern designation command, a variable category command, or a reserved memory number notification command, the received command is stored sequentially from the beginning of the free space in the start winning time reception command buffer 135SG194A, but the present invention is not limited to this. If the received command is a start port winning designation command, a timer is set to wait for the reception of the reserved memory number notification command, and if the reserved memory number notification command is not received before the timer times out, the entry reserved memory that has not received the reserved memory number notification command may be set as not being subject to the pre-reading preview performance described below.

Next, the performance control process processing in this characteristic section 135SG will be described. As shown in Figure 10-15, in the performance control process processing, the performance control CPU 120 executes a pre-reading notice setting process (step S161) and then executes a specific display display start performance execution process (step 135SGS162) to execute a specific display display start performance as a display start animation for the pending display in the active display area 135SG005A, the first pending memory display area 135SG005D, and the second pending memory display area 135SG005U, and a display start animation for the active display in the active display area 135SG005A. In addition, after the specific display display start performance execution process, the performance control CPU 120 executes a winning flash performance execution process (step 135SGS163) to execute a winning flash performance, a specific display rotation display performance execution process (step 135SGS164) to execute a specific display rotation display performance as a rotation animation according to the value of the display mode flag of the reserved display or active display after the above-mentioned specific display display start performance has ended (see Figures 10-19 (B-1) to 10-19 (B-4)), and when it is decided to execute a reserved display notice performance as a pre-reading notice in this characteristic part 135SG, executes a start port lamp light-up performance execution process (step 135SG165) to execute a start port lamp light-up performance that lights up the start port lamp 135SG009S in a color according to the display mode of the reserved display/active display based on the reserved memory until the variable display based on the reserved memory that is the target of the reserved display notice performance ends, and executes any of the processes in steps S170 to S177.

The specific display rotation display effect execution process in this characteristic section 135SG also includes a process of shifting each pending display to the next display position based on the start of the variable display and displaying it as a rotation animation, and a process of shifting the pending display to the active display area 135SG005A as the active display and displaying it as a rotation animation.

Figure 10-16 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step 161 of Figure 10-15 as the pre-reading notice setting process. In the pre-reading notice setting process, the performance control CPU 120 first checks the start winning time reception command buffer 135SG194A or the active display buffer 135SG194B (step 135SGS240) and determines whether there is an entry whose display mode flag is not set (step 135SGS241). If there is no entry whose display mode flag is not set (step 135SGS241; N), the pre-reading notice setting process is terminated, and if there is an entry whose display mode flag is not set (step 135SGS241; Y), it determines whether there is an entry whose display mode flag is already set to "1" or "2", that is, whether the pending display notice performance as the pre-reading notice performance is already being executed (step 135SGS242).

If there is no entry with the display mode flag set to "1" or "2" (step 135SGS242; N), it is further determined whether or not the symbol designation command of the entry indicates a small win (step 135SGS243). If the symbol designation command of the entry does not indicate a small win (step 135SGS243; N), the variable display result is identified from the symbol designation command of the entry (step 135SGS244a) and the variable category is identified from the variable category command of the entry (step 135SGS244b). Then, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the pending display preview performance and the display pattern based on the identified variable display result and variable category (step 135SGS245).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 10-17, if the variable display result is a miss and the variable category is a non-reach, there is a 95% chance that the hold display preview performance will not be executed (display pattern α in which the display mode of the hold display or active display is white), there is a 5% chance that the hold display preview performance will be executed in display pattern β (the display mode of the hold display or active display is blue), and there is a 0% chance that the hold display preview performance will be executed in display pattern γ (the display mode of the hold display or active display is red).

In addition, if the variable display result is a miss and the variable category is other (normal reach), there is an 80% chance that the hold display preview performance will not be executed (display pattern α in which the display mode of the hold display or active display is white), there is a 20% chance that the hold display preview performance will be executed with display pattern β (the display mode of the hold display or active display is blue), and there is a 0% chance that the hold display preview performance will be executed with display pattern γ (the display mode of the hold display or active display is red).

In addition, if the variable display result is a miss and the variable category is a super reach, there is a 65% chance that the hold display preview performance will not be executed (display pattern α in which the display mode of the hold display or active display is white), there is a 25% chance that the hold display preview performance will be executed with display pattern β (the display mode of the hold display or active display is blue), and there is a 10% chance that the hold display preview performance will be executed with display pattern γ (the display mode of the hold display or active display is red).

In addition, if the variable display result is a jackpot, there is a 15% chance that the hold display preview performance will not be executed (display pattern α in which the display mode of the hold display or active display is white), there is a 30% chance that the hold display preview performance will be executed in display pattern β (the display mode of the hold display or active display is blue), and there is a 55% chance that the hold display preview performance will be executed in display pattern γ (the display mode of the hold display or active display is red).

In other words, this feature unit 135SG is set so that when the reserved display or active display is displayed in red, the target variable display result has the highest probability of being a jackpot (jackpot expectation rate), and when the reserved display or active display is displayed in white, the target variable display result has the highest probability of being a miss (jackpot expectation rate according to the display color of the reserved display or active display: red > blue > white).

Returning to FIG. 10-16, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not it has been decided in step 135SGS245 to execute the pending display preview performance (step 135SGS246). If it has been decided in step 135SGS245 to execute the pending display preview performance (step 135SGS246; Y), it sets the display mode flag of the entry to a value ("1" or "2") corresponding to the decided display pattern (step 135SGS247), and ends the advance preview setting process.

If there is an entry whose display mode flag is already set to "1" or "2" (step 135SGS242; Y), if the symbol designation command of that entry indicates a small win (step 135SGS243; Y), or if it has been decided not to execute the pending display preview performance (step 135SGS246; N), then the display mode flag of that entry is set to "0" (step 135SGS248), which corresponds to not executing the dig display preview performance, and the advance preview setting process is terminated.

Note that, in this feature section 135SG, an example is given of a form in which the preview effect that determines the display mode of the pending display and the effect that determines the display mode of the active display can be executed together as a preview effect for the pending display, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the preview effect that determines the display mode of the pending display and the effect that determines the display mode of the active display can also be executed individually as different effects.

Figure 10-18 is a flow chart showing an example of the processing executed in step 135SGS162 of Figure 10-15 as the specific display start performance execution processing. In the specific display start performance execution processing, the performance control CPU 120 first determines whether or not either specific display start performance A or specific display start performance B is being executed (step 135SGS251). Whether or not either specific display start performance A or specific display start performance B is being executed can be determined by whether or not the process timer for specific display start performance A or the process timer for specific display start performance B, which will be described later, is operating.

If the specific display start performance A or the specific display start performance B is not being executed (step 135SGS251; N), it is determined whether or not a start winning designation command has been received (whether or not the start winning designation command reception flag is set) (step 135SGS252). If the start winning designation command has not been received (step 135SGS252; N), the specific display start performance execution process is terminated. Also, if the start winning designation command has been received (step 135SGS252; Y), a newly generated reserved memory entry is identified by referring to the start winning time reception command buffer 135SG194A and the active display buffer 135SG194B (263SGS273), and it is determined whether or not it is the first special chart reserved memory (step 135SGS253a). In addition, whether or not it is the first special chart reserved memory can be determined by the start opening winning designation command stored in the entry.

If the entry (the identified entry) is not the first special chart reserved memory (step 135SGS253a; N), proceed to step 135SGS255. If the entry is the first special chart reserved memory (step 135SGS253a; Y), determine whether the display mode flag of the identified entry is 0 or not, that is, whether the entry is the target of the reserved display notice performance (step 135SGS254). If the display mode flag of the identified entry is 0, that is, the entry is not the target of the reserved display notice performance (step 135SGS254; Y), proceed to step 135SGS255.

In the processing of step 135SGS255, the performance control CPU 120 selects a process table for specific display start performance A according to the display position of the specific display (pending display or active display). Then, it starts a process timer for specific display start performance A (step 135SGS256).

If the display mode flag of the identified entry is not 0, that is, if the entry is the target of the pending display preview effect (step 135SGS254; N), a process table for the specific display start effect B according to the display position of the specific display (pending display or active display) is selected (step 135SGS257). Then, a process timer for the specific display start effect B is started (step 135SGS258).

After executing step 135SGS256 or step 135SGS258, the performance control CPU 120 controls the performance device according to the contents of process data 1 in the set specific display start performance process table (step 135SGS259), and ends the specific display start performance execution process.

Also, if specific display start performance A or specific display start performance B is being executed (step 135SGS251; Y), the performance control CPU 120 decrements the value of the process timer for the specific display start performance being executed (process timer for specific display start performance A or process timer for specific display start performance B) by 1 (step 135SGS260), and determines whether the process timer for the specific display start performance that has been decremented by 1 (process timer for the specific display start performance being executed) has timed out (step 135SGS261). If the process timer for the specific display start performance being executed has not timed out (step 135SGS261; N), the performance device is controlled according to the contents corresponding to the process data of the process timer for the specific display start performance being executed (step 135SGS262), and the specific display start performance execution process is terminated.

If the process timer for the specific display start performance currently being executed times out (step 135SGS261; Y), it is determined whether or not the process timer for the specific display start performance is the last process timer for the specific display start performance (step 135SGS263). If the process timer for the last specific display start performance times out (step 135SGS263; Y), the specific display start performance ends (step 135SGS267) and the specific display start performance execution process ends. If the process timer for the last specific display start performance has not timed out (step 135SGS263; N), the process data is switched, the process timer for the next specific display start performance is started, and the performance device is controlled according to the contents corresponding to the process data of the process timer for the next specific display start performance (step 135SGS264, step 135SGS265, step 135SGS266), and the specific display start performance execution process ends.

As described above, in this characteristic part 135SG, when a start winning occurs and it is decided not to execute the pre-reading preview performance (hold display preview performance) based on the start winning, or when the start winning is a start winning at the second start port, as shown in Figures 10-19 (A), 10-19 (B), and 10-19 (B-1) to 10-19 (B-4), an appearance animation is displayed in which the hold display (active display) gradually appears from the bottom to the top as a specific display display start performance A in a position according to the number of hold memories in the active display area 135SG005A or the hold memory display areas 135SG005D and 135SG005U.

In addition, in this feature section 135SG, the period from the occurrence of the start winning to the end of the appearance animation of the pending display (active display) as the specific display display start performance A is approximately 0.2 seconds. After the specific display display start performance A ends, the pending display (active display) transitions to a display with a rotating animation in the active display area 135SG005A or pending memory display areas 135SG005D, 135SG005U as with other pending displays and active displays, as the specific display rotating display performance described above.

In addition, when a start winning occurs, and the execution of a pre-reading preview performance (hold display preview performance) is determined based on the start winning, and the start winning is a start winning to the first start port, as shown in Figures 10-20 (A) to 10-20 (C), 10-20 (C-1) to 10-20 (C-4), as a specific display display start performance B, first, an animation of character A appearing from the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is displayed on the image display device 5. After character A appears from the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, a variable display is executed at the timing of the start winning, or if the first special reserved memory already exists, an animation of character A moving to the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D is displayed. At this time, character A is displayed overlapping with a part of the active display area 135SG005A in the process of moving to the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D.

When character A moves to the first pending memory display area 135SG005D, as shown in Figures 10-20 (C-1) to 10-20 (C-4), an animation is displayed in which character A attacks (acts) the position where the pending display is displayed based on the initial winning. When the display of this animation ends, an appearance animation is displayed in which the pending display gradually appears from the bottom to the top at the position where character A attacked.

In this characteristic part 135SG, the period from the occurrence of the start winning to the end of the animation in which character A attacks the position where the reserved display in the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D is displayed as the specific display display start performance B is about 1 second, and the period from the end of the animation to the end of the reserved display appearance animation is about 0.2 seconds. In other words, when the specific display display start performance B is executed for the reserved display of the first special chart, it takes 1.2 seconds from the occurrence of the start winning to the completion of the display of the reserved display based on the start winning. Then, the reserved display after the specific display display start performance B ends transitions to a display with a rotation animation in the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D as the specific display rotation display performance described above, just like other reserved displays and active displays.

When character A appears from the winning flash lamp 135SG009F as the specific display start performance B, if the variable display is not being executed at the timing of the start winning and the first special chart reserved memory does not exist, an animation of character A moving to the active display area 135SG005A is displayed. Then, when character A moves to the active display area 135SG005A, an animation of character A attacking (acting) on the position where the active display is displayed based on the start winning, i.e., the active display area 135SG005A, is displayed, as in Figures 10-20 (C-1) to 10-20 (C-4). When the display of the animation ends, an appearance animation is displayed in which the active display gradually appears from the bottom to the top at the position where character A attacked.

In this feature 135SG, the period from the occurrence of the start winning to the end of the animation in which character A attacks the active display area 135SG005A as the specific display start performance B is approximately 0.5 seconds, and the period from the end of that animation to the end of the active display appearance animation is approximately 0.2 seconds. In other words, when the specific display start performance B is executed for the active display, it takes 0.7 seconds from the occurrence of the start winning to the completion of the display of the active display based on the start winning. Then, after the specific display start performance B ends, the active display transitions to a display with a rotation animation in the active display area 135SG005A as the specific display rotation display performance described above.

Figures 10-21 and 10-22 are flow charts showing an example of the process executed in step 135SGS163 of Figure 10-21 as the winning flash effect execution process. In the winning flash effect execution process, the effect control CPU 120 first checks the start winning command reception buffer 135SG194A and the active display buffer 135SG194B (step 135SGS272), and determines whether there are any entries in the start winning command reception buffer 135SG194A and the active display buffer 135SG194B with the display mode flag set to "1" or "2", i.e., whether the pending display preview effect is being executed (step 135SGS273).

If there is an entry with the display mode flag set to "1" or "2" (step 135SGS273; Y), the performance control CPU 120 determines whether the entry is an entry based on a start winning at the first start gate (step 135SGS274). Whether the entry is an entry based on a start winning at the first start gate can be determined from the start gate winning designation command stored in the entry.

If the entry is based on a start winning into the first start port (step 135SGS274; Y), the presentation control CPU 120 judges whether the game state is normal or not (step 135SGS275). If the game state is normal (step 135SGS275; Y), it further judges whether the value of the presentation control process flag is any of 0 to 3, that is, whether the game state is a big win game state or a small win game state (step 135SGS276). If the value of the presentation control process flag is any of 0 to 3 (step 135SGS276; Y), it judges whether the variable category of the entry (an entry whose display mode flag is set to "1" or "2") is a super reach or not (step 135SGS277).

If the variable category of the entry is Super Reach (step 135SGS277; Y), it is determined whether the value of the performance control process flag is 2 or not, i.e., whether variable display is being executed or not (step 135SGS278). If the value of the performance control process flag is 2 (step 135SGS278; Y), the performance control CPU 120 determines whether a reach performance is being executed or not (step 135SGS279). Note that whether a reach performance is being executed or not can be determined from the contents of the variable display process data, etc.

If the value of the performance control process flag is not 2 (step 135 SGS278; N) or if the reach performance is not being executed (step 135 SGS279; N), the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the flash performance when a win occurs based on the variable display result. Note that the variable display result can be determined from the design specification command of an entry for which the flash performance target flag when a win occurs is not set.

As shown in FIG. 10-24, if the variable display result is a miss, the flash effect when a prize is won is determined to be executed with a probability of 10%, and the flash effect when a prize is won is determined not to be executed with a probability of 90%. Also, if the variable display result is a jackpot, the flash effect when a prize is won is determined to be executed with a probability of 20%, and the flash effect when a prize is won is determined not to be executed with a probability of 80%.

In other words, in this feature section 135SG, if the winning flash effect is executed from the start of the winning, the probability of being controlled to the jackpot game state is set to be higher than if the winning flash effect is not executed.

Returning to FIG. 10-21, the CPU 120 for controlling the effects judges whether or not it has decided to execute a flash effect when a prize is won (step 135SG279b). If it has decided to execute a flash effect when a prize is won (step 135SG279b; Y), the CPU 120 sets the flash effect target flag for the entry (the entry for which the flash effect target flag for the prize is not set) to "1" indicating that the entry is a pending memory for the flash effect when a prize is won (step 135SG280), and turns on the flash effect execution flag for the prize (step 135SG280a). It selects a process table for flash effects when a prize is won in the previous period, starts a process timer for flash effects when a prize is won in the previous period, and controls the effect device according to the contents of process data 1 (steps 135SGS281 to 135SGS283), and proceeds to step 135SGS292.

As shown in Figure 10-23, the early winning flash effect is an effect in which the winning flash lamp 135SG009F and the game effect lamp 9 flash in a manner corresponding to the early winning flash effect for 1.5 seconds from the occurrence of the initial winning (as shown in Figures 10-26 (A) and 10-26 (B) the winning flash lamp 135SG009F and the game effect lamp 9 are repeatedly turned on and off at high brightness C1), a sound corresponding to the winning flash effect is output from speakers 8L and 8R at volume V1, and an effect image 135SG005E of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is displayed on the image display device 5. The winning flash effect corresponding sound in this characteristic part 135SG is divided into a first-term winning flash effect corresponding sound output during the execution of the first-term winning flash effect, and a second-term winning flash effect corresponding sound output during the execution of the second-term winning flash effect. Of these, the first-term winning flash effect corresponding sound may be a sound with a relatively short output period (for example, 1 second) such as an electronic sound or a voice sound of a specific character that is output once. Also, the second-term winning flash effect corresponding sound may be a sound with a longer output period than the first-term winning flash effect corresponding sound such as a dedicated BGM or SE (sound effect). In addition, in the pachinko game machine 1 in this characteristic part 135SG, in addition to the winning flash effect corresponding sound described above, multiple performance sounds such as the advance notice effect corresponding sound and the variable display corresponding sound described below can be simultaneously output from the speakers 8L and 8R using different channels at different volumes.

If the entry is based on a win at the second starting port (step 135SG274; N), if the game state is not normal (step 135SG275; N), if the effect control process flag is not 0 to 3 (step 135SG276; N), if the variable category of the entry is not a super reach (step 135SG277; N), if a reach effect is being executed (step 135SG279; Y), or if it has been decided not to execute a flash effect when a win is generated (step 135SG279b), the flash effect target flag for the entry when a win is generated is set to "0" (step 135SG279c), indicating that the entry is not eligible for the flash effect when a win is generated, and the flash effect execution process when a win is generated is terminated.

In addition, if the winning flash effect execution flag is on in step 135SGS271 (step 135SGS271; Y), the effect control CPU 120 judges whether the process timer for the previous winning flash effect is operating (step 135SGS284). If the process timer for the previous winning flash effect is operating (step 135SGS284; Y), the value of the process timer for the previous winning flash effect is decremented by 1 (step 135SGS285), and it is judged whether the process timer for the previous winning flash effect has timed out after decrementing the value by 1 (step 135SGS286). If the process timer for the flash effect when a prize is won in the previous period has not timed out (step 135SGS286; N), the performance control CPU 120 controls the performance device according to the contents corresponding to the process data of the process timer for the flash effect when a prize is won in the previous period that is currently running (step 135SGS287), and proceeds to step 135SGS292.

If the process timer for the flash effect at the time of winning the previous period has timed out (step 135SGS286; Y), it is determined whether the process timer for the flash effect at the time of the last winning the previous period has timed out (step 135SGS288). If the process timer for the flash effect at the time of the last winning the previous period has not timed out (step 135SGS288; N), the CPU 120 for controlling the effect switches the process data, starts the process timer for the next process timer for the flash effect at the time of winning the previous period, and controls the effect device according to the contents corresponding to the process data of the process timer for the next process timer for the flash effect at the time of winning the previous period (steps 135SGS289, 135SGS290, 135SGS291), and proceeds to step 135SGS292.

Then, in step 135SGS292, the CPU 120 for controlling the performance controls the game effect lamps 9 (main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacca lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d) other than the button lamp 135SG009X and the stick lamp 135SG009Y, and the winning flash lamp 135SG009F to blink in a manner corresponding to the previous winning flash performance. In addition, the winning flash performance corresponding sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R at volume V1 (step 135SGS293), and the winning flash performance execution process is terminated. Note that, as a manner corresponding to the previous winning flash performance, the main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacca lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d, and winning flash lamp 135SG009F may be repeatedly illuminated in white or red. In addition, in accordance with the flash effect when a prize is won, the game effect lamps 9 (main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacca lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d) excluding the button lamp 135SG009X and stick lamp 135SG009Y and the winning flash lamp 135SG009F may be illuminated in the same color.

Also, in step 135SGS288, if the last process timer for the flash effect when a prize is won in the early stage has timed out (step 135SGS288; Y), the effect control CPU 120 ends the flash effect when a prize is won in the early stage (step 135SGS294). Then, it selects a process table for the flash effect when a prize is won in the later stage, starts the process timer for the flash effect when a prize is won in the later stage, controls the effect device according to the contents of process data 1 (steps 135SGS294 to 135SGS297), and proceeds to step 135SGS307.

As shown in FIG. 10-23, the later winning flash effect is an effect in which the winning flash lamp 135SG009F flashes in a manner corresponding to the later winning flash effect from the end of the earlier winning flash effect to the start of the reach effect of the target variable display super reach, the winning flash effect corresponding sound is output from the speakers 8L, 8R at volume V1, and the silhouette image 135SG005S of character A modeled by the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is displayed on the image display device 5. As a manner corresponding to the later winning flash effect, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F may be repeatedly illuminated in white or red, as in the earlier winning flash effect. In addition, because the flash effect for later winning is performed at a lower brightness than the flash effect for earlier winning (see Figure 10-28), the actual light emitted by the winning flash lamp 135SG009F during the flash effect for later winning will be darker than the flash effect for earlier winning.

As shown in FIG. 10-27(A), the game effect lamp 9 (particularly the frame lamp 9b) is repeatedly turned on (blinking) and off at a brightness C2 that is lower than the brightness C1 described above during the period except when the flash effect is being performed. In particular, the blinking period at brightness C2 is longer than the blinking period during the execution of the flash effect when the previous stage wins, and during the blinking period, as shown in FIG. 10-27(B) to FIG. 10-27(D), the frame lamp 9b blinks while changing the emission color in stages at multiple points in a manner corresponding to the background image displayed on the image display device 5. For this reason, the game effect lamp 9 during the period except when the flash effect when the previous stage wins is being performed makes a lesser impression on the player than the game effect lamp 9 during the execution of the flash effect when the previous stage wins.

Also, if the process timer for the flash effect at the time of early prize winning is not running in step 135SGS284, that is, if the process timer for the flash effect at the time of late prize winning is running (step 135SGS284; N), the performance control CPU 120 decrements the value of the process timer for the flash effect at the time of late prize winning by 1 (step 135SGS298), and determines whether the process timer for the flash effect at the time of late prize winning that has been decremented by 1 has timed out (step 135SGS299). If the process timer for the flash effect at the time of late prize winning has not timed out (step 135SGS299; N), the performance device is controlled according to the contents corresponding to the process data of the process timer for the flash effect at the time of late prize winning that is currently running (step 135SGS300), and the process proceeds to step 135SGS307.

If the process timer for the flash effect at the time of the later winning has timed out (step 135SGS299; Y), it is determined whether the last process timer for the flash effect at the time of the later winning has timed out (step 135SGS301). If the last process timer for the flash effect at the time of the later winning has not timed out (step 135SGS301; N), the process data is switched, the process timer for the next flash effect at the time of the later winning is started, and the effect device is controlled according to the contents of process data 1 (steps 135SGS302 to 135SGS304), and the process proceeds to step 135SGS307.

In addition, if the process timer for the last flash effect at the time of late winning expires (step 135SGS301; Y), the process timer for the first flash effect at the time of late winning starts, and the effect device is controlled according to the contents of process data 1 (step 135SGS305, step 135SGS306), and the process proceeds to step 135SGS307.

In step 135SGS307, the CPU 120 for controlling the performance controls the winning flash lamp 135SG009F to blink in a manner corresponding to the later winning flash performance. In addition, the sound corresponding to the winning flash performance is output from the speakers 8L and 8R at volume V1 (step 135SGS308).

Furthermore, the performance control CPU 120 checks the active display buffer 135SG194B (step 135SGS309) and determines whether the winning flash performance target flag of the active display buffer 135SG194B is set to "1", that is, whether the variable display being executed is a variable display that is the target of the winning flash performance (step 135SGS310). If the winning flash performance target flag of the active display buffer 135SG194B is set to "0" (step 135SGS310; N), the winning flash performance execution process ends. If the winning flash performance target flag of the active display buffer 135SG194B is set to "1" (step 135SGS310; Y), it determines whether it is the start timing of the reach performance (step 135SGS311).

If it is time to start the reach effect (step 135SGS311; Y), the effect control CPU 120 ends the later winning flash effect, turns off the winning flash effect execution flag (step 135SGS312, step 135SGS313), and ends the winning flash effect execution process.

Also, if it is not the timing to start the reach effect (step 135SGS311; N), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not a symbol determination command has been received (step 135SGS311a). If a symbol determination command has been received (step 135SGS311a; Y), the later winning flash effect ends, the winning flash effect execution flag is turned off (steps 135SGS312, 135SGS313), and the winning flash effect execution process ends. If a symbol determination command has not been received (step 135SGS311a; N), the winning flash effect execution process ends without executing the processes of steps 135SGS312 and 135SGS313.

As described above, the flash effect at the time of early winning in this feature section 135SG is an effect that ends when a predetermined performance period (e.g., 1.5 seconds) has elapsed, while the flash effect at the time of late winning is an effect that is executed repeatedly without ending every time a certain period of time has elapsed until the start timing of the reach effect of the variable display of the performance target.

In addition, if the CPU 120 for controlling the performance is unable to determine that it is time to start the reach performance of the variable display of the performance target due to static electricity or the like during the execution of the later winning flash performance, it is possible to end the later winning flash performance including the blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F again at the end timing of the variable display (the timing of receiving the pattern determination command), which is later than the start timing of the reach performance.

As shown in step 135SGS281 in FIG. 10-21 and step 135SGS295 in FIG. 10-22, in this feature section 135SG, the performance control CPU 120 selects one performance process table as the process table for the flash performance when an early prize is won, and selects one performance process table as the process table for the flash performance when a late prize is won. In other words, the performance patterns (performance periods) of the flash performance when an early prize is won and the flash performance when a late prize is won in this feature section 135SG are always executed in the same performance mode and for the same performance period, regardless of the number of reserved memories, etc.

Figure 10-25 is a flowchart showing the variable display performance processing (step S172) in the performance control process. In the variable display performance processing, the performance control CPU 120 decrements the values of the process timer, variable time timer, and variable control timer by 1 (steps 135SGS351, 135SGS352, and 135SGS353). Note that the process timer, variable display time timer, and variable display control timer are timers that are set in the variable display start setting process.

Then, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether the process timer has timed out (step 135SGS356). If the process timer has timed out (step 135SGS356; Y), the process data is switched (step 135SGS357). That is, the process timer is started again by setting the process timer to the next process timer setting value in the process table set in the variable display start setting process (step 135SGS358). In addition, the control state for the performance device (performance component) is changed based on the next set display control execution data, lamp control execution data, sound control execution data, operation unit control data, etc. (step 135SGS359). On the other hand, if the process timer has not timed out (step 135SGS356; N), the performance device (performance component) is controlled according to the contents of the process data corresponding to the process timer (display control execution data, lamp control execution data, sound control execution data, operation unit control data, etc.) (step 135SGS360).

In particular, the control contents of steps 135SGS359 and 135SGS360 are as follows: the performance control CPU 120 outputs a variable display corresponding sound corresponding to the variable display being executed from the speakers 8L and 8R at a volume V2 lower than the volume V1 (step 135SGS361). Note that the variable display corresponding sound in this characteristic part 135SG refers to background music corresponding to the background image displayed on the image display device 5, background music corresponding to the number of pseudo consecutive performances executed during the variable display, etc. In addition, when the flash effect for winning a previous period is not being executed (step 135SGS362; N), the game effect lamp 9 is controlled to blink in a manner corresponding to the variable display being executed (step 135SGS363), whereas when the flash effect for winning a previous period is being executed (step 135SGS362; Y), the game effect lamp 9 is not controlled to blink in a manner corresponding to the variable display being executed (as shown in Figures 10-21 and 10-22, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled to blink in a manner corresponding to the flash effect for winning a previous period).

Next, the performance control CPU 120 executes a preview performance execution process (step 135SG364). In this preview performance execution process, for example, when the performance control CPU 120 executes the variable display start setting process, it determines whether or not to execute a preview performance during variable display execution and in which performance pattern the preview performance will be executed, and it is possible to execute the preview performance according to the determination result. Also, when determining the performance pattern of the preview performance in the variable display start setting process described above, one performance pattern is determined from multiple performance patterns at different rates depending on the variable display result, so that the proportion of the preview performance controlled to the jackpot game state differs depending on which performance pattern the preview performance is executed in.

The preview effect executed in this feature section 135SG is a line preview effect in which the character's lines are displayed on the image display device 5, and the expected probability of a jackpot varies depending on the lines displayed.

The performance control CPU 120 also checks whether the variable display control timer has timed out (step 135SGS365). If the variable display control timer has timed out (step 135SGS365; Y), the performance control CPU 120 creates image data for the next display screen of the left, center, and right decorative patterns (screens that should be displayed 30 ms after the previous display switching of the decorative patterns) and writes it to a specified area of the VRAM (step 135SGS366). In this way, variable display control of the decorative patterns is realized in the image display device 5. The display control unit 123 outputs a signal based on data that superimposes image data of a specified area such as a set background image and image data based on the display control execution data set in the process table to the image display device 5. In this way, the background image, character image, and decorative pattern in the variable display of the decorative pattern are displayed in the image display device 5. In addition, a specified value is reset to the variable display control timer (step 135SGS367).

In addition, if the variable display control timer has not timed out (step 135SGS365; N) or after executing step 135SGS366, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether the variable display time timer has timed out (step 135SGS368). If the variable display time timer has timed out, the value of the performance control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special pattern hit waiting process (step S173) (step 135SGS370). Even if the variable display time timer has not timed out, if the confirmation command reception flag indicating that a pattern confirmation command has been received is set (step 135SGS369; Y), the value of the performance control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special pattern hit waiting process (step S173) (step 135SGS370). Even if the variable display time timer has not timed out, if a pattern confirmation command is received, the control will transition to stopping the variable display. Therefore, even if, for example, a variable pattern designation command indicating a long variable time is received due to noise between boards, the variable display of the decorative pattern can be ended when the regular variable display time has elapsed (when the variable display of the special pattern has ended).

The process table used for controlling the variable display of the decorative pattern contains the process data during the variable display of the decorative pattern. In other words, the sum of the process timer settings of process data 1 to n in the process table corresponds to the variable display time of the decorative pattern. Therefore, when the process timer of the last process data n times out in the processing of step 135SGS356, there is no process data to switch (display control execution data, lamp control execution data, etc.), and the performance control of the decorative pattern based on the process table ends.

Next, the operation of each of the presentation devices when the winning flash presentation in the characteristic part 135SG is executed will be explained with reference to Figs. 10-28 to 10-68. First, Fig. 10-28 is a timing chart when a start winning occurs during execution of the variable display and a decision is made to execute a winning flash presentation based on the start winning. Fig. 10-28 is a timing chart corresponding to both the case where execution of the pending display notice presentation is decided when execution of the winning flash presentation is decided based on the start winning, and the case where it is decided not to execute the pending display notice presentation. Figs. 10-29 to 10-48 are diagrams showing the presentation modes of the image display device 5 and the winning flash lamp 135SG009F when a start winning occurs during execution of the variable display and execution of the pending display notice presentation and the winning flash presentation are decided based on the start winning. Figures 10-49 to 10-68 are diagrams showing the presentation state of the image display device 5 and winning flash lamp 135SG009F when a start winning occurs during the execution of the variable display, and a decision is made to execute a winning flash presentation based on the start winning, while a decision is made not to execute a pending display advance presentation.

Note that "when it is decided to execute the pending display preview effect and the winning flash effect" shown in Figures 10-29 to 10-48 refers to the case where the display mode of the pending display that is the target of the winning flash effect is displayed in display pattern β or display pattern γ (displayed as a blue or red circle), and "when it is decided to execute the winning flash effect but not to execute the pending display preview effect" shown in Figures 10-49 to 10-68 refers to the case where the display mode of the pending display that is the target of the winning flash effect is displayed in display pattern α (displayed as a white circle).

First, as shown in Fig. 10-28 and Fig. 10-29(A), during variable display, the image display device 5 displays the decorative symbols in a variable manner, and the speakers 8L and 8R output a sound corresponding to the variable display at a volume of V2. During variable display, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is turned off, and the game effect lamp 9 is controlled to flash at a cycle T0 according to the variable display (flashing in the manner shown in Fig. 10-27(A) to Fig. 10-27(D)).

Furthermore, while the variable display is being executed, if the preview performance is being executed, an image corresponding to the performance pattern of the preview performance is displayed on the image display device 5, and a sound corresponding to the performance pattern of the preview performance (for example, a preview performance-related sound such as a character speaking the characters displayed on the image display device 5) is output from the speakers 8L, 8R at volume V2. In addition, there are three first special chart reserve memories as reserve memories (three reserve displays are displayed in the first reserve memory display area 135SG005D).

If a winning entry (start winning entry) occurs in the first starting port during such a variable display, and a decision is made to execute a pending display notice effect and a winning flash effect based on the starting winning entry, the previous winning flash effect will start, as shown in Figures 10-28 and 10-29 (B).

As for the flash effect at the time of winning in the previous period, first, as shown in Fig. 10-28 and Fig. 10-29 (B), the speaker 8L, 8R starts outputting the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning at volume V1 (V1>V2), and the winning flash lamp 135SG009F and the game effect lamp 9 are temporarily turned off. Then, as shown in Fig. 10-28, Fig. 10-30 (C) and Fig. 10-30 (D), the image display device 5 starts displaying the effect image 135SG005E around the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, and starts blinking control at cycle T1 for the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacca lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d, stick lamp 135SG009X and button lamp 135SG009Y. In addition, with this blinking control, each lamp is lit at brightness C1, which is higher than brightness C2.

When the previous winning flash performance starts, as shown in Figures 10-30(D), 10-31(E), and 10-31(F), an animation of character A appearing from the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, which is controlled to blink, is displayed as the specific display start performance B described above, along with an animation of character A moving to the first pending memory display area 135SG005D. Then, after character A moves to the first pending memory display area 135SG005D, an animation of character A attacking (acting) on the position in the first pending memory display area 135SG005D where the pending display is displayed (the position where the fourth pending display is displayed in the case of this feature part 135SG) is displayed.

After character A acts on the first pending memory display area 135SG005D, an appearance animation is displayed at the affected position, in which the pending display that is the subject of the ongoing winning flash performance (previous winning flash performance) gradually appears from bottom to top (see Figures 10-20 (D-1) to 10-20 (D-5)). Note that the pending display that has completed its appearance animation in the first pending memory display area 135SG005D transitions to a rotating display like other pending displays, as a special display rotating display performance.

In other words, in this feature section 135SG, if a start winning occurs during the variable display and it is decided to execute a winning flash effect based on the start winning, the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F starts flashing, and the effect image 135SG005E on the image display device 5 starts before the pending display based on the start winning is completed. Note that the appearance animation of the pending display (specific display) accompanied by the execution of the specific display display start effect B in this feature section 135SG is completed during the execution of the later winning flash effect (see Figures 10-32 (G) and 10-32 (H)).

When the early winning flash effect ends, the late winning flash effect starts from the same timing. For the late winning flash effect, as shown in Figures 10-28, 10-32 (G) and 10-32 (H), the speakers 8L and 8R start to output the winning flash effect sound at volume V2, and the winning flash lamp 135SG009F starts to flash at brightness C2 and with a period T2 (period T2 > period T1). In addition, the image display device 5 starts to display a silhouette image 135SG005S of character A at regular intervals around the winning flash lamp 135SG009F.

At the end of the early winning flash performance and the start of the late winning flash performance, the light emission mode (flashing at brightness C1 and cycle T1) of the game effect lamps 9 (main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacca lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d) excluding stick lamp 135SG009X and button lamp 135SG009Y as part of the early winning flash performance ends. Then, the light emission mode of the game effect lamps 9 (main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacca lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d) excluding stick lamp 135SG009X and button lamp 135SG009Y switches to a mode (flashing at brightness C2 and cycle T0 as shown in Figures 10-27(A) to 10-27(D)) corresponding to the background image displayed on the image display device 5. In other words, the lighting state of the game effect lamps 9 (main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacca lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d) other than the stick lamp 135SG009X and button lamp 135SG009Y will return to the lighting state before the start of the flash performance at the time of the previous winning, based on the end of the flash performance at the time of the previous winning. Note that the stick lamp 135SG009X and button lamp 135SG009Y will remain in the off state after the start of the flash performance at the time of the later winning.

The flashing of the game effect lamps 9 (main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacca lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d) excluding the stick lamp 135SG009X and button lamp 135SG009Y at brightness C2 and cycle T0 is performed in the same manner as before the flash effect at the time of the previous winning (light emission manner shown in Figure 10-29 (A)) as described above, in a color corresponding to the background image of the image display device 5 (for example, a blue-based gradation if the background image is a daytime image, a red-based gradation if the background image is an evening image, etc.).

The blinking period of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, which is the period T2, is longer than the previously mentioned period T1, but shorter than the previously mentioned period T0 (lamp blinking period length: T0>T2>T1). Note that the stick lamp 135SG009X and button lamp 135SG009Y are not lit during the execution of the later winning flash performance.

As shown in Figures 10-32(H), 10-33(I) and 10-33(J), when the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the image display device 5, the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed with a transparent black image 135SG005B superimposed on the entire first display region 135SG005F excluding the active display area 135SG005A of the image display device 5. The silhouette image 135SG005S in this characteristic portion 135SG is displayed in blue so that it is easily visible to the player when superimposed on the black image 135SG005B.

In this characteristic section 135SG, the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed in blue so that it is easily visible to the player when it is displayed overlapping with the black image 135SG005B, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the silhouette image 135SG005S may be displayed in a color other than blue, such as green or red. In particular, when the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed in multiple colors such as the aforementioned blue, green, and red, the probability of a jackpot may be made to differ depending on the color in which the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed. In this way, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the color of the silhouette image 135SG005S, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

As shown in FIG. 10-32(H) and FIG. 10-33(J), in this feature section 135SG, the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the right side of the image display device 5, while the small pattern 135SG005M is displayed on the left end of the image display device 5. Therefore, in the winning flash performance of this feature section 135SG, the silhouette image 135SG005S and the small pattern 135SG005M are not displayed overlapping each other, and the player can check whether the variable display is being performed by visually checking the small pattern 135SG005M, regardless of whether the silhouette image 135SG005S is being displayed during the winning flash performance.

As shown in FIG. 10-33(J), FIG. 10-34(K) and FIG. 10-34(L), when the variable display ends based on the reception of the pattern determination command, the decorative pattern and the small pattern 135SG005M are derived and displayed in a combination indicating a loss on the image display device 5 (displayed with the variable display stopped), and the output of the variable display corresponding sound from the speakers 8L and 8R stops. At this time, the active display is erased from the active display area 135SG005A. Note that the flash effect at the time of late winning in this characteristic part 135SG is executed regardless of whether or not it is the pattern determination period. That is, as shown in FIG. 10-33(J), even during the pattern determination period, the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed with the black image 135SG005B superimposed on it on the image display device 5, and the winning flash effect corresponding sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R at volume V2.

When the pattern determination period ends, a new variable display begins. At this time, in the image display device 5, the reserved display displayed at the top of the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D moves to the active display area 135SG005A as the active display, and the display positions of the remaining reserved displays displayed in the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D are shifted one space to the right. In addition, output of the variable display compatible sound from the speakers 8L and 8R at volume V2 also begins.

After that, as shown in Figures 10-34 (K) to 10-41 (Z), in the variable display before the variable display that is the target of the winning flash effect, the following is repeatedly executed: the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect is output from speakers 8L and 8R at volume V2 as a later winning flash effect; the winning flash lamp 135SG009F flashes at brightness C2 and cycle T2; and the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the image display device 5.

In particular, as shown in Fig. 10-38 (S) to Fig. 10-40 (X), in the variable display where the pseudo consecutive performance is executed, even during the period when the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped (see Fig. 10-40 (W). In this feature section 135SG, decorative symbols showing normal numbers are temporarily stopped in the left and right decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R, and a special symbol notifying of a temporary stop is temporarily stopped in the central decorative symbol display area 5C), the later winning flash performance is executed by outputting the winning flash performance corresponding sound from the speakers 8L and 8R at volume V2, flashing the winning flash lamp 135SG009F at brightness C2 and with a period T2, and displaying the silhouette image 135SG005S on the image display device 5.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 10-41(Y) and FIG. 10-41(Z), when the variable display that has become a normal reach miss in response to the execution of the pseudo consecutive performance ends, the decorative pattern and the small pattern 135SG005M are derived and displayed in a combination indicating a miss on the image display device 5 (displayed with the variable display stopped), and the output of the variable display corresponding sound from the speakers 8L and 8R stops. At this time, the active display is erased from the active display area 135SG005A. Note that the flash performance at the time of late winning in this characteristic part 135SG is also executed during the pattern determination period of the variable display of the normal reach miss. That is, as shown in FIG. 10-41(Y) and FIG. 10-41(Z), even during the pattern determination period, the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed with the black image 135SG005B superimposed on it on the image display device 5, and the winning flash performance corresponding sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R at volume V2.

As shown in Figures 10-40 (W) and 10-40 (X), during the period when the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped, the main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacca lamp 9c, and movable body lamp 9d emit light in a light emission mode corresponding to the temporary stop of the decorative symbol (for example, if the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped for the first time in the variable display, they emit blue light at brightness C2), and then return to a light emission mode corresponding to the background image when the variable display is executed again. Furthermore, during the period when the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped, the variable display of the small symbol 135SG005M is executed regardless of the temporary stop, so the player can recognize that the variable display has not yet ended by visually checking the variable display of the small symbol 135SG005M.

Then, as shown in Figures 10-42(a) and 10-42(b), when the variable display that is the subject of the winning flash effect starts, the pending display that corresponds to the variable display displayed in the first pending memory display area 135SG005D moves to the active display area 135SG005A as the active display.

As shown in Figures 10-43(c) to 10-47(l), the variable display continues to execute the flash effect at the time of the later winning. Also, during the variable display, a preview effect may be executed (see Figures 10-43(d) and 10-44(e)). Furthermore, since the variable display is a variable display with a Super Reach variation pattern, at least two pseudo consecutive effects are executed during the variable display (see Figures 10-45(g) to 10-46(j)).

In particular, even in the variable display that is the target of the winning flash effect, during the period when the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped (see Figure 10-46 (j)), the later winning flash effect is executed by outputting the winning flash effect corresponding sound from speakers 8L and 8R at volume V2, blinking the winning flash lamp 135SG009F at brightness C2 and cycle T2, and displaying a silhouette image 135SG005S on the image display device 5.

As shown in FIG. 10-45(g) and FIG. 10-46(j), during the period when the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacca lamp 9c, and the movable lamp 9d emit light in a light emission mode corresponding to the temporary stop of the decorative pattern (for example, blue at brightness C2 for the first temporary stop, and green at brightness C2 for the second temporary stop), and return to a light emission mode corresponding to the background image based on the execution of the re-variable display. Although not shown in this feature section 135SG, when three pseudo consecutive performances are executed during the variable display, during the third temporary stop of the decorative pattern, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacca lamp 9c, and the movable lamp 9d emit light in a light emission mode corresponding to the third temporary stop of the decorative pattern (for example, red at brightness C2), and return to a light emission mode corresponding to the background image based on the execution of the re-variable display.

As shown in Figures 10-48(m) and 10-48(n), when the variable display progresses and it becomes time to start the reach performance, the first display area 135SG005F excluding the active display area 135SG005A of the image display device 5 goes white (the performance image displayed in the first display area 135SG005F goes non-display and the first display area 135SG005F goes white), and then the reach performance starts. Note that in this feature 135SG, the whitening of the first display area 135SG005F suggests that the reach performance of the super reach will be executed afterwards.

At this whiteout timing, the output of the winning flash sound from the speakers 8L and 8R as part of the later winning flash effect, the blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F at brightness C2 and cycle T2, and the display of the silhouette image 135SG005S on the image display device 5 end.

At the whiteout timing, the flashing of the game effect lamps 9 (main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacca lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d) excluding the stick lamp 135SG009X and button lamp 135SG009Y at brightness C2 and cycle T0 ends. The main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacca lamp 9c, and movable body lamp 9d remain off during the whiteout period.

In other words, during the whiteout period, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacca lamp 9c, and movable body lamp 9d are kept off. Then, when the whiteout ends, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacca lamp 9c, and movable body lamp 9d start to emit light (lighting up at brightness C1) according to the reach effect described above.

During the whiteout period, the output of the variable display corresponding sound from the speakers 8L and 8R is stopped. In other words, during the whiteout period, no sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and there is silence. When the whiteout ends, the aforementioned winning flash lamp 135SG009F, main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacca lamp 9c, and movable body lamp 9d start to emit light (lighting at brightness C1) in accordance with the reach performance, and the speakers 8L and 8R start to output the reach performance corresponding sound, which is a sound in accordance with the reach performance. Note that, as the reach performance corresponding sound in this characteristic part 135SG, background music or the like different from the variable display corresponding sound may be output so that the player can recognize that the reach performance (the reach performance of the super reach) is being executed.

As shown in FIG. 10-28, if a start winning occurs during the execution of the variable display and it is decided to execute the hold display preview performance based on the start winning, the start gate lamp 135SG009S will start illuminating in a color corresponding to the display pattern of the hold display preview performance (for example, blue if the display pattern of the hold display is display pattern β, and red if the display pattern of the hold display is display pattern γ) from the timing of the start winning as a start gate lamp illumination performance.

The illumination of the start gate lamp 135SG009S is an effect that is executed completely independently of the aforementioned winning flash effect, and regardless of the blinking pattern of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F or the game effect lamp 9, it continues to emit light in a color that corresponds to the display pattern of the hold display preview effect from the aforementioned start winning until the end of the target variable display of the start gate lamp illumination effect (target variable display of the winning flash effect).

Next, we will explain the cases where the execution of the pending display preview effect along with the winning flash effect is not decided upon starting winning during the execution of the variable display.

First, as shown in Fig. 10-28 and Fig. 10-49 (A), while the variable display is being performed, the image display device 5 performs variable display of decorative symbols, and the speakers 8L and 8R output a sound corresponding to the variable display at a volume of V2. Also, while the variable display is being performed, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is turned on, and the game effect lamp 9 is controlled to flash at a cycle T0 according to the variable display (flashing in the manner shown in Fig. 10-27 (A) to Fig. 10-27 (D)).

Furthermore, while the variable display is being executed, if the preview performance is being executed, an image corresponding to the performance pattern of the preview performance is displayed on the image display device 5, and a sound corresponding to the performance pattern of the preview performance (preview performance corresponding sound) is output from the speakers 8L, 8R at volume V2. In addition, there are three first special chart reserved memories as reserved memories (three reserved displays are displayed in the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D).

If a winning entry (start winning entry) occurs in the first starting port during such a variable display, and a decision is made to execute a pending display notice effect and a winning flash effect based on the starting winning entry, the previous winning flash effect will start, as shown in Figures 10-28 and 10-49 (B).

As for the flash effect at the time of winning in the previous period, first, as shown in Fig. 10-28 and Fig. 10-49 (B), the speaker 8L, 8R starts to output the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning at volume V1 (V1>V2), and the winning flash lamp 135SG009F and the game effect lamp 9 are temporarily turned off. Then, as shown in Fig. 10-28, Fig. 10-50 (C) and Fig. 10-50 (D), the image display device 5 starts to display the effect image 135SG005E around the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, and the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacca lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d, stick lamp 135SG00X, and button lamp 135SG009Y start to blink at cycle T1. In addition, with this blinking control, each lamp is lit at brightness C1, which is higher than brightness C2.

In addition, when the previous winning flash performance starts, as shown in Figures 10-49 (B), 10-50 (C), and 10-50 (D), the aforementioned specific display display start performance A is displayed as an appearance animation in which the pending display that is the subject of the currently running winning flash performance (previous winning flash performance) gradually appears from bottom to top (see Figures 10-19 (B-1) to 10-19 (B-4)). In addition, the pending display that has completed the appearance animation in the first pending memory display area 135SG005D transitions to a rotating display like the other pending displays as a specific display rotating display performance.

In particular, when the special display start performance A is executed together with the winning flash performance, the pending display appearance animation ends while the effect image 135SG005E is still being displayed on the image display device 5. On the other hand, when the above-mentioned special display start performance B is executed together with the winning flash performance, the pending display appearance animation ends after the display of the effect image 135SG005E has finished on the image display device 5 (see Figures 10-29 to 10-32). In other words, when the special display start performance A is executed, the display of the pending display (appearance animation) is completed and the rotation animation is started earlier than when the special display start performance B is executed.

In other words, in this feature section 135SG, if a start winning occurs during the variable display and it is decided to execute a winning flash effect based on the start winning, the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect will be output from the speakers 8L and 8R, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F will blink, and the effect image 135SG005E on the image display device 5 will start before the pending display based on the start winning is completed. Note that the appearance animation of the pending display (specific display) accompanied by the execution of the specific display display start effect A in this feature section 135SG is completed during the execution of the previous winning flash effect.

When the early winning flash effect ends, the late winning flash effect starts from the same timing. For the late winning flash effect, as shown in Figures 10-28, 10-52 (G) and 10-52 (H), the speakers 8L and 8R start to output the winning flash effect sound at volume V2, and the winning flash lamp 135SG009F starts to flash at brightness C2 and with a period T2 (period T2 > period T1). In addition, the image display device 5 starts to display a silhouette image 135SG005S of character A at regular intervals around the winning flash lamp 135SG009F.

At the end of the early winning flash performance and the start of the late winning flash performance, the light emission mode (flashing at brightness C1 and cycle T1) of the game effect lamps 9 (main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacca lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d) excluding stick lamp 135SG009X and button lamp 135SG009Y as part of the early winning flash performance ends. Then, the light emission mode of the game effect lamps 9 (main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacca lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d) excluding stick lamp 135SG009X and button lamp 135SG009Y switches to a mode (flashing at brightness C2 and cycle T0 as shown in Figures 10-27(A) to 10-27(D)) corresponding to the background image displayed on the image display device 5. In other words, the lighting state of the game effect lamps 9 (main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacca lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d) other than the stick lamp 135SG009X and button lamp 135SG009Y will return to the lighting state before the start of the flash performance at the time of the previous winning, based on the end of the flash performance at the time of the previous winning. Note that the stick lamp 135SG009X and button lamp 135SG009Y will remain in the off state after the start timing of the flash performance at the time of the later winning.

The flashing of the game effect lamps 9 (main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacca lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d) excluding the stick lamp 135SG009X and button lamp 135SG009Y at brightness C2 and cycle T0 is performed in the same manner as before the flash effect at the time of the previous winning (light emission manner shown in Figure 10-29 (A)) as described above, in a color corresponding to the background image of the image display device 5 (for example, a blue-based gradation if the background image is a daytime image, a red-based gradation if the background image is an evening image, etc.).

The blinking period of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, which is the period T2, is longer than the previously mentioned period T1, but shorter than the previously mentioned period T0 (lamp blinking period length: T0>T2>T1). Note that the stick lamp 135SG009X and button lamp 135SG009Y are not lit during the execution of the later winning flash performance.

Also, as shown in Figures 10-52 (H), 10-53 (I) and 10-53 (J), when the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the image display device 5, the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed in a state where a transparent black image 135SG005B is superimposed over the entire first display region 135SG005F excluding the active display area 135SG005A of the image display device 5.

As shown in FIG. 10-52(H) and FIG. 10-53(J), in this feature section 135SG, the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the right side of the image display device 5, while the small pattern 135SG005M is displayed on the left end of the image display device 5. Therefore, in the winning flash performance of this feature section 135SG, the silhouette image 135SG005S and the small pattern 135SG005M are not displayed overlapping each other, and the player can check whether the variable display is being performed by visually checking the small pattern 135SG005M, regardless of whether the silhouette image 135SG005S is being displayed during the winning flash performance.

As shown in FIG. 10-53(J), FIG. 10-54(K) and FIG. 10-54(L), when the variable display ends based on the reception of the pattern determination command, the decorative pattern and the small pattern 135SG005M are derived and displayed in a combination indicating a loss on the image display device 5 (displayed with the variable display stopped), and the output of the variable display corresponding sound from the speakers 8L and 8R stops. At this time, the active display is erased from the active display area 135SG005A. Note that the flash effect at the time of late winning in this characteristic part 135SG is executed regardless of whether or not it is the pattern determination period. That is, as shown in FIG. 10-53(J), even during the pattern determination period, the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed with the black image 135SG005B superimposed on it on the image display device 5, and the winning flash effect corresponding sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R at volume V2.

When the pattern determination period ends, a new variable display begins. At this time, in the image display device 5, the reserved display displayed at the top of the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D moves to the active display area 135SG005A as the active display, and the display positions of the remaining reserved displays displayed in the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D are shifted one space to the right. In addition, output of the variable display compatible sound from the speakers 8L and 8R at volume V2 also begins.

After that, as shown in Figures 10-54 (K) to 10-61 (Z), in the variable display before the variable display that is the target of the winning flash effect, the following is repeatedly executed: the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect is output from speakers 8L and 8R at volume V2 as a later winning flash effect; the winning flash lamp 135SG009F flashes at brightness C2 and cycle T2; and the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the image display device 5.

In particular, as shown in Figures 10-58 (S) to 10-60 (X), in the variable display where the pseudo consecutive performance is executed, even during the period when the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped (see Figure 10-60 (W). In this feature section 135SG, decorative symbols showing normal numbers are temporarily stopped in the left and right decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R, and a special symbol notifying of a temporary stop is temporarily stopped in the central decorative symbol display area 5C), the later winning flash performance is executed by outputting the winning flash performance corresponding sound from the speakers 8L and 8R at volume V2, flashing the winning flash lamp 135SG009F at brightness C2 and with a cycle of T2, and displaying the silhouette image 135SG005S on the image display device 5.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 10-61(Y) and FIG. 10-51(Z), when the variable display that has become a normal reach miss in response to the execution of the pseudo consecutive performance ends, the decorative pattern and the small pattern 135SG005M are derived and displayed in a combination indicating a miss on the image display device 5 (displayed with the variable display stopped), and the output of the variable display corresponding sound from the speakers 8L and 8R stops. At this time, the active display is erased from the active display area 135SG005A. Note that the flash performance at the time of late winning in this characteristic part 135SG is also executed during the pattern determination period of the variable display of the normal reach miss. That is, as shown in FIG. 10-61(Y) and FIG. 10-61(Z), even during the pattern determination period, the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed with the black image 135SG005B superimposed on it on the image display device 5, and the winning flash performance corresponding sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R at volume V2.

As shown in Figures 10-60 (W) and 10-60 (X), during the period when the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped, the main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacca lamp 9c, and movable body lamp 9d emit light in a light emission mode corresponding to the temporary stop of the decorative symbol (for example, if the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped for the first time in the variable display, the light emission mode corresponds to the background image when the variable display is executed again). Furthermore, during the period when the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped, the variable display of the small symbol 135SG005M is executed regardless of the temporary stop, so the player can recognize that the variable display has not ended yet by visually checking the variable display of the small symbol 135SG005M.

Then, as shown in Figures 10-62(a) and 10-62(b), when the variable display that is the subject of the winning flash performance starts, the pending display that corresponds to the variable display displayed in the first pending memory display area 135SG005D moves to the active display area 135SG005A as the active display.

As shown in Figures 10-63(c) to 10-67(l), the variable display continues to execute the flash effect at the time of the later winning. Also, during the variable display, a preview effect may be executed (see Figures 10-63(d) and 10-64(e)). Furthermore, since the variable display is a variable display with a Super Reach variation pattern, at least two pseudo consecutive effects are executed during the variable display (see Figures 10-65(g) to 10-66(j)).

As shown in Fig. 10-65(g) and Fig. 10-66(j), during the period when the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacca lamp 9c, and the movable lamp 9d emit light in a light emission mode corresponding to the temporary stop of the decorative pattern (for example, blue at brightness C2 for the first temporary stop, and green at brightness C2 for the second temporary stop), and return to a light emission mode corresponding to the background image based on the execution of the re-variable display. Although not shown in this feature section 135SG, when three pseudo consecutive performances are executed during the variable display, during the third temporary stop of the decorative pattern, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacca lamp 9c, and the movable lamp 9d emit light in a light emission mode corresponding to the third temporary stop of the decorative pattern (for example, red at brightness C2), and return to a light emission mode corresponding to the background image based on the execution of the re-variable display.

In particular, even in the variable display that is the target of the winning flash effect, during the period when the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped (see Figure 10-66 (j)), the later winning flash effect is executed by outputting the winning flash effect corresponding sound from speakers 8L and 8R at volume V2, blinking the winning flash lamp 135SG009F at brightness C2 and cycle T2, and displaying a silhouette image 135SG005S on the image display device 5.

As shown in FIG. 10-68(m) and FIG. 10-68(n), when the timing for the reach effect to start comes due to the progression of the variable display, the first display area 135SG005F excluding the active display area 135SG005A of the image display device 5 goes white (the effect image displayed in the first display area 135SG005F goes non-display and the first display area 135SG005F goes white), and then the reach effect starts. Note that in this feature portion 135SG, the whitening of the first display area 135SG005F suggests that the reach effect of the super reach will then be executed.

At this whiteout timing, the output of the winning flash sound from the speakers 8L and 8R as part of the later winning flash effect, the blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F at brightness C2 and cycle T2, and the display of the silhouette image 135SG005S on the image display device 5 end.

At the whiteout timing, the flashing of the game effect lamps 9 (main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacca lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d) excluding the stick lamp 135SG009X and button lamp 135SG009Y at brightness C2 and cycle T0 ends. The main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacca lamp 9c, and movable body lamp 9d remain off during the whiteout period, but once the whiteout ends, they emit light in a manner that corresponds to the reach presentation.

During the whiteout period, the output of the variable display corresponding sound from the speakers 8L and 8R is stopped. In other words, during the whiteout period, no sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and there is silence. When the whiteout ends, the aforementioned winning flash lamp 135SG009F, main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacca lamp 9c, and movable body lamp 9d start to emit light (lighting at brightness C1) in accordance with the reach performance, and the speakers 8L and 8R start to output the reach performance corresponding sound, which is a sound in accordance with the reach performance. Note that, as the reach performance corresponding sound in this characteristic part 135SG, background music or the like different from the variable display corresponding sound may be output so that the player can recognize that the reach performance (the reach performance of the super reach) is being executed.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 with this characteristic part 135SG, as shown in Figures 10-28, 10-29 (A) to 10-32 (H), and 10-49 (A) to 10-50 (D), the winning flash lamp 135SG009F lights up before the display of the pending display is completed, making it easier for the player to recognize the pending display that is the subject of the winning flash performance. Furthermore, the present invention has a winning flash lamp 135SG009F as the first light-emitting means in the present invention, and a main lamp 9a, a frame lamp 9b, an attacca lamp 9c, and a movable body lamp 9d as the second light-emitting means in the present invention. As shown in FIG. 10-28, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F flashes at a brightness of C1 and a cycle of T1 during the execution period of the early winning flash performance, and flashes at a brightness of C2 and a cycle of T2 during the execution period of the late winning flash performance, while the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacca lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d flash at a brightness of C3 and a cycle of T4 during the early winning flash performance. During the execution of the winning flash effect, it flashes at a brightness of C1 and a cycle of T1, and during the execution of the later winning flash effect, it flashes at a brightness of C2 and a cycle of T0. Therefore, during the execution of the early winning flash effect, not only the winning flash lamp 135SG009F but also the main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacca lamp 9c, and movable body lamp 9d flash at a brightness of C1 and a cycle of T1, making the winning flash effect stand out more, and making it even easier for the player to recognize the pending display, which is the target of the winning flash effect.

In addition, in this characteristic part 135SG, when a new start winning occurs during variable display, whether or not to execute the winning flash effect and whether or not to execute the reserved display notice effect are determined for the reserved memory based on the start winning is illustrated as an example, but the present invention is not limited to this, and when a new start winning occurs when variable display is not being executed and there is no reserved memory, whether or not to execute the winning flash effect and whether or not to execute the reserved display notice effect are determined for the reserved memory based on the start winning. Specifically, when a new start winning occurs during variable display, as the specific display display start effect A or the specific display display start effect B, an animation of the appearance of the active display of one of the display patterns α to γ (display pattern when the reserved display notice effect is not executed or the display pattern when the reserved display notice effect is executed) is executed in the active display area 135SG005A, and then, as the specific display rotation display effect, a rotation display of the active display is executed, and a winning flash effect (early winning flash effect and late winning flash effect) is executed based on the start of the variable display based on the start winning.

As shown in Figures 10-15, 10-30(D) to 10-32(H), and 10-49(B) to 10-50(D), the specific display start presentation is composed of a part where an appearance animation is displayed in which the pending display gradually appears from the bottom to the top, and a part where the pending display is displayed as a rotation animation as shown in Figures 10-15, 10-30(D) to 10-32(H), and 10-49(B) to 10-50(D). As shown in Figures 10-19 and 10-20, the rotation animation of the pending display starts from the timing when the appearance animation of the pending display is completed, so the player's attention to the pending display can be increased.

Also, as shown in Fig. 10-29(A) to Fig. 10-32(H), when the specific display start performance B is executed, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacca lamp 9c, and movable body lamp 9d light up as the winning flash performance from a timing before the reserved display starts, so the winning flash performance can be made more prominent. In addition, in this characteristic part 135SG, even when the specific display start performance A of Fig. 10-49(A) to Fig. 10-50(D) is executed, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacca lamp 9c, and movable body lamp 9d light up as the winning flash performance from a timing before the reserved display starts, so the winning flash performance can be made more prominent.

The execution period of the specific display start effect A is 0.2 seconds, and the execution period of the specific display start effect B is 1.2 seconds. As shown in FIG. 10-28 and FIG. 10-49(A) to FIG. 10-50(D), the winning flash effect starts before the end timing of the specific display start effect A. Therefore, regardless of whether the display pattern of the pending display is display pattern α to display pattern γ, the winning flash effect can start before the specific display start effect ends, so the player can reliably recognize the pending display that is the target of the winning flash effect.

Also, as shown in Figures 10-28, 10-29(A), 10-29(B), 10-49(A) and 10-49(B), if it is decided to execute a winning flash effect based on the start winning, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacca lamp 9c and movable body lamp 9d are temporarily turned off, allowing the player to recognize the start of the winning flash effect.

In this characteristic section 135SG, when it is decided to execute a winning flash effect based on the start winning, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacca lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d are temporarily turned off. However, the present invention is not limited to this. When it is decided to execute a winning flash effect based on the start winning, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacca lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d may be changed to a lower brightness than the previous brightness (for example, if they were emitting light at brightness C2 until then, they may be changed to a brightness C3 that is lower than the brightness C2). In other words, the "low brightness state" in this invention includes a state in which the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacca lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d are emitting light at a low brightness, as well as a state in which they are turned off (not emitting light).

Also, as shown in Figures 10-29 (A) to 10-48 (n) and Figures 10-49 (A) to 10-68 (n), during the variable display, a flash effect when a prize is won can be executed whether or not a preview effect is being executed, and as shown in Figure 10-29 (B), when a flash effect when a prize is won is executed while the variable display is being executed, speakers 8L and 8R output the variable display corresponding sound at volume V2 while outputting the winning flash effect corresponding sound at volume V1 (V1 > V2), and when a flash effect when a prize is won is executed while the preview effect is being executed, speakers 8L and 8R output the preview effect corresponding sound at volume V2 while outputting the winning flash effect corresponding sound at volume V1 (V1 > V2). Therefore, even if the variable display corresponding sound or advance notice corresponding sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, the winning flash corresponding sound can be output so that it is easy for the player to hear, so the output of the winning flash corresponding sound makes it easy for the player to recognize that the winning flash corresponding sound is being executed.

In this characteristic section 135SG, as an example of a form in which the winning flash effect corresponding sound is output in priority over the preview effect corresponding sound and the variable display element corresponding sound, the winning flash effect corresponding sound is output from speakers 8L and 8R at volume V1, and the preview effect corresponding sound and the variable display corresponding sound are output at volume V2. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as an example of a form in which the winning flash effect corresponding sound is output in priority over the preview effect corresponding sound and the variable display element corresponding sound, the winning flash effect corresponding sound may be output at volume V2, while the preview effect corresponding sound and the variable display corresponding sound may be output at a volume lower than volume V2 (for example, volume V3).

In addition, in the feature section 135SG, a form in which the winning flash effect corresponding sound is output in priority over the advance notice effect corresponding sound and the variable display body corresponding sound is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the winning flash effect corresponding sound does not have to be output in priority over the advance notice effect corresponding sound and the variable display body corresponding sound. Specifically, if the advance notice effect starts during the execution of the winning flash effect (while the winning flash effect corresponding sound or the variable display corresponding sound is being output from the speakers 8L and 8R), the output of the winning flash effect corresponding sound from the speakers 8L and 8R may be temporarily stopped, and only the variable display corresponding sound and the advance notice effect corresponding sound, or only either the advance notice effect corresponding sound or the variable display corresponding sound, may be output. In this way, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest in the game caused by the advance notice effect corresponding sound and the variable display corresponding sound being difficult for the player to hear due to the winning flash effect corresponding sound.

As shown in Figures 10-28, 10-29(A) to 10-32(H), and 10-49(A) to 10-50(D), when it is decided to execute a winning flash effect in response to a start winning, the winning flash effect corresponding sound starts to be output from speakers 8L and 8R, and then the winning flash lamp 135SG009F starts to blink and the animation of the pending display is completed. Therefore, the output of the winning flash effect corresponding sound from speakers 8L and 8R allows the player to quickly recognize that a starting winning has occurred and that it has been decided to execute a winning flash effect, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

In addition, in this characteristic section 135SG, an example is given in which the winning flash lamp 135SG009F starts blinking and the pending display animation is completed after the winning flash effect corresponding sound starts to be output from the speakers 8L and 8R, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the winning flash lamp 135SG009F and the pending display appearance animation may start after the winning flash effect corresponding sound starts to be output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

Also, as shown in FIG. 10-28, during the execution of the early winning flash effect, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is made to flash at brightness C1, and during the execution of the later winning flash effect, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is made to flash at brightness C2 (C1>C2). By making at least the winning flash lamp 135SG009F flash at brightness C1, the player can be made aware of the start of the winning flash effect, and the winning flash lamp 135SG009F flashing at brightness C1 during the execution of the later winning flash effect can be prevented from interfering with other effects and decreasing interest in the game.

In this characteristic part 135SG, as shown in FIG. 10-28, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is flashed at a brightness C1 and a cycle T2 as a flash effect when a prize is won in the early stage, and the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is flashed at a brightness C2 that is lower than the brightness C1 and a cycle T2 that is longer than the cycle T1 as a "specific mode with a low degree of emphasis" as a flash effect when a prize is won in the later stage. In other words, the "specific mode with a low degree of emphasis" of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F in the later winning flash performance of this feature part 135SG includes both a slow flashing mode with a low degree of emphasis due to a slow flashing speed (long flashing cycle) and a low brightness mode with a low degree of emphasis due to low brightness, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the "specific mode with a low degree of emphasis" of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F in the later winning flash performance may be only one of the slow flashing mode and the low brightness mode.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 10-28, the execution period of the later winning flash effect includes the execution period of the variable display before the variable display that is the target of the winning flash effect, and the execution period of the variable display that is the target of the winning flash effect. Therefore, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F flashes at brightness C2 and cycle T2 before and after the start of the variable display that is the target of the winning flash effect, making it easier for the player to recognize that it is the target variable display, increasing the player's interest in the game.

Also, as shown in FIG. 10-28, during the execution period of the early winning flash performance, effect image 135SG005E is displayed on the image display device 5, and during the execution period of the later winning flash performance, silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the image display device 5. During the execution period of the early winning flash performance, effect image 135SG005E is displayed on the image display device 5, allowing the player to recognize the start of the winning flash performance, and during the execution period of the later winning flash performance, silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the image display device 5, preventing the image display device 5 from continuing to display effect image 135SG005E from interfering with other displays and decreasing interest in the game.

In particular, in this characteristic portion 135SG, as shown in Figures 10-30(D) to 10-31(F) and 10-34(L), the effect image 135SG005E is displayed in a brighter color than the silhouette image 135SG005S, and the display area on the image display device 5 is also larger, so that the display of the effect image 135SG005E can effectively allow the player to recognize the start of the flash effect when a prize is won.

Also, as shown in FIG. 10-28, during the execution of the early winning flash effect, the winning flash effect corresponding sound is output from speakers 8L and 8R at volume V1, and during the execution of the later winning flash effect, the winning flash effect corresponding sound is output from speakers 8L and 8R at volume V2 (V1>V2). In this way, by outputting the winning flash effect corresponding sound at volume V1 as the winning flash effect, it is possible to easily make the player aware that the winning flash effect has started, and by outputting the winning flash effect corresponding sound at volume V2 during the execution of the later winning flash effect, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game due to the interference with other effects by the winning flash effect corresponding sound.

In addition, in this feature section 135SG, while the later winning flash effect is being executed, the winning flash effect corresponding sound is output at volume V2, thereby preventing a decrease in interest in playing due to other effects being hindered by the winning flash effect corresponding sound. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is also possible to prevent a decrease in interest in playing due to other effects being hindered by the winning flash effect corresponding sound by not outputting the winning flash effect corresponding sound while the later winning flash effect is being executed.

Also, as shown in Figures 10-29(A) to 10-48(n), during the execution of the later winning flash effect, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F continues to flash during the variable display pattern determination period before the variable display that is the target of the winning flash effect begins. In other words, the effect control CPU 120 continues to flash the winning flash lamp 135SG009F during the pattern determination period regardless of whether or not a pattern determination command has been received (the determination command reception flag has been set) or whether or not the variable display time timer has timed out. This makes it possible to accurately maintain the player's anticipation of being controlled into a jackpot gaming state until the start of the variable display that is the target of the winning flash effect, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

In addition, in this characteristic part 135SG, as the early winning flash performance, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacca lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d are illuminated in a manner (brightness C1 and cycle T1) corresponding to the early winning flash performance, and after the early winning flash performance ends, as the late winning flash performance, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is illuminated in a manner (brightness C2 and cycle T2) corresponding to the late winning flash performance, while the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacca lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d are illuminated in a manner (brightness C2 and cycle T2) corresponding to the late winning flash performance. Although an example has been given of the body lamp 9d being illuminated in a manner corresponding to the background image (brightness C2 and cycle T0), the present invention is not limited to this, and the performance control CPU 120 may clear the process timer for the early winning flash performance when the early winning flash performance ends, thereby preventing the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacca lamp 9c, and movable body lamp 9d from illuminating in a manner corresponding to the early winning flash performance during the execution period of the late winning flash performance.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 10-3, a small symbol 135SG005M is arranged at the left end of the first display area 135SG005F of the image display device 5, and as shown in FIG. 10-33(J) and the like, during the symbol determination period, the small symbol 135SG005M is displayed in a state where the variable display is stopped. Therefore, even if the winning flash lamp 135SG009F continues to emit light during the symbol determination period, the small symbol 135SG005M is displayed in a combination that indicates a loss, allowing the player to recognize that the symbol determination period is in progress.

Also, as shown in Figure 10-33 (J), while the winning flash performance is being executed, the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the right side of the first display area 135SG005F of the image display device 5, while the small pattern 135SG005M is displayed on the left end of the first display area 135SG005F of the image display device 5, thereby preventing the silhouette image 135SG005S from being overlapped with the small pattern 135SG005M, making it difficult for the player to recognize the end of the variable display.

In addition, this feature section 135SG can execute a pseudo consecutive performance including a temporary stop and re-variable display of the decorative symbols on the image display device 5 during variable display, and when the pseudo consecutive performance is executed in the variable display while the winning flash performance is being executed, the silhouette image 135SG005S can be displayed as a winning flash performance superimposed on the special symbol (see Figure 10-40, etc.) that stops in the "middle" decorative symbol display area 5C when the decorative symbols temporarily stop, so that the special symbol is hidden by the silhouette image 135SG005S, providing the player with an element of surprise and increasing their interest in the game.

Furthermore, as shown in Figures 10-28 and 10-42(a) to 10-47(l), the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the image display device 5 even for the variable display that is the subject of the flash effect when a prize is won, making it easier for the player to recognize that the variable display is the subject of the flash effect when a prize is won, and increasing the interest of the variable display that is the subject of the flash effect when a prize is won.

As shown in FIG. 10-28, during the variable display that is the target of the winning flash effect, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is flashed at brightness C2 and cycle T2 before the start of the reach effect, and the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is turned off at the start of the reach effect. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 10-22, if the effect control CPU 120 cannot determine that it is the start timing of the reach effect of the variable display that is the target of the effect due to static electricity or the like, the later winning flash effect including the flashing of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is ended again at the end timing of the variable display (the timing of receiving the pattern determination command), which is a timing later than the start timing of the reach effect, so that the discomfort felt when the flashing of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F as the winning flash effect does not end at the start timing of the reach effect can be reduced.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 10-22, if the performance control CPU 120 is unable to determine that it is time to start the reach performance of the variable display of the performance target due to the generation of static electricity or the like, the performance control CPU 120 will end the later winning flash performance based on the reception of a pattern determination command, thereby further reducing the sense of discomfort felt when ending the emission of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F as the winning flash performance.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 10-21, if a start winning occurs at the first start port while the reach performance of the Super Reach is being executed, the execution of the winning flash performance is not decided, so that a decrease in interest in the game due to a decrease in attention to the reach performance of the Super Reach can be prevented.

As shown in FIG. 10-17, in this feature section 135SG, the reserved display and active display can be displayed in one of display patterns α to γ, which have different jackpot expectation rates, and as shown in FIG. 10-28, when it is decided to display the reserved display and active display in display pattern β or display pattern γ, the start gate lamp 135SG009S will emit light in a color corresponding to display pattern β or display pattern γ from the occurrence of the start winning to the end of the variable display based on the start winning, regardless of the blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F as a winning flash performance or the light emission mode of the game effect lamp 9, etc. Therefore, the player can recognize the display mode of the reserved display and active display from the light emission mode (light emission color) of the start gate lamp 135SG009S, which increases the fun of the game.

The features of the present invention have been described above with reference to the drawings, but the specific configuration is not limited to these features, and the present invention also includes modifications and additions that do not deviate from the gist of the present invention.

For example, the flash effect at the time of the later winning in the characteristic portion 135SG is exemplified as being executed regardless of whether or not it is during the pattern determination period (when the variable display is stopped), but the present invention is not limited to this, and as shown in Figures 10-69 to 10-89 as modified example 135SG-1, the output of the winning flash effect corresponding sound, the illumination of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, the display of the silhouette image 135SG005S, etc. as the flash effect at the time of the later winning may not be executed during the pattern determination period.

Specifically, as shown in Fig. 10-69 and Fig. 10-70 (A), while the variable display is being performed, the image display device 5 performs variable display of decorative symbols, and the speakers 8L and 8R output a sound corresponding to the variable display at a volume of V2. Also, while the variable display is being performed, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is turned on, and the game effect lamp 9 is controlled to flash at a cycle T0 according to the variable display (flashing in the manner shown in Fig. 10-27 (A) to Fig. 10-27 (D)).

Furthermore, while the variable display is being executed, if the preview performance is being executed, an image corresponding to the performance pattern of the preview performance is displayed on the image display device 5, and a sound corresponding to the performance pattern of the preview performance (preview performance corresponding sound) is output from the speakers 8L, 8R at volume V2. In addition, there are three first special chart reserved memories as reserved memories (three reserved displays are displayed in the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D).

If a winning entry (start winning entry) occurs in the first starting port during such a variable display, and a decision is made to execute a pending display notice effect and a winning flash effect based on the starting winning entry, the previous winning flash effect will start, as shown in Figures 10-69 and 10-70 (B).

As for the flash effect at the time of winning in the previous period, first, as shown in Fig. 10-69 and Fig. 10-70 (B), the speaker 8L, 8R starts to output the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning at volume V1 (V1>V2), and the winning flash lamp 135SG009F and the game effect lamp 9 are temporarily turned off. Then, as shown in Fig. 10-69, Fig. 10-71 (C) and Fig. 10-71 (D), the image display device 5 starts to display the effect image 135SG005E around the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, and the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacca lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d, stick lamp 135SG00X and button lamp 135SG009Y start to blink at cycle T1. In addition, with this blinking control, each lamp is lit at brightness C1, which is higher than brightness C2.

When the previous winning flash performance starts, as shown in Figures 10-71 (D), 10-72 (E), and 10-72 (F), an animation of character A appearing from the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, which is controlled to blink, is displayed as the specific display start performance B described above, along with an animation of character A moving to the first pending memory display area 135SG005D. Then, after character A moves to the first pending memory display area 135SG005D, an animation of character A attacking (acting) on the position in the first pending memory display area 135SG005D where the pending display is displayed (the position where the fourth pending display is displayed in the present modified example 135SG-1) is displayed.

After character A acts on the first pending memory display area 135SG005D, an appearance animation is displayed at the affected position, in which the pending display that is the subject of the ongoing winning flash performance (previous winning flash performance) gradually appears from bottom to top (see Figures 10-20 (D-1) to 10-20 (D-5)). Note that the pending display that has completed its appearance animation in the first pending memory display area 135SG005D transitions to a rotating display like other pending displays, as a special display rotating display performance.

In other words, in this modified example 135SG-1, if a start winning occurs during the variable display and it is decided to execute a winning flash effect based on the start winning, the winning flash effect corresponding sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F starts blinking, and the effect image 135SG005E starts on the image display device 5 before the pending display based on the start winning is completed. Note that the appearance animation of the pending display (specific display) accompanied by the execution of the specific display display start effect B in this modified example 135SG-1 is completed during the execution of the later winning flash effect (see Figures 10-73 (G) and 10-73 (H)).

When the early winning flash performance ends, the late winning flash performance starts from the end timing. As shown in Figures 10-69, 10-73 (G) and 10-73 (H), the speakers 8L and 8R start to output the winning flash performance corresponding sound at volume V2, and the winning flash lamp 135SG009F starts to flash at brightness C2 and cycle T2 (cycle T2 > cycle T1), the game effect lamps 9 except for the stick lamp 135SG009X and button lamp 135SG009Y start to flash at brightness C2 and cycle T2 (flashing in the manner shown in Figures 10-27 (A) to 10-27 (D)), and the image display device 5 starts to display the silhouette image 135SG005S of character A around the winning flash lamp 135SG009F at regular intervals.

The flashing of the game effect lamps 9, excluding the stick lamp 135SG009X and the button lamp 135SG009Y, at brightness C2 and cycle T2 is performed in a color corresponding to the background image of the image display device 5 (for example, a blue-based gradation if the background image is a daytime image, a red-based gradation if the background image is an evening image, etc.).

The blinking period of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, which is the period T2, is longer than the previously mentioned period T1, but shorter than the previously mentioned period T0 (lamp blinking period length: T0>T2>T1). Note that the stick lamp 135SG009X and button lamp 135SG009Y are not lit during the execution of the later winning flash performance.

Also, as shown in Figures 10-74 (I) and 10-74 (J), when the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the image display device 5, the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed in a state where a transparent black image 135SG005B is superimposed over the entire first display region 135SG005F of the image display device 5, excluding the active display area 135SG005A.

As shown in Figures 10-74 (J), 10-75 (K) and 10-75 (L), when the variable display ends based on receipt of a pattern confirmation command, the decorative pattern and small pattern 135SG005M are derived and displayed in a combination indicating a miss on the image display device 5 (displayed with the variable display stopped), and the output of the variable display corresponding sound from the speakers 8L and 8R stops. At this time, the active display is erased from the active display area 135SG005A. Then, as shown in Figures 10-69, 10-76 (M) and 10-76 (N), during the pattern determination period from the end of the variable display to the start of the next variable display, the output of the winning flash effect corresponding sound from speakers 8L and 8R as the late winning flash effect and the display of silhouette image 135SG005S on image display device 5 are stopped, and only the flashing of main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacca lamp 9c and movable body lamp 9d in a manner corresponding to the background image displayed on image display device 5 continues.

When the pattern determination period ends, a new variable display begins. At this time, in the image display device 5, the reserved display displayed at the top of the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D moves to the active display area 135SG005A as the active display, and the display positions of the remaining reserved displays displayed in the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D are shifted one space to the right. In addition, output of the variable display compatible sound from the speakers 8L and 8R at volume V2 also begins.

After that, as shown in Figures 10-75 (K) to 10-82 (Z), in the variable display before the variable display that is the target of the winning flash effect, the following are repeatedly executed as the later winning flash effect: the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R at volume V2, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F flashes at brightness C2 and with a cycle of T2, and the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the image display device 5; however, during the pattern determination period, the following are not executed as the later winning flash effect: the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R at volume V2, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F flashes at brightness C2 and with a cycle of T2, and the silhouette image 135SG005S is not displayed on the image display device 5.

As shown in Fig. 10-79 (S) to Fig. 10-81 (X), in the variable display where the pseudo consecutive performance is executed, during the period when the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped (see Fig. 10-81 (W). In this modified example 135SG-1, decorative symbols showing normal numbers are temporarily stopped in the left and right decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R, and a special symbol notifying of a temporary stop is temporarily stopped in the central decorative symbol display area 5C), a later winning flash performance is executed by outputting a winning flash performance corresponding sound from speakers 8L and 8R at volume V2, flashing the winning flash lamp 135SG009F at brightness C2 and with a period T2, and displaying a silhouette image 135SG005S on the image display device 5.

In FIG. 10-81(W), when the winning flash effect is being executed, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is not blinked at brightness C2 and cycle T2 when the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped in the variable display before the variable display that is the target of the winning flash effect. However, depending on the timing of the temporary stop, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is made to blink at brightness C2 and cycle T2 even when the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped. In other words, in this modified example 135SG-1, the winning flash effect continues to be executed for the variable display before the variable display that is the target of the winning flash effect during the temporary stop period of the decorative symbol.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 10-82(Y) and FIG. 10-82(Z), when the variable display that has become a normal reach miss in response to the execution of the pseudo consecutive performance ends, the decorative pattern and the small pattern 135SG005M are derived and displayed in a combination indicating a miss on the image display device 5 (displayed with the variable display stopped), and the output of the variable display corresponding sound from the speakers 8L and 8R stops. At this time, the active display is erased from the active display area 135SG005A. Note that the flash performance at the time of late winning in this characteristic part 135SG is also executed during the pattern determination period of the variable display of the normal reach miss. That is, as shown in FIG. 10-82(Y) and FIG. 10-82(Z), even during the pattern determination period, the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed with the black image 135SG005B superimposed on it on the image display device 5, and the winning flash performance corresponding sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R at volume V2.

As shown in Figures 10-81 (W) and 10-81 (X), during the period when the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped, the variable display of the small symbols 135SG005M is being executed regardless of the temporary stop, so the player can recognize that the variable display has not yet ended by visually checking the variable display of the small symbols 135SG005M.

Then, as shown in Figures 10-83(a) and 10-83(b), when the variable display that is the subject of the winning flash performance starts, the pending display that corresponds to the variable display displayed in the first pending memory display area 135SG005D moves to the active display area 135SG005A as the active display.

As shown in Figures 10-84(c) to 10-88(l), the variable display continues to execute the flash effect at the time of the later winning. Also, during the variable display, a preview effect may be executed (see Figures 10-84(d) and 10-85(e)). Furthermore, since the variable display is a variable display with a Super Reach variation pattern, at least two pseudo consecutive effects are executed during the variable display (see Figures 10-86(g) to 10-87(j)).

In particular, even in the variable display that is the target of the winning flash effect, during the period when the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped (see Figure 10-87 (j)), the later winning flash effect is executed by outputting the winning flash effect corresponding sound from speakers 8L and 8R at volume V2, blinking the winning flash lamp 135SG009F at brightness C2 and with a period T2, and displaying a silhouette image 135SG005S on the image display device 5.

As shown in Figures 10-89(m) and 10-89(n), when the timing for the reach effect to start comes due to the progression of the variable display, the first display area 135SG005F excluding the active display area 135SG005A of the image display device 5 goes white (the effect image displayed in the first display area 135SG005F goes non-display and the first display area 135SG005F goes white), and then the reach effect starts. Note that in this modified example 135SG-1, the whitening of the first display area 135SG005F suggests that the reach effect of the super reach will then be executed.

At this whiteout timing, the output of the winning flash effect sound from the speakers 8L and 8R as the later winning flash effect, the blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F at brightness C2 and cycle T2, and the display of the silhouette image 135SG005S on the image display device 5 end. On the other hand, the output of the variable display corresponding sound from the speakers 8L and 8R at volume V2 and the blinking of the game effect lamps 9 excluding the stick lamp 135SG009X and button lamp 135SG009Y at brightness C2 and cycle T0 continue.

As shown in FIG. 10-69, if a start winning occurs during the execution of the variable display and it is decided to execute the hold display preview performance based on the start winning, the start gate lamp 135SG009S will start illuminating in a color corresponding to the display pattern of the hold display preview performance (for example, blue if the display pattern of the hold display is display pattern β, and red if the display pattern of the hold display is display pattern γ) from the timing of the start winning as a start gate lamp illumination performance.

The illumination of the start gate lamp 135SG009S is an effect that is executed completely independently of the winning flash effect described above, and regardless of the blinking pattern of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F or the game effect lamp 9, it continues to emit light in a color that corresponds to the display pattern of the hold display notice effect from the time of the aforementioned start winning until the end of the target variable display of the start gate lamp illumination effect (target variable display of the winning flash effect).

As described above, in this modified example 135SG-1, when the winning flash effect is started based on the initial winning, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is turned off as the later winning flash effect during the pattern determination period, so that it is possible to prevent the player from mistaking that the variable display is being performed due to the winning flash lamp 135SG009F continuing to be turned on as the later winning flash effect during the pattern determination period. Furthermore, during the temporary stop period of the decorative pattern in the variable display that is the target of the winning flash effect and the temporary stop period of the decorative pattern in the variable display that is the target of the winning flash effect, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F continues to flash at brightness C2 and cycle T2, so that it is possible to prevent the player from mistaking that the variable display has ended even though it is during the temporary stop period of the decorative pattern.

In addition, in this modified example 135SG-1, during the pattern determination period during the execution of the later winning flash effect, the output of the winning flash effect corresponding sound, the lighting of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F for the later winning flash effect, and the display of the silhouette image 135SG005S are stopped. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and during the pattern determination period during the execution of the later winning flash effect, as long as it is possible to prevent the player from mistaking that a variable display is being executed, it is also possible to execute only one or two of the output of the winning flash effect corresponding sound, the lighting of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F for the later winning flash effect, and the display of the silhouette image 135SG005S.

Furthermore, in this modified example 135SG-1, during the pattern determination period during the execution period of the later winning flash effect, the output of the winning flash effect corresponding sound as the later winning flash effect, the illumination of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, the display of the silhouette image 135SG005S, etc. are not executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and during the pattern determination period during the execution period of the later winning flash effect, the output of the winning flash effect corresponding sound as the later winning flash effect, the illumination of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, the display of the silhouette image 135SG005S, etc. are not executed. As an example of a form in which the illumination of the lamp 135SG009F and the display of the silhouette image 135SG005S are not executed, the performance control CPU 120 may, based on receiving a pattern determination command while the later winning flash performance is being executed, clear the process timer for the later winning flash performance, thereby preventing the output of the winning flash performance corresponding sound, the illumination of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, and the display of the silhouette image 135SG005S as the later winning flash performance during the pattern determination period.

In this case, the performance control CP 120, upon receiving the first variable display start command, selects the later winning flash performance process table again and resets and starts the later winning flash performance process timer, thereby starting the later winning flash performance (output of winning flash performance corresponding sound, illumination of winning flash lamp 135SG009F, display of silhouette image 135SG005S) in response to the start of the new variable display.

As an example of a form in which the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is not illuminated as a late winning flash effect during the pattern determination period during the execution of the late winning flash effect, the effect control CPU 120 may, based on receiving a pattern determination command while the late winning flash effect is being executed, continue to output to the lamp control board 14 lighting control data that keeps the winning flash lamp 135SG009F off (for example, the RGB value of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is "0:0:0" indicating off), rather than lighting control data according to the process data of the late winning flash effect process timer, until it receives a variable display start command.

In addition, if the later winning flash effect is not executed during the pattern determination period, the output of the winning flash effect corresponding sound, the lighting of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, and the display of the silhouette image 135SG005S may be executed again from the beginning of each cycle from the start of the new variable display (see Figure 10-69), or the output of the winning flash effect corresponding sound, the lighting of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, and the display of the silhouette image 135SG005S may be restarted from the middle of each cycle from the start of the new variable display.

In addition, in this modified example 135SG-1, when the variable display ends while the later winning flash performance is being executed, the output of the winning flash performance corresponding sound from speakers 8L, 8R as the later winning flash performance and the display of silhouette image 235SG005S are stopped during the pattern determination period of the variable display, while the flashing of main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacca lamp 9c and movable body lamp 9d continues in a manner corresponding to the background image displayed on image display device 5. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the flashing of main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacca lamp 9c and movable body lamp 9d may also be stopped during the pattern determination period. In particular, the flashing of the main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacca lamp 9c, and movable body lamp 9d may be stopped during the pattern determination period by turning off the in lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacca lamp 9c, and movable body lamp 9d during the pattern determination period, or by keeping the in lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacca lamp 9c, and movable body lamp 9d continuously lit in a constant color (for example, a color corresponding to the background image displayed on the image display device 5) during the pattern determination period.

In addition, in the description of FIG. 10-8, in the feature section 135SG, it has been stated that multiple reach effects may be provided as the reach effect of the Super Reach. However, when multiple reach effects are provided as the reach effect of the Super Reach in this manner, the likelihood of a jackpot may be made different between the reach effects of the multiple Super Reach (for example, as the reach effect of the Super Reach, a reach effect of Super Reach α and a reach effect of Super Reach β, which has a higher likelihood of a jackpot than the reach effect of Super Reach α, may be provided).

In particular, in this way, when it is possible to execute multiple Super Reach reach effects with different jackpot expectations, as shown in Figures 10-90(A) and 10-90(B) as modified example 135SG-2, the movable body 32 is made movable between a retracted position (e.g., an upper position of the image display device 5) and an effect position (e.g., a central front position when viewed from the front of the image display device 5), and when the variable display that is the subject of the winning flash effect is a variable display with a variable pattern of Super Reach α (a variable display that executes the reach effect of Super Reach α), the first display area 135SG005F of the image display device 5 during the variable display, excluding the active display area 135SG005A, is temporarily whited out. During this period, the movable body 32 is repeatedly moved between evacuation positions (for example, an intermediate position between the aforementioned evacuation position and the performance position) to execute a movable body operation suggestion performance that suggests that the movable body 32 should move to the performance position, and if the variable display that is the subject of the winning flash performance is a variable display in the variable pattern of Super Reach β (a variable display that executes the reach performance of Super Reach β), the aforementioned movable body operation suggestion performance may be executed during the period when the first display area 135SG005F excluding the active display area 135SG005A of the image display device 5 is temporarily whited out, and then a movable body operation performance that moves the movable body 32 from the evacuation position to the performance position may be executed.

By doing this, during the whiteout period, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the movement of the movable body 32, and when the movable body 32 moves to the performance position (when the movable body movement performance is executed), the player can be notified that the movable body movement performance will execute the reach performance of Super Reach β, which has a higher expectation of a jackpot than the reach performance of Super Reach α, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

For example, if the target of the winning flash effect is a variable display with a Super Reach α variable pattern, as shown in Figures 10-91(A) and 10-91(B), when the variable display that is the target of the winning flash effect starts, the output of the variable display corresponding sound from speakers 8L and 8R starts. In addition, the variable display continues to execute the late winning flash effect. Furthermore, during the variable display, a preview effect may be executed (see Figures 10-91(B), 10-92(C), and 10-92(D)). Furthermore, since the variable display is a variable display with a Super Reach variable pattern, at least two pseudo consecutive effects are executed during the variable display (see Figures 10-93(E) to 10-94(H)).

In particular, even in the variable display that is the target of the winning flash effect, during the period when the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped (see Figure 10-94 (H)), the later winning flash effect is executed by outputting the winning flash effect corresponding sound from speakers 8L and 8R at volume V2, blinking the winning flash lamp 135SG009F at brightness C2 and cycle T2, and displaying a silhouette image 135SG005S on the image display device 5.

As shown in Figures 10-95(I) to 10-96(L), when the variable display progresses and the timing for the reach effect to start arrives, the first display area 135SG005F, excluding the active display area 135SG005A of the image display device 5, goes white (the effect image displayed in the first display area 135SG005F goes non-display for a moment, and the first display area 135SG005F goes white). Note that in this modified example 135SG-2, the whitening of the first display area 135SG005F suggests that the reach effect of the super reach will then be executed.

As shown in Figure 10-90 (A) and Figure 10-96 (K) to Figure 10-97 (N), during the white-out period, at the start of the movable body operation suggestion performance, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F lights up at brightness C2 and the display of the silhouette image 135SG005S on the image display device 5 ends. Then, as the movable body operation suggestion performance, the movable body 32 has repeatedly traveled back and forth between the retracted position and the suggested position a predetermined number of times (four travels in this modified example 135SG-2) by a drive mechanism not shown, and the white-out period also ends. During the execution period of the movable body operation suggestion performance, the movable body operation suggestion performance corresponding sound is output from speakers 8L, 8R at volume V2 instead of the variable display corresponding sound. In addition, the sound corresponding to the movable body operation suggestion effect may be a sound effect (such as a "clatter" sound effect) that allows the player to recognize that the movable body 32 is repeatedly moving between the retreat position and the suggested position.

As shown in Figures 10-90(A), 10-98(O) and 10-98(P), from the timing when the movable body operation suggestion effect and whiteout end, the reach effect of Super Reach α starts on the image display device 5, and the main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacca lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d and winning flash lamp 135SG009F start to light up at brightness C1 in a manner corresponding to the reach effect, and the speakers 8L and 8R start to output a reach effect corresponding to the reach effect of Super Reach α (such as background music different from the variable display corresponding sound).

When the target of the winning flash effect is a variable display with a Super Reach β variable pattern, as shown in Figures 10-99(A) and 10-99(B), when the variable display that is the target of the winning flash effect starts, the output of a variable display corresponding sound from speakers 8L and 8R starts. In addition, the variable display continues to execute the late winning flash effect. Furthermore, during the variable display, a preview effect may be executed (see Figures 10-99(B), 10-100(C), and 10-100(D)). Furthermore, since the variable display is a variable display with a Super Reach variable pattern, at least two pseudo consecutive effects are executed during the variable display (see Figures 10-101(E) to 10-102(H)).

In particular, even in the variable display that is the target of the winning flash effect, during the period when the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped (see Figure 10-102 (H)), the later winning flash effect is executed by outputting the winning flash effect corresponding sound from speakers 8L and 8R at volume V2, blinking the winning flash lamp 135SG009F at brightness C2 and with a period T2, and displaying a silhouette image 135SG005S on the image display device 5.

As shown in Figures 10-103(I) to 10-104(L), when the variable display progresses and the reach effect begins, the first display area 135SG005F, excluding the active display area 135SG005A of the image display device 5, goes white (the effect image displayed in the first display area 135SG005F goes non-display and the first display area 135SG005F goes white). Note that in this modified example 135SG-2, the whitening of the first display area 135SG005F suggests that a reach effect of a super reach will be executed afterwards.

As shown in FIG. 10-90(B) and FIG. 10-104(K) to FIG. 10-105(N), during the whiteout period, at the start timing of the movable body operation suggestion performance, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F lights up at brightness C2, and the display of the silhouette image 135SG005S on the image display device 5 ends. Then, the movable body operation suggestion performance ends when the movable body 32 has repeatedly traveled back and forth between the retreat position and the suggested position a predetermined number of times (four travels in this modified example 135SG-2) by a drive mechanism not shown. During the execution period of the movable body operation suggestion performance, the speakers 8L and 8R output a movable body operation suggestion performance corresponding sound at volume V2 instead of the variable display corresponding sound. As the movable body operation suggestion performance corresponding sound, a sound effect (for example, a sound effect such as "clatter") that allows the player to recognize that the movable body 32 is repeatedly moving between the retreat position and the suggested position may be output.

After the movable body operation suggestion performance ends, as shown in Figure 10-90 (B) and Figure 10-106 (O) to Figure 10-106 (P), the whiteout period ends and the movable body 32 moves from the retreat position to the performance position by a drive mechanism not shown as a movable body operation performance. During the movable body operation performance period, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacca lamp 9c, and movable body lamp 9d are lit at brightness C1 in a manner corresponding to the movable body operation performance. Also, although not shown in Figure 10-90 (B), a movable body operation performance corresponding sound is output from speakers 8L and 8R at volume V1 (see Figure 10-106 (P)). As the movable body operation performance corresponding sound in this feature part 135SG, a sound effect (for example, a sound effect such as "bang") that allows the player to recognize that the movable body has operated may be output.

Then, as shown in FIG. 10-107(Q), the movable body operation presentation ends based on the return of the movable body 32 from the presentation position to the retreat position. As shown in FIG. 10-90(B), FIG. 10-107(Q) and FIG. 10-107(R), from the timing when the movable body operation presentation and the whiteout are finished, the reach presentation of the Super Reach β starts on the image display device 5, and the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacca lamp 9c, the movable body lamp 9d and the winning time flash lamp 135SG009F start to light up at brightness C1 in a manner corresponding to the reach presentation, and the speakers 8L and 8R start to output a reach presentation corresponding to the reach presentation of the Super Reach β. Note that, as the reach presentation corresponding to the reach presentation of the Super Reach β, BGM or the like different from the variable display corresponding sound or the reach presentation corresponding sound corresponding to the reach presentation of the Super Reach α may be output so that the player can recognize that the reach presentation of the Super Reach β is being executed.

As described above, in this modified example 135SG-2, in the variable display of the Super Reach, which is the subject of the winning flash effect, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F flashes at brightness C2 and cycle T2 before the start of the Super Reach reach effect, and the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is turned on at brightness C2 from the start timing of the Super Reach reach effect. In other words, when the reach effect starts, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F changes from flashing at brightness C2 and cycle T2 to emitting light in a manner corresponding to the reach effect (lighting on at brightness C2), thereby increasing the interest in the reach effect.

In particular, as shown in Figures 10-96 (K) to 10-98 (O) and Figures 10-104 (K) to 10-106 (O), the first display area 135SG005F is displayed in white (whiteout), and during the whiteout period, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is turned off, and from the start of the reach performance of the super reach thereafter, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is turned on at brightness C2, thereby preventing the player from feeling uncomfortable due to changes in the light emission mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, and improving the player's interest in the game.

Furthermore, if the variable display that is the target of the winning flash effect is a variable display with a Super Reach β variation pattern, the movable body action suggestion effect is executed during the whiteout period, and the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is turned off in response to the execution of the movable body action suggestion effect, and then, in response to the execution of the movable body action effect (movement of the movable body 32 to the performance position), the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is lit at brightness C1 in a manner corresponding to the movable body action effect. In other words, the light emission mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is lit at brightness C1 with a period of turning off in response to the execution of the movable body action suggestion effect, so that it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable due to changes in these light emission modes, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

In addition, in the characteristic section 135SG, a form in which a dialogue preview effect can be executed as a preview effect that suggests that the variable display result will be a jackpot during the variable display has been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and as a modified example 135SG-3, the preview effect may be, in addition to a dialogue preview effect, a step-up effect in which the image displayed on the image display device 5 changes in stages, with the expected probability of a jackpot varying depending on the final number of stages of change, or a group preview effect in which a group of multiple characters crosses the image display device 5, etc.

In particular, when the step-up effect can be executed as modified example 135SG-3, as shown in Figures 10-108 (A) and 10-109 (A) to 10-113 (L), when the step-up effect is executed during a variable display in which the winning flash effect is not being executed, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F can be temporarily lit at brightness C2 at the timing when an image (step-up image) is displayed on the image display device 5 or when the image is gradually changed, thereby enhancing the effect of the step-up effect. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 10-108(B) and FIG. 10-114(A) to FIG. 10-118(F), when a step-up effect is executed during a variable display in which a winning flash effect is being executed, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is already blinking at brightness C2 and cycle T2, so the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is not turned on when the image (step-up image) is displayed on the image display device 5 or when the image is changed in stages. In other words, while the winning flash effect is being executed, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, which is already emitting light in a manner corresponding to the winning flash effect, may not be emitting light in a manner corresponding to the step-up effect.

As described above, in this modified example 135SG-3, when a step-up effect is started in the variable display while the winning flash effect is being executed, that is, when the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is already flashing at brightness C2 and cycle T2 as the winning flash effect and a step-up effect is started to light up the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, the flashing of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F as the winning flash effect is executed with priority, so it is possible to prevent the winning flash lamp 135SG009F from starting to light up in a manner corresponding to the step-up effect at an inappropriate timing, such as the end timing of the winning flash effect.

In addition, in the characteristic section 135SG, an example is given of a form in which the movable body 32 is not operated before the start of the reach performance of the Super Reach, but the present invention is not limited to this, and it is also possible to execute a movable body operation performance that moves the movable body 32 from a retracted position (e.g., a position above the image display device 5) to a performance position (e.g., a central front position when viewed from the front of the image display device 5) before the start of the reach performance of the Super Reach, thereby making it possible to notify the player that the reach performance of the Super Reach will be executed.

In this way, when it is possible to execute a movable body movement effect before the reach effect of the Super Reach, as shown in Figures 10-119(A) and 10-119(B) as modified example 135SG-4, when a winning flash effect is executed for the variable display of the Super Reach, the expected probability of a jackpot may differ depending on whether the light emission mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is changed from the mode corresponding to the winning flash effect to either the light emission mode corresponding to the movable body movement effect or the light emission mode corresponding to the reach effect of the Super Reach.

For example, as shown in Figure 10-119 (C), when the variable display result of the variable display that is the subject of the winning flash effect is a jackpot, at the start of the variable display, it is decided with a probability of 70% that the light emission mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F will be changed from the mode corresponding to the winning flash effect to the light emission mode corresponding to the movable body operation effect from the start timing of the movable body operation effect, and it is decided with a probability of 30% that the light emission mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F will be changed from the mode corresponding to the winning flash effect to the light emission mode corresponding to the reach effect from the start timing of the reach effect. Then, if the variable display result of the variable display that is the target of the winning flash performance is a miss, at the start of the variable display, it is decided that the light emission mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F will be changed from the mode corresponding to the winning flash performance to the light emission mode corresponding to the movable body operation performance at a rate of 30% from the start timing of the movable body operation performance, and that the light emission mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F will be changed from the mode corresponding to the winning flash performance to the light emission mode corresponding to the reach performance at a rate of 70% from the start timing of the reach performance.

When it is decided to change the light emission mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F from the mode corresponding to the winning flash presentation to the light emission mode corresponding to the movable body operation presentation or the light emission mode corresponding to the reach presentation, the process data corresponding to the decision is selected, and the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is controlled according to the contents of the process data corresponding to the process timer as the variable display progresses.

As described above, in this modified example 135SG-4, depending on the timing when the light emission mode corresponding to the winning flash effect of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F ends, it may be during the execution of the moving body movement effect or during the execution of the reach effect of the Super Reach, so the player can easily recognize whether the winning flash effect ends during the execution of the moving body movement effect or during the reach effect of the Super Reach. In particular, as shown in FIG. 10-119(C), the expectation of a big win differs when the light emission mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F changes from the light emission mode corresponding to the winning flash effect to the light emission mode corresponding to the moving body movement effect from the start timing of the moving body movement effect and when the light emission mode corresponding to the reach effect is changed from the light emission mode corresponding to the winning flash effect to the light emission mode corresponding to the moving body movement effect from the start timing of the reach effect, so that the player can pay attention to the end timing of the winning flash effect and increase the interest in the game.

In addition, in this modified example 135SG-4, an example is given of a form in which the probability of a jackpot varies depending on the timing when the blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F as the winning flash effect ends (changing to a light emission mode corresponding to the movable body operation effect or a light emission mode corresponding to the reach effect), but the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be possible to suggest a setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 depending on the timing when the blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F as the winning flash effect ends. This also makes it possible to draw the player's attention to the timing when the winning flash effect ends, increasing the player's interest in the game.

In addition, in this modified example 135SG-4, the light emission mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F can be changed either at the start of the movable body movement presentation during the variable display that is the target of the winning flash presentation, or at the start of the reach presentation of the super reach. Since the expectation of a jackpot differs between the case where the light emission mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is changed from the light emission mode corresponding to the winning flash presentation to the light emission mode corresponding to the movable body movement presentation from the start timing of the moving body movement presentation, and the case where the light emission mode is changed from the light emission mode corresponding to the reach presentation from the start timing of the reach presentation, the player can be drawn to the presentation that is being executed at the time when the light emission mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F changes, and the interest in the game can be increased.

In addition, in this modified example 135SG-4, in the variable display of the super reach, a form in which the movable body operation presentation can be executed before the start of the reach presentation of the super reach is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a movable body operation suggestion presentation that suggests the execution of the movable body operation presentation may be executed before the execution of the movable body operation presentation. In this way, when the movable body operation suggestion presentation can be executed before the execution of the movable body operation presentation, a case is provided in which the light emission mode of the winning time flash lamp 135SG009F is changed from the light emission mode corresponding to the winning time flash presentation to the light emission mode corresponding to the movable body operation suggestion presentation from the start timing of the movable body operation suggestion presentation, and the expectation of a jackpot may be different between the case in which the light emission mode of the winning time flash lamp 135SG009F is changed from the light emission mode corresponding to the winning time flash presentation to the light emission mode corresponding to the movable body operation suggestion presentation from the start timing of the movable body operation suggestion presentation and ... is changed to the light emission mode corresponding to the reach presentation from the start timing of the reach presentation. This makes it possible to draw the player's attention to the effects being performed when the lighting state of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F changes, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

Furthermore, in this modified example 135SG-4, an example is given of a form in which the likelihood of a jackpot differs depending on whether the light emission mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is changed from a light emission mode corresponding to the winning flash presentation to a light emission mode corresponding to the movable body movement suggestion presentation from the start timing of the movable body movement suggestion presentation, or whether the light emission mode is changed to a light emission mode corresponding to the reach presentation from the start timing of the reach presentation; however, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is also possible to provide a form in which the light emission (flashing) of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F ends at the start timing of the movable body movement suggestion presentation and a form in which it ends at the start timing of the reach presentation, so that the likelihood of a jackpot differs depending on when the light emission of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F ends. Furthermore, even if multiple timings are provided for stopping the blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F as part of the winning flash effect during one variable display, if the effect control CPU 120 is unable to stop the blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F due to static electricity or the like, the later winning flash effect, including the blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, can be ended again at the end of the variable display (the timing of receiving the pattern confirmation command), which is a timing that comes after these timings.

By doing this, even if the blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F as part of the winning flash effect cannot be ended at the start of the movable body operation suggestion effect or the start of the reach effect, the later winning flash effect, including the blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, can be ended at the end of the variable display that is the target of the winning flash effect.

In addition, in the characteristic section 135SG, the display patterns for the specific display (pending display and active display) are display pattern α, which has the lowest jackpot expectation and is a white circle, display pattern β, which has a higher jackpot expectation than display pattern α and is a blue circle, and display pattern γ, which has a higher jackpot expectation than display pattern β and is a red circle, but the present invention is not limited to this, and display patterns other than display pattern α to display pattern γ may be provided as the display patterns for the specific display.

For example, as shown in FIG. 10-120 as modified example 135SG-5, in addition to the above-mentioned display patterns α to γ, the display patterns of the specific display may include a display pattern δ that is a white flashing circle that may change to display pattern β or display pattern γ at any time during display as a pending display or active display (expectation of change to display pattern β or display pattern γ: low), and a display pattern ε that is a specific character-shaped circle that is more likely than display pattern δ to change to display pattern β or display pattern γ at any time during display as a pending display or active display (expectation of change to display pattern β or display pattern γ: high).

In other words, for the display patterns of the pending display and active display in variant 135SG-5, among display patterns α to γ, display pattern γ (red display) is set to have the highest jackpot expectation, and display pattern α (white display) is set to have the lowest jackpot expectation. On the other hand, for the jackpot expectation of display patterns δ and ε when there is no change to display pattern β or display pattern γ, the jackpot expectation may be set lower than that of display pattern α, or may be set higher than that of display pattern α and lower than that of display pattern β.

In addition, in this modified example 135SG-5, display pattern δ and display pattern ε are provided as hold display and active display patterns that may change to display pattern β and display pattern γ, but the present invention is not limited to this, and there may also be cases where display pattern α changes to display pattern β or display pattern γ at a lower rate than display pattern δ and display pattern ε. Furthermore, there may also be cases where the hold display and active display of display pattern β changes to display pattern γ.

Furthermore, in the characteristic section 135SG, an example was given of a form in which the execution or non-execution of the pending display preview performance (a performance in which the pending display or active display is displayed in display pattern β or display pattern β) and the display pattern are determined independently of the decision to execute the flash performance when a prize is won, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the determination of the execution or non-execution of the pending display preview performance and the display pattern may be determined in relation to the decision to execute the flash performance when a prize is won.

For example, as shown in FIG. 10-120 for the aforementioned modified example 135SG-5, when it is decided to execute a winning flash effect based on the start winning, the display mode of the pending display or active display based on the start winning may be decided as follows: display pattern ε at the highest rate, display pattern δ at a lower rate than display pattern ε, display pattern γ at a lower rate than display pattern δ, display pattern β at a lower rate than display pattern γ, and display pattern α at the lowest rate (display pattern decision rate when deciding to execute a winning flash effect: display pattern ε > display pattern δ > display pattern γ > display pattern β > display pattern α).

As described above, display patterns α to ε are provided as the display modes for the special displays (pending display and active display), and when the special display is displayed as display pattern δ or display pattern ε, the probability that the winning flash effect will also be executed is higher than when the special display is displayed as display pattern β or display pattern γ. Therefore, by executing the winning flash effect, the player can be drawn to the special display, and the player can also be drawn to whether the special display will change from display pattern δ or display pattern ε to display pattern β or display pattern γ, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

Furthermore, display pattern α is a display pattern in which the specific display is displayed as a white circle, display pattern β is a display pattern in which the specific display is displayed as a blue circle, display pattern γ is a display pattern in which the specific display is displayed as a red circle, and display pattern δ is a display pattern in which the specific display is displayed as a flashing white circle, so that the player can easily identify the difference between the specific displays by the display color and flashing pattern.

In addition, in this modified example 135SG-5, when the specific display is displayed in display pattern δ or display pattern ε, there is no description of the rate at which the display pattern of the specific display changes to display pattern β or display pattern γ depending on whether or not a flash effect is executed when a prize is won. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the specific display is displayed in display pattern δ or display pattern ε, the rate at which the display pattern of the specific display changes to display pattern β or display pattern γ may differ depending on whether or not a flash effect is executed when a prize is won. In this way, it is possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not a flash effect is executed when the specific display is displayed in display pattern δ or display pattern ε, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

In addition, in this modified example 135SG-5, a display pattern δ that flashes white is exemplified as a special mode of the specific display in the present invention, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the special mode of the specific display in the present invention (display pattern δ) may be a color other than white, blue, and red, which are the normal and special modes of the specific display in the present invention (for example, purple, black, etc.).

In addition, in this modified example 135SG-5, a form is exemplified in which a specific display is displayed in display pattern δ, thereby suggesting that the specific display will change to display pattern β or display pattern γ, but the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be possible to execute an action presentation that can change a specific display displayed in display pattern δ to display pattern β or display pattern γ by acting on the specific display.

In particular, when an action effect is used, a plurality of action effects with different ratios of changing the specific display displayed in display pattern δ to display pattern β or display pattern γ may be provided as the action effect (for example, a first action effect that can change the specific display displayed in display pattern δ to display pattern β or display pattern γ by acting on the specific display displayed in display pattern δ, and a second action effect that has a different performance ratio from the first action effect and can change the specific display displayed in display pattern δ to display pattern β or display pattern γ at a higher ratio than the first action effect) and when the second action effect is executed, a winning flash effect may be executed at a higher ratio than when the first action effect is executed.

By doing this, it is possible to draw the player's attention to whether the action performance will be executed as the first action performance or the second action performance, and by executing the flash performance when a prize is won, it is possible to heighten the player's sense of anticipation that the action performance will be executed as the second action performance.

In addition, in this modified example 135SG-5, when the special display is displayed in display pattern ε, the probability that the flash effect will be executed when a prize is won is higher than when the special display is displayed in display pattern δ. Therefore, when the special display is displayed in display pattern ε and the flash effect is executed when a prize is won, the player's attention can be drawn to the change in the display pattern of the special display to display pattern β or display pattern γ, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

Moreover, in the above-mentioned modified example 135SG-5, a display pattern ε that displays a character is provided as the display pattern of the specific display (pending display and active display), and an example is given in which the display pattern of the specific display can be changed to display pattern β or display pattern γ by executing an action performance on the character as the specific display, but the present invention is not limited to this, and as modified example 135SG-6, a character as the specific display can act on another character, and as a result of this action, the display pattern of the specific display can be changed to display pattern β or display pattern γ.

Specifically, as shown in Figures 10-121 (A) and 10-121 (B), when the number of first special reserved memories is three and is being variably displayed, a winning entry into the first start port (start winning) occurs, and based on the start winning, the display pattern of the reserved display based on the start winning is determined to be display pattern ε as a reserved display preview performance, and an ally character is displayed as the fourth reserved display in the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D, and the active display displayed in the active display area 135SG005A changes to an enemy character (see Figure 10-121 (B-1)).

In this state, the variable display ends and a new variable display begins; that is, as shown in Figures 10-122(A) and 10-122(B), when the ally character (pending display of display pattern ε) displayed in the first pending memory display area 135SG005D moves from the display position of the fourth pending display to the display position of the third pending display, the ally character acts (shoots) on the enemy character displayed in the active display area 135SG005A.

Next, each time the variable display ends and a new variable display starts, that is, as shown in Figures 10-122(C) and 10-122(D), when the ally character displayed in the first pending memory display area 135SG005D moves from the display position of the third pending display to the display position of the second pending display, and when the ally character displayed in the first pending memory display area 135SG005D moves from the display position of the second pending display to the display position of the first pending display, the ally character acts (shoots) on the enemy character displayed in the active display area 135SG005A.

Furthermore, when the variable display ends and the variable display that is the subject of the pending display preview performance begins, the ally character displayed in the display position of the first pending display in the first pending memory display area 135SG005D moves to the active display area 135SG005A, and the ally character directly acts on the enemy character within the active display area 135SG005A (a battle performance between the ally character and the enemy character is executed).

As shown in Figures 10-123(G) and 10-123(H), if an ally character wins as a result of the battle performance, the ally character changes to an active display of display pattern β or display pattern γ in the active display area 135SG005A. On the other hand, as shown in Figures 10-123(I) and 10-123(J), if an ally character is defeated as a result of the battle performance, the enemy character or ally character changes to an active display of display pattern α in the active display area 135SG005A.

In addition, in this modified example 135SG-6, when the reserved display is displayed in display pattern ε, an ally character as the reserved display of the display pattern ε can defeat an enemy character in the active display area 135SG005A, thereby changing the active display of the ally character to the active display of display pattern β or display pattern γ. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the reserved display is displayed in display pattern ε, the ally character as the reserved display can be changed to the reserved display of display pattern β or display pattern γ by defeating an enemy character when the reserved display is displayed in the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D.

In addition, when the pending display is displayed in display pattern ε, the pending display of display pattern ε may be changed to the pending display (or active display) of display pattern β or display pattern γ at a higher rate when both winning flash effects are executed than when neither winning flash effect is executed. In this way, not only can the player be drawn to the outcome of the battle between the ally character and enemy character as the pending display of display pattern ε, but the player can also be drawn to whether or not the winning flash effect is being executed during the battle, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

Moreover, in the modified example 135SG-5 and the modified example 135SG-6, display patterns for the pending display and active display are exemplified by adding display pattern δ and display pattern ε to display pattern α to display pattern γ described in characteristic part 135SG, but when the pending display and active display are displayed using display pattern δ or display pattern ε, specific display display start performance A or specific display display start performance B can be executed in the same manner as when the pending display and active display are displayed using display pattern α to display pattern γ.

More specifically, when the reserved display or active display is displayed in display pattern δ, the specific display display start performance A (see FIG. 10-19) is executed as in the case of display pattern α, and when the reserved display or active display is displayed in display pattern ε, the specific display display start performance B (see FIG. 10-20) is executed as in the case of display pattern β or display pattern γ, or a specific display display start performance in which the period during which the display of the reserved display or active display is completed is longer than that of specific display display start performance A and shorter than that of specific display display start performance B is executed. In this way, when the reserved display or active display is displayed in display pattern δ or display pattern ε, the player will be able to recognize the winning flash performance sound and the light emission of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F from a timing before the display of the reserved display or active display is completed, as in the characteristic part 135SG.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 135SG, a form was exemplified in which the winning flash effect is achieved by displaying a silhouette image 135SG005S on the image display device 5 together with the blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, but the present invention is not limited to this. As a modified example 135SG-7, the display mode of the silhouette image 135SG005S displayed on the image display device 5 may be changed in stages in accordance with the progress of the winning flash effect.

For example, as shown in Figures 10-124(A) and 10-124(B), if a win (start win) occurs in the first start port during variable display when there are three first special chart reserved memories, and a decision is made based on the start win to execute the reserved display notice performance and the winning flash performance, the previous winning flash performance will be started as shown in Figure 10-124(B).

As for the flash effect at the time of winning in the previous period, first, as shown in Fig. 10-124 (B), the speaker 8L, 8R starts outputting the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning at volume V1 (V1>V2), and the winning flash lamp 135SG009F and the game effect lamp 9 are temporarily turned off. Then, as shown in Fig. 10-125 (C) and Fig. 10-125 (D), the image display device 5 starts displaying the effect image 135SG005E around the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, and starts blinking control at cycle T1 for the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacca lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d, stick lamp 135SG00X, and button lamp 135SG009Y. In addition, with this blinking control, each lamp is lit at brightness C1, which is higher than brightness C2.

In addition, when the previous winning flash performance starts, as shown in Figures 10-125 (D), 10-126 (E), and 10-126 (F), an animation of character A appearing from the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, which is controlled to blink, is displayed as the specific display start performance B described above, along with an animation of character A moving to the first pending memory display area 135SG005D. Then, after character A moves to the first pending memory display area 135SG005D, an animation of character A attacking (acting) on the position in the first pending memory display area 135SG005D where the pending display is displayed (the position where the fourth pending display is displayed in the case of this feature part 135SG) is displayed.

After character A acts on the first pending memory display area 135SG005D, an appearance animation is displayed at the affected position, in which the pending display that is the subject of the ongoing winning flash performance (previous winning flash performance) gradually appears from bottom to top (see Figures 10-20 (D-1) to 10-20 (D-5)). Note that the pending display that has completed its appearance animation in the first pending memory display area 135SG005D transitions to a rotating display like other pending displays, as a special display rotating display performance.

When the early winning flash effect ends, the late winning flash effect starts from the end timing. As shown in Fig. 10-127 (G) and Fig. 10-127 (H), the speakers 8L and 8R start to output the winning flash effect corresponding sound at volume V2, and the winning flash lamp 135SG009F starts to flash at brightness C2 and cycle T2 (cycle T2 > cycle T1), the game effect lamps 9 excluding the stick lamp 135SG009X and the button lamp 135SG009Y start to flash at brightness C2 and cycle T2 (flashing in the manner shown in Fig. 10-27 (A) to Fig. 10-27 (D)), and the image display device 5 starts to display the silhouette image 135SG005S of character A around the winning flash lamp 135SG009F at regular intervals.

The flashing of the game effect lamps 9, excluding the stick lamp 135SG009X and the button lamp 135SG009Y, at brightness C2 and cycle T2 is performed in a color corresponding to the background image of the image display device 5 (for example, a blue-based gradation if the background image is a daytime image, a red-based gradation if the background image is an evening image, etc.).

The blinking period of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, which is the period T2, is longer than the previously mentioned period T1, but shorter than the previously mentioned period T0 (lamp blinking period length: T0>T2>T1). Note that the stick lamp 135SG009X and button lamp 135SG009Y are not lit during the execution of the later winning flash performance.

Also, as shown in Figures 10-128 (I) and 10-128 (J), when the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the image display device 5, the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed in a state where a transparent black image 135SG005B is superimposed over the entire first display region 135SG005F of the image display device 5, excluding the active display area 135SG005A.

As shown in FIG. 10-128(J), FIG. 10-129(K) and FIG. 10-129(L), when the variable display ends based on the reception of the pattern determination command, the decorative pattern and the small pattern 135SG005M are derived and displayed in a combination indicating a loss on the image display device 5 (displayed with the variable display stopped), and the output of the variable display corresponding sound from the speakers 8L and 8R stops. At this time, the active display is erased from the active display area 135SG005A. Note that the flash effect at the time of late winning in this modified example 135SG-7 is executed regardless of whether or not it is the pattern determination period. That is, as shown in FIG. 10-128(J), even during the pattern determination period, the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed with the black image 135SG005B superimposed on it on the image display device 5, and the winning flash effect corresponding sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R at volume V2.

When the pattern determination period ends, a new variable display begins. At this time, in the image display device 5, the reserved display displayed at the top of the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D moves to the active display area 135SG005A as the active display, and the display positions of the remaining reserved displays displayed in the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D are shifted one space to the right. In addition, output of the variable display compatible sound from the speakers 8L and 8R at volume V2 also begins.

Incidentally, in this variable display, as shown in FIG. 10-129(K) and FIG. 10-129(L), the silhouette image 135SG005S displayed together with the black image 135SG005B on the image display device 5 may be displayed larger than in the previous variable display. By displaying the silhouette image 135SG005S larger than in the previous variable display in this way, the silhouette image is displayed overlapping the active display area 135SG005A.

As shown in FIG. 10-130(M) and FIG. 10-130(N), when the variable display ends based on the reception of the pattern determination command, the decorative pattern and the small pattern 135SG005M are derived and displayed in a combination indicating a loss on the image display device 5 (displayed with the variable display stopped), and the output of the variable display corresponding sound from the speakers 8L and 8R is stopped. At this time, the active display is erased from the active display area 135SG005A. The flash effect at the time of the later winning is executed even during the pattern determination period. That is, as shown in FIG. 10-130(N), the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed with the black image 135SG005B overlapping on the image display device 5 even during the pattern determination period. In particular, the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed overlapping with the active display area 135SG005A. In addition, the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of the winning is output from the speakers 8L and 8R at the volume V2.

In this modified example 135SG-7, either of two silhouette images 135SG005S of different sizes can be displayed as the silhouette image 135SG005S displayed on the image display device 5 as a flash effect when a prize is won, and when the larger sized silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed, the silhouette image 135SG005S and the active display area 135SG005A are displayed overlapping each other. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the larger sized silhouette image 135SG005S and the active display area 135SG005A may be displayed overlapping each other only when the variable display that is the target of the flash effect when a prize is won is executed. This makes it easier for the player to recognize the variable display that corresponds to the flash effect when a prize is won, and the silhouette image 135SG005S hides the active display area 135SG005A, i.e., the active display that corresponds to the flash effect when a prize is won, providing the player with a sense of surprise and increasing their interest in the game.

In addition, in this modified example 135SG-7, silhouette images 135SG005S of different sizes can be displayed on the image display device 5 as a flash effect when a prize is won, and the overlapping manner between the silhouette image 135SG005S and the active display area 135SG005A differs depending on the size of the silhouette image 135SG005S displayed, thereby increasing interest in the game.

In addition, in this modified example 135SG-7, the silhouette image 135SG005S and the active display area 135SG005A may or may not overlap depending on the size of the silhouette image 135SG005S displayed on the image display device 5, but the present invention is not limited to this, and it is also possible to provide a case where the overlapping area between the silhouette image 135SG005S and the active display area 135SG005A differs depending on the size of the silhouette image 135SG005S displayed on the image display device 5 (for example, a case where only a part of the active display area 135SG005A overlaps with the silhouette image 135SG005S, a case where the entire active display area 135SG005A overlaps with the silhouette image 135SG005S, etc.).

In addition, in this modified example 135SG-7, there is a case where the silhouette image 135SG005S and the active display area 135SG005A overlap depending on the size of the silhouette image 135SG005S displayed on the image display device 5, but the present invention is not limited to this, and before the variable display that is the target of the winning flash performance is started, the silhouette image 135SG005S may be displayed so as to overlap the pending display that is the target of the winning flash performance displayed in the first pending memory display area 135SG005D, and during the execution of the variable display that is the target of the winning flash performance, the silhouette image 135SG005S may be displayed so as to overlap the active display that is the target of the winning flash performance displayed in the active display area 135SG005A. This makes it easier for players to recognize the pending and active displays that correspond to the winning flash effects, and because the silhouette image 135SG005S hides not only the pending displays but also the active displays, it adds an extra element of surprise to the player, increasing their interest in the game.

In addition, in this modified example 135SG-7, the display of silhouette image 135SG005S as a flash effect when a prize is won is exemplified as an example of a form in which only one of the pending display and the active display is hidden by the display of silhouette image 135SG005S as a flash effect when a prize is won, but the present invention is not limited to this, and there may be cases in which both the pending display and the active display are hidden by the display of silhouette image 135SG005S as a flash effect when a prize is won.

In addition, in this modified example 135SG-7, a form in which the silhouette image 135SG005S as the winning flash effect can be displayed overlapping the active display area 135SG005A or the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and when a pseudo consecutive effect is executed in the variable display during the execution of the winning flash effect as exemplified in the characteristic part 135SG, the silhouette image 135SG005S as the winning flash effect can be displayed overlapping the special pattern (see FIG. 10-40, etc.) that stops in the "middle" decorative pattern display area 5C when the decorative pattern temporarily stops. By doing so, the special pattern for notifying the temporary stop is hidden by the silhouette image 135SG005S as the winning flash effect, which gives the player an element of surprise and increases his interest in the game.

In addition, in this modified example 135SG-7, as an example of a reversible display effect in the present invention, a form in which the special pattern stops in the "medium" decorative pattern display area 5C is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and as a reversible display effect, an image different from the special pattern can be displayed on the image display device 5, and a silhouette image 135SG005S as a flash effect when a prize is won can be displayed overlapping with that image.

In addition, in the characteristic section 135SG, if a start winning occurs in the first start port during the execution of the reach performance of the Super Reach, the execution of the winning flash performance based on the start winning is not decided (determined not to be executed), but the present invention is not limited to this. As a modified example 135SG-8, if a start winning occurs in the first start port during the execution of the variable display, the remaining period of the variable display may be specified, and if the specified period is less than or equal to the execution period of the previous winning flash performance, the execution of the winning flash performance is not decided (determined not to be executed). By doing so, it is possible to prevent the specific display (holding display or active display) of the target of the winning flash performance from becoming difficult to understand by executing the winning flash performance (previous winning flash performance) when the remaining period of the variable display is short, such as less than or equal to the execution period of the previous winning flash performance.

In addition, in this modified example 135SG-8, an example is given of a form in which the decision as to whether or not to execute the winning flash effect is based on the remaining period of the variable display and the execution period of the previous winning flash effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the decision as to whether or not to execute the winning flash effect may also be based on the remaining period of the variable display and a period other than the execution period of the previous winning flash effect (for example, a period of 5 seconds, 10 seconds, etc.).

Furthermore, in this modified example 135SG-8, when a start winning occurs in the first start port while the variable display is being executed, the remaining period of the variable display is identified, and if the identified period is less than or equal to the execution period of the previous winning flash effect, the execution of the winning flash effect is not decided; however, the present invention is not limited to this, and if the identified period is less than or equal to the execution period of the previous winning flash effect, the winning flash effect may be executed from the start timing of the next variable display, provided that the variable display result of the variable display is a miss. In this way, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the Super Reach Reach effect and the winning flash effect due to the overlapping execution of the Super Reach Reach effect and the winning flash effect.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 135SG, the light emission modes of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F in the winning flash performance are two light emission modes: blinking at brightness C1 and cycle T1 (light emission mode in the early winning flash performance) and blinking at brightness C2 and cycle T2 (light emission mode in the late winning flash performance). On the other hand, the light emission modes of the start port lamp 135SG009S in the start port lamp light emission performance are blue light emission at brightness C2 corresponding to the display pattern β and red light emission at brightness C2 corresponding to the display pattern γ. In other words, the characteristic portion 135SG exemplifies a form in which the number of light emission modes of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F in the winning flash performance is the same as the number of light emission modes of the starting gate lamp 135SG009S in the starting gate lamp light emission performance, but the present invention is not limited to this, and as a modified example 135SG-9, the number of light emission modes of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F in the winning flash performance may be different from the number of light emission modes of the starting gate lamp 135SG009S in the starting gate lamp light emission performance.

In particular, as shown in modified example 135SG-5, by providing display pattern δ and display pattern ε as display patterns for the pending display and active display, and providing light emission modes corresponding to display pattern δ and display pattern ε as the light emission modes of the start gate lamp 135SG009S in the start gate lamp light emission performance, the number of light emission modes of the start gate lamp 135SG009S in the start gate lamp light emission performance may be made greater than the number of light emission modes of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F in the winning flash performance. In this way, the variation in the light emission of the start gate lamp 135SG009S is increased, thereby increasing interest in the game.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 135SG, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is illuminated as a winning flash effect, and the starting gate lamp 135SG009S is illuminated as a starting gate lamp illumination effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as a modified example 135SG-10, the illumination area where the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is illuminated as a winning flash effect may be set larger than the illumination area where the starting gate lamp 135SG009S is illuminated as a starting gate lamp illumination effect.

As shown in FIG. 10-28, in the case where it is decided to execute both the winning flash effect and the pending display notice effect based on the start winning, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F emits light from the time the starting winning occurs until the start of the reach effect of the variable display that is the target of the starting winning flash effect, while the starting gate lamp 135SG009S emits light from the time the starting winning occurs until the end of the variable display that is the target of the pending display notice effect (the variable display that is the target of the winning flash effect). Therefore, by applying the modified example 135SG-10, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game due to the winning flash lamp 135SG009F emitting light in response to the winning flash effect for an excessively long period of time, while maintaining the player's anticipation that the light emission mode of the starting gate lamp 135SG009S will control the jackpot game state.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 135SG, the start gate lamp 135SG009S is lit without blinking as the start gate lamp light-emitting effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the start gate lamp 135SG009S may be blinked as the start gate lamp light-emitting effect. Furthermore, when the start gate lamp 135SG009S is blinked as the start gate lamp light-emitting effect in this way, the blinking cycle of the start gate lamp 135SG009S may be made different from the blinking cycle (cycle T2) of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F as the winning flash effect. By making the blinking cycle of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F and the blinking cycle of the start gate lamp 135SG009S different in this way, it is possible to draw the player's attention to both the blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F and the blinking of the start gate lamp 135SG009S, and to increase the interest in the game.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 10-28, the characteristic portion 135SG exemplifies a form in which the main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacca lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d, etc. are temporarily turned off when a flash effect is executed when a prize is won, but the present invention is not limited to this. As a modified example 135SG-11, when a flash effect is executed when a prize is won, the brightness of the backlight etc. built into the image display device 5 may be temporarily lowered to reduce the visibility of the image displayed on the image display device 5, and then the flash effect when a prize is won may be started. In this way, when a flash effect is executed when a prize is won, the visibility of the image displayed on the image display device 5 is reduced, making it easier for the player to recognize the start of the flash effect when a prize is won.

In addition, in this modified example 135SG-11, the visibility of the image displayed on the image display device 5 is reduced by reducing the brightness of the backlight etc. built into the image display device 5, that is, the brightness of the image display device 5 is changed to change the image display device 5 to a low visibility state with lower visibility than the previous state, but the present invention is not limited to this. In addition to reducing the brightness (brightness) of the image display device 5, other forms of reducing the visibility of the image displayed on the image display device 5 may include temporarily stopping the display of the image on the image display device 5, operating the movable body 32 in front of the image display device 5, repeatedly operating the image display device 5 itself in the up and down direction, increasing the brightness of the game effect lamp 9 to relatively reduce the visibility of the image displayed on the image display device 5, etc.

In other words, the "low visibility state" in the present invention includes a state in which the visibility of the image display device 5 is reduced compared to the immediately preceding state, and includes a state in which the visibility of the image is reduced by a method other than a reduction in the brightness of the image display device 5.

In addition, in the characteristic part 135SG, as shown in FIG. 10-28, when it is decided to execute the winning flash effect in response to the start winning, the winning flash effect corresponding sound starts to be output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and then the winning flash lamp 135SG009F starts to blink. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as a modified example 135SG-12, when it is decided to execute the winning flash effect in response to the start winning, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F starts to blink, and then the winning flash effect corresponding sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the appearance animation of the pending display and active display is completed. In this way, the player can be made to quickly recognize that the start winning has occurred and that the winning flash effect has been decided to be executed by the blinking (light emission) of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

In addition, in this modified example 135SG-12, a form has been exemplified in which the winning flash lamp 135SG009F starts blinking, and then the winning flash effect corresponding sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the appearance animation of the pending display and active display is completed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and it is also possible to have the winning flash lamp 135SG009F start blinking, and then the winning flash effect corresponding sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the appearance animation of the pending display and active display start.

In addition, in the characteristic part 135SG, as shown in FIG. 10-28, during the execution period of the early winning flash performance, the speakers 8L and 8R output the winning flash performance corresponding sound at volume V1, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F blinks at brightness C1 and cycle T1, and the image display device 5 displays the effect image 135SG005E. During the execution period of the late winning flash performance, the speakers 8L and 8R output the winning flash performance corresponding sound at volume V2, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F blinks at brightness C2 and cycle T2, and the image display device 5 displays the effect image 135SG005E. The above example shows a form in which the display of the win-time flash effect is repeatedly executed, but the present invention is not limited to this. As a modified example 135SG-13, even during the execution period of the later winning flash effect, when the variable display that is the target of the winning flash effect is started, the following may be temporarily executed: output of the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect from speakers 8L, 8R at volume V1, flashing of winning flash lamp 135SG009F at brightness C1 and cycle T1, and display of effect image 135SG005E on image display device 5, just as during the execution period of the earlier winning flash effect. By doing this, even during the execution of the later winning flash effect, the winning flash effect corresponding sound is output from speakers 8L and 8R at volume V1, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F flashes at brightness C1 and cycle T1, and the effect image 135SG005E is displayed on the image display device 5, just like in the earlier winning flash effect, making it easier for the player to recognize that the variable display that is the target of the winning flash effect is about to begin, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

In this modified example 135SG-13, even during the execution of the later winning flash performance, when the variable display that is the target of the winning flash performance starts, the speakers 8L and 8R output the winning flash performance corresponding sound at volume V1, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F blinks at brightness C1 and cycle T1, and the image display device 5 displays the effect image 135SG005E temporarily, just as during the execution of the earlier winning flash performance. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the variable display that is the target of the winning flash performance starts during the execution of the later winning flash performance, only one or two of the following may be executed: the speakers 8L and 8R output the winning flash performance corresponding sound at volume V1, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F blinks at brightness C1 and cycle T1, and the image display device 5 displays the effect image 135SG005E.

In addition, the pachinko gaming machine 1 in this specification is one in which the probability of winning varies depending on the set value (Figs. 1 to 9), one in which a pending display notice effect and a winning flash effect can be executed based on the initial winning, and the change in the light emission mode as the winning flash effect varies depending on the lamp (characteristic section 135SG, Figs. 10-1 to 10-68), one in which the winning flash effect is stopped during the period in which the variable display pattern is determined (variant 135SG-1, Figs. 10-69 to 10-89), one in which the reach effect of super reaches with different jackpot expectations can be executed and one in which a movable body operation effect can be executed before a reach effect with a high jackpot expectation, and when the movable body operation effect is executed, the start of the movable body operation effect A variation 2 in which the light emission mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is changed to a light emission mode corresponding to the movable body operation presentation from the timing (Fig. 10-90 to Fig. 10-107), a step-up presentation can be executed during variable display, and when the step-up presentation is executed when the winning flash presentation is not being executed, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is caused to emit light in a mode corresponding to the step-up presentation, while when the step-up presentation is executed during the execution of the winning flash presentation, the light emission mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is not changed from the light emission mode corresponding to the winning flash presentation (variation 135SG-3, Fig. 10-108 to Fig. 10-118). , a movable body operation presentation can be executed before the start of the reach presentation of the super reach, and the expectation of a big win differs between the case where the light emission mode of the winning time flash lamp 135SG009F changes from the light emission mode corresponding to the winning time flash presentation to the light emission mode corresponding to the movable body operation presentation from the start timing of the winning time flash presentation to the light emission mode corresponding to the movable body operation presentation from the start timing of the reach presentation and the case where the light emission mode changes to the light emission mode corresponding to the reach presentation from the start timing of the reach presentation (variant example 135SG-4, FIG. 10-119), display patterns α to ε are provided as display modes for the reserved display and active display, and in response to the execution of the winning time flash presentation being determined by the start winning, any of the display patterns is selected as the display pattern for the reserved display and active display. The present invention discloses a pachinko machine that has a different ratio of when the reserved display pattern is determined (Modification 135SG-5, FIG. 10-120), when display pattern ε is determined as the display pattern for the reserved display, the display pattern ε changes to one of display patterns α to γ in response to the execution of the action presentation (Modification 135SG-6, FIG. 10-121 to FIG. 10-123), and in which the display mode of silhouette image 135SG005S displayed on image display device 5 changes in response to the progress of the winning flash presentation (Modification 135SG-7, FIG. 10-124 to FIG. 10-130). However, the present invention may be implemented by combining two or more of these features and modifications.

In addition, in the characteristic section 135SG, a pachinko gaming machine 1 is given as an example of a gaming machine that performs a predetermined game, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the gaming machine that performs a predetermined game may be a pachinko gaming machine 1, a slot machine, or a general game machine, as long as it at least performs a predetermined game.

The present invention is not limited to the above description. Furthermore, the specific configuration includes the above-mentioned embodiment and other examples described below, as well as modifications and additions that do not deviate from the gist of the present invention.

Furthermore, among the configurations shown in the embodiment and each modified example described above, and the configurations shown in the embodiment and each modified example described below, all or part of the configurations may be combined in any manner.

The above-mentioned and hereinafter-described embodiments disclosed herein should be considered as illustrative in all respects and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is indicated by the claims, not by the above-mentioned and hereinafter-described descriptions, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope of the claims.

The gaming machine of the present invention is also a gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can execute a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player,
Light-emitting means capable of emitting light (for example, a main lamp 9a, a frame lamp 9b, an attacca lamp 9c, a movable body lamp 9d, a winning flash lamp 135SG009F),
A display means (e.g., an image display device 5) capable of displaying a specific display (e.g., a hold display and an active display) corresponding to the variable display;
A presentation execution means (e.g., a presentation control CPU 120) capable of executing a specific display presentation (e.g., a portion that displays a reserved display or an active display in one of display patterns α to γ) that displays the specific display based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (e.g., the occurrence of a start winning), and a specific light emission presentation (e.g., a flash presentation at the time of winning) that causes the light emitting means to emit light;
Equipped with
The effect execution means executes the specific light-emitting effect so that the light emitted by the light-emitting means is recognizable to the player before the display of the specific display is completed in the specific display effect (for example, as shown in Figs. 10-28, 10-29(A) to 10-32(H), and 10-49(A) to 10-50(D), a portion that lights up the winning flash lamp 135SG009F before the display of the pending display is completed),
The proportion of the game being controlled to the advantageous state is higher when the specific light-emitting effect is executed than when the specific light-emitting effect is not executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-24, when the flash effect at the time of winning is executed, the proportion of the game being controlled to the jackpot game state is higher than when the flash effect at the time of winning is not executed),
The light emitting means includes a first light emitting means (e.g., a winning flash lamp 135SG009F) and a second light emitting means different from the first light emitting means (e.g., a main lamp 9a, a frame lamp 9b, an attacca lamp 9c, and a movable body lamp 9d),
The first light-emitting means emits light in a manner corresponding to the specific light-emitting effect during a first period from the start of the specific light-emitting effect to a predetermined timing (e.g., a period from the start of the early-stage winning flash effect to the end timing of the early-stage winning flash effect) and a second period from the predetermined timing to a specific timing of the variable display that is the target of the specific light-emitting effect (e.g., a period from the start of the late-stage winning flash effect to the start timing of the reach effect of the variable display that is the target of the winning flash effect) (e.g., as shown in FIG. 10-28, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F flashes with brightness C1 and cycle T1 during the execution period of the early-stage winning flash effect, and flashes with brightness C2 and cycle T2 during the execution period of the late-stage winning flash effect).
The second light-emitting means emits light in a manner corresponding to the specific light-emitting performance during the first period, and emits light in a manner corresponding to the variable display being executed during the second period (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-28, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacca lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d flash with a brightness of C1 and a cycle of T1 during the execution period of the early winning flash performance, and flash with a brightness of C2 and a cycle of T0 during the execution period of the late winning flash performance).
The specific display performance is composed of an appearance performance section where the appearance performance of the specific display is executed (for example, as shown in Fig. 10-15, Fig. 10-30(D) to Fig. 10-32(H), Fig. 10-49(B) to Fig. 10-50(D), a section where an appearance animation is displayed in which the reserved display or active display gradually appears from the bottom to the top as a result of the performance control CPU 120 executing a specific display display start performance execution process), and a periodic performance section where a periodic performance is executed in which the display mode of the specific display periodically changes at a predetermined position after the appearance performance (for example, as shown in Fig. 10-15, Fig. 10-30(D) to Fig. 10-32(H), Fig. 10-49(B) to Fig. 10-50(D), a section where the reserved display or active display is displayed as a rotation animation as a result of the performance control CPU 120 executing a specific display rotation display performance execution process),
moreover,
A group performance execution means (for example, a group preview performance) for executing a group performance that displays an image in which a plurality of characters progress in a group (for example, a group preview execution process shown in FIG. 47, a six-person group preview performance shown in FIG. 94 to FIG. 100) is provided;
The display period of the image in the group performance includes a first display period, a second display period, and a third display period (for example, the period shown in FIG. 59 ),
The first display period is a period from when the display of the first character in the group performance begins, when a new character is displayed, until the display of any character ends first (for example, the period shown in FIG. 94 (a23) to FIG. 96 (a30)),
The second display period is a period longer than the first display period, during which a state in which a new character is displayed and the display of a currently displayed character is terminated continues (for example, the period shown in FIG. 97 (a31) to FIG. 98 (a36)),
The third display period is a period during which the display of the currently displayed character is terminated without any new display of the character (for example, the period shown in FIG. 99 (a37) to FIG. 100 (a42)),
An example of such a gaming machine is one in which, during the first display period, a first situation in which a part of the first displayed character is displayed changes to a second situation in which a part of the first displayed character is displayed below the first situation and a part of the second displayed character is displayed (for example, the examples shown in Figures 57 and 94).
According to this feature, since the light emitting means emits light before the display of the specific display is completed, it becomes easier for the player to recognize the specific display that is the target of the specific light emitting performance, and since the specific light emitting performance can be made more prominent by causing not only the first light emitting means but also the second light emitting means to emit light in a manner corresponding to the specific light emitting performance during the first period of the specific light emitting performance, it becomes even easier for the player to recognize the specific display that is the target of the specific light emitting performance.Furthermore, the group performance can be executed more preferably.

In other words, the light emission mode of the light emitting means makes it possible to make the gaming machine easy for the player to recognize the specific display that is the target of the specific light emission effect, and in the first display period, the first situation in which a part of the first displayed character is displayed changes to a second situation in which a part of the first displayed character is displayed more than in the first situation and a part of the second displayed character is displayed, and then in the second display period, which is longer than the first display period, a new character is displayed and the display of the displayed character ends, and this state continues. By eliminating the situation in which only a single character is displayed, it is possible to reliably inform the player that it is a group effect, and the start and continuation of the group effect are preferably executed, thereby increasing the interest of the group effect. In other words, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that, when installed in an amusement facility, makes the effect easy for players to understand and is likely to increase the interest of the effect.

In addition, a light-emitting effect using a light-emitting means may be associated with a character group effect. For example, when a character group effect is executed, the light-emitting means may be made to emit light in a manner that corresponds to the group preview (for example, as the character group moves from left to right, the light-emitting means may also emit light from left to right). This allows for an effective effect to be executed, increasing interest.

Furthermore, as another example of a gaming machine capable of increasing interest, there is a gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is favorable to a player when the display result of the variable display becomes a specific display result,
A group performance execution means (for example, a group preview performance) for executing a group performance that displays an image in which a plurality of characters progress in a group (for example, a group preview execution process shown in FIG. 47, a six-person group preview performance shown in FIG. 94 to FIG. 100) is provided;
The display period of the image in the group performance includes a first display period, a second display period, and a third display period (for example, the period shown in FIG. 59 ),
The first display period is a period from when the display of the first character in the group performance begins, when a new character is displayed, until the display of any character ends first (for example, the period shown in FIG. 94 (a23) to FIG. 96 (a30)),
The second display period is a period longer than the first display period, during which a state in which a new character is displayed and the display of a currently displayed character is terminated continues (for example, the period shown in FIG. 97 (a31) to FIG. 98 (a36)),
The third display period is a period during which the display of the currently displayed character is terminated without any new display of the character (for example, the period shown in FIG. 99 (a37) to FIG. 100 (a42)),
In the first display period, a first situation in which a part of the character displayed first is displayed changes to a second situation in which a part of the character displayed first is displayed below the first situation and a part of the character displayed second is displayed (for example, the examples shown in Figs. 57 and 94). An example of this gaming machine will be described below as another example.

(Other examples)

[Pachinko machine configuration, etc.]
11 and 12 are front views of a pachinko game machine according to this embodiment. In Fig. 11 and Fig. 12, the layout of the main components of a pachinko game machine 1, which is an example of a game machine, is shown. The pachinko game machine 1, which is an example of a game machine, is broadly composed of a game board (gauge board) 2 that constitutes the game board surface, and a game machine frame (base frame) 3 that supports and fixes the game board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and game balls as game media are shot into this game area by a predetermined ball shooting device.

In the pachinko game machine 1, the game is played by displaying special symbols in a variable manner. The "variable display" of special symbols means, for example, displaying multiple types of special symbols in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described later). The variations include updating the display of multiple symbols, scrolling the display of multiple symbols, transforming one or more symbols, and enlarging/reducing one or more symbols. In the variation of special symbols and normal symbols described later, multiple types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of decorative symbols described later, multiple types of decorative symbols are scrolled or updated, or one or more decorative symbols are transformed or enlarged/reduced. The variations also include a mode in which a certain symbol is displayed flashing. At the end of the variable display, a specified special symbol is displayed stationary (also called derived or derived display) as a display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described later). The variable display may be expressed as a variable display or a variation.

In addition, two types of special symbols are provided as special symbols that are variably displayed on the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, one special symbol is also called the "first special symbol" or "first special symbol," and the other special symbol is also called the "second special symbol" or "second special symbol." In addition, a special symbol game using the first special symbol is also called the "first special symbol game," and a special symbol game using the second special symbol is also called the "second special symbol game."

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the play area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device) or an organic EL (electro luminescence) device, and displays various presentation images. The image display device 5 may also be composed of a projector and a screen. Various presentation images are displayed on the image display device 5.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronization with the first special game or the second special game, multiple types of decorative patterns (such as patterns showing numbers, etc.) that are different from the special patterns are variably displayed as decorative identification information. Here, in synchronization with the first special game or the second special game, decorative patterns are variably displayed (for example, scrolled up and down or updated) in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas. The special game and the variable display of decorative patterns that are executed in synchronization are collectively referred to as simply variable display.

The screen of the image display device 5 may be provided with a display area for displaying a pending display corresponding to a variable display whose execution is pending, and an active display corresponding to a variable display that is being executed. The pending display and the active display are collectively referred to as a variable display-compatible display corresponding to the variable display.

The number of reserved variable displays is also referred to as the reserved memory number. The reserved memory number corresponding to the first special game is also referred to as the first reserved memory number, and the reserved memory number corresponding to the second special game is also referred to as the second reserved memory number. The sum of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number is also referred to as the total reserved memory number.

A character called Yume Yume-chan who appears in the performance executed by the pachinko game machine 1 is drawn on the game board 2 on the left side of the image display device 5. Yume Yume-chan is the main character who appears in the content used in the pachinko game machine 1. Also, a character called Jam-chan who appears in the performance executed by the pachinko game machine 1 is drawn on the game board 2 on the lower right side of the image display device 5. Jam-chan is a character who appears in the content used in the pachinko game machine 1. Yume Yume-chan is the main character, so she has the highest importance of all the characters and appears more frequently (number of times) in the performance than other characters including Jam-chan. Also, Jam-chan has the highest importance of all the characters other than the main character Yume Yume-chan and appears more frequently (number of times) in the performance than other characters other than Yume Yume-chan. Also, a character with a higher priority than other characters, such as Yume Yume-chan or Jam-chan, may be the character that appears first in the scene where a character is selected, the character that is placed in the most prominent position, or the character that is ranked highest among all selected characters.

A winning ball device 6A is provided below the image display device 5, and a variable winning ball device 6B is provided to the right of the winning ball device 6A.

The winning ball device 6A forms a first start winning hole that is always kept in a constant open state so that a game ball can enter, for example, by a specified ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first start winning hole, a specified number of prize balls (for example, three) are paid out and the first special game can be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (normal electric device) forms a second start winning hole (electric chute) that changes between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 18). The variable winning ball device 6B is, for example, an electric tulip-type device having a pair of movable wings, and when the solenoid 81 is in the off state, the movable wings are in a vertical position, so that the second start winning hole is in a closed state in which the game ball does not enter (also referred to as the second start winning hole being in a closed state). On the other hand, when the solenoid 81 is in the on state, the movable wings of the variable winning ball device 6B are in a tilted position, so that the second start winning hole is in an open state in which the game ball can enter (also referred to as the second start winning hole being in an open state). When a game ball enters the second start winning hole, a predetermined number of prize balls (for example, three) are paid out and the second special game can be started. The variable winning ball device 6B may be any device that can change between a closed state and an open state, and is not limited to devices that include an electric tulip-type device.

At predetermined positions on the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 11, three locations are provided at the lower left of the game area and one location is provided above the variable winning ball device 6B), general winning openings 10 are provided which are always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. In this case, when a game ball enters one of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) are paid out as prize balls.

Between the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B, a special variable winning ball device 7A having a large winning opening is provided. The special variable winning ball device 7A has a large winning opening door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 18), and the large winning opening door forms a large winning opening (hereinafter referred to as a regular large winning opening) as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state.

For example, the special variable winning ball device 7A has a large prize opening door in the space between the game board 2 located at the back of the pachinko game machine 1 and the glass door frame 3a (see FIG. 13) located at the front side (player side) of the pachinko game machine 1, and this large prize opening door slides open and closes horizontally between the back and front sides of the pachinko game machine 1 to open the path for the game ball to the normal large prize opening. Specifically, when the solenoid 82 is in the off state, the large prize opening door slides to the front side of the pachinko game machine 1 to close the normal large prize opening, and the game ball cannot enter (pass) through the normal large prize opening. On the other hand, when the solenoid 82 is in the on state, the large prize opening door slides to the back side of the pachinko game machine 1 to open the normal large prize opening, and the game ball can easily enter the normal large prize opening.

When a game ball enters the regular large prize opening, it is detected by the count switch 23 as it passes through an area provided inside the regular large prize opening. When the game ball is detected by the count switch 23 (see FIG. 18), a number of game balls corresponding to the detection (for example, 10 balls per detection) are paid out to the player as prize balls. When a game ball enters the regular large prize opening, more prize balls are paid out than when a game ball enters the first start prize opening, the second start prize opening, or the general prize opening 10. When the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23 reaches an upper limit (for example, 10 balls), one round ends and the regular large prize opening is controlled to a closed state.

In the pachinko game machine 1, a V-variable winning ball device 7B is provided next to the special variable winning ball device 7A. The V-variable winning ball device 7B has a large winning opening door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 83 (see FIG. 18), and forms a large winning opening (hereinafter referred to as a V-large winning opening) that can be switched between an open state and a closed state by the large winning opening door.

For example, the special variable winning ball device 7B has a large winning port door in the space between the game board 2 and the glass door frame 3a, and this large winning port door slides open and closes horizontally between the back and front of the pachinko game machine 1 to open the path for the game ball to the V large winning port. Specifically, when the solenoid 83 is in the off state, the large winning port door slides to the front side of the pachinko game machine 1 to close the V large winning port, preventing the game ball from entering (passing through) the V large winning port. On the other hand, when the solenoid 83 is in the on state, the large winning port door slides to the back side of the pachinko game machine 1 to open the V large winning port, making it easier for the game ball to enter the V large winning port.

The game ball that enters the V large prize opening is detected by the V prize opening switch 24 (see FIG. 18) as it passes through a specific area (also called the V prize opening area) provided inside the V large prize opening. When the game ball is detected by the V prize opening switch 24, the game state is controlled to a high probability state. In other words, in this embodiment, a V prize occurs on the condition that the game ball enters the V large prize opening during a round of the high probability game state, and the game state is controlled to a high probability state. The normal high probability prize opening and the V large prize opening are collectively referred to as high probability prize openings. The high probability prize opening is also referred to as an attacca.

The entry of a game ball into each winning port, including the general winning port 10, is also called a "winning". In particular, a winning ball into the starting port (first starting winning port, second starting winning port) is also called a starting winning port.

In the pachinko game machine 1, normal symbols are variably displayed as multiple types of normal identification information different from the special symbols. Such variable display of normal symbols is also called a normal symbol game.

A pass gate 41 through which the game ball can pass is provided to the right of the image display device 5. When the game ball passes through the pass gate 41, a regular game is executed.

In addition to the above features, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with windmills that change the direction and speed of the game balls, as well as numerous obstacle nails. At the bottom of the game area, there is an outlet that takes in game balls that do not enter any of the winning holes.

Speakers 8L and 8R are provided at the upper left and right positions of the gaming machine frame 3 to play and output sound effects, etc.

At a predetermined position on the game board 2 (above the image display device 5 in FIG. 1), a movable body 32 that operates according to the performance is provided. The movable body 32 is configured so that a member with the letters "POWER" attached is located in front of a member with the letter "2". This forms the letters "POWER2". "POWER2" may be the model name of the pachinko game machine 1, or a name representing the content used in the pachinko game machine 1 (for example, the title of an anime or the name of a singer). The letters attached to the movable body 32 may also represent the name of the main character or the character with the second highest priority after the main character (for example, "Yume Yume" representing the main character Yume Yume-chan) that appears in the content used in the pachinko game machine 1. In this embodiment, the model name of the pachinko game machine 1 (Powerful 2) is shown on the movable body 32.

In this embodiment, the movable body 32 is movable between a position above the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 1 and a position covering the front of the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 12. Specifically, of the component bearing the word "POWER" and the component bearing the word "2," only the component bearing the word "POWER" falls from the position shown in FIG. 1, and the movable body 32 stops at a position covering the front of the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 12. The movable body 32 is also referred to as a role-playing object.

At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, a ball-hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 is provided, which is operated by the player or the like to launch the gaming ball toward the gaming area using the ball-hitting device.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the playing area, a ball supply tray (upper tray) is provided to hold (store) gaming balls dispensed as prize balls or gaming balls loaned by a predetermined ball loaning machine so that they can be supplied to the ball launching device. In addition to the upper tray, the gaming machine frame 3 may also be provided with a payout section (ball supply tray) from which prize balls are paid out when the upper tray is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by the player is attached to a predetermined position on the gaming machine frame 3 below the playing area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed (or depressed) by the player. Operations on the stick controller 31A are detected by the controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 18).

At a predetermined position on the gaming machine frame 3 below the playing area, a push button 31B is provided that allows the player to perform a predetermined command operation by pressing it. The operation of the push button 31B is detected by a push sensor 35B (see FIG. 18).

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B are provided as detection means for detecting the player's actions (operations, etc.), but other detection means may also be provided.

The pachinko game machine 1 is provided with a special symbol LED board 9020 at the bottom left of the game board 2. The special symbol LED board 9020 is an LED board that is controlled by the game control microcomputer 100 and notifies the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number by turning on/off/blinking the LEDs. In the special symbol LED board 9020, the type of the special symbol (first special symbol) in the first special symbol game and the type of the special symbol (second special symbol) in the second special symbol game are represented by a combination of lighting modes such as turning on/blinking/off by multiple LEDs provided in the special symbol 1 variable display unit 9021, for example, as shown in FIG. 15(a) described later, in the special symbol LED board 9020, the type of the first special symbol is represented by a combination of lighting modes such as turning on/blinking/off by multiple LEDs provided in the special symbol 2 variable display unit 9022, and the type of the second special symbol is represented by a combination of lighting modes such as turning on/blinking/off by multiple LEDs provided in the special symbol 2 variable display unit 9022.

The pachinko game machine 1 further includes a fourth symbol unit 9050 at the bottom left of the image display device 5. The fourth symbol unit 9050 is an LED board that is controlled by the performance control CPU 120 and notifies the change in the special symbol, the number of reserved memories, the right-hit display, and the like by turning on/off/blinking the LEDs. In the fourth symbol unit 9050, the type of the special symbol (first special symbol) in the first special symbol game and the type of the special symbol (second special symbol) in the second special symbol game are represented by a combination of lighting modes such as turning on/blinking/off by multiple LEDs provided in the special symbol 1 variable display unit 9053, for example, as shown in FIG. 15(b) described later, in the fourth symbol unit 9050, the type of the first special symbol is represented by a combination of lighting modes such as turning on/blinking/off by multiple LEDs provided in the special symbol 2 variable display unit 9054, and the type of the second special symbol is represented by a combination of lighting modes such as turning on/blinking/off by multiple LEDs provided in the special symbol 2 variable display unit 9054.

The pachinko game machine 1 has a game board 2 and a game machine frame 3 with multiple lamps. Specifically, the pachinko game machine 1 includes a role lamp 9A provided on the movable body 32, a board left lamp 9B provided on the left side of the game board 2, a board-top lamp 9C provided above the game board 2, an attacca lamp 9E provided near the special variable winning ball device 7B, a V attacca lamp 9F provided near the special variable winning ball device 7A, a V lamp 9G that notifies the player that a round of a big win game state in which a V big winning hole is open and a V winning can occur, or that a V winning has occurred, an electric chute lamp 9H provided near the variable winning ball device 6B, a stick controller lamp 9J provided on the stick controller 31A, a trigger button lamp 9K provided on the push button 31B, a frame left lamp 9L provided on the left side of the game machine frame 3, and a frame right lamp 9R provided on the right side of the game machine frame 3. The V lamp may be for notifying the player that a big win has occurred.

The reel lamp 9A is composed of multiple lamps, namely reel lamps 9A1 to 9A4. Specifically, the component labeled "POWER" included in the movable body 32 is divided into four parts, with reel lamp 9A1 located behind the "P" and "O" parts, reel lamp 9A2 located behind the "W" and "E" parts, reel lamp 9A3 located behind the "R" and "F" parts, and reel lamp 9A4 located behind the "U" and "L" parts. As a result, when reel lamps 9A1 to 9A4 light up (emit light) behind the component labeled with the word "POWER", "POWER" lights up (emits light).

The left board lamp 9B is made up of multiple lamps, such as left board lamps 9B1 to 9B5. A main character (for example, "Yume Yume", which refers to the main character Yume Yume-chan) in the content used in the pachinko game machine 1 is depicted on the left side of the game board 2, and the left board lamps 9B1 to 9B5 are each positioned behind the part of the game board 2 where the main character is depicted. As a result, when the left board lamps 9B1 to 9B5 light up (emit light) behind the part of the game board 2 where the main character is depicted, the part of the game board 2 where the main character is depicted lights up (emits light).

As shown in FIG. 12, the board lamps 9C are composed of multiple lamps such as board lamps 9C1 to 9C13. The upper side of the game board 2 is divided into three areas, left, center, and right, and the board lamps 9C1 to 9C5, board lamps 9C6 to 9C8, and board lamps 9C9 to 9C13 are arranged on the back side of the game board 2. The parts of the game board 2 where the board lamps 9C1 to 9C5, board lamps 9C6 to 9C8, and board lamps 9C9 to 9C13 are provided are made of a transparent material that can transmit light, so that when the board lamps 9C1 to 9C13 light up (emit light) on the back side of the upper part of the game board 2, the upper part of the game board 2 lights up (emits light) in white, red, or the like.

The attacca lamp 9E is located on the back side of the game board 2 near the special variable winning ball device 7B. As a result, when the attacca lamp 9E lights up (emits light) on the back side of the game board 2, it lights up (emits light) the area near the special variable winning ball device 7B. In addition, the V attacca lamp 9F is located on the back side of the game board 2 near the special variable winning ball device 7A. As a result, when the V attacca lamp 9F lights up (emits light) on the back side of the game board 2, it lights up (emits light) the area near the special variable winning ball device 7A.

The V lamp 9G is located behind the part of the game board 2 that is marked with a "V". As a result, when the V lamp 9G lights up (emits light) behind the part of the game board 2 that is marked with a "V", the part of the game board 2 that is marked with a "V" lights up (emits light). The electric chute lamp 9H is located near the variable winning ball device 6B, and when it lights up (emits light), it lights up (emits light) the area near the special variable winning ball device 7B.

The stick controller lamp 9J is provided on the stick controller 31A, and when it is turned on (lights up), it lights up (lights up) the stick controller 31A. The trigger button lamp 9K is provided on the push button 31B, and when it is turned on (lights up), it lights up (lights up) the push button 31B.

The left frame lamp 9L is composed of multiple lamps 9L1 to 9L12 (described later in FIG. 14) provided on the left side of the gaming machine frame 3, and when each lamp is turned on (lights up), the left side of the gaming machine frame 3 is turned on (lights up). The right frame lamp 9R is composed of multiple lamps 9R2 to 9L12 (described later in FIG. 14) provided on the right side of the gaming machine frame 3, and when each lamp is turned on (lights up), the right side of the gaming machine frame 3 is turned on (lights up). The left frame lamp 9L and the right frame lamp 9R are collectively referred to as frame lamps. The role lamp 9A, the left board lamp 9B, the top board lamp 9C, the attacca lamp 9E, the V attacca lamp 9F, the V lamp 9G, the electric chute lamp 9H, the stick controller lamp 9J, the trigger button lamp 9K, the left frame lamp 9L, and the right frame lamp 9R are collectively referred to as game effect lamps 9.

Figure 13 is a rear perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to this embodiment. The main board 11 housed in a board case 201 is mounted on the rear of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The main board 11 is provided with a setting key 51 and a setting change switch 52. The setting key 51 functions as a lock switch for switching to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state. The setting change switch 52 functions as a setting switch for changing settings such as the probability of winning a jackpot and the payout rate in the setting change state. The setting key 51 and the setting change switch 52 may be attached to the outside of the main board 11, for example, at a predetermined position on the power supply board 17 (see Figure 18).

A display monitor 29 is disposed in the center of the back surface of the main board 11, and a display changeover switch 30 (see FIG. 18) is disposed to the side of the display monitor 29. The display monitor 29 may be configured, for example, using a seven-segment LED display device. The display monitor 29 and the display changeover switch 30 are disposed directly in front of the main board 11 when the back surface of the game board 2 is viewed with the game machine frame 3 open.

The display monitor 29 can display winning information such as consecutive win ratio, winning ratio, and base. The consecutive win ratio is the ratio of the number of winning balls that have entered the large winning port (attacka) to the total number of winning balls. The winning ratio is the ratio of the number of winning balls that have entered the second start winning port (electric chute) and the number of winning balls that have entered the large winning port (attacka) to the total number of winning balls. The base is the ratio of the total number of winning balls to the number of game balls shot out. When in the setting change state or setting confirmation state, the display monitor 29 can display the setting values in the pachinko game machine 1. When in the setting change state or setting confirmation state, the display monitor 29 only needs to be able to display the setting values to be changed or confirmed.

When the gaming machine frame 3 is closed, the setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 cannot be operated from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The gaming machine frame 3 is provided with a rotatable glass door frame 3a having a glass window, and is configured so that the gaming area can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 3a. When the glass door frame 3a is closed, the gaming area can be seen through the glass window.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a security cover 50A is attached to the right end of the outer frame 1a, which is formed in a vertically long rectangular frame shape. When the gaming machine frame 3 is closed, the security cover 50A covers the right side of the board case 201, including the setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52, from the rear side. The security cover 50A is a roughly L-shaped member including a short piece 50Aa and a long piece 50Ab, and may be made of a transparent synthetic resin.

Figure 14 is a diagram for explaining the frame lamps. The frame left lamp 9L has a group of 12 lamps, frame left lamps 9L1 to 9L12, arranged counterclockwise from the top to the bottom of the gaming machine frame 3. The frame left lamp 9L lights up or blinks each of the multiple lamps (12 lamps in this example), causing the left side of the gaming machine frame 3 to glow. Meanwhile, the frame right lamp 9R has a group of 11 lamps, frame left lamps 9R2 to 9L12, arranged clockwise from the top to the bottom of the gaming machine frame 3. The frame right lamp 9R lights up or blinks each of the multiple lamps (11 lamps in this example), causing the right side of the gaming machine frame 3 to glow.

15 is a diagram for explaining the special symbol LED board 9020 and the fourth symbol unit 9050. As shown in FIG. 15(a), the special symbol LED board 9020 includes a special symbol 1 variable display section 9021 showing the variable display of the first special symbol, a special symbol 2 variable display section 9022 showing the variable display of the second special symbol, a special symbol 1 memory display section 9023 showing the first reserved memory number corresponding to the first special symbol game, a special symbol 2 memory display section 9024 showing the second reserved memory number corresponding to the second special symbol game, a regular symbol memory display section 9025 showing the regular symbol reserved memory number, a regular symbol display section 9026 showing the variable display of the regular symbol, a right-hit display section 9030 encouraging the player to hit the right, a special symbol display section 9028 showing the presence or absence of a special symbol state, a time-saving display section 9029 showing the presence or absence of a time-saving state, and a round display section 9027 showing the number of rounds of the jackpot. Each display unit can inform the player of the presence or absence of variable display of special or normal symbols, the results, the current game status, the number of reserved symbols, etc., by lighting or blinking with a lighting means such as an LED.

For example, the special symbol 1 variable display unit 9021 notifies the player whether or not a variable display of the first special symbol in the first special symbol game is being performed, and the stopping symbol of the first special symbol determined by the result of the variable display, by lighting/blinking/extinguishing an LED or other lighting means. The special symbol 2 variable display unit 9022 notifies the player whether or not a variable display of the second special symbol in the second special symbol game is being performed, and the stopping symbol of the second special symbol determined by the result of the variable display, by lighting/blinking/extinguishing an LED or other lighting means.

Furthermore, the special chart LED board 9020 can prompt the player to hit to the right by lighting/blinking/turning off the lighting means such as the LED in the right hit display unit 9030. In this embodiment, when the player is prompted to hit to the right, the lighting means such as the LED in the right hit display unit 9030 lights up (emits light), and when the player is not prompted to hit to the right, that is, when the player is prompted to hit to the left, the lighting means such as the LED in the right hit display unit 9030 turns off. After the pattern is determined, the CPU 103 transmits a right hit display lighting designation command to the performance control CPU 120 and turns on the right hit display unit 9030, and after the pattern is determined by the final variation in the high base state before returning to the normal state, it transmits a right hit display turning off designation command to the performance control CPU 120 and turns off the right hit display unit 9030. In addition, if the pachinko game machine 1 has a jackpot or a small jackpot that is not controlled to a high base after the jackpot game state, the performance control CPU 120 may turn on the right-hit display unit 9030 only during the jackpot round. In this case, the CPU 103 sends a jackpot end designation command to the performance control CPU 120 and turns off the right-hit display unit 9030.

Here, right-hand hit refers to operating the ball-hitting handle 30 to launch the game ball toward the second flow-down path, which is one of the first and second flow-down paths through which the game medium can flow down in the game area provided on the game board 2. The first flow-down path is, for example, a path that passes through the left area of the game area, and beyond which there is a first start winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, but there is no second start winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B. The second flow-down path is, for example, a path that passes through the right area of the game area, and beyond which there are a second start winning hole and a large winning hole (normal large winning hole, V large winning hole) formed in the variable winning ball device 6B. When the player launches the game ball toward the first flow-down path, the game ball flows toward the first start winning hole through the first flow-down path. When a player shoots a game ball toward the second flow path, the game ball passes through the second flow path and flows toward the second start winning hole or the big winning hole (normal big winning hole, V big winning hole).

In this embodiment, during the jackpot game after the jackpot occurs and during the game state after the jackpot game (time-saving state or probability change state), the player hits the right to cause the game ball to enter the second start winning hole or the large winning hole provided on the right side of the game area, and during that time, the right-hit display unit 9030 encourages the player to hit the right. By hitting the right while the display encouraging the player to hit the right is being displayed, the player can make the game ball enter the second start winning hole and a predetermined number of prize balls (e.g., 3 balls) are paid out and the player can obtain the right to play the second special game, or can make the game ball enter the normal large winning hole and a predetermined number of prize balls (e.g., 10 balls) are paid out. Furthermore, as will be described in more detail later, during a round of a guaranteed jackpot, the V-large winning hole opens, and by hitting the right while a display is being displayed encouraging the player to hit to the right, the player can gain the right to enter the game ball into the V-large winning hole and be controlled into a guaranteed jackpot state. Therefore, hitting to the right while a display is being displayed encouraging the player to hit to the right can give the player an overall advantage. Note that, unlike hitting to the right, operating the ball-hitting handle 30 to launch the game ball toward the first flow path (hitting style) is also called hitting to the left.

As shown in FIG. 15(b), the fourth symbol unit 9050 includes a special symbol 1 memory display section 9051 that indicates the first reserved memory number corresponding to the first special symbol game, a special symbol 2 memory display section 9052 that indicates the second reserved memory number corresponding to the second special symbol game, a special symbol 1 variable display section 9053 that indicates the status or display result of the variable display of the first special symbol, a special symbol 2 variable display section 9054 that indicates the status or display result of the variable display of the second special symbol, and a right hit display section 9055 that encourages the player to hit right. Each display section can inform the player of the presence or absence of a variable display of a special symbol, the reserved number, and a right hit instruction by lighting/blinking/turning off the light using lighting means such as an LED.

For example, the special symbol 1 variable display unit 9053 notifies the player whether or not a variable display of the first special symbol in the first special symbol game is being performed, and the stopping symbol of the first special symbol determined by the result of the variable display, by lighting/blinking/extinguishing an LED or other lighting means. The special symbol 2 variable display unit 9054 notifies the player whether or not a variable display of the second special symbol in the second special symbol game is being performed, and the stopping symbol of the second special symbol determined by the result of the variable display, by lighting/blinking/extinguishing an LED or other lighting means.

In the following, the display of the change in the stopped pattern of the first special pattern by lighting means such as LEDs in the special pattern 1 variable display unit 9021 and the special pattern 1 variable display unit 9053 is also referred to as the change display (variable display) of the first special pattern. Also, the display of the change in the stopped pattern of the second special pattern by lighting means such as LEDs in the special pattern 2 variable display unit 9022 and the special pattern 2 variable display unit 9054 is also referred to as the change display (variable display) of the second special pattern.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, when the player is prompted to hit right, the lighting means such as LED in the right hit display unit 9055 of the fourth symbol unit 9050 lights up (emits light), and when the player is not prompted to hit right, that is, when the player is prompted to hit left, the lighting means such as LED in the right hit display unit 9055 turns off. The performance control CPU 120 turns on the right hit display unit 9055 based on receiving a right hit display lighting command from the CPU 103 after the symbol is determined, and turns off the right hit display unit 9055 based on receiving a right hit display turning off command from the CPU 103 after the symbol is determined by the final variation in the high base state before returning to the normal state. In addition, when the pachinko game machine 1 has a big hit or a small hit that is not controlled to the high base after the big hit game state, the performance control CPU 120 may turn on the right hit display unit 9055 only during the big hit round. In this case, the performance control CPU 120 turns off the right-hit display unit 9055 based on receiving a jackpot end command from the CPU 103.

Figure 16 is a view looking between the game board 2 and the image display device 5. As shown in Figure 1, the game board 2 is fixed so that it covers the edge of the screen of the image display device 5. Therefore, as shown in Figure 16, when looking between the game board 2 and the image display device 5, the edge of the screen of the image display device 5 located on the rear side of the game board 2 can be seen.

Figure 17 is a diagram for explaining the display mode of the screen in the image display device 5. Most of the display area of the image display device 5 is used to display images such as variable display of decorative symbols and reach effects. Specifically, in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronization with the first special symbol game and the second special symbol game, variable display of decorative symbols (such as symbols showing numbers, etc.) as multiple types of decorative identification information different from the special symbols is performed. Here, in synchronization with the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game, decorative symbols are variably displayed (for example, scrolled up and down or updated) in each of the "left", "center", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. The special symbol games and variable display of decorative symbols executed in synchronization are collectively referred to simply as variable display.

At the bottom of the screen of the image display device 5, there is provided a first pending memory display area 5D capable of displaying the first pending memory number by the number of circular pending displays, a second pending memory display area 5U capable of displaying the second pending memory number by the number of circular pending displays, and an active display area 5A for displaying the pending display corresponding to the variable display currently being executed as the active display.

At the top right corner of the screen of the image display device 5, a fourth pattern 5J is displayed, indicating that the special pattern is being variably displayed, and indicating the first and second reserved memory counts. At the left edge of the screen of the image display device 5, small patterns 5M, which are smaller than the decorative patterns, are displayed. The small patterns are arranged vertically in a row, corresponding to the decorative patterns displayed in the "left" decorative pattern display area 5L, the decorative patterns displayed in the "middle" decorative pattern display area 5C, and the decorative patterns displayed in the "right" decorative pattern display area 5R. Furthermore, the small patterns 5M are never made invisible during the variably displayed state, and are also the patterns that are always displayed on the screen of the image display device 5.

As shown in FIG. 17, the decorative pattern is arranged in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, and the small pattern 5M is arranged at the left end of the screen of the image display device 5 in a size smaller than the decorative pattern. Therefore, the visibility of the small pattern 5M is lower than the visibility of the decorative pattern.

As shown in FIG. 17(a), the screen of the image display device 5 is rectangular or nearly rectangular, but as described above, the game board 2 is fixed so as to cover the edges of the screen of the image display device 5. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 17(b), when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is viewed from the front, part of the screen of the image display device 5 (especially the edges) cannot be seen or is difficult to see because of the game board 2.

[Board configuration]
18 is a diagram for explaining various boards mounted on the pachinko game machine 1. As shown in FIG. 18, the pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, a performance control board 12, a sound control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, and the like. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, and a launch control board are arranged on the back of the pachinko game machine 1. Furthermore, a power supply board 17 connected to a power switch 91 is also mounted. The various control boards are a concept that includes not only electronic circuit boards such as printed wiring boards on which conductor patterns are formed and on which electrical components can be mounted, but also electronic circuit mounting boards configured to realize specific electrical functions by mounting electrical components on the electronic circuit board.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, power from an AC power source, such as an external power source of 100V AC, such as a commercial power source, can be supplied to electrical components including various control boards such as the main board 11 and the performance control board 12, via the power supply board 17. The power supply board 17 includes, for example, a rectifier circuit for converting alternating current (AC) to direct current (DC), and a power supply circuit for converting a predetermined DC voltage to a specific DC voltage (for example, 12V DC or 5V DC).

The main board 11 is the main control board, and has the function of controlling the progress of the above-mentioned games in the pachinko game machine 1 (execution of the special game (including management of reserved balls), execution of the regular game (including management of reserved balls), big win game state, small win game state, game state, etc.). The main board 11 has a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, an output circuit 111, etc.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103, a random number circuit 104, an I/O (Input/Output port) 105, and an RTC (Real Time Clock) 106.

The CPU 103 executes the programs stored in the ROM 101 to perform processes that control the progress of the game (processes that realize the functions of the main board 11). At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (such as data on fluctuation patterns, performance control commands, and tables referenced when making various decisions) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. The RAM 102 serves as a backup RAM in which the stored contents are preserved for a predetermined period of time even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped in part or in whole. Note that all or part of the programs stored in the ROM 101 may be deployed to the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random number values (gaming random numbers) used to control the progress of the game. The gaming random numbers may be updated by the CPU 103 executing a specific computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 105 includes, for example, an input port to which various signals (detection signals described below) are input, and an output port for transmitting various signals (signals for controlling (driving) the special LED board 9020, etc., solenoid drive signals).

The switch circuit 110 takes in detection signals (such as a detection signal indicating that a game ball has passed or entered and a switch has been turned on) from various switches for detecting game balls (gate switch 21, start port switch (first start port switch 22A and second start port switch 22B), count switch 23, V winning switch 24) and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal indicates that the game ball has passed or entered.

The switch circuit 110 receives a reset signal, a power-off signal, and a clear signal from the power supply board 17 and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100. The reset signal is an operation stop signal for stopping the operation of control circuits such as the game control microcomputer 100, and can be output using a power supply monitoring circuit, a watchdog timer built-in IC, or a system reset IC. The power-off signal is turned off when the specified power supply voltage used in the pachinko game machine 1 exceeds a specified value, and is turned on when the period during which the specified power supply voltage is below the specified value continues for longer than the power-off reference time. The clear signal is turned on in response to, for example, pressing the clear switch 92 provided on the power supply board 17.

The output circuit 111 transmits the solenoid drive signal from the game control microcomputer 100 to solenoid 81, solenoid 82, or solenoid 83.

The main board 11 is connected to a display monitor 29, a display changeover switch 30, a setting key 51, a setting changeover switch 52, and a door open sensor 90. The door open sensor 90 detects the opening of the gaming machine frame 3, including the glass door frame 3a.

As part of controlling the progress of the game, the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) supplies presentation control commands (commands that specify (notify) the progress of the game, etc.) to the presentation control board 12 in accordance with the progress of the game. The presentation control commands output from the main board 11 are relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the presentation control board 12. The presentation control commands include, for example, commands that specify various determination results in the main board 11 (for example, the display results of the special game (including the type of jackpot), the variable pattern used when executing the special game (described in detail later)), the game status (for example, the start or end of the variable display, the opening status of the jackpot opening, the occurrence of a win, the number of reserved memories, the game status), the occurrence of an error, etc.

The performance control board 12 is a sub-control board independent of the main board 11, and has the function of receiving performance control commands and executing performances (various performances according to the progress of the game, including various notifications such as driving the movable body 32, notifying errors, and notifying of power outage recovery) based on the received performance control commands.

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control unit 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125.

The performance control CPU 120 executes the programs stored in the ROM 121 to perform processing for executing performances together with the display control unit 123 (processing for realizing the above-mentioned functions of the performance control board 12, including determining the performance to be executed). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The presentation control CPU 120 may instruct the display control unit 123 to execute a presentation based on detection signals from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (signals that are output when an operation by the player is detected and that appropriately indicate the content of the operation).

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), CGROM (Character Generator ROM), VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes the performance based on instructions to execute the performance from the performance control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 displays a performance image on the image display unit 5 by supplying a video signal corresponding to the performance to be executed to the image display unit 5 based on an instruction to execute the performance from the performance control CPU 120. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal designating the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 and a lamp signal (a signal designating the on/off state of the lamp) to the lamp control board 14 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the performance image and to turn on/off the game effect lamp 9. The display control unit 123 also supplies a signal to operate the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or to a drive circuit that drives the movable body 32.

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits that drive the speakers 8L and 8R, and drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, causing the speakers 8L and 8R to output the sound designated by the sound designation signal.

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits that drive the game effect lamp 9, and drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, turning the game effect lamp 9 on and off in the manner specified by the lamp signal. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the sound output and the turning on and off of the lamp.

The performance control CPU 120 may be configured to execute control of audio output, turning on/off the lamp (such as supplying a sound designation signal or a lamp signal), and controlling the movable body 32 (such as supplying a signal to operate the movable body 32).

The random number circuit 124 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random number values (random numbers for performance) used to execute various performances. The random numbers for performance may be updated by the performance control CPU 120 executing a specific computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 125 mounted on the performance control board 12 includes an input port for taking in performance control commands transmitted from, for example, the main board 11, and an output port for transmitting various signals (video signals, sound designation signals, lamp signals).

The boards other than the main board 11, such as the performance control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also called sub-boards. As with the pachinko game machine 1, multiple sub-boards may be provided for different functions, or one sub-board may be configured to have multiple functions.

The fourth pattern unit 9050 is connected to the performance control board 12, and each display section can be lit (blinked) under the control of the control CPU 120.

[Outline of game progress]
In the pachinko game machine 1 having the above-mentioned configuration, the game proceeds as follows. The game ball is launched toward the game area by the player rotating the ball hitting operation handle 30 provided on the pachinko game machine 1. When the game ball passes through the passing gate 41, a normal game is started by the normal symbol display 20. If the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 during the period when the previous normal game is being played (if the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 but the normal game based on the passing cannot be played immediately), the normal game based on the passing is reserved up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In this normal game, if a specific normal symbol (a normal winning symbol) is displayed as a fixed normal symbol, the display result of the normal symbol will be "normal winning". On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than a normal winning symbol (a normal losing symbol) is displayed as a fixed normal symbol, the display result of the normal symbol will be "normal losing". When a "normal winning" occurs, an opening control is performed to keep the variable winning ball device 6B in an open state for a predetermined period of time (the second starting winning port is opened).

When a game ball enters the first start winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special game is started by the special game 1 variable display unit 21 of the special game LED board 9020.

When a game ball enters the second start winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special game is started by the special game 2 variable display unit 9022 of the special game LED board 9020.

In addition, if the game ball enters (wins) the start winning hole during the period when the special game is being played or during the period when the game is controlled to a big win game state or a small win game state (when a start winning occurs but the special game based on the start winning cannot be played immediately), the special game based on that entry will be put on hold until a specified upper limit number (for example, 4).

In the special game, a "big win" occurs when the combination of the lighting modes of the multiple LEDs provided on the special 1 variable display unit 9021 or the special 2 variable display unit 9022 of the special LED board 9020 corresponds to a specific special pattern (big win pattern, the actual pattern varies depending on the type of big win described below). In addition, the lighting mode corresponding to a specific special pattern (big win pattern) in the combination of the lighting modes of the multiple LEDs provided on the special 1 variable display unit 9021 or the special 2 variable display unit 9022 of the special LED board 9020 is also referred to as a "specific display result". In addition, a "small win" occurs when the combination of the lighting modes of the multiple LEDs provided on the special 1 variable display unit 9021 or the special 2 variable display unit 9022 of the special LED board 9020 corresponds to a specific special pattern (small win pattern) different from the big win pattern. In addition, when the combination of the lighting modes of the multiple LEDs provided on the special chart 1 variable display unit 9021 and the special chart 2 variable display unit 9022 of the special chart LED board 9020 is a combination of lighting modes corresponding to a special pattern (missing pattern) different from the big win pattern and the small win pattern, it is a "miss". In addition, the lighting mode corresponding to a special pattern (missing pattern) different from the big win pattern and the small win pattern in the combination of the lighting modes of the multiple LEDs provided on the special chart 1 variable display unit 9021 and the special chart 2 variable display unit 9022 of the special chart LED board 9020 is also called a "miss display result".

After the display result in the special game becomes "big win", the game state is controlled to a big win game state, which is advantageous for the player. After the display result in the special game becomes "small win", the game state is controlled to a small win game state. Note that a small win does not necessarily have to be set as a win type.

In the jackpot game state, the large prize opening formed by the special variable prize ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. This open state continues until either a predetermined period of time (e.g., 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) has elapsed, or the number of game balls that have entered the large prize opening reaches a predetermined number (e.g., 9), whichever comes first. This predetermined period is the upper limit period during which the large prize opening can be opened in one round, and is hereinafter also referred to as the upper limit opening period. This cycle in which the large prize opening is open is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeated until the predetermined upper limit number of times (10 times or 7 times) is reached.

In the jackpot gaming state, the player can get prize balls by making the gaming ball enter the big prize opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The more rounds there are in the jackpot gaming state, and the longer the upper limit opening period, the more advantageous it is for the player.

The "jackpot" has a set type of jackpot. For example, there are multiple types of opening modes of the jackpot opening (number of rounds or maximum opening period) and game states after the jackpot game state (normal state, time-saving state, special state, etc.), and the jackpot type is set according to these. There may be jackpot types that offer many prize balls, jackpot types that offer few prize balls, or jackpot types that offer almost no prize balls.

In the small win game state, the large prize opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening state. For example, in the small win game state, the large prize opening is opened in the same opening state as the large prize opening in the large prize game state for some large prize types (the number of times the large prize opening is opened is the same as the number of rounds, and the timing of closing the large prize opening is also the same, etc.). Note that, like the large prize types, small prize types may also be set for "small prizes."

After the jackpot game state ends, the game may be controlled to a time-saving state or a special state depending on the type of jackpot mentioned above.

In the time-saving state, control (time-saving control) is executed to shorten the average special symbol fluctuation time (period during which the special symbol fluctuates) more than in the normal state. In the time-saving state, control (high opening control, high base control) is also executed to make it easier for the game ball to enter the second start winning hole by shortening the average regular symbol fluctuation time (period during which the regular symbol fluctuates) more than in the normal state and by improving the probability of a "regular symbol hit" in the regular symbol game more than in the normal state. The time-saving state is an advantageous state for the player because it is a state in which the fluctuation efficiency of special symbols (especially the second special symbol) is improved.

In the probability variable state (probability fluctuating state), in addition to time-saving control, probability variable control is executed, which increases the probability that the display result will be a "jackpot" compared to the normal state. The probability variable state is an even more advantageous state for the player, as it not only improves the efficiency of special symbol fluctuation, but also makes it easier to get a "jackpot."

The time-saving state or the probability of a special bonus state will continue until one of the end conditions is met first, such as the specified number of special games being played or the start of the next big win game state. The end condition of the state in which the specified number of special games have been played is also called a count-cut (count-cut time-saving state, count-cut probability of a special bonus state, etc.).

The normal state refers to a game state other than advantageous states such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, and special states such as a time-saving state and a probability-varying state, and is a state in which the pachinko game machine 1, such as the probability that the display result in the normal game will be a "normal hit" and the probability that the display result in the special game will be a "jackpot", is controlled in the same way as the initial setting state of the pachinko game machine 1 (for example, when a system reset is performed and the specified return process is not executed after the power is turned on).

The state in which probability variable control is being executed is also called a high probability state, and the state in which probability variable control is not being executed is also called a low probability state. The state in which time-saving control is being executed is also called a high base state, and the state in which time-saving control is not being executed is also called a low base state. Combining these, the time-saving state is also called a low probability high base state, the probability variable state is a high probability high base state, and the normal state is a low probability low base state. A high probability state and a low base state are also called a high probability low base state.

After the small win game state ends, the game state is not changed, and the game state before the display result of the special game becomes "small win" is continued (however, if the special game when the "small win" occurs is the special game of the specified number of times in the number cut, the game state will naturally change). Note that the display result of the special game does not have to be "small win".

The game state may change based on the game ball passing through a specific area (e.g., a specific area within a big prize opening) during a big win game state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, the game state may be controlled to a special probability state after the big win game state.

In the pachinko game machine 1, various effects (effects that notify the progress of the game or liven up the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The effects are performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, but in addition to or instead of display, the effects may be performed using audio output from the speakers 8L, 8R, turning on or off the game effect lamp 9, operating the movable body 32, or any other effect device that includes some or all of these.

As an effect that is executed according to the progress of the game, in the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R provided on the image display device 5, a variable display of decorative patterns begins in response to the start of the first or second special pattern game. At the timing when the display result (also called the determined special pattern) in the first or second special pattern game is displayed statically, the determined decorative pattern (a combination of three decorative patterns) which is the display result of the variable display of the decorative patterns is also displayed statically (derived).

During the period from when the variable display of the decorative symbols starts to when it ends, the state of the variable display of the decorative symbols may become a predetermined reach state (a reach is achieved). Here, a reach state refers to a state in which the decorative symbols that have not yet been stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 continue to be variable displayed when the decorative symbols that have not yet been stopped and displayed form part of a jackpot combination, which will be described later.

In addition, a reach performance is executed in response to the above-mentioned reach state being reached during the variable display of the decorative pattern. In the pachinko game machine 1, a plurality of types of reach performances are executed in which the rate at which the display result (the display result of the special game or the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern) becomes a "jackpot" (also called the jackpot reliability or jackpot expectation rate) differs according to the performance state. Reach performances include, for example, a normal reach, a super reach with a higher jackpot reliability than a normal reach, and a strongest reach with an even higher jackpot reliability than a super reach. In addition, the super reach is divided into the first half of the super reach and the second half of the super reach. In this embodiment, the jackpot reliability is higher when the display result of the variable display is derived in the first half of the super reach than when the display result of the variable display is derived in the normal reach. In addition, the jackpot reliability is higher when the display result of the variable display is derived in the second half of the super reach than when the display result of the variable display is derived in the first half of the super reach. In addition, the reliability of a jackpot is higher when the display result of the variable display is derived in the strongest reach than when the display result of the variable display is derived in the second half of the super reach. Note that, below, "Super Reach" is also referred to as "SP Reach," "the first half of the Super Reach" as "the first half of the SP," and "the second half of the Super Reach" as "the second half of the SP."

When the display result of the special game is a combination of lighting patterns corresponding to a "jackpot" (the specific display result described above), a confirmed decorative pattern that is a predetermined jackpot combination is derived as the display result of the variable display of decorative patterns on the screen of the image display device 5 (the display result of the variable display of decorative patterns is a "jackpot"). As an example, the same decorative patterns (for example, "7") are displayed stopped in line on a predetermined effective line in the "left", "center", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

In the case of a "probability jackpot" that is controlled to a probability jackpot state after the end of the jackpot game state, odd decorative symbols (such as "7") may be displayed in a line, and in the case of a "non-probability jackpot (normal jackpot)" that is not controlled to a probability jackpot state after the end of the jackpot game state, even decorative symbols (such as "6") may be displayed in a line. In this case, odd decorative symbols are also called probability jackpot symbols, and even decorative symbols are also called non-probability jackpot symbols (normal symbols). After a reach state is reached with non-probability jackpot symbols, a promotion effect may be executed that ultimately results in a "probability jackpot".

When the display result of the special game is a combination of lighting patterns corresponding to a "small win", a fixed decorative pattern (such as "1 3 5") that is a predetermined small win combination is derived as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns on the screen of the image display device 5 (the display result of the variable display of decorative patterns is a "small win"). As an example, decorative patterns that constitute chance eyes are displayed stationary on a predetermined effective line in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Note that a common fixed decorative pattern may be derived and displayed when the display result of the special game is a "big win" of some big win types (big win types in a big win game state that are the same as in a small win game state) and when it is a "small win".

When the display result of the special game is a combination of lighting patterns corresponding to a "miss" (the miss display result described above), the state of the variable display of the decorative patterns does not become a reach state, and the display result of the variable display of the decorative patterns may display a fixed decorative pattern of a non-reach combination (also called a "non-reach miss") as a "non-reach miss" (the display result of the variable display of the decorative patterns may be a "non-reach miss"). Also, when the display result is a "miss", after the state of the variable display of the decorative patterns becomes a reach state, the display result of the variable display of the decorative patterns may display a fixed decorative pattern of a predetermined reach combination (also called a "reach miss") that is not a jackpot combination as a "reach miss" (the display result of the variable display of the decorative patterns may be a "reach miss").

The effects that the pachinko gaming machine 1 can execute include displaying the variable display compatible display (reserved display or active display) described above. In addition, other effects, such as a preview effect that predicts the jackpot reliability, are executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern. Preview effects include a preview effect that predicts the jackpot reliability in the variable display currently being executed, and a pre-reading preview effect that predicts the jackpot reliability in the variable display before execution (variable display whose execution is on hold). As a pre-reading preview effect, an effect may be executed that changes the display mode of the variable display compatible display (reserved display or active display) to a mode different from normal.

In addition, in the image display device 5, a pseudo consecutive performance may be executed in which a single variable display appears to be multiple variable displays by temporarily pausing the decorative pattern during the variable display and then restarting the variable display.

During a jackpot game state, a jackpot performance is executed to notify the player of the jackpot game state. As a jackpot performance, a performance to notify the number of rounds or an upgrade performance to indicate that the value of the jackpot game state will increase may be executed. Also, during a small jackpot game state, a small jackpot performance to notify the player of the small jackpot game state is executed. In addition, a common performance may be executed during a small jackpot game state and a jackpot game state for some jackpot types (a jackpot type in a jackpot game state of the same mode as a small jackpot game state, for example, a jackpot type in which the game state after that is a high probability state), so that the player cannot tell whether he is currently in a small jackpot game state or a jackpot game state. In such a case, a common performance may be executed after the end of the small jackpot game state and after the end of the jackpot game state, so that it is not possible to distinguish whether the state is a high probability state or a low probability state.

In addition, for example, when a special game or the like is not being executed, a demo (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demo performance is executed).

[Various tables related to jackpots]
Various tables relating to big wins will be explained with reference to Figures 19 and 20.

(Winning type)
19 is a diagram for explaining the types of winning. As shown in FIG. 19, the winning type table shows the probability of winning after the end of the jackpot game state, the base after the end of the jackpot game state, and the number of openings (number of rounds) in the jackpot for each type (kind) of winning in the jackpot.

Specifically, there are three types of jackpots: normal jackpot 1 and 2, and special jackpot 1 to 9. In the following, each round may be indicated with the letter "R." For example, the first round is also called the 1st round, and the second round is also called the 2nd round.

Normal jackpot 1 is a jackpot that is controlled to a low probability state and a high base state after the end of the jackpot game state of three rounds. In normal jackpot 1, this low probability high base state continues until a variable display (special chart change) is executed for a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times).

Normal jackpot 2 is a jackpot that is controlled to a low probability state and a high base state after the end of the jackpot game state of three rounds. In normal jackpot 2, this low probability high base state continues until a variable display (special chart change) is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times).

Variable jackpots 1 to 5 are jackpots that are controlled to a high probability state and a high base state after the end of three rounds of jackpot play. In variable jackpot 1, this high probability, high base state continues until a variable display (special chart change) is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times).

The probability of a jackpot 6 is a jackpot that is controlled to a high probability state and a high base state after the end of the 5-round jackpot game state. In the probability of a jackpot 6, this high probability high base state continues until a variable display (special chart change) is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times).

The probability of a jackpot 7 is a jackpot that is controlled to a high probability state and a high base state after the end of the jackpot game state of 7 rounds. In the probability of a jackpot 7, this high probability high base state continues until a variable display (special chart change) is executed for a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times).

The probability of a jackpot being 8 or 9 is a jackpot that is controlled to a high probability state and a high base state after the end of the 10-round jackpot game state. In the probability of a jackpot being 8 or 9, this high probability high base state continues until a variable display (special chart change) is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times).

(each random number)
Fig. 20 is a diagram for explaining each random number. As shown in Fig. 20, each random number is used as follows. Specifically, Random 1 is a random counter for determining whether or not a jackpot has been reached. Random 1 is, for example, incremented by one from 1 until it reaches its upper limit of 65536, after which it is incremented again from 1. Random 2 is a random counter (for determining the type of jackpot) that determines the type of jackpot.

Random 3 and Random 4 are random counters (for determining the later fluctuation pattern) that determine the fluctuation pattern (hereafter referred to as the later fluctuation pattern) (fluctuation time) that corresponds to the later fluctuation of the fluctuation pattern. Later fluctuation refers to the latter part of the fluctuation of the special pattern. Random 3 is a random counter that determines the later fluctuation pattern that corresponds to a miss, and for example, is updated by 1, and is incremented from 1 to its upper limit of 65519, and then is incremented again from 1. Random 4 is a random counter that determines the later fluctuation pattern that corresponds to a win, and for example, is incremented by 1, and is incremented from 1 to its upper limit of 239, and then is incremented again from 1.

Random 5 is a random counter (for determining a previous fluctuation pattern) that determines the fluctuation pattern (hereafter referred to as a previous fluctuation pattern) (fluctuation time) that corresponds to the previous fluctuation among the fluctuation patterns. A previous fluctuation refers to the fluctuation in the first half of the special pattern fluctuation. For example, Random 5 is incremented by one from 1 up to its upper limit of 251, and then incremented again from 1. Random 6 is a random counter (for determining a normal pattern hit) that determines whether or not a hit based on a normal pattern will occur. For example, Random 6 is incremented by one from 1 up to its upper limit of 201, and then incremented again from 1.

In this embodiment, whether or not the game state is controlled to a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player is determined based on the value of a random number for jackpot determination (Random 1). Then, which of the multiple types of jackpots will be the jackpot is determined based on the value of a random number for jackpot type determination (Random 2). At this time, the jackpot pattern can also be determined based on the value of Random 2.

First, the random number for determining the subsequent fluctuation pattern (Random 3, 4) is used to determine the subsequent fluctuation pattern depending on whether the result is a hit or a miss, and then the random number for determining the previous fluctuation pattern (Random 5) is used to determine the previous fluctuation pattern. In this way, in this embodiment, the fluctuation pattern is determined by a two-stage lottery process.

(Big hit determination table, big hit type determination table)
21 is a diagram for explaining the big win determination table and the big win type determination table. These tables are stored in the ROM 101.

Figure 21 (a) is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot determination table. The jackpot determination table is a collection of data stored in ROM 101, and is a table in which a jackpot determination value that is compared with Random 1 is set. There are two types of jackpot determination tables: a normal (non-high probability) jackpot determination table used in the normal state (a game state that is not in the high probability state, i.e., a non-high probability state), and a high probability jackpot determination table used in the high probability state.

The normal jackpot determination table has jackpot determination values set for the number of determination values listed in the upper column of FIG. 21(a), and the special jackpot determination table has jackpot determination values set for the number of determination values listed in the lower column of FIG. 21(a). The special jackpot determination table has a greater number of jackpot determination values than the normal jackpot determination table, as it is a combination of the jackpot determination values common to the normal jackpot determination table and the jackpot determination values specific to the special jackpot state. This means that in the special jackpot state, a jackpot determination is made with a higher probability than in the normal state.

At a predetermined time, the CPU 103 extracts the count value of the random number circuit 104 and compares the extracted value with the value of the random number (Random 1) for determining a jackpot. If the random number value for determining a jackpot matches any of the jackpot determination values shown in FIG. 21(a), it decides to determine a jackpot (normal jackpot or special jackpot) for the special symbol. Note that FIG. 21(a) shows the probability (percentage) of a jackpot or the probability (percentage) of a miss.

Figures 21(b) and (c) are explanatory diagrams showing jackpot type determination tables. Figure 21(b) is a first special pattern jackpot type determination table used to determine the type of jackpot when a jackpot is determined to be a jackpot based on the first special pattern. Figure 21(c) is a second special pattern jackpot type determination table used to determine the type of jackpot when a jackpot is determined to be a jackpot based on the second special pattern.

The first special chart jackpot type determination table in FIG. 21(b) has a number of determination values set for normal jackpots 1 and 2 and special jackpots 1 to 4, which are numerical values to be compared with the random 2 value for jackpot type determination. For example, as shown in FIG. 21(b), for the first special chart, normal jackpot 1 is assigned 25 random 2 values out of 100 random 2 values, normal jackpot 2 is assigned 25 random 2 values out of 100 random 2 values, special jackpot 1 is assigned 5 random 2 values out of 100 random 2 values, special jackpot 2 is assigned 37 random 2 values out of 100 random 2 values, special jackpot 3 is assigned 4 random 2 values out of 100 random 2 values, and special jackpot 4 is assigned 4 random 2 values out of 100 random 2 values.

The second special symbol jackpot type judgment table in FIG. 21(c) has judgment values set for the number of judgment values corresponding to each of the special jackpots 5 to 9, which are numerical values to be compared with the value of Random 2. For example, as shown in FIG. 21(c), for the second special symbol, special jackpot 5 is assigned 10 of 100 Random 2 values, special jackpot 6 is assigned 5 of 100 Random 2 values, special jackpot 7 is assigned 5 of 100 Random 2 values, special jackpot 8 is assigned 70 of 100 Random 2 values, and special jackpot 9 is assigned 10 of 100 Random 2 values.

Using these various jackpot type determination tables, the CPU 103 determines the jackpot type that corresponds to the jackpot type determination value with which the value of Random 2 matches, and determines the jackpot pattern with which the value of Random 2 matches. This simultaneously determines the jackpot type and the jackpot pattern that corresponds to the jackpot type.

[Performance control command]
FIG. 22 is a diagram for explaining an example of a presentation control command. The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11, which is the main control board, transmits various presentation control commands to the presentation control CPU 120 according to the game control state. The presentation control command is, for example, a two-byte configuration, with the first byte indicating MODE (command classification) and the second byte indicating EXT (command type). Note that the command form shown in FIG. 22 is an example, and other command forms may be used. Note that, in the following, "(H)" indicates hexadecimal, but may be omitted in this specification.

Command 80XX (H) is a variation pattern command that specifies the variation pattern (previous variation pattern) corresponding to the previous variation among the variation patterns of the decorative pattern that are variably displayed on the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of the special pattern (XX corresponds to the number of the previous variation pattern). The previous variation on the sub side refers to the variation of the first half of the decorative pattern that are variably displayed on the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of the special pattern. When a unique number is assigned to each of the multiple types of previous variation patterns, there is a previous variation pattern command that corresponds to each of the previous variation patterns identified by that number.

Command 8101 (H) is a first variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display of the first special symbol. Command 8102 (H) is a second variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display of the second special symbol. When the performance control CPU 101 receives command 8101 (H) or command 8102 (H), it controls the image display device 5 to start variable display of the decorative pattern.

Command 84XX (H) is a variation pattern command that specifies the variation pattern (post-variation pattern) corresponding to the post-variation among the variation patterns of the decorative pattern that are variably displayed on the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of the special pattern (XX corresponds to the number of the post-variation pattern). The post-variation on the sub side refers to the latter half of the variation of the decorative pattern that are variably displayed on the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of the special pattern. When a unique number is assigned to each of the multiple types of post-variation patterns, there is a post-variation pattern command that corresponds to each of the post-variation patterns identified by that number.

Command 8C01 (H) is a display result 1 designation command (miss designation command) indicating that a miss has been determined. Command 8C02 (H) is a display result 2 designation command (normal jackpot 1 designation command) indicating that a normal jackpot 1 has been determined. Command 8C03 (H) is a display result 3 designation command (normal jackpot 2 designation command) indicating that a normal jackpot 2 has been determined. Command 8C04 (H) is a display result 4 designation command (probability jackpot 1 designation command) indicating that a special jackpot 1 has been determined. Command 8C05 (H) is a display result 5 designation command (probability jackpot 2 designation command) indicating that a special jackpot 2 has been determined. Command 8C06 (H) is a display result 6 designation command (probability jackpot 3 designation command) indicating that a special jackpot 3 has been determined. Command 8C07(H) is a display result 7 designation command (probability change jackpot 4 designation command) indicating that probability change jackpot 4 has been determined. Command 8C08(H) is a display result 8 designation command (probability change jackpot 5 designation command) indicating that probability change jackpot 5 has been determined. Command 8C09(H) is a display result 9 designation command (probability change jackpot 6 designation command) indicating that probability change jackpot 6 has been determined. Command 8C10(H) is a display result 10 designation command (probability change jackpot 7 designation command) indicating that probability change jackpot 7 has been determined. Command 8C11(H) is a display result 11 designation command (probability change jackpot 8 designation command) indicating that probability change jackpot 8 has been determined. Command 8C12(H) is a display result 12 designation command (probability change jackpot 9 designation command) indicating that probability change jackpot 9 has been determined. The miss designation command, normal jackpot 1, 2 designation command, and special jackpot 1-9 designation command, or these collectively, are also referred to as 8C commands.

Command 8D01 (H) is a first pattern change designation command that indicates the start of variable display of the first special pattern. Command 8D02 (H) is a second pattern change designation command that indicates the start of variable display of the second special pattern. The first pattern change designation command and the second pattern change designation command, or these collectively, are also referred to as 8D commands. Command 8F00 (H) is a pattern confirmation designation command that specifies the end of the variation of the first special pattern and/or the second special pattern.

Command 9000 (H) is an initialization command that specifies initialization (specifies the display of the initial screen when power is turned on) that is sent when power supply to the gaming machine is started. Command 9200 (H) is a power outage recovery command that specifies the recovery from power outage (specifies the display of the power outage recovery screen) that is sent when power supply to the gaming machine is resumed. Command 9500 (H) is a normal state command that specifies the background of the normal state. Command 9501 (H) is a time-saving state command that specifies the background of the time-saving state. Command 9502 (H) is a special probability state command that specifies the background of the special probability state. The normal state command, time-saving state command, and special probability state command, or these are collectively referred to as 95 series commands or background command. Command 9F00 (H) is a customer waiting demonstration command that specifies a customer waiting demonstration.

Command A001 (H) is a jackpot start 1 designation command that specifies the start of normal jackpot 1. Command A002 (H) is a jackpot start 2 designation command that specifies the start of normal jackpot 2. Command A003 (H) is a special jackpot start 3 designation command that specifies the start of special jackpot 1. Command A004 (H) is a special jackpot start 4 designation command that specifies the start of special jackpot 2. Command A005 (H) is a special jackpot start 5 designation command that specifies the start of special jackpot 3. Command A006 (H) is a special jackpot start 6 designation command that specifies the start of special jackpot 4. Command A007 (H) is a special jackpot start 7 designation command that specifies the start of special jackpot 5. Command A008 (H) is a special jackpot start 8 designation command that specifies the start of special jackpot 6. Command A009 (H) is a special jackpot start 9 command that specifies the start of special jackpot 7. Command A010 (H) is a special jackpot start 10 command that specifies the start of special jackpot 8. Command A011 (H) is a special jackpot start 11 command that specifies the start of special jackpot 9. Each of the jackpot start 1-11 commands, or all of them collectively, are also referred to as A0 series commands.

A1XX (H) is a command for specifying when the large prize opening is open, indicating that the large prize opening is open for the number of times (rounds) indicated by XX. The command for specifying when the large prize opening is open is also referred to as an A1 series command. A2XX (H) is a command for specifying after the large prize opening is open, indicating that the large prize opening is closed for the number of times (rounds) indicated by XX. The command for specifying after the large prize opening is open is also referred to as an A2 series command.

Command A301 (H) is a jackpot end 1 designation command that specifies the end of normal jackpot 1. Command A302 (H) is a jackpot end 2 designation command that specifies the end of normal jackpot 2. Command A303 (H) is a jackpot end 3 designation command that specifies the end of special jackpot 1. Command A304 (H) is a jackpot end 4 designation command that specifies the end of special jackpot 2. Command A305 (H) is a jackpot end 5 designation command that specifies the end of special jackpot 3. Command A306 (H) is a jackpot end 6 designation command that specifies the end of special jackpot 4. Command A307 (H) is a jackpot end 7 designation command that specifies the end of special jackpot 5. Command A308 (H) is a jackpot end 8 designation command that specifies the end of special jackpot 6. Command A309 (H) is a jackpot end 9 command that specifies the end of special jackpot 7. Command A310 (H) is a jackpot end 10 command that specifies the end of special jackpot 8. Command A311 (H) is a jackpot end 11 command that specifies the end of special jackpot 9. Each of the jackpot end 1-11 commands, or all of them collectively, are also referred to as A3 series commands.

Command AD00(H) is a high probability jackpot determination device passage designation command that specifies that a V win has occurred. The high probability jackpot determination device passage designation command is a command that is sent when the game ball that has passed through the V large winning port enters the V winning area and is detected by the V winning switch 24.

Command B100(H) is a first start winning designation command that specifies that a first start winning has occurred. Command B200(H) is a second start winning designation command that specifies that a second start winning has occurred.

Command C1XX(H) is a first reserved memory number designation command that designates that the first reserved memory number has reached the number indicated by XX. The first reserved memory number designation command is also referred to as a C1 series command. Command C2XX(H) is a second reserved memory designation command that designates that the second reserved memory number has reached the number indicated by XX. The second reserved memory number designation command is also referred to as a C2 series command.

Commands C4XX(H) and C6XX(H) are presentation control commands that indicate the contents of the winning judgment results, such as a jackpot judgment, a jackpot type judgment, and a variation pattern type judgment, when a starting winning is made at the first starting winning port or the second starting winning port. Of these, command C4XX(H) is a design designation command that indicates the winning judgment results, such as whether or not a winning will occur and the type of jackpot.

C7XX(H) is a special prize opening entry designation command that indicates the passage of the game ball through the special prize opening on the number of times (round) indicated by XX.

A command in which MODE is FD (H) and the 4th bit of EXT is 0 is a right-hit display off command, which indicates that the right-hit display is turned off. A command in which MODE data is FD (H) and the 4th bit of EXT data is 1 is a right-hit display on command, which indicates that the right-hit display is turned on. In this embodiment, the right-hit display on command is also referred to as an FD-based command.

At the time of start winning, the game control microcomputer 100 judges whether or not a jackpot will be reached, the type of jackpot, and the range of judgment values for the value of the random number for judging the type of fluctuation pattern. Then, a value specifying a jackpot and a value specifying the type of jackpot are set in the EXT data of the designation command, and controls the transmission of this to the performance control CPU 120. The game control microcomputer 100 also sets a value specifying the range of judgment values as the judgment result of the type of fluctuation pattern in the EXT data of the fluctuation type command, and controls the transmission of this to the performance control CPU 120. The performance control CPU 120 can recognize whether or not the display result will be a jackpot and the type of jackpot based on the value set in the designation command, and can recognize the type of fluctuation pattern based on the fluctuation type command.

[Fluctuation pattern]
The contents of the fluctuation patterns and how the fluctuation patterns are determined will be described with reference to Figures 23 to 29.

In this embodiment, multiple types of variation patterns are set by the game control microcomputer 100, which is the main side. Each variation pattern is managed by a main variation number and is composed of a combination of a front variation pattern that is a variation pattern corresponding to a front variation and a back variation pattern that is a variation pattern corresponding to a back variation, and each combination contains different contents. The front variation pattern corresponds to the front variation pattern command (80XX (H)) described using FIG. 22, and the back variation pattern corresponds to the back variation pattern command (84XX (H)) described using FIG. 22.

(Main side front fluctuation pattern)
FIG. 23 is a diagram for explaining an example of a previous fluctuation pattern on the main side. Among the multiple types of previous fluctuation patterns each assigned with a previous fluctuation number, previous fluctuation number 1 is a previous fluctuation pattern command (8000(H)) that specifies a normal fluctuation (for example, a fluctuation of a decorative pattern over 13 seconds). Previous fluctuation number 2 is a previous fluctuation pattern command (8001(H)) that specifies a shortened fluctuation (for example, a fluctuation of a decorative pattern over 7 seconds). Previous fluctuation number 3 is a previous fluctuation pattern command (8002(H)) that specifies a super shortened fluctuation (for example, a fluctuation of a decorative pattern over 3 seconds).

Previous change number 4 is a previous change pattern command (8003 (H)) that specifies a normal reach (reel ×) (a reach that is in reach mode but the movable body 32 does not move). Previous change number 5 is a previous change pattern command (8004 (H)) that specifies a normal reach (reel ○) (a reach that is in reach mode and the movable body 32 moves). Previous change number 6 is a previous change pattern command (8005 (H)) that specifies a normal reach (final reach development) (a reach that is in reach mode and develops into a final reach).

Previous change number 7 is a previous change pattern command (8006 (H)) that specifies that a normal reach (character ×) is executed after one pseudo change. A pseudo change is a variable display (variable display) in which the variable display (variable display) of the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and then resumed from the start of the variable display (variable display) to the derived display of the display result of the variable display. Such a performance in which pseudo changes are repeated is also called a pseudo consecutive. By executing a pseudo consecutive, a variable display based on one reserved memory can be made to look like multiple pseudo variable displays to the player. Note that a variable display that is temporarily stopped and then resumed is also called a "re-variable display". Previous change number 8 is a previous change pattern command (8007 (H)) that specifies that a normal reach (character ○) is executed after one pseudo change. Previous change number 9 is a previous change pattern command (8008 (H)) that specifies a normal reach (final reach development) after one pseudo change.

Previous change number 10 is a previous change pattern command (8009(H)) that specifies that a normal reach (character ×) is to be executed after two pseudo changes. Previous change number 11 is a previous change pattern command (800A(H)) that specifies that a normal reach (character ○) is to be executed after two pseudo changes. Previous change number 12 is a previous change pattern command (800B(H)) that specifies a normal reach (final reach development) after two pseudo changes.

A change time is specified for each previous change pattern, and an animation (video) is displayed on the image display device 5 for each change time. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, it takes about 33.3 msec for one still image (called a frame) that makes up the video. For example, for patterns with previous change numbers 7 to 9, the change time is set to 41,500 msec, and the number of frames is about 1,246. For patterns with previous change numbers 10 to 12, the change time is set to 62,000 msec, and the number of frames is about 1,861.

(Main side rear fluctuation pattern)
FIG. 24 is a diagram for explaining an example of a post-fluctuation pattern on the main side. Among the multiple types of post-fluctuation patterns each assigned with a post-fluctuation number, post-fluctuation number 1 is a post-fluctuation pattern command (8400(H)) that specifies a 13-second fluctuation. Post-fluctuation number 2 is a post-fluctuation pattern command (8401(H)) that specifies a 7-second fluctuation. Post-fluctuation number 3 is a post-fluctuation pattern command (8402(H)) that specifies a 3-second fluctuation. Post-fluctuation number 4 is a post-fluctuation pattern command (8403(H)) that specifies the execution of a pseudo consecutive fake. A pseudo consecutive fake is a performance that appears to execute a pseudo consecutive but does not execute the pseudo consecutive after all.

Later change number 5 is a later change pattern command (8404(H)) that specifies a normal reach (miss) (a change in the decorative pattern that becomes a reach state but does not develop into an SP reach and becomes a miss state). Later change number 6 is a later change pattern command (8405(H)) that specifies the first half of the SP (miss) (a change in the decorative pattern that develops into an SP reach but becomes a miss state in the first half of the SP reach). Later change number 7 is a later change pattern command (8406(H)) that specifies the second half of the SP (miss) (a change in the decorative pattern that develops into the second half of the SP reach but becomes a miss state in the second half of the SP reach). Later change number 8 is a later change pattern command (8407(H)) that specifies a final reach (miss) (a change in the decorative pattern that develops into a final reach but becomes a miss state in the final reach).

Later change number 9 is a later change pattern command (8408(H)) that specifies a normal reach (hit) (a change in the decorative pattern that becomes a reach state and then a hit state). Later change number 10 is a later change pattern command (8409(H)) that specifies the first half of the SP (hit) (a change in the decorative pattern that develops into an SP reach and then becomes a hit state in the first half of the SP reach). Later change number 11 is a later change pattern command (840A(H)) that specifies the second half of the SP (hit) (a change in the decorative pattern that develops into the second half of the SP reach and then becomes a hit state in the second half of the SP reach). Later change number 12 is a later change pattern command (840B(H)) that specifies a final reach (hit) (a change in the decorative pattern that develops into a final reach and then becomes a hit state in the final reach).

(Determination of subsequent fluctuation pattern)
The after-variation pattern is determined by using different random counters depending on whether the jackpot is determined to be a jackpot or a miss in the jackpot determination. FIG. 25 is a diagram for explaining the after-variation pattern determination table in the case of a miss. As shown in FIG. 25, when the jackpot is determined to be a miss in the jackpot determination, the after-variation pattern is determined by using the random 3 described in FIG. 20. Furthermore, when the jackpot is determined to be a miss in the jackpot determination, the after-variation pattern is determined by using different judgment value numbers according to the number of reserved memories after consumption, and the after-variation number determined is also different.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 25(a), when the number of reserved memories after consumption is 0, one of the post-change patterns is determined from post-change numbers 1, 4, and 5 to 8, and a different judgment value number is set for each post-change pattern. Note that the probability of determining one of the post-change numbers 6 to 8 that develop into an SP reach or final reach (selection rate of post-change numbers 6 to 8) is approximately 1/102.

When there is only one reserved memory after consumption, one of the post-change patterns is determined from post-change numbers 1, 4, and 5-8, and a different judgment value number is set for each post-change pattern. The probability that one of the post-change numbers 6-8 that develop into an SP reach or final reach is determined (selection rate of post-change numbers 6-8) is approximately 1/102.

When the number of reserved memories after consumption is two, one of the post-change patterns is determined from post-change numbers 2, 4, and 5-8, and a different judgment value number is set for each post-change pattern. The probability that one of the post-change numbers 6-8 that develop into an SP reach or final reach is determined (selection rate of post-change numbers 6-8) is approximately 1/102.

When the number of reserved memories after consumption is three, one of the following change patterns is determined from the following change numbers 3, 4, and 5 to 8, and a different judgment value number is set for each following change pattern. The probability that one of the following change numbers 6 to 8 that develops into an SP reach or final reach is determined (selection rate of following change numbers 6 to 8) is approximately 1/102.

In this way, the subsequent variation pattern is determined using a different judgment value number depending on the number of reserved memories after consumption, and further, the subsequent variation number is determined using a different judgment value number depending on the number of reserved memories after consumption, so the type of variation pattern changes depending on the number of remaining reserved memories, which adds variety to the game and increases the interest of the game.

Figure 26 is a diagram for explaining the post-fluctuation pattern determination table at the time of a jackpot. As shown in Figure 26, when a jackpot is determined in the jackpot determination, the post-fluctuation pattern is determined using Random 4 described in Figure 20. Furthermore, when a jackpot is determined in the jackpot determination, the post-fluctuation pattern is determined using different determination value numbers depending on the type of jackpot.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 26(a), when a normal jackpot 1 or 2 or a special jackpot 1, 2, or 5 to 8 is determined, a post-change pattern is determined from post-change numbers 9 to 12, and a different judgment value number is set for each post-change pattern. The probability of determining one of post-change numbers 10 to 12, which develops into an SP reach or final reach (selection rate of post-change numbers 10 to 12) is approximately 1/1.1.

If either the guaranteed jackpot 3 or 9 is determined, one of the post-change patterns is determined from the post-change numbers 9 to 12, and a different judgment value number is set for each of the post-change patterns. The probability of being determined to be one of the post-change numbers 10 to 12 that develop into the SP reach or final reach (selection rate of the post-change numbers 10 to 12) is approximately 1/1.1.

If the probability of winning jackpot 4 is reached, one of the post-change patterns is selected from the post-change numbers 9 to 12, and a different judgment value is set for each of the post-change patterns. The probability of being selected as one of the post-change numbers 10 to 12, which develop into an SP reach or final reach (selection rate of post-change numbers 10 to 12) is approximately 1/1.1.

In this way, the subsequent fluctuation pattern is determined using different judgment values depending on the type of jackpot, so the type of fluctuation pattern changes depending on the type of jackpot, which adds variety to the game and makes it more interesting.

Also, as shown in FIG. 25, the probability of being determined to be one of the variable numbers 6 to 8 after developing into the SP Reach or Final Reach is approximately 1/102 when there is a miss, but is higher at approximately 1/1.1 when there is a jackpot, so if there is a development into the SP Reach or Final Reach, the player can be made to expect a jackpot to occur.

(Determination of previous fluctuation pattern)
27 is a diagram for explaining the previous fluctuation pattern determination table. The previous fluctuation pattern is determined by using the number of random 5 determination values that differ according to the type of the previous fluctuation pattern that is determined first. Furthermore, the previous fluctuation number that is determined also differs according to the type of the previous fluctuation pattern that is determined first.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 27(a), when the post-fluctuation pattern of post-fluctuation number 1 is determined, the post-fluctuation pattern of post-fluctuation number 1 is determined. As shown in FIG. 27(b), when the post-fluctuation pattern of post-fluctuation number 2 is determined, the post-fluctuation pattern of post-fluctuation number 2 is determined. As shown in FIG. 27(c), when the post-fluctuation pattern of post-fluctuation number 3 is determined, the post-fluctuation pattern of post-fluctuation number 3 is determined. As shown in FIG. 27(d), when the post-fluctuation pattern of post-fluctuation number 4 is determined, the post-fluctuation pattern of post-fluctuation number 1 is determined.

As shown in FIG. 27(e), if the post-change pattern of post-change number 5 or 9 is determined, the post-change pattern of post-change number 4 or 7 is determined. As shown in FIG. 27(f), if the post-change pattern of post-change number 6 or 10 is determined, the post-change pattern of post-change number 4, 7, or 10 is determined. As shown in FIG. 27(g), if the post-change pattern of post-change number 7 is determined, the post-change pattern of post-change number 5, 8, or 11 is determined.

As shown in FIG. 27(h), when the post-change pattern of post-change number 11 is determined, the post-change pattern is determined to be one of post-change numbers 5, 8, or 11. As shown in FIG. 27(i), when the post-change pattern of post-change number 8 is determined, the post-change pattern is determined to be one of post-change numbers 6, 9, or 12. As shown in FIG. 27(j), when the post-change pattern of post-change number 12 is determined, the post-change pattern is determined to be one of post-change numbers 6, 9, or 12.

(All fluctuation patterns)
Fig. 29 is a diagram for explaining an example of the total fluctuation pattern on the main side. When the rear fluctuation pattern and the front fluctuation pattern are determined as described in Fig. 25 to Fig. 27, the fluctuation pattern becomes one of the main fluctuation patterns 1 to 26 as shown in Fig. 29.

Figure 29 is a diagram for explaining an example of all fluctuation patterns on the sub side. Furthermore, on the sub side, fluctuation patterns of sub fluctuation numbers 1 to 26 are also defined so as to correspond to each of the fluctuation patterns of main fluctuation numbers 1 to 26.

[Each preview performance]
FIG. 30 is a diagram for explaining the lottery table in each advance notice performance. In this embodiment, an advance notice performance may be executed that suggests that the display result of the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol will become a predetermined jackpot symbol. The advance notice performance is a performance that suggests or predicts the occurrence of a jackpot, and is also a performance that makes the player expect a jackpot. The advance notice performance includes a group advance notice performance (also called a group advance notice or a group performance) and a SP first half title advance notice performance (also called a SP first half title advance notice).

The group preview performance is a performance that displays an image of multiple objects progressing in a group. The multiple objects include any object that progresses, such as characters such as people, fish, and animals, or machines such as airplanes and cars. There may be one type of object such as a character, or multiple types. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, multiple types of group preview performances are provided. Specifically, a six-person group preview in which six characters dressed as maids progress in a group, a Bakuchu group preview in which a mouse character with a bomb body named Bakuchu progresses in a group, and a Boingo group preview in which a character named Boingo progresses in a group can be executed.

In this embodiment, when a post-change pattern of post-change numbers 6-8 and 10-12 that develop into an SP reach or final reach is determined, whether or not the group preview performance will be performed is determined by a group preview lottery, and the type of group preview performance to be performed is determined.

Figure 30(a) shows a lottery table for executing a group preview lottery on stage A. In this embodiment, even if a variable display is performed based on the same variation pattern, multiple types of stages are provided, each with a different presentation style (background image, BGM, sound effects, characters that appear, etc.). As will be described in more detail later, in this embodiment, stage A is a stage where a presentation is performed by a character called Yume Yume, who is one of six characters dressed as maids.

As shown in FIG. 30(a), if the after-change pattern of after-change numbers 6 to 8, which correspond to a miss, is determined, the group preview performance is executed with a probability of 15%, of which the six-person group preview is determined with a probability of 13%, and the Boingo group preview is determined with a probability of 2%. Also, if the after-change pattern of after-change numbers 10 to 12, which correspond to a win, is determined, the group preview performance is executed with a probability of 85%, of which the six-person group preview is determined with a probability of 55%, and the Boingo group preview is determined with a probability of 30%.

Considering that the probability of a miss is about 319/320 and the probability of the subsequent fluctuation pattern of subsequent fluctuation numbers 6 to 8 being determined is about 1/102, the probability of the subsequent fluctuation pattern of fluctuation numbers 6 to 8 being determined when a miss is about 1/102. In this case, the probability of the group forecast being executed is about 15%, so the probability of the group forecast being executed when a miss is about 0.15%. On the other hand, considering that the probability of a jackpot is about 1/320 and the probability of the subsequent fluctuation pattern of subsequent fluctuation numbers 10 to 12 being determined is about 1/1.1, the probability of the subsequent fluctuation pattern of fluctuation numbers 10 to 12 being determined when a hit is about 1/320. In this case, the probability of the group forecast being executed is about 85%, so the probability of the group forecast being executed when a hit is about 0.27%. From this, the probability of a jackpot when the group forecast is executed (reliability, expectation) is about 64%. The reliability (expectation) of the group forecast is not limited to 64%, and if it exceeds 50%, it can be executed to give the player hope that a jackpot will occur.

Figure 30(b) shows a lottery table for executing a group preview lottery on stage B. As will be described in more detail later, in this embodiment, stage B is a stage where a performance is performed by a character called Bakuchu.

As shown in FIG. 30(b), if the after-variation pattern of after-variation numbers 6 to 8, which correspond to a miss, is determined, the group preview performance is executed with a probability of 10%, of which the group preview is determined to be the Bakuchu group preview with a probability of 8%, and the Boingo group preview with a probability of 2%. Also, if the after-variation pattern of after-variation numbers 10 to 12, which correspond to a win, is determined, the group preview performance is executed with a probability of 90%, of which the group preview is determined to be the Bakuchu group preview with a probability of 60%, and the Boingo group preview with a probability of 30%.

As mentioned above, the probability that the subsequent variation pattern of variation numbers 6 to 8 is determined when a miss occurs is approximately 1/102. In this case, the probability that the group forecast is executed is approximately 10%, so the probability that the group forecast is executed when a miss occurs is approximately 0.10%. On the other hand, the probability that the subsequent variation pattern of variation numbers 10 to 12 is determined when a hit occurs is approximately 1/320. In this case, the probability that the group forecast is executed is approximately 90%, so the probability that the group forecast is executed when a hit occurs is approximately 0.28%. From this, the probability (reliability, expectation) of a jackpot occurring when the group forecast is executed is approximately 74%. Note that the reliability (expectation) of the group forecast is not limited to 74%, and as long as it exceeds 50%, the player can expect a jackpot to occur when it is executed.

The SP First Half Title Preview is an effect that suggests that a jackpot will occur if the game develops into an SP Reach, based on the display mode of the text image showing the title of the first half of the SP Reach. In this embodiment, the display of the text image of the SP First Half Title is executed on both Stage A and Stage B, but the preview effect that changes the display mode of the text image of the SP First Half Title is executed only on Stage B. Note that a preview effect that changes the display mode of the text image of the SP First Half Title may also be executed on Stage A.

In this embodiment, when the post-change pattern of the post-change number 6 to 12 that develops into the SP reach or final reach is determined, it is decided whether or not the SP first half title preview will be executed in the SP first half title preview lottery, and the type of SP first half title preview to be executed.

As shown in FIG. 30(c), if the after-change pattern of after-change numbers 6 to 8, which correspond to a miss, is determined, there is a 20% probability that the SP first half title announcement will be made, and if the after-change pattern of after-change numbers 10 to 12, which correspond to a win, there is an 80% probability that the SP first half title announcement will be made.

As mentioned above, the probability that the subsequent variation pattern of the variation numbers 6 to 8 is determined when the player loses is approximately 1/102. In this case, the probability that the SP first half title announcement is executed is approximately 20%, so the probability that the SP first half title announcement is executed when the player loses is approximately 0.20%. On the other hand, the probability that the subsequent variation pattern of the variation numbers 10 to 12 is determined when the player wins is approximately 1/320. In this case, the probability that the SP first half title announcement is executed is approximately 80%, so the probability that the SP first half title announcement is executed when the player wins is approximately 0.25%. From this, the probability (reliability, expectation) of a jackpot when the SP first half title announcement is executed is approximately 56%. Note that the reliability (expectation) of the SP first half title announcement is not limited to 56%, and if it exceeds 50%, the player can expect a jackpot to occur when it is executed.

Thus, the reliability (expected jackpot) of the group preview is 64% (in the case of stage A) or 74% (in the case of stage B), while the reliability (expected jackpot) of the SP first half title preview is 56%, making the group preview more reliable than the SP first half title preview. For this reason, when the group preview is executed, it is more advantageous for the player than when the SP first half title preview is executed, and players tend to expect the group preview to be executed more than the SP first half title preview.

In addition, the Boingo Group Forecast in Stage A is executed with only a 2% probability when it is a miss, but with a 30% probability when it is a hit, so when the Boingo Group Forecast is executed, it is highly likely to be a big hit. On the other hand, the Six-person Group Forecast in Stage A is executed with a 13% probability when it is a miss, but with a 55% probability when it is a hit, so even if the Six-person Group Forecast is executed, it is more likely to be a miss than the Boingo Group Forecast. For this reason, when the Boingo Group Forecast is executed, it is more advantageous for the player than when the Six-person Group Forecast is executed, and players tend to expect the Boingo Group Forecast to be executed more than the Six-person Group Forecast.

Similarly, the Boingo Group Forecast in Stage B is executed with only a 2% probability on a miss, but with a 30% probability on a hit, so when the Boingo Group Forecast is executed, it is highly likely to be a big hit. On the other hand, the Bakuchu Group Forecast in Stage B is executed with an 8% probability on a miss, but with a 60% probability on a hit, so even if the Bakuchu Group Forecast is executed, it is more likely to be a miss than the Boingo Group Forecast. For this reason, when the Boingo Group Forecast is executed, it is more advantageous for the player than when the Bakuchu Group Forecast is executed, and players tend to expect the Boingo Group Forecast to be executed more than the Bakuchu Group Forecast.

Furthermore, the six-person group announcement in stage A is executed with a probability of 13% when it is a miss, but with a probability of 55% when it is a hit. On the other hand, the explosive chocolate group announcement in stage B is executed with a probability of 8% when it is a miss, but with a probability of 60% when it is a hit. For this reason, the explosive chocolate group announcement in stage B is executed more frequently when it is a big hit than the six-person group announcement in stage A. As a result, when the explosive chocolate group announcement is executed in stage B, it is more advantageous for the player than when the six-person group announcement is executed in stage A, and players tend to expect the six-person group announcement to be executed more than the six-person group announcement.

The reliability of the group preview in stage A and the reliability of the group preview in stage B may be designed to be the same. In this case, it is sufficient that both the group preview in stage A and the group preview in stage B are more reliable than the SP first half title preview, and the Boingo group preview is more reliable than the 6-person group preview and the Bakuchu group preview.

[motion]
Next, the operation (function) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Main Operations of Main Board 11)
First, the main operations on the main board 11 will be described.

(Special pattern processing)
31 is a flow chart showing an example of a game control main process. When power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is started up, and the game control main process is executed by the CPU 103.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 31, the CPU 103 first sets interrupts to be prohibited (step S1). Next, the CPU 103 performs the necessary initial settings (step S2). The initial settings include setting the stack pointer, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output port, etc.), and setting the RAM 102 to an accessible state.

Next, the CPU 103 judges whether the recovery condition is satisfied (step S3). The recovery condition can be satisfied when the clear signal is in the OFF state, backup data is present, and the backup RAM is normal. When the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, if the clear switch 92 provided on the power supply board 17 is pressed, for example, a clear signal in the ON state is input to the game control microcomputer 100. If such a clear signal in the ON state is input, it is sufficient to judge in step S3 that the recovery condition is not satisfied. The backup data only needs to be capable of being stored in the RAM 102, which serves as the backup RAM for game control. In step S3, it is sufficient to check or inspect the presence or absence of backup data and the presence or absence of data errors, and to judge whether the recovery condition can be satisfied.

When the restoration condition is met (Y in step S3), the CPU 103 executes a restoration process (step S4) and then executes a setting confirmation process (step S5). The restoration process in step S4 causes the CPU 103 to set a working area based on the contents stored in RAM 102. By setting the working area using the backup data stored in RAM 102, the game state when the power supply was stopped is restored, and if, for example, a special symbol was changing, it is sufficient if the change of the special symbol can be resumed from the state before the stoppage.

If the recovery condition is not met (N in step S3), the CPU 103 executes an initialization process (step S6) and then executes a setting change process (step S7). The initialization process in step S6 includes a clearing process that clears flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and the execution of the clearing process sets initial values in the working area.

In the setting confirmation process of step S5, it is determined whether a predetermined setting confirmation condition is met. The setting confirmation condition is met, for example, when power supply is started, the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is in the ON state and the setting key 51 is turned ON. The setting confirmation process of step S5 is executed when the recovery condition is met in step S3, including the clear signal being in the OFF state. Therefore, since the setting confirmation condition can be met when the clear signal is in the OFF state, the clear signal being in the OFF state can also be included in the setting confirmation condition.

When the setting confirmation condition is met in the setting confirmation process of step S5, the pachinko gaming machine 1 enters a setting confirmation state in which the setting values set therein can be confirmed, and a setting confirmation start command is sent from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. In the setting confirmation state, the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be confirmed by viewing them on the display monitor 29. When the setting confirmation state is to end, a setting confirmation end command is sent from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12.

When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the setting confirmation state, it may be in a game stop state in which the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped. In the game stop state, the launch of game balls by the operation of the ball hitting operation handle 30, the detection of game balls by various switches, etc., are stopped, and control may be performed such that a missing symbol or the like is frozen and a display corresponding to a game stop state other than a missing symbol is performed. When the setting confirmation state ends, the game stop state associated with it may also end.

In the setting change process of step S7, the CPU 103 determines whether a predetermined setting change condition is met. The setting change condition is met, for example, when the power supply is started, the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is in the ON state, and the setting key 51 is turned ON. The setting change condition may also include the clear signal being in the ON state.

When the setting change condition is met in the setting change process of step S7, the pachinko gaming machine 1 enters a setting change state in which the setting value set therein can be changed, and a setting change start command is sent from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. In the setting change state, the setting value is displayed on the display monitor 29, and the numerical value displayed on the display monitor 29 is updated and displayed sequentially each time the setting change switch 52 is operated. After that, when the setting key 51 is turned off by an attendant at the game center or the like, the CPU 103 stores (updates and stores) the setting value displayed on the display monitor 29 in the backup area of the RAM 102, and turns off the display monitor 29. When the setting change state is to be ended, a setting change end command is sent from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12.

When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the setting change state, the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be in a play stop state, just as when it is in the setting confirmation state. When the setting change state ends, the associated play stop state may also end.

When the performance control board 12 receives a setting check start command or a setting change start command, it may perform control to notify the user that the setting is being checked or changed. For example, it may display a specific image on the image display device 5, output a specific sound from the speakers 8L and 8R, or cause a light-emitting component such as the game effect lamp 9 to emit light in a specific manner.

The clear signal is turned on by, for example, pressing the clear switch 92 provided on the power supply board 17. Therefore, when the power supply is started, if the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is on, if the clear switch 92 is on, the initialization process of step S6 and the setting change process of step S7 are executed, and it is possible to control it to the setting change state, and if the clear switch 92 is off, the recovery process of step S4 and the setting confirmation process of step S5 are executed, and it is possible to control it to the setting confirmation state. When the power supply is started, if the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is off or if the setting key 51 is off, if the clear switch 92 is on, the initialization process of step S6 is executed but it is not controlled to the setting change state, and if the clear switch 92 is off, the recovery process of step S4 is executed but it is not controlled to the setting confirmation state.

After executing the setting confirmation process or setting change process, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process to initialize the random number circuit 104 (step S8). The CPU 103 then sets the register of the CTC built into the game control microcomputer 100 so that a timer interrupt occurs periodically at a predetermined time (for example, every 2 ms) (step S9), and permits the interrupt (step S10). After that, a loop process is entered. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined time intervals (for example, every 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute the timer interrupt process.

(Game control timer interrupt processing)
Fig. 32 is a flow chart showing an example of a game control timer interrupt process. When the CPU 103 that has executed the game control main process receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flow chart of Fig. 32. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in Fig. 32 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process to determine whether or not detection signals have been received from various switches such as the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, and the count switch 23 via the switch circuit 110 (step S21). Next, the CPU 103 executes a predetermined main side error process to perform an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko game machine 1, and can issue a warning if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). After this, the CPU 103 executes a predetermined information output process to output data such as jackpot information (information indicating the number of jackpots that have occurred), start information (information indicating the number of start winnings), and probability fluctuation information (information indicating the number of times the special state has been entered) to be supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko game machine 1 (step S23).

Following the information output process, the CPU 103 executes a game random number update process to update at least a portion of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software (step S24). After this, the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process process (step S25). By the CPU 103 executing the special symbol process process at each timer interrupt, management of the execution and reservation of the special symbol game, control of the big win game state and small win game state, control of the game state, etc. are realized.

Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S26). The CPU 103 executes the normal symbol process at each timer interrupt, enabling the execution and reservation management of the normal symbol game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the game ball passing through the passing gate 41), and the opening control of the variable winning ball device 6B based on a "normal symbol hit". The normal symbol game is executed by driving the normal symbol display unit 26, and the number of reserved normal symbols is displayed by lighting up the normal symbol memory display unit 25.

After executing the normal symbol process processing, as part of the game control timer interrupt processing, processing when a power outage occurs, processing for paying out prize balls, etc. may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes a command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may set a performance control command for transmission in each of the above processes. In the command control processing of step S27, a process is performed to transmit the performance control command set for transmission to a sub-side control board such as the performance control board 12. After executing the command control processing, the interrupt is permitted and then the game control timer interrupt processing is terminated.

(Special pattern processing)
Fig. 33 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol process. The special symbol process is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in Fig. 32. In this special symbol process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S101).

In the start winning judgment process, a process is executed to detect the occurrence of a start winning, store the reserved information in a specified area of the RAM 102, and update the reserved memory number. When a start winning occurs, a random number value for determining the display result (including the type of big win) and the variation pattern is extracted and stored as reserved information. In addition, a process for predicting and judging the display result and the variation pattern based on the extracted random number value may be executed. After the reserved information and the reserved memory number are stored, a transmission setting is performed to transmit a performance control command to the performance control board 12 to specify the judgment results such as the occurrence of a start winning, the reserved memory number, and the predictive judgment. The performance control command at the time of the start winning that has been set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12, for example, after the special pattern process is completed, by executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. 32.

After executing the start winning determination process in step S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes one of the processes in steps S110 to S120 depending on the value of the special symbol process flag provided in the RAM 102. Note that in each step of the special symbol process (steps S110 to S120), a transmission setting is made to transmit a performance control command corresponding to each step to the performance control board 12.

The normal special pattern processing in step S110 is executed when the value of the special pattern process flag is "0" (initial value). In this normal special pattern processing, a determination is made as to whether or not to start the first special pattern game or the second special pattern game based on the presence or absence of reserved information. In addition, in the normal special pattern processing, based on a random number value for determining the display result, whether or not the display result of the special pattern or the decorative pattern is to be a "big win" or a "small win", and if it is a "big win", the type of big win is determined (pre-determined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Furthermore, in the normal special pattern processing, a determined special pattern (either a big win pattern, a small win pattern, or a miss pattern) to be stopped and displayed in the special pattern game is set in response to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "1", and the normal special pattern processing is terminated. Note that the special pattern game using the second special pattern may be executed in priority over the special pattern game using the first special pattern (also called special pattern 2 priority consumption). Also, the order in which the game balls enter the first start winning slot and the second start winning slot may be stored, and the conditions for starting the special game may be met in the order in which the balls enter (also known as winning order consumption).

When making various decisions based on random number values, various tables stored in ROM 101 (tables in which decision values compared with random number values are assigned to decision results) are referenced. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the performance control board 12. On the performance control board 12, various tables are stored in ROM 121.

The fluctuation pattern setting process of step S111 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "1". This fluctuation pattern setting process includes a process of determining the fluctuation pattern to one of multiple types using a random number value for determining the fluctuation pattern based on a pre-determined result of whether the display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit". In the fluctuation pattern setting process, when the fluctuation pattern is determined, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "2" and the fluctuation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern specifies the execution time of the special game (special game variation time) (which is also the execution time of the variable display of the decorative symbols), the manner of the variable display of the decorative symbols (such as whether or not there is a reach), and the content of the presentation during the variable display of the decorative symbols (such as the type of reach presentation), and is also called the variable display pattern.

The special pattern change process of step S112 is executed when the value of the special pattern process flag is "2". This special pattern change process includes a process of making settings to change the special pattern in the special pattern 1 variable display section 21 and the special pattern 2 variable display section 22, and a process of measuring the elapsed time since the special pattern started to change. It also determines whether the measured elapsed time has reached the special pattern change time corresponding to the change pattern. Then, when the elapsed time since the special pattern started to change reaches the special pattern change time, the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "3", and the special pattern change process ends.

The special symbol stop process of step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "3". This special symbol stop process includes a process for stopping the variation of the special symbol in the special symbol 1 variable display unit 21 and the special symbol 2 variable display unit 22, and setting the special symbol to stop displaying (deriving) the confirmed special symbol that is the display result of the special symbol. If the display result is a "jackpot", the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "4". If the display result is a "miss", the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "0". If the display result is a "miss", when the time-saving state or the probability of winning is controlled and the end of the number of times is reached, the game state is also updated. When the value of the special symbol process flag is updated, the special symbol stop process ends.

The pre-opening process for the jackpot in step S114 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "4". This pre-opening process for the jackpot includes a process for setting the jackpot opening port to open by starting the execution of a round in the jackpot game state based on the display result being "jackpot". When the jackpot opening port is opened, a process for supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the jackpot opening port is executed. At this time, for example, depending on the type of jackpot, the maximum open period for the jackpot opening port and the maximum number of rounds to be executed are set. When these settings are completed, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "5" and the pre-opening process for the jackpot is completed.

The jackpot opening process of step S115 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "5". This jackpot opening process includes a process for measuring the time that has elapsed since the jackpot opening was opened, and a process for determining whether or not it is time to return the jackpot opening from an open state to a closed state based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23. When the jackpot opening is to be returned to a closed state, a process for stopping the supply of a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the jackpot opening door is executed, and then the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "6", and the jackpot opening process is terminated.

The post-jackpot release process of step S116 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "6". This post-jackpot release process includes a process for determining whether the number of times the round that opens the big prize opening has been executed has reached a set upper limit, and a process for making settings to end the jackpot game state when the upper limit has been reached. When the number of times the round has been executed has not reached the upper limit, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "5", whereas when the number of times the round has been executed has reached the upper limit, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "7". When the value of the special chart process flag is updated, the post-jackpot release process ends.

The jackpot end process of step S117 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "7". This jackpot end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to the period during which an ending presentation is executed as a presentation operation that notifies the end of the jackpot game state has elapsed, and a process of making various settings for starting special rate control or time-saving control in response to the end of the jackpot game state. When such settings are made, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot end process ends.

The pachinko game machine 1 is configured so that the winning probability of a jackpot and the ball payout rate change according to the setting value. For example, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, the winning probability of a jackpot and the ball payout rate change by using a display result judgment table (winning probability) according to the setting value. For example, the setting value is made up of six levels from 1 to 6, with 6 being the highest winning probability of a jackpot, and the winning probability of a jackpot decreasing as the value decreases in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1. In this example, when the setting value is set to 6, the player has the highest advantage, and the advantage decreases stepwise as the value decreases in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1. If the winning probability of a jackpot changes according to the setting value, the ball payout rate may also change according to the setting value. The winning probability of a jackpot is constant regardless of the setting value, while the number of rounds in the jackpot game state may change according to the setting value. The pachinko gaming machine 1 may be configured to be able to set one of a number of setting values that have different degrees of advantage for the player. The setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is notified by sending a setting value designation command from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12.

The set values that can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be five or less or seven or more. The smaller the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous it may be for the player. The game characteristics may be changed according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the game characteristics are such that the probability of a jackpot in the normal state is 1/320, and the probability of ... On the other hand, the game may be of a type in which the rate at which the game ball passes through a predetermined switch during a jackpot game varies depending on the variable special chart (so-called V-type), and when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 3, the probability of a jackpot is 1/320 and the probability of a small jackpot is 1/50, and the game may be of a type in which the game ball passes through a predetermined switch provided inside the special variable winning ball device 7 during a high base (during time-saving control) (so-called one-type two-type mixed type). When the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any of 1 to 3, the game is the same, but a setting may be provided in which the probability of a jackpot or small jackpot is higher than when the set value is any of 1 to 3, but the number of prize balls that can be obtained during a jackpot game is smaller (for example, when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any of 4 to 6). When the game is changed depending on the set value, a common switch may be used for different purposes. Specifically, when the setting value is 1 to 3, a predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 is used as a presentation switch (a switch for executing a predetermined presentation each time the game ball passes through a predetermined area), and when the setting value is 4 to 6, the predetermined switch may be used as a game switch (a switch for controlling the game state to a special bonus state or a jackpot game state based on the game ball passing through the predetermined switch).

The jackpot type may be determined at different rates depending on the set value, based on the allocation of judgment values in the jackpot type judgment table. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined at a common rate regardless of the set value. The fluctuation pattern may be determined at different rates depending on the set value, based on the allocation of judgment values in the fluctuation pattern judgment table. Alternatively, the fluctuation pattern may be determined at a common rate regardless of the set value. The execution rate of normal reaches and super reaches may differ depending on the set value, so that the setting value may be suggested by the frequency at which normal reaches and super reaches are executed. Alternatively, the execution rate of normal reaches and super reaches may be common regardless of the set value. In addition, any setting suggestion performance may be possible at different rates depending on the set value.

(Start winning judgment process)
FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing the start winning judgment process. The CPU 103 executes the start winning judgment process in S101 of the special symbol process shown in FIG. 33. In the start winning judgment process, the CPU 103 first judges whether the first starting hole switch 22A is on or not based on a detection signal from the first starting hole switch 22A provided corresponding to the first starting winning hole formed by the winning ball device 6A (step S51). At this time, if the first starting hole switch 22A is on (Y in step S51), it judges whether the first special symbol reserved memory number, which is the reserved memory number of the special symbol game using the first special symbol, is a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4" as the upper limit memory number) (step S52). The CPU 103 may specify the first special symbol reserved memory number by reading the first reserved memory number count value, which is the stored value of the first reserved memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit not shown, for example. When the number of reserved first special charts is not the upper limit in step S52 (N in step S52), the storage value of a start port buffer provided in a game control buffer setting section (not shown), for example, is set to "1" (step S53).

When the first start port switch 22A is off in step S51 (N in step S51) or when the first special symbol reserved memory number has reached the upper limit in step S52 (Y in step S52), the second start port switch 22B is determined to be on or not based on a detection signal from the second start port switch 22B provided corresponding to the second start port formed by the variable winning ball device 6B (step S54). At this time, if the second start port switch 22B is on (Y in step S54), it is determined whether the second special symbol reserved memory number, which is the reserved memory number of the special symbol game using the second special symbol, has reached a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4" as the upper limit memory number) (step S55). The CPU 103 may specify the second special symbol reserved memory number by, for example, reading the second reserved memory number count value, which is the stored value of the second reserved memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit not shown. If the number of reserved second special charts is not the upper limit in step S55 (N in step S55), the storage value of the start port buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit (not shown) is set to "2" (step S56).

After executing either step S53 or step S56, the number of reserved memories corresponding to the start port buffer value, which is the stored value of the start port buffer, is updated to add 1 (step S57). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1", the first reserved memory count value is added by 1, while when the start port buffer value is "2", the second reserved memory count value is added by 1. Thus, the first reserved memory count value is updated to increase by 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning port and the first start condition corresponding to the special game using the first special game is established. Also, the second reserved memory count value is updated to increase by 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning port and the second start condition corresponding to the special game using the second special game is established. At this time, the total reserved memory count is also updated to add 1 (step S58). For example, the total reserved memory count value, which is the stored value of the total reserved memory counter provided in the game control counter setting unit (not shown), may be updated to add 1.

After executing the process of step S58, the CPU 103 extracts numerical data indicating the random number value RANDOM 1 for determining a jackpot, the random number value RANDOM 2 for determining the type of jackpot, and the random number values RANDOM 3 and RANDOM 4 for determining the variation pattern from the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104 and the random counter of the game control counter setting unit (not shown) (step S59). The numerical data indicating each random number value thus extracted is stored by being set as reserved information at the beginning of an empty entry in the special chart reserved memory unit according to the start port buffer value (step S60). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1", numerical data indicating the random number values RANDOM 1 to RANDOM 4 are stored in the first special chart reserved memory unit (not shown), while when the start port buffer value is "2", numerical data indicating the random number values RANDOM 1 to RANDOM 4 are stored in the second special chart reserved memory unit (not shown).

The numerical data indicating the random number value RANDOM1 for determining a jackpot and the random number value RANDOM2 for determining the type of jackpot are used to determine whether the result of the variable display of the special and decorative patterns is a "jackpot" or not, and further to determine the type of jackpot if the result of the variable display is a "jackpot". The random number values RANDOM3 and RANDOM4 for determining the variable pattern are used to determine the variable pattern including the variable display time of the special and decorative patterns. By executing the process of step S59, the CPU 103 extracts numerical data indicating all of the random number values used to determine the variable display mode including the variable display result and the variable display time of the special and decorative patterns.

Following the processing of step S59, the start port winning designation command is set to be sent according to the start port buffer value (step S60). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1", the storage address of the first start port winning designation command table in ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer, and the setting is made to send the first start port winning designation command to the performance control board 12. On the other hand, when the start port buffer value is "2", the storage address of the second start port winning designation command table in ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area of the transmission command buffer, and the setting is made to send the second start port winning designation command to the performance control board 12. The start port winning designation command set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12, for example, by executing the command control processing of S27 shown in FIG. 32 after the special pattern process processing is completed.

Following the processing of step S60, the CPU 103 stores a random number value in a storage area corresponding to the reserved memory (step S61). After that, the CPU 103 clears the start port buffer and initializes the stored value to "0" (step S62), and then ends the start winning determination processing. This ensures that even if both the first start port switch 22A and the second start port switch 22B simultaneously detect a valid start winning of a game ball, the processing based on the detection of both valid start winnings can be completed reliably.

(Special pattern normal processing)
FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing an example of the normal special symbol processing. As shown in FIG. 35, in the normal special symbol processing, the CPU 103 judges whether there is reserved memory data in the first reserved memory buffer (a memory buffer for storing reserved memory information of the first special symbol) or the second reserved memory buffer (a memory buffer for storing reserved memory information of the second special symbol) (step S1001). If there is no reserved memory data in either the first reserved memory buffer or the second reserved memory buffer (N in step S1001), it judges whether a predetermined period has passed since the fluctuation stop (step S1002). If the predetermined period has not passed since the fluctuation stop (N in step S1002), the normal special symbol processing is terminated. On the other hand, if the predetermined period has passed since the fluctuation stop (Y in step S1002), a process for transmitting a customer waiting demo designation command is performed (step S1003), and the normal special symbol processing is terminated. Here, when the customer waiting demo designation command is transmitted, a customer waiting demo designation command transmission completion flag indicating that the customer waiting demo designation command has been transmitted is set. Then, when the special symbol normal processing is executed after the next timer interruption after the customer waiting demo designation command is transmitted, the customer waiting demo designation command transmission completion flag is set, so that the customer waiting demo designation command is not transmitted again. Such a customer waiting demo designation command transmission completion flag is reset when the next variable display of the special symbol is started.

When there is reserved memory data in the first reserved memory buffer or the second reserved memory buffer (Y in step S1001), the CPU 103 determines whether the first data among the data set in the reserved specific area is data indicating "second" (step S1004). If the first data set in the reserved specific area is not data indicating "second" (i.e., data indicating "first") (N in step S1004), the CPU 103 sets data indicating "first" to the special pattern pointer (a flag indicating whether the special pattern process is being performed on the first special pattern or the second special pattern) (step S1005). If the first data set in the reserved specific area is data indicating "second" (Y in step S1004), the CPU 103 sets data indicating "second" to the special pattern pointer (step S1006).

In this embodiment, depending on whether data indicating "first" or "second" is set in the special pattern pointer, the display of the first special pattern and the display of the second special pattern are performed using a common processing routine. When data indicating "first" is set in the special pattern pointer, the display of the first special pattern is performed based on the reserved memory data stored in the first reserved memory buffer. On the other hand, when data indicating "second" is set in the special pattern pointer, the display of the second special pattern is performed based on the reserved memory data stored in the second reserved memory buffer.

By the control of steps S1004 to S1006, if there is at least one second reserved memory data in the second reserved memory buffer, the display of the second special symbol changes based on the data in the second reserved memory is executed in priority over the display of the first special symbol changes based on the data in the first reserved memory.

Next, the CPU 103 reads out each random number stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved memory number=1 indicated by the special symbol pointer, and stores it in the reserved memory buffer of the RAM 102 (step S1007). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 reads out each random number stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved memory number=1 in the first reserved memory buffer, and stores it in the reserved memory buffer of the RAM 102. Also, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the CPU 103 reads out each random number stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number=1 in the second reserved memory buffer, and stores it in the reserved memory buffer of the RAM 102.

Then, the CPU 103 subtracts one from the count value of the reserved memory number counter indicated by the special pattern pointer, and shifts the contents of each storage area (step S1008). Specifically, when the special pattern pointer indicates "first," the CPU 103 subtracts one from the count value of the first reserved memory number counter, and shifts the contents of each storage area in the first reserved memory buffer. When the special pattern pointer indicates "second," the CPU 103 subtracts one from the count value of the second reserved memory number counter, and shifts the contents of each storage area in the second reserved memory buffer.

In other words, when the special symbol pointer indicates "1st", the CPU 103 stores each random number stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved memory number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the first reserved memory buffer of the RAM 102 in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved memory number = n-1. Also, when the special symbol pointer indicates "2nd", the CPU 103 stores each random number stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the second reserved memory buffer of the RAM 102 in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number = n-1.

Therefore, the order in which the random numbers stored in the respective storage areas corresponding to each first pending memory number (or each second pending memory number) are extracted always matches the order of the first pending memory number (or second pending memory number) = 1, 2, 3, 4.

Next, the CPU 103 controls the transmission of a reserved memory number designation command indicated by the special pattern pointer to the performance control CPU 120 based on the value of the reserved memory number counter indicated by the special pattern pointer after subtraction (step S1009). In this case, if the special pattern pointer is set to a value indicating "first", the CPU 103 controls the transmission of a first reserved memory number designation command. Also, if the special pattern pointer is set to a value indicating "second", the CPU 103 controls the transmission of a second reserved memory number designation command.

Next, the CPU 103 sends a background designation command (step S1010), reads Random R (random number for determining a jackpot) from the reserved memory buffer, and executes the jackpot determination module (step S1011). In this case, the CPU 103 reads the random number for determining a jackpot extracted in the start winning determination process and stored in advance in the first reserved memory buffer or the second reserved memory buffer, and performs a jackpot determination. The jackpot determination module is a program that executes a process that compares a predetermined jackpot determination value (see FIG. 20) with the random number for determining a jackpot, and determines that a jackpot has occurred if they match. In other words, it is a program that executes the process of determining a jackpot.

In the process of determining a jackpot, when the game state is in a probability variable state (high probability state), the probability of a jackpot is higher than when the game state is in a non-probability variable state (normal game state and time-saving state). Specifically, a probability variable jackpot determination table (table in which the numbers in the lower column of FIG. 21(a) are set) in which a large number of jackpot determination values are set in advance, and a normal time jackpot determination table (table in which the numbers in the upper column of FIG. 21(a) are set) in which a smaller number of jackpot determination values are set than in the probability variable jackpot determination table are provided. Then, the CPU 103 checks whether the game state is in a probability variable state, and when the game state is in a probability variable state, performs the process of determining a jackpot using the probability variable jackpot determination table, and when the game state is in a normal state or time-saving state, performs the process of determining a jackpot using the normal time jackpot determination table. That is, when the value of the random number for determining a jackpot (RANDOM 1) matches any of the jackpot determination values shown in FIG. 21(a), the CPU 103 determines that the special symbol is a jackpot. If it determines that a jackpot has occurred (Y in step S1011), the process proceeds to step S1012. Note that determining whether or not to determine whether or not to determine a jackpot means determining whether or not to transition to a jackpot game state, but also means determining whether or not to determine whether or not to set the stopped symbol in the special symbol as a jackpot symbol.

Whether the current game state is in a high probability state is confirmed by checking whether the high probability state flag is set. The high probability state flag is set when the game state transitions to a high probability state, and is reset when the high probability state ends. Specifically, the high probability state flag is set in the process of ending a jackpot game, and is then reset at the timing when the variable display of the special pattern ends and the stopped pattern is displayed stationary when either the variable display has been performed a predetermined number of times (for example, 150 times) or the next jackpot has been determined, whichever occurs first, is met.

If the value of the random number (Random 1) for determining a jackpot does not match any of the jackpot determination values (N in step S1011), proceed to step S1015 described below.

If the value of the random number (RANDOM 1) for determining a jackpot in step S1011 matches any of the jackpot determination values, the CPU 103 sets a jackpot flag indicating a jackpot (step S1012). The jackpot flag is reset when the jackpot game ends. Then, as a table to be used to determine the jackpot type as one of the multiple types, the first special symbol jackpot type determination table in FIG. 21(b) and the second special symbol jackpot type determination table in FIG. 21(c) are selected. Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 selects the first special symbol jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 21(b). Also, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the CPU 103 selects the second special symbol jackpot type determination table in FIG. 21(c). Then, the CPU 103 reads out the random number for determining the type of jackpot extracted during the start winning determination process and stored in advance in the first reserved memory buffer or the second reserved memory buffer, and uses the selected jackpot type determination table to determine the type of jackpot and the jackpot pattern that correspond to the value that matches the value of the random number for determining the type of jackpot (Random 2) stored in the reserved memory buffer (step S1013).

The CPU 103 also sets jackpot type data indicating the determined jackpot type in the jackpot type buffer in the RAM 102 (step S1014).

Next, the CPU 103 sets the special symbol to be stopped (step S1015). Specifically, if the jackpot flag is not set, the special symbol is set to a "-" symbol, which is a losing symbol. If the jackpot flag is set, the special symbol is set to the jackpot symbol determined in step S1014 according to the determination result of the jackpot type.

Then, the CPU 103 sends a display result designation command (step S1016) and updates the value of the special pattern process flag to a value corresponding to the variable pattern setting process (step S111) (step S1017).

(Variation pattern setting process)
FIG. 36 is a flow chart showing an example of a variation pattern setting process. As shown in FIG. 36, in the variation pattern setting process, the CPU 103 determines the subsequent variation pattern based on Random 3 and Random 4 according to the number of reserved memories and the presence or absence of a jackpot (step S1101). Specifically, in the case of a miss, the CPU 103 selects the subsequent variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 25 according to the number of reserved memories, and determines the subsequent variation pattern based on the selected subsequent variation pattern determination table and the value of Random 3. In addition, in the case of a jackpot, the CPU 103 selects the subsequent variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 26 according to the type of jackpot, and determines the subsequent variation pattern based on the selected subsequent variation pattern determination table and the value of Random 4.

Next, the CPU 103 determines the previous fluctuation pattern based on RANDOM 5 (step S1102). Specifically, the CPU 103 selects a previous fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 27 according to the previous fluctuation pattern determined in S1102, and determines the previous fluctuation pattern based on the selected previous fluctuation pattern determination table and the value of RANDOM 5.

Next, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a change pattern command corresponding to the determined change pattern (front change pattern and rear change pattern) to the performance control CPU 120 (step S1103).

Next, the CPU 103 sets a value corresponding to the change time corresponding to the selected change pattern in the change time timer formed in the RAM 102 (step S1104). Then, the CPU 103 performs control to send a pattern change designation command to the performance control CPU 120 (step S1105), and updates the value of the special pattern process flag to a value corresponding to the special pattern change process (step S112) (step S1106).

(Special pattern variation processing)
Fig. 37 is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol variation processing. As shown in Fig. 37, in the special symbol variation processing, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the variation time timer (step S1201), and when the variation time timer times out (Y in step S1202), updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol stop processing (step S113) (step S1203). When the variation time timer does not time out (N in step S1202), the processing ends as it is.

(Special symbol stop processing)
FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol stop processing. As shown in FIG. 38, in the special symbol stop processing, the CPU 103 sets an end flag to end the variable display of the special symbol, and performs control to derive and display the stop symbol on the special symbol 1 variable display unit 21 or the special symbol 2 variable display unit 22 (step S1301). If data indicating "first" is set in the special symbol pointer, the variation of the first special symbol on the special symbol 1 variable display unit 21 is ended, and if data indicating "second" is set in the special symbol pointer, the variation of the second special symbol on the special symbol 2 variable display unit 22 is ended. In addition, a symbol determination designation command is set in the performance control CPU 120 (step S1302). As a result, the symbol determination designation command is transmitted to the performance control CPU 120. Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the big win flag is set (step S1303). If the jackpot flag is not set (N in step S1303), the process proceeds to step S1309.

If the jackpot flag is set (Y in step S1303), the CPU 103 resets the probability bonus flag and the time-saving flag (step S1304). Next, the CPU 103 transmits a jackpot start command and a right-hit display lighting command to the performance control CPU 120 (step S1305).

Also, by referring to the opening pattern data stored in ROM 101, data indicating the opening mode of the normal large prize winning port and the V large prize winning port, such as the number of times to open (for example, 5 times or 10 times), the opening time (for example, 29 seconds), and the interval time between rounds (for example, 0.5 seconds), are set in a predetermined memory area (step S1306). For example, in the case of a normal jackpot of 3R, the opening mode in which the normal large prize winning port is opened in all of 1 to 3R is stored in a predetermined memory area provided in RAM 102. In the case of a jackpot of 5R, the opening mode in which the normal large prize winning port is opened in 1 to 3R and 5R, and the V large prize winning port is opened in 4R is stored in a predetermined memory area provided in RAM 102. In addition, in the case of a jackpot of 10R, the opening mode in which the normal large prize winning port is opened in 1 to 8R and 10R, and the V large prize winning port is opened in 9R is stored in a predetermined memory area provided in RAM 102. The data on the number of times it was opened (5 times or 10 times) is set in an opening counter to count the number of times it was opened.

The large prize opening control timer is also set to a value equivalent to the fanfare time, which is the jackpot display time (the time during which the occurrence of a jackpot is notified, for example, on the image display device 5) (step S1307). Thereafter, in the jackpot opening pre-processing, the large prize opening control timer is decremented by 1, and when it reaches 0, the large prize opening is opened and the round begins. The value of the special symbol process flag is then updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot opening pre-processing (step S114) (step S1308), and the process ends.

If it is determined in step S1303 that the jackpot flag is not set (N in step S1304), the CPU 103 determines whether or not a time-saving flag indicating that the game is in a time-saving state is set (step S1309). If the time-saving flag is not set (N in step S1309), the CPU 103 proceeds to the processing of step S1316. If the time-saving flag is set (Y in step S1309), the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the counter value of the time-saving count counter indicating the remaining number of fluctuations in the time-saving state (step S1310). Next, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the value of the time-saving count counter has become 0 (step S1311). If the value of the time-saving count counter has become 0 (Y in step S1311), the CPU 103 determines that the duration of the time-saving state has ended and resets the time-saving flag (step S1312). As a result, when a fluctuation display that results in a miss display is performed a specific number of times (150 times) in the time-saving state, the game state transitions from the time-saving state to the non-time-saving state. In step S1311, if the time-saving counter value is not 0 (N in step S1311), the process proceeds to step S1316.

After step S1312, it is determined whether or not a high probability flag indicating a high probability state is set (step S1313). If the high probability flag is set (Y in step S1313), the high probability flag is reset (step S1314). Next, in response to the game state transitioning from the time-saving state to the normal state (low probability/low base state), the CPU 103 transmits a normal state designation command to the performance control CPU 120 (step S1315) and proceeds to step S1316. If the high probability flag is not set in step S1313 (N in step S1313), the process of step S1314 is not performed and the process proceeds to step S1315. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (step S110) (step S1316), and the process ends.

(Pre-opening process for big win)
Fig. 39 is a flow chart showing an example of the big win opening pre-processing. As shown in Fig. 39, in the big win opening pre-processing, the CPU 103 decrements the value of the big win opening control timer by 1 (subtract update) (step S1401). Then, it is determined whether the value of the big win opening control timer is 0 (step S1402), and if the value of the big win opening control timer is not 0 (N in step S1402), the process is terminated.

If the value of the large prize opening control timer is 0 (Y in step S1402), a command to specify that the large prize opening is open is sent to the performance control CPU 120 (step S1403). Then, the solenoid 82 is driven according to the opening pattern to open the regular large prize opening (step S1404). As a result, the regular large prize opening is opened in the first round.

Next, the CPU 103 sets the large prize opening control timer to a large prize opening opening time (e.g., 29 seconds) corresponding to the maximum time that the large prize opening can be opened (large prize opening opening time) based on the opening pattern data (e.g., data stored in RAM 102 by step S1306) (step S1405). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the large prize opening process (step S115) (step S1406), and ends the process.

(Processing during jackpot opening)
40 is a flow chart showing an example of the big win opening process. As shown in FIG. 40, in the big win opening process, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the value of the big win opening control timer (step S1501).

Then, the CPU 103 checks whether the value of the large prize opening control timer has reached 0 (step S1502). If the value of the large prize opening control timer has reached 0 (Y in step S1502), the process proceeds to step S1511. If the value of the large prize opening control timer has not reached 0 (N in step S1502), the process determines whether the regular large prize opening or the V large prize opening is currently open (step S1503). Whether the regular large prize opening or the V large prize opening is currently open can be determined from the value of the opening count counter.

If it is determined in step S1503 that the regular large prize opening or the V large prize opening is not open (N in step S1503), the process ends.

If the regular large prize opening or the V large prize opening is open (Y in step S1503), it is determined whether the count switch 23 or the V prize switch 24 is on (step S1504). If neither the count switch 23 nor the V prize switch 24 is on (N in step S1504), the process ends. On the other hand, if either the count switch 23 or the V prize switch 24 is on (Y in step S1504), the prize number counter is incremented by +1 (updated) (step S1505).

Next, it is determined whether or not the high probability determination flag is set (step S1506). The high probability determination flag is a flag that is set when it is determined that the machine will be controlled to the high probability state when a V win occurs. If the high probability determination flag is set (Y in step S1506), the process proceeds to step S1510. On the other hand, if the high probability determination flag is not set (N in step S1506), it is determined whether or not the V winning switch 24 is on (step S1507). If the V winning switch 24 is not on (N in step S1507), the process proceeds to step S1510. On the other hand, if the V winning switch is on (Y in step S1507), the high probability determination flag is set (step S1508), a high probability determination device pass command is sent (step S1509), and the process proceeds to step S1510.

Then, the CPU 103 determines whether the value of the winning number counter has reached a predetermined number (for example, 10) (step S1510). If the value of the winning number counter has not reached the predetermined number (N in step S1510), the process ends.

When the value of the winning number counter is a predetermined number (Y in step S1510), the CPU 103 performs either control to drive the solenoid 82 to close the normal large prize opening, or control to drive the solenoid 83 to close the V large prize opening (step S1511). Next, the CPU 103 performs a process to clear (set to 0) the value of the winning number counter (step S1512). Next, the CPU 103 updates (step S1513) the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the post-large prize opening process (step S116), and ends the process.

(Post-opening processing)
41 is a flow chart showing an example of a big win release post-processing. As shown in FIG 41, in the big win release post-processing, the CPU 103 judges whether the value of the opening number counter is 0 or not (step S1601).

If the value of the opening count counter is 0 (Y in step S1601), a jackpot end command is sent to the performance control CPU 120 (step S1602), a value corresponding to the jackpot end time (the time at which the jackpot game is notified, for example, on the image display device 5 that the jackpot game has ended) is set in the jackpot entry port control timer (step S1603), the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot end process (step S117) (step S1604), and the process ends.

In step S1601, if the value of the opening count counter is not 0 (N in step S1601), a command to specify when the large prize opening is to be opened is sent to the performance control CPU 120 (step S1605), and the large prize opening control timer is set to a value equivalent to the interval time from the end of a round to the start of the next round (step S1606).

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not it is before the round in which the V large prize opening is opened (also called the V opening round), i.e., whether or not the next round is a V opening round (step S1607). If it is not before the V opening round (N in step S1607), control is performed to drive the solenoid 82 to open the normal large prize opening (step S1608). On the other hand, if it is before the V opening round (Y in step S1607), control is performed to drive the solenoid 83 to open the V large prize opening (step S1609).

After step S1608 or step S1609, the CPU 103 sends a command to the performance control CPU 120 to specify whether the jackpot opening is in progress (step S1610). The CPU 103 then updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the jackpot opening process (step S115) (step S1611), and ends the process.

(Jackpot end processing)
FIG. 42 is a flow chart showing an example of the jackpot end process. As shown in FIG. 42, in the jackpot end process, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the value of the jackpot opening control timer in which the jackpot end time is set (step S1701). Then, the CPU 103 judges whether the value of the jackpot opening control timer is 0 (whether the jackpot end time has elapsed) (step S1702). If the value of the jackpot opening control timer is not 0 (N in step S1702), the process is terminated. If the value of the jackpot opening control timer is 0 (Y in step S1702), the jackpot flag is reset (step S1703).

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether the high probability flag, which is set by passing through the V winning area, is set (step S1704). If the high probability flag is not set (N in step S1704), the process proceeds to step S1705. If the high probability flag is set in step S1704 (Y in step S1704), the high probability flag indicating that the game is in a high probability state is set (step S1707). Next, a high probability state designation command is sent to the performance control CPU 120 (step S1708), the high probability flag is reset (step S1709), and the process proceeds to step S1710.

In step S1710, a time-saving flag is set to indicate that the time-saving state is active (step S1710), and the time-saving count counter is set to 150 (step S1711). Then, the process proceeds to step S1712.

On the other hand, if the probability of a bonus has not been set in step S1704 (N in step S1704), then in step S1705, a time-saving flag is set indicating that the game is in a time-saving state (step S1705), the time-saving counter is set to 100 (step S1706), and the process proceeds to step S1712.

In step S1712, a time-saving state designation command is sent to the performance control CPU 120 (step S1712). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal processing (step S110) (step S1713), and ends the process. Note that the performance control CPU 120 is able to recognize whether the game is in a special, time-saving, or normal state based on the special state designation command sent from the CPU 103.

(Main operations of the performance control board 12)
Next, the main operations of the performance control board 12 will be described.

(Performance control main processing)
When the performance control board 12 receives a power supply voltage from a power supply board or the like, the performance control CPU 120 starts up and executes the performance control main process as shown in the flowchart of Fig. 43. Fig. 43 is a flowchart showing an example of the performance control main process. When the performance control main process shown in Fig. 43 starts, the performance control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71), clears the RAM 122, sets various initial values, and sets the registers of the CTC (counter/timer circuit) mounted on the performance control board 12. In addition, it executes an initial operation control process (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control is executed to perform the initial operation of the movable body 32, such as control to drive the movable body 32 to return it to its initial position and control to perform a predetermined operation check.

Then, it is determined whether the timer interrupt flag is on or not (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to the on state every time a predetermined time (e.g., 2 milliseconds) elapses, for example based on the register setting of the CTC. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (N in step S73), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and the system waits.

In addition, on the performance control board 12 side, an interrupt occurs to receive a performance control command from the main board 11, in addition to a timer interrupt that occurs every time a predetermined time has elapsed. This interrupt occurs, for example, when the performance control INT signal from the main board 11 becomes ON. When an interrupt occurs due to the performance control INT signal becoming ON, the performance control CPU 120 automatically sets the interrupt to be prohibited, but if a CPU that does not automatically become interrupt prohibited is used, it is desirable to emit an interrupt prohibition command (DI command). In response to an interrupt due to the performance control INT signal becoming ON, the performance control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process. In this command reception interrupt process, a performance control command is taken in from a predetermined input port that receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15, among the input ports included in the I/O 125. The performance control command taken in at this time is stored in a performance control command reception buffer provided in, for example, the RAM 122. The performance control CPU 120 then sets the interrupt to permitted and ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (Y in step S73), the timer interrupt flag is cleared to an off state (step S74), and a command analysis process is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, various presentation control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the presentation control command reception buffer are read, and then settings and controls corresponding to the read presentation control commands are performed. For example, the read presentation control command is stored in a specified area of the RAM 122, or a reception flag provided in the RAM 122 is turned on so that which presentation control command was received and the contents specified by the presentation control command can be confirmed by the presentation control process process. In addition, if the presentation control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background corresponding to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the performance control process is executed (step S76). In the performance control process, for example, control is performed to operate various performance devices, such as the display operation of the performance image in the display area of the image display device 5, the sound output operation from the speakers 8L, 8R, the lighting operation of the decorative light-emitting elements such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LEDs, and the driving operation of the movable body 32. In addition, judgments, decisions, settings, etc. are made regarding the control contents of the performance operations using the various performance devices in accordance with the performance control commands transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the performance control process processing of step S76, a performance random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a portion of the performance random numbers used on the performance control board 12 side is updated by software. Then, the process returns to step S73. Before returning to step S73, other processes may be executed.

(Performance control process)
FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing an example of the performance control process. The performance control process is a process executed in step S76 of FIG. 43. In the performance control process shown in FIG. 44, the performance control CPU 120 first executes a pre-reading notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-reading notice setting process, for example, a judgment, decision, setting, etc. for executing the pre-reading notice performance is performed based on the performance control command at the time of the start winning transmitted from the main board 11. In addition, a process for displaying the reserved display is executed based on the reserved memory number specified from the performance control command.

After executing the processing of step S161, the performance control CPU 120 selects and executes one of the processing of steps S170 to S177 as described below, depending on the value of a performance process flag provided in, for example, RAM 122.

The variable display start waiting process of step S170 is executed when the value of the presentation process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process includes a process of determining whether or not to start the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command specifying the start of variable display has been received from the main board 11. If it is determined that the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5 should be started, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to "1" and the variable display start waiting process ends.

The variable display start setting process of step S171 is a process executed when the value of the performance process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (determined decorative pattern), the mode of the variable display of the decorative pattern, whether or not various performances such as reach performances and various advance notice performances are executed, and the mode and execution start timing are determined based on the display result and the change pattern specified by the performance control command. Then, a performance control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute a performance) that reflects the determined result is set. After that, based on the set performance control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is terminated. In response to the instruction to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the display control unit 123 starts the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5.

The variable display performance process of step S172 is a process executed when the performance process flag value is "2". In this variable display performance process, the performance control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display a performance image based on the performance control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5, to drive the movable body 32, to output voice and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the voice control board 13, and to turn on/off/blink the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED by outputting a command (illumination signal) to the lamp control board 14, thereby executing various performance controls during the variable display of the decorative pattern. After performing such performance control, for example, in response to the reading of an end code indicating the end of the variable display of the decorative pattern from the performance control pattern, or the reception of a command specifying the stop display of the fixed decorative pattern from the main board 11, the fixed decorative pattern, which is the display result of the decorative pattern, is stopped. When the final decorative pattern is displayed in a stopped state, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "3" and the performance process during variable display ends.

The special winning waiting process of step S173 is executed when the value of the presentation process flag is "3". In this special winning waiting process, the presentation control CPU 120 judges whether or not a presentation control command that specifies the start of a jackpot game state has been received from the main board 11. Then, when a presentation control command that specifies the start of a jackpot game state is received, if the command specifies the start of a jackpot game state, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to "4". Also, when a command that specifies the start of a jackpot game state is not received and the waiting time for receiving the command has elapsed, it is judged that the display result in the special game was a "miss", and the value of the presentation process flag is updated to the initial value of "0". When the value of the presentation process flag is updated, the special winning waiting process is terminated.

The jackpot performance process of step S174 is executed when the performance process flag value is "4". In this jackpot performance process, the performance control CPU 120 sets, for example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the performance content in the jackpot gaming state, and executes various performance controls in the jackpot gaming state based on the set content. In addition, in the jackpot performance process, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 specifying that the jackpot gaming state is to end, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "5", which is a value corresponding to the ending performance process, and the jackpot performance process ends.

The ending presentation process of step S175 is executed when the value of the presentation process flag is "5". In this ending presentation process, the presentation control CPU 120 sets a presentation control pattern corresponding to, for example, the end of a jackpot gaming state, and executes various presentation controls for the ending presentation at the end of the jackpot gaming state based on the set contents. After that, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending presentation process is terminated.

(Variable display start setting process)
Fig. 45 is a flow chart showing an example of variable display start setting processing. As shown in Fig. 45, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether the result of the variable display is determined to be a miss (step S7101). If it is determined to be a miss, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether a command corresponding to a non-reach variable pattern is received as a variable pattern command (step S7103).

When the performance control CPU 120 determines that it has received a command corresponding to a non-reach fluctuation pattern, it uses the data table for determining a losing symbol to determine the display result of a losing symbol that does not result in a reach as the final stop of the performance symbol (step S7105), and proceeds to step S7106.

If the process of step S7103 determines that the pattern is not a non-reach fluctuation pattern (if the pattern is determined to be a reach fluctuation pattern), the stopping patterns of the performance patterns that make up the reach pattern combination are determined (step S7104), and the process proceeds to step S7106.

Also, if the processing in step S7101 does not determine a miss (if a jackpot is determined), the CPU 101 for controlling the presentation determines the stopping patterns of the presentation patterns that make up the combination of jackpot patterns according to the type of jackpot (step S7102), and proceeds to step S7106.

Next, a performance setting process (step S7106) is executed to set various performances in the variable display (for example, group preview setting process), and then the process proceeds to step S7107.

In step S7107, the performance control pattern is determined to be one of a plurality of performance control patterns. In step S7107, depending on the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command and the various performance control (performance operation) patterns specified by the performance control pattern of the performance determined in the processing of step S7106, one of the multiple pattern variation control patterns stored in the pattern variation control pattern table that corresponds to the various specified performance operation patterns is selected and determined as the pattern to be used.

The control pattern table stored in ROM 121 stores multiple types of pattern change control patterns that indicate the control contents of various performance operations, such as the display operation of the changing performance pattern in the display area of the image display device 5 during the period from when the change in the performance pattern begins to when the final performance pattern, which is the final stopping pattern, is stopped and displayed, the display operation in a reach performance, the display operation due to a pseudo consecutive performance, and the display operation in a preview performance.

In addition, each pattern change control pattern includes control data for controlling various performance operations according to the display change of the performance pattern, such as a performance control process timer setting value, a performance control process timer judgment value, performance display control data, audio control data, lamp control data, and an end code, and the contents of various performance controls and the timing of switching the performance controls are set in chronological order.

Next, a process table corresponding to the effect control pattern is selected (step S7108). Then, the process timer (effect setting process timer) in the process data of the selected process table is started (step S7109).

After executing the processing of step S7109, control of the performance devices (image display device 5 as a performance component, various lamps as performance components, and speakers 8L, 8R as performance components) is started (step S7110) according to the contents of the process data (display control execution data, lamp control execution data, sound number data). For example, a command is output to cause the image display device 5 to display an image (including a performance pattern) corresponding to the variation pattern according to the display control execution data. Also, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the lamp control board 14 to control the turning on/off of light-emitting elements such as various LEDs. Also, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the audio control board 13 to output audio from the speakers 8L, 8R.

Then, the variable display time timer is set to a value corresponding to the variable time specified by the variable pattern command (step S7111), the value of the performance control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the performance processing during variable display (step S172) (step S7112), and the variable display start setting processing ends.

(Group advance notice setting process)
46 is a flowchart showing an example of the group advance notice setting process. The group advance notice setting process is a process included in the variable display start setting process (step S171).

As shown in FIG. 46, the performance control CPU 120 judges whether or not it has received a variation pattern command capable of executing a group preview (step S7061). Specifically, the performance control CPU 120 judges whether or not it has received a variation pattern command including a subsequent variation pattern of subsequent variation numbers 6 to 8 when it loses, and whether or not it has received a variation pattern command including a subsequent variation pattern of subsequent variation numbers 10 to 12 when it wins. Note that the variation pattern including the subsequent variation pattern of subsequent variation numbers 6 to 8 is the variation pattern of main variation numbers 8 to 15, and the variation pattern including the subsequent variation pattern of subsequent variation numbers 10 to 12 is the variation pattern of main variation numbers 18 to 26.

If the CPU 120 for controlling the performance does not receive a fluctuation pattern command capable of executing a group preview (N in step S7061), it ends the process. On the other hand, if the CPU 120 for controlling the performance receives a fluctuation pattern command capable of executing a group preview (Y in step S7061), it converts the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation pattern command into the number of frames (step S7062). For example, in the case of the fluctuation pattern of main fluctuation number 22, the previous fluctuation time is 41,500 msec, so the number of frames is about 1,246, and the subsequent fluctuation time is 91,900 msec, so the number of frames is about 3,000. Also, for example, in the case of the fluctuation pattern of main fluctuation number 26, the previous fluctuation time is 62,000 msec, so the number of frames is about 1,861, and the subsequent fluctuation time is 142,800 msec, so the number of frames is about 4,288.

The performance control CPU 120 executes a group preview lottery (step S7063). Specifically, the performance control CPU 120 uses the group preview lottery table shown in Figures 30 (a) and (b) to determine whether or not to execute a group preview based on the post-variation number, and the type of group preview to execute.

The performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not the group preview lottery has been won. If the performance control CPU 120 has not won the group preview lottery (N in step S7064), it ends the process. On the other hand, if the performance control CPU 120 has won the group preview lottery (Y in step S7064), it extracts a performance control pattern for executing the group preview according to the stage (step S7065) and ends the process.

For example, as shown in Example 1, in the case of a fluctuation pattern of main fluctuation number 22 and stage A, the performance control pattern is set to execute the group preview from the 985th frame of the 1246 frames in the previous fluctuation. Also, in the case of a fluctuation pattern of main fluctuation number 22 and stage B, the performance control pattern is set to execute the group preview from the 1385th frame of the 3000 frames in the later fluctuation.

For example, as shown in Example 2, in the case of a fluctuation pattern of main fluctuation number 26 and stage A, the performance control pattern is set to execute the group preview from the 1600th frame of the 1861 frames in the previous fluctuation. Also, in the case of a fluctuation pattern of main fluctuation number 26 and stage B, the performance control pattern is set to execute the group preview from the 2000th frame of the 4288 frames in the later fluctuation.

Thus, in this embodiment, in the case of stage A, group announcements are made in the pre-change, whereas in the case of stage B, group announcements are made in the post-change.

(Group notice execution processing)
47 is a flowchart showing an example of the group advance notice execution process. The group advance notice execution process is a process included in the variable display performance process (step S172).

As shown in FIG. 47, the performance control CPU 120 subtracts one frame from the number of frames corresponding to the performance control pattern set in the variable display start setting process (step S7201). For example, when a performance control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern of main variation number 26 is set, the performance control CPU 120 subtracts one frame from the total number of frames, which is frame 6149.

If the performance control CPU 120 has not set a performance control pattern for executing the group preview (N in step S7202), it ends the process. On the other hand, if the performance control CPU 120 has set a performance control pattern for executing the group preview (Y in step S7202), it determines whether or not the frame for the execution timing of the group preview has been reached (S7203). For example, in the case of the variation pattern of main variation number 26 and stage A, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not the 1600th frame has been reached.

If the frame for the execution timing of the group announcement has not yet been reached (N in step S7203), the performance control CPU 120 ends the process. On the other hand, if the frame for the execution timing of the group announcement has been reached (Y in step S7203), the performance control CPU 120 controls various performance devices to execute the group announcement (step S7204). For example, the performance control CPU 120 controls the game effect lamp 9 to light, blink, or turn off based on the group announcement lighting table shown in Figures 62 to 68 described below, and controls the speakers 8R and 8L to output sound. After that, the performance control CPU 120 ends the process.

[Outline of game progress]
In the pachinko game machine 1 configured as described above, the game progresses as follows. In the pachinko game machine 1, the player first hits the ball from the left to launch the game ball toward the first flow path that passes through the left side of the game area. When the launched game ball enters the first start winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game is started. When the first special symbol game results in the display mode of the special symbol 1 variable display section 21 showing the big win symbol, a big win occurs.

As mentioned above, the types of jackpots in the first special symbol game are normal jackpots 1 and 2, and probability jackpots 1 to 4. When a jackpot occurs, a fanfare effect is executed, and a right-hit promotion effect is executed to encourage the player to make a right hit. The right-hit promotion effect is executed by displaying text (for example, "right hit") and a graphic image (for example, an arrow pointing to the right, which is the direction of the second flow path) on the screen of the image display device 5 to encourage a right hit, and also by lighting up the right-hit display unit 9030 of the special symbol LED board 9020 and the right-hit display unit 9055 of the fourth symbol unit 9050 with lighting means such as LEDs to encourage a right hit. This causes the player to make a right hit from that point on.

During a round in the jackpot game state, the jackpot opening is opened a predetermined number of times (for example, three times for a 3R regular jackpot, and ten times for a 10R special jackpot). The jackpot opening is continued until a predetermined period of time (for example, 29 seconds) has elapsed, or until the number of game balls that have entered the jackpot reaches a predetermined number (for example, 10), whichever comes first.

When the ending performance following the jackpot game state ends, the game state is controlled to a time-saving state for a predetermined number of times (e.g., 100 times). Furthermore, if a V win occurs during the jackpot round, the game state is controlled to a high probability state for a predetermined number of times (e.g., 100 times) of fluctuations while being controlled to the time-saving state.

Even in the special probability state or time-saving state after the jackpot round, the right-hit promotion effect continues to be executed by the image display device 5, the right-hit display unit 9030, and the right-hit display unit 9055. Therefore, after the first jackpot (also called the first hit) occurs, the player is always prompted to hit right by the right-hit promotion effect, even in the time-saving state after the jackpot round ends.

In the time-saving state, control is performed to shorten the average special chart change time (period during which the special chart changes) compared to the normal state, and control is performed to shorten the average regular chart change time (period during which the regular chart changes) compared to the normal state, and further control is performed to increase the probability of a "regular chart hit" in the regular chart game compared to the normal state. Also, in the time-saving state, electric chute support control may be performed to increase the frequency at which the variable winning ball device 6B that forms the second start winning port is opened, thereby increasing the frequency at which the game ball enters the second start winning port, making it easier to win in the second start winning port (high entry, high frequency).

In the time-saving state after the jackpot round, the released game ball enters the second start winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, starting the second special game. If the result of the second special game is that the special game 2 variable display section 9022 shows a jackpot pattern, a jackpot (also called a consecutive win) occurs.

As mentioned above, the types of jackpots in the second special game include guaranteed jackpots 5 to 9. When a jackpot occurs, a fanfare effect is executed. The right-hit promotion effect by the image display device 5, right-hit display unit 9030, and right-hit display unit 9055 continues from the first jackpot.

During a round in which a jackpot game is in progress, the jackpot opening is opened a predetermined number of times (e.g., 10 times). Each opening of the jackpot opening continues until either a predetermined period of time (e.g., 29 seconds) has elapsed or the number of game balls that have entered the jackpot opening reaches a predetermined number (e.g., 10), whichever comes first.

Then, when the ending presentation after the jackpot game state ends, the game state is controlled to the time-saving state and the probability variable state (high probability, high base state) for a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 times) in the same way as the first hit. Even in the probability variable state after the jackpot round in a consecutive hit, the right-hit promotion presentation continues to be executed by the image display device 5, the right-hit display unit 9030, and the right-hit display unit 9055. For this reason, after the first hit occurs, consecutive hits occur in the probability variable state or the time-saving state after the jackpot round ends, and the player is always encouraged to hit right by the right-hit promotion presentation, even in the probability variable state or the time-saving state after the jackpot round ends in the consecutive hit.

When the probability variable state or time-saving state ends without a jackpot occurring in either the probability variable state or time-saving state after the first jackpot round ends, or the probability variable state or time-saving state after the consecutive jackpot round ends, the game state is controlled to the normal state (low probability low base state), and the right-hit promotion effect by the image display device 5, right-hit display unit 9030, and right-hit display unit 9055 also ends. As a result, the player will again use the left hit to launch the game ball toward the first flow path that passes through the left area of the game area.

[Swarm preview production design]
Next, the design of the group preview performance during the development stage of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Group advance notice work process)
Fig. 48 is a flow chart showing an example of a group advance notice work process. As shown in Fig. 48, the group advance notice work process includes, in the order of work, a summary creation process (step S901), an animation creation process (step S902), a main video production process (step S903), an authoring process (step S904), a sound creation process (step S905), a lottery incorporation process (step S906), a video incorporation process (step S907), a sound incorporation process (step S908), a lamp data creation process (step S909), and a lamp incorporation process (step S910).

In the outline creation process of step S901, an outline is created for newly designing a group preview for the pachinko gaming machine 1.

In the animation production process in step S902, storyboards for the animation used in the group previews are created, characters and backgrounds to be used in the animation are designed, a video storyboard is created that serves as a script for creating the animation, CG is produced for the animation, and the actual animation is produced.

In the main video production process of step S903, the video data used in the group preview is created using the animation created in the animation production process. The video data used in the group preview is created in this main video production process, but the playback time of the created video data is created longer than the execution time of the group preview actually executed in the pachinko game machine 1. As a result, even if the execution time of the group preview is lengthened due to a design change, the video data created in this video production process can be used as is without being changed. In addition, in this video production process, the playback timing is also designed for each video data so that the video data is played at a timing predetermined for each performance. For example, in the variation pattern of main variation number 22, the group preview of stage A is incorporated into the main video so that the group preview is executed from the 985th frame, and the group preview of stage B is incorporated into the main video so that the group preview is executed from the 1385th frame. Additionally, in the variation pattern of main variation number 26, the swarm preview animation for stage A is incorporated into the main video so that it is executed from the 1600th frame, and the swarm preview animation for stage B is incorporated into the main video so that it is executed from the 2000th frame.

In the authoring process of step S904, the video data created in this video production process is used to create software (program) for video playback to be executed on the pachinko gaming machine 1.

In the sound creation process of step S905, various sound data such as background music (BGM) and sound effects used in the group preview are created to match the video of the group preview.

In the lottery incorporation process of step S906, data is created for various lotteries related to the group notice, such as the group notice lottery. In addition, in this lottery incorporation process, the expectation (reliability) of the group notice, etc. is designed. The created lottery data is incorporated into the pachinko game machine 1 as lottery software executed in the pachinko game 1.

In the video embedding process of step S907, the video playback software created in the authoring process is embedded in the pachinko gaming machine 1 as video playback software executed in the group preview.

In the sound incorporation process of step S908, the sound data created in the sound creation process is incorporated into the pachinko gaming machine 1 as software for sound playback executed by the group preview.

In the lamp data creation process of step S908, various lighting data such as lighting, blinking, and extinguishing for lighting means (light-emitting means) such as lamps and LEDs used in group warnings is created.

In the lamp installation process of step S910, the data for various lamps, LEDs, etc., such as turning on, blinking, and turning off, created in the lamp data creation process, is incorporated into the pachinko game machine 1 as software for lamp playback executed in the pachinko game 1.

Through the work in each of these processes, lottery, video, and sound data related to the group preview performance is created and incorporated as software to be executed in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

(This video was produced by)
The actual video production process for the group preview will be specifically described with reference to Figures 49 to 52. Figures 49 to 52 are diagrams for explaining an example of the actual video production process.

As shown in FIG. 49, first, in STEP 1, character images to be used in the group preview are prepared. For example, a main character named Yume Yume is used in the group preview, and four images g1 to g4 are prepared to show Yume Yume's running style. Note that such character images are created in the animation production process.

Next, in STEP 2, a video creation tool is used to create a video of a character stamping its feet using four character images g1 to g4. For example, when the video creation tool is started, a timeline screen 710 is displayed. In the timeline screen 710, one or more layers are arranged on the vertical axis, and the horizontal axis is the time axis. The layers are arranged in numerical order from the top, such as layer 1, 2, 3, etc., and the higher an image is placed (i.e., the lower the number), the closer it is to the back on the screen of the image display device 5. The number of layers and the width of the time axis can be set to the user's desired value.

In STEP 2, each character image g1 to g4 is arranged in a column of a specific layer. For example, in the example shown in (a), character images g1 to g4 are arranged on the timeline corresponding to layer 1, constituting video data A1 to A4. Video data A1 to A4 results in a stepping video pattern consisting of character images g1 to g4.

By repeatedly placing the set of stepping video data A1 to A4 created as described above on a timeline, a video of the character stepping is repeated. For example, in the example shown in (b), the video data A1 to A4 are repeated for three periods. This stepping video data is then output. In this manner, stepping videos are created for other characters in a similar manner.

As shown in FIG. 50, in STEP 3, a video in which a character progresses is created. First, the screen size of the image display device 5 is set to a predetermined size. For example, in the example shown in (a), the width of the X axis along the horizontal direction on the screen is set to 800, and the widths of the X and Y axes along the vertical direction on the screen are set to 640. Note that the value corresponding to the center position on both the X and Y axes is 0. Therefore, the screen size is -400≦X≦400, -320≦Y≦320.

Using the setting screen 730 of the video creation tool, it is possible to set the width of movement of the video data. For example, in the example shown in (b), one period of the stepping video data A1 to A4 of the pattern consisting of character images g1 to g4 is set to 500, and it is set to move linearly on the X axis in the range of -1000≦X≦500.

As shown in FIG. 51, in STEP 4, a video is created in which multiple characters progress. For example, in the example shown in (a), video data is created in which a character called Jam-chan, used in the group preview, moves in a straight line on the X-axis in the range of -1000≦X≦500, using a similar creation procedure.

As described above, when video data is created for multiple characters moving in a straight line on the X-axis in the range of -1000≦X≦500, the video data for each character is placed on a different layer, as shown in (b). Also, by shifting the time axis between characters, the timing of their appearance can be shifted. Furthermore, by shifting the Y-axis positions between characters, the positions on the Y-axis at which characters appear can be shifted. The Z-axis is the axis between the front side (near side) and back side (depth side) of the screen, and by inputting a value, the performance of the group preview (the Boingo group preview in this embodiment) can be designed so that the characters move between the front side (near side) and back side (depth side) of the screen.

As shown in FIG. 52, in STEP 5, the group preview video is finally created. For example, as shown in (a), the group preview video is completed by arranging the video data of six types of characters, characters A to F, on the timeline of the layer.

Also, by changing the length of the video data on the timeline, the speed at which the characters move can be changed while maintaining the animation itself, which is a repeat of three periods of a pattern of character images g1-g4. For example, the video data of character C placed on layer 10 is the same as the video data of character C placed on layer 9, in which a repeat of three periods of a pattern of character images g1-g4, but the length on the timeline of the video data of character C placed on layer 10 is shorter than the length on the timeline of the video data of character C placed on layer 9. As a result, character C placed on layer 10 progresses on the screen at a faster speed than character C placed on layer 9, while maintaining the same animation as character C placed on layer 9.

In the six-person group preview, multiple characters are not placed at the same timing and speed in the coordinates arranged on the screen. For example, in the example shown in Figure 52(a), video data for multiple characters is not placed on the timeline at the same timing and for the same length.

Furthermore, as shown in (b), by placing video data of dust clouds on layer 1, which is the layer furthest from the back, it is possible to combine video of multiple characters progressing with the dust cloud video.

In this way, video data for a group preview in which multiple characters progress can be created. Note that, in the actual creation of the video data for the group preview, it is assumed that the game board 2 covers the edge of a screen of a predetermined size (for example, 19 inches), and the video data for the group preview is created with a mask covering the area of the screen where the game board 2 covers. Furthermore, so that it can be applied to sizes larger than the predetermined screen size (for example, 19 inches) (for example, 20 inches), the video data for the group preview is created up to the area corresponding to the larger size.

(Group advance notice work process)
FIG. 53 is a diagram showing the overall image of the six-person group announcement. As shown in FIG. 53, in the six-person group announcement included in the group announcement performance, an image of six characters such as maid A to maid F progressing in a group is displayed. The group announcement performance is not limited to six characters, and each character appears in multiple people, making it the performance with the largest number of characters displayed among the performances that can be executed in the pachinko game machine 1. Since maids A to F are all wearing the same or almost the same maid clothes, it is difficult to distinguish the types of characters except by recognizing them by their faces. In this embodiment, the patterns of the aprons worn by each character are different for each character, but it is difficult to recognize the difference at first glance. Note that maid A is Yume Yume-chan, the main character, and maid B is Jam-chan, the character with the next highest priority after Yume Yume-chan, the main character.

In the six-person group preview, the character image may fit within the display area of the image display device 5, or part of the character image (for example, the face or legs) may not fit within the display area of the image display device 5 and may extend beyond it. For example, of the characters appearing in the six-person group preview, there are six maids A (Yume Yume-chan), but five of them have their faces visible. In other words, of the six maids A who appear, one has a face that does not fit within the display area of the image display device 5. Of the characters appearing in the six-person group preview, there are five maids B (Jam-chan), but four of them have their faces visible. In other words, of the five maids B who appear, one has a face that does not fit within the display area of the image display device 5. Of the characters appearing in the six-person group preview, there are five maids C who appear, but three of them have their faces visible. In other words, of the five maids C who appear, two have their faces that do not fit within the display area of the image display device 5. Of the characters appearing in the six-person group preview, five maids D appear, but the faces of three of them are visible. In other words, of the five maids D who appear, the faces of two do not fit within the display area of the image display device 5. Of the characters appearing in the six-person group preview, five maids E appear, but the faces of three of them are visible. In other words, of the five maids E who appear, the faces of two do not fit within the display area of the image display device 5. Of the characters appearing in the six-person group preview, five maids F appear, but the faces of three of them are visible. In other words, of the five maids F who appear, the faces of two do not fit within the display area of the image display device 5.

In this way, the multiple characters displayed in the group preview performance include characters whose entire bodies are displayed to fit within the display area of the screen, and characters whose entire bodies are displayed to fit within the display area of the screen, with only a portion of the entire body (e.g., the face) not fitting within the display area of the screen, and other portions of the entire body (e.g., parts other than the face) fitting within the display area of the screen.

The multiple characters displayed in the group preview performance include characters with low importance in the content of the pachinko gaming machine 1, such as Maids C to F, and characters with higher importance than Maids C to F in the content of the pachinko gaming machine 1, such as Maid A (Yume Yume-chan) and Maid B (Jam-chan), and Maid A and Maid B are less likely to have their faces displayed within the display area of the screen and the rest of their body displayed within the display area of the screen than Maids C to F. In other words, the six-person group preview is designed so that Maid A and Maid B are more likely to appear with their faces visible than Maids C to F.

(Auxiliary display)
FIG. 54 is a diagram for explaining the auxiliary display used in the group preview performance. As shown in FIG. 54, in the group preview performance, an auxiliary display is performed to emphasize that the character is moving forward. In this embodiment, an image of dust cloud is displayed as the auxiliary display. If the image of dust cloud is displayed near the character, or more effectively, so as to follow behind the moving character, the player can be made to think that dust cloud is generated by the character's movement, and thus the manner in which the character runs through can be emphasized. As shown in FIG. 52(b) above, the image of dust cloud as the auxiliary display is arranged on layer 1 located on the rearmost side. For this reason, as shown in FIG. 54, the image of dust cloud is arranged to be located behind any of the characters that appear.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 54, the layer on which maid E's image is placed is in front of the layer on which maid C's image is placed, so maid E's image is displayed in front of maid C's image. On the other hand, the auxiliary display image corresponding to maid E is positioned behind both maid E's image and maid C's image.

In this way, when the display of maid E and the display of maid C overlap, the display of that maid E takes priority over the display of the other maid C, whereas when the auxiliary display corresponding to that maid E and the display of maid C overlap, the display of that maid C takes priority over the auxiliary display corresponding to that maid E.

(Motion Blur Processing)
FIG. 55 is a diagram for explaining the motion blur processing used in the group preview performance. As shown in FIG. 55, in the group preview performance, the motion blur processing is applied to the advancing character. The motion blur processing is a processing for displaying an object (for example, a character) as an afterimage, and the motion blur processing is applied to the display of the advancing character, so that the afterimage of the character is displayed behind the advancing character. This makes it possible to create a dynamic group preview performance. In addition, when an image obtained by the motion blur processing for one character overlaps with an image obtained by the motion blur processing for another character, the image obtained by the motion blur processing for the one character becomes transparent so as not to impede the visibility of the other character.

(Contours of overlapping characters)
Fig. 56 is a diagram for explaining the outline of characters when they overlap in the group preview performance. As shown in Fig. 56, in the group preview performance, one character may overtake another character. In that case, when the display of the overtaking character overlaps with the display of the other character, the outline of the overtaking character is displayed thicker than the outline of the other character.

For example, in the example shown in (a), maid B, who is positioned in front of maid A, is shown overtaking maid A, but in this case, the outline of maid B is thicker than the outline of maid A, and maid B is displayed more emphasized than maid A. Also, maid A, who is positioned in front of maid F, is shown overtaking maid F, but in this case, the outline of maid A is thicker than the outline of maid F, and maid A is displayed more emphasized than maid F.

Furthermore, in the example shown in (b), maid B, who is positioned in front of maid A, is shown overtaking maid A, but in this case, the outline of maid B is thicker than the outline of maid A, and maid B is displayed more emphasized than maid A. Also, maid A, who is positioned in front of maid D, is shown overtaking maid D, but in this case, the outline of maid A is thicker than the outline of maid D, and maid A is displayed more emphasized than maid D.

When a character overtakes another character, the outline of the character is not limited to being thicker, but the character may be displayed more emphasized than the other characters by increasing the size of the character, making the character brighter than the other characters, or making the contrast of the character clearer than the other characters.

(Display on the screen of the image display device)
Fig. 57 is a view of the gap between the game board 2 and the image display device 5 during the execution of the group advance notice performance. As shown in Figs. 54 to 56 above, the game board 2 covers the edge of the screen of the image display device 5, so when the pachinko game machine 1 is viewed from the front, the part of the edge of the screen of the image display device 5 that is covered by the game board 2 cannot be seen. However, as shown in Fig. 57, when looking between the game board 2 and the image display device 5, the edge of the screen of the image display device 5 located on the back side of the game board 2 can be seen.

In FIG. 57, the six-person group preview changes from a first situation as shown in (a) in which the main character, Maid A (Yume Yume-chan), is not yet displayed in her entirety but only part of her (in this example, part of her face) is displayed, to a second situation as shown in (b) in which Maid A, who is displayed first, is not yet displayed in her entirety but only part of her is displayed more than in the first situation, and Maid B (Jam-chan), who is displayed second, is not yet displayed in her entirety but only part of her (in this example, part of her face) is displayed. Also, the first character displayed (Maid A) and the second character displayed (Maid B) have different position coordinates on the Y axis along the vertical direction of the screen.

Such a change from the first situation to the second situation occurs whether the image display device 5 is viewed with the game board 2 covering the edge of the screen of the image display device 5 or when the image display device 5 is viewed while looking between the game board 2 and the image display device 5. That is, FIG. 57 shows the case where the image display device 5 is viewed while looking between the game board 2 and the image display device 5, but as shown in FIG. 17(b), even when the game board 2 covers the edge of the screen of the image display device 5, in the six-person group preview, the first situation in which the main character Maid A (Yume-Yume-chan) is not yet displayed in its entirety but part of the maid A (in this example, part of her face) is displayed changes to the second situation in which the first maid A displayed in its entirety is not yet displayed but part of the maid A is more visible than in the first situation, and the second maid B (Jam-chan) displayed in its entirety is not yet displayed but part of the maid B (in this example, part of her face) is displayed.

(Full image of the Bakuchugun trailer)
58 is a diagram showing an overall image of the Bakuchu group preview. As shown in Fig. 58, in the Bakuchu group preview included in the group preview performance, an image of Bakuchu characters progressing in a group is displayed.

In the Bakuchu Group Preview, the character image may fit within the display area of the image display device 5, but in other cases, part of the character image (for example, ears or feet) may not fit within the display area of the image display device 5 and may extend beyond it.

In this way, in the Bakuchu Group Preview, the video data for the Bakuchu Group Preview is created by arranging on the screen an animated image of one type of character moving in a progressing manner. Note that the video data for the Bakuchu Group Preview is also created in the same manner as the video data for the 6-person Group Preview, based on the work process shown in Figures 48 to 52.

(Volume change and brightness data table for group preview performance)
Fig. 59 is a diagram for explaining the volume change and the brightness data table in the group preview performance. As shown in Fig. 59, the group preview performance (6-person group preview, Bakuchu preview, Boingo group preview) is divided into a first display period (1000 msec), a second display period (1310 msec), and a third display period (830 msec).

The first display period is the period from when the display of the characters first starts in the group preview performance to when the display of the characters first ends. More specifically, the first display period is the period from when any character first appears in the group preview performance to when any character first disappears. For example, if a character appears first in the group preview performance and the first character continues to progress at the top, the first display period is the period until the first character disappears. Alternatively, if a character appears first in the group preview performance and is overtaken by another character, the first display period is the period until the other character disappears from the edge of the screen. Note that in this embodiment, the display of the second character displayed in the first display period ends before the display of the first character ends. That is, in the first display period, the first character appears, the first character is overtaken by the second character, and the second character disappears from the edge of the screen first.

The second display period is a period longer than the first display period, and is a period during which the state in which the display of new characters begins and ends continues. More specifically, the second display period is the period from when any character first disappears in the group preview performance, during which new characters continue to appear one after another, until the last character appears. Note that the second display period is a period longer than both the first display period and the third display period. Also, the number of characters appearing in the second display period is greater than in both the first display period and the third display period.

The third display period is a period during which the display of characters ends without the start of the display of new characters. More specifically, the third display period is the period from when the last character appears in the group preview performance until all characters disappear. Note that the last character to disappear is not limited to the last character to appear, but may be the character overtaken by the last character to appear. Note that the third display period is a period longer than the first display period.

Regarding changes in the volume during the group preview performance, speakers 8L and 8R start outputting a performance sound corresponding to the group preview performance at a timing related to the start of the first display period, increase the volume of the performance sound to a specific volume during the first display period, maintain the volume of the performance sound at the specific volume during the second display period, and decrease the volume of the performance sound during the third display period.

For example, as shown in FIG. 58, for the performance sound corresponding to the group preview performance, the volume is minimum (e.g., mute or minimum volume) at the beginning of the first display period, then gradually increases in stages until it reaches a specified value, and thereafter is maintained at the specified value (e.g., set volume or maximum volume). The volume also remains at the specified value during the second display period. Then, during the third display period, the volume is maintained at the specified value, and then gradually decreases in stages until it reaches the minimum.

The gradual increase in volume from the minimum to the specified value during the first display period is referred to as a volume fade-in. The gradual decrease in volume from the specified value to the minimum during the third display period is referred to as a volume fade-out. In this embodiment, the fade-in time from when the sound effect is output during the first display period until the volume of the sound effect increases from the minimum to the specified value is shorter than the fade-out time from when the volume of the sound effect starts to decrease during the third display period until the volume of the sound effect reaches the minimum.

The brightness data table is composed of a plurality of brightness data for lighting each of a plurality of lighting means. The plurality of lighting means include game effect lamps such as the frame lamp 9 (frame left lamp 9L, frame right lamp 9R), role lamp 9A, board left lamp 9B, board top lamp 9C, attacca lamp 9E, V attacca lamp 9F, V lamp 9G, electric chute lamp 9H, stick controller lamp 9J, and trigger button lamp 9K. The brightness data table includes a first brightness data table corresponding to the first display period, a second brightness data table corresponding to the second display period, and a third brightness data table corresponding to the third display period. In other words, during the first display period, the predetermined game effect lamp 9 lights up, blinks, or goes out based on the brightness data contained in the first brightness data table, during the second display period, the predetermined game effect lamp 9 lights up, blinks, or goes out based on the brightness data contained in the second brightness data table, and during the third display period, the predetermined game effect lamp 9 lights up, blinks, or goes out based on the brightness data contained in the third brightness data table.

(Timing of the six-person group announcement in Stage A)
60 is a diagram for explaining the timing of occurrence of the six-person group announcement in stage A. As described above, in stage A, the six-person group announcement is executed from the 1600th frame during the previous change.

For example, as shown in FIG. 60, in the case of the fluctuation pattern of fluctuation number 9, which is a miss in the first half of the SP reach, the fluctuation time of the previous fluctuation is 62000 msec (1861 frames), the fluctuation time of the later fluctuation is 37400 msec (1123 frames), and the six-person group announcement starts from the 53280 msec (1600th frame) of the previous fluctuation. Therefore, in the case of the fluctuation pattern of fluctuation number 9, which is a miss in the first half of the SP reach, the timing when the six-person group announcement is executed (1600th frame) belongs to the latter half of the total fluctuation time (2984 frames). In other words, in the case of a miss in the first half of the SP reach, when it is suggested that it is a display result, during the specified period (2984 frames) from the start of the variable display to the indication that the variable display is a miss display result, the first display period of the six-person group announcement starts in the latter half of the specified period (1600th frame).

In the case of the fluctuation pattern of the variable number 20, which hits in the first half of the SP reach, the fluctuation time of the previous fluctuation is 62000 msec (1861 frames), the fluctuation time of the later fluctuation is 93300 msec (2801 frames), and the six-person group announcement starts from the 53280 msec (1600th frame) of the previous fluctuation. Therefore, in the case of the fluctuation pattern of the variable number 20, which hits in the first half of the SP reach, the timing (1600th frame) when the six-person group announcement is executed belongs to the first half of the total fluctuation time (4662 frames). In other words, in the case of a hit in the first half of the SP reach, when it is suggested that it is a display result, during the specified period (4662 frames) from the start of the variable display to the indication that the variable display is a hit display result, the first display period of the six-person group announcement starts in the first half of the specified period (1600th frame). Furthermore, the timing when the six-person group announcement is made (1600th frame) is in the first half of the total change time (4662 frames), close to halfway (2331st frame) of the total change time (4662 frames) (the latter half).

In the case of the fluctuation pattern of the variable number 23 that hits in the latter half of the SP reach, the fluctuation time of the previous fluctuation is 62000 msec (1861 frames), the fluctuation time of the later fluctuation is 99900 msec (3000 frames), and the six-person group announcement starts from the 53280 msec (1600th frame) of the previous fluctuation. Therefore, in the case of the fluctuation pattern of the variable number 23 that hits in the latter half of the SP reach, the timing (1600th frame) when the six-person group announcement is executed belongs to the first half of the total fluctuation time (4861 frames). In other words, in the case of a hit in the latter half of the SP reach, when it is suggested that it is a display result, during the specified period (4861 frames) from the start of the variable display to the indication that the variable display is a hit display result, the first display period of the six-person group announcement starts in the first half of the specified period (1600th frame). Furthermore, the timing when the six-person group announcement is made (1600th frame) is in the first half of the total change time (4861 frames), close to halfway (approximately 2430th frame) of the total change time (4861 frames) (the latter half).

In the case of the fluctuation pattern of the variable number 26 that hits in the final reach, the fluctuation time of the previous fluctuation is 62000 msec (1861 frames), the fluctuation time of the later fluctuation is 142800 msec (4288 frames), and the six-person group forecast starts from the 53280 msec (1600th frame) of the previous fluctuation. Therefore, in the case of the fluctuation pattern of the variable number 26 that hits in the final reach, the timing (1600th frame) when the six-person group forecast is executed belongs to the first half of the total fluctuation time (6149 frames). In other words, in the case of a hit in the final reach, when it is suggested that it is a display result, in the predetermined period (6149 frames) from the start of the variable display to the indication that the variable display is a hit display result, the first display period of the six-person group forecast starts in the first half of the predetermined period (1600th frame). Furthermore, the timing when the six-person group announcement is made (1600th frame) is in the first half of the total change time (6149 frames), close to halfway (approximately the 3074th frame) of the total change time (6149 frames) (the latter half).

In this embodiment, in the case of a variable number 10 to 15 fluctuation pattern that results in a miss in the latter half of the SP reach or the final reach, the post-fluctuation time is set to be longer, so the first display period of the six-person group preview is not configured to start in the first half of the specified period (1600th frame) from the start of the variable display until it is suggested that the variable display is a miss. However, even in the case of a variable number 10 to 15 fluctuation pattern that results in a miss in the latter half of the SP reach or the final reach, the first display period of the six-person group preview may be configured to start in the first half of the specified period from the start of the variable display until it is suggested that the variable display is a miss.

Figure 61 is a diagram to explain the timing of the occurrence of the Bakuchu Group Notice in Stage B. As mentioned above, in Stage B, the Bakuchu Group Notice is executed from the 2000th frame during the post-change.

For example, as shown in FIG. 61, in the case of the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation number 9 which is a miss in the first half of the SP reach, the fluctuation time of the previous fluctuation is 62000 msec (1861 frames), the fluctuation time of the later fluctuation is 37400 msec (1123 frames), and the Bakuchu group announcement starts from the 66600 msec (2000th frame) of the previous fluctuation. Therefore, in the case of the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation number 9 which is a miss in the first half of the SP reach, the timing when the Bakuchu group announcement is executed (2000th frame) belongs to the latter half of the total fluctuation time (2984 frames). In other words, in the case of a miss in the first half of the SP reach, when it is suggested that it is a display result, during the specified period (2984 frames) from the start of the variable display to the indication that the variable display is a miss display result, the first display period of the Bakuchu group announcement starts in the latter half of the specified period (2000th frame).

In the case of the fluctuation pattern of the variable number 20, which is a hit in the first half of the SP reach, the fluctuation time of the previous fluctuation is 62000 msec (1861 frames), the fluctuation time of the later fluctuation is 93300 msec (2801 frames), and the Bakuchu group notice starts from the 66600 msec (2000th frame) of the previous fluctuation. Therefore, in the case of the fluctuation pattern of the variable number 20, which is a hit in the first half of the SP reach, the timing when the Bakuchu group notice is executed (2000th frame) belongs to the first half of the total fluctuation time (4662 frames). In other words, in the case of a hit in the first half of the SP reach, when it is suggested that it is a display result, during the specified period (4662 frames) from the start of the variable display to the indication that the variable display is a hit display result, the first display period of the Bakuchu group notice starts in the first half of the specified period (2000th frame). Furthermore, the timing when the Bakuchu Group Announcement is executed (2000th frame) is in the first half of the total fluctuation time (4662 frames), close to halfway (2331st frame) of the total fluctuation time (4662 frames) (the latter half).

In the case of the fluctuation pattern of the variable number 23, which hits in the latter half of the SP reach, the fluctuation time of the previous fluctuation is 62000 msec (1861 frames), the fluctuation time of the later fluctuation is 99900 msec (3000 frames), and the Bakuchu group notice starts from the 66600 msec (2000th frame) of the previous fluctuation. Therefore, in the case of the fluctuation pattern of the variable number 23, which hits in the latter half of the SP reach, the timing when the Bakuchu group notice is executed (2000th frame) belongs to the first half of the total fluctuation time (4861 frames). In other words, in the case of a hit in the latter half of the SP reach, when it is suggested that it is a display result, during the specified period (4861 frames) from the start of the variable display to the indication that the variable display is a hit display result, the first display period of the Bakuchu group notice starts in the first half of the specified period (2000th frame). Furthermore, the timing when the Bakuchu Group Announcement is executed (2000th frame) is in the first half of the total fluctuation time (4861 frames), close to halfway (approximately the 2430th frame) of the total fluctuation time (4861 frames) (the latter half).

In the case of the fluctuation pattern of the variable number 26, which hits in the latter half of the final reach, the fluctuation time of the previous fluctuation is 62000 msec (1861 frames), the fluctuation time of the later fluctuation is 142800 msec (4288 frames), and the Bakuchu group notice starts from the 66600 msec (2000th frame) of the previous fluctuation. Therefore, in the case of the fluctuation pattern of the variable number 26, which hits in the final reach, the timing when the Bakuchu group notice is executed (2000th frame) belongs to the first half of the total fluctuation time (6149 frames). In other words, in the case of a hit in the final reach, when it is suggested that it is a display result, during the specified period (6149 frames) from the start of the variable display to the indication that the variable display is a hit display result, the first display period of the Bakuchu group notice starts in the first half of the specified period (2000th frame). Furthermore, the timing when the Bakuchu Group Announcement is executed (2000th frame) is in the first half of the total fluctuation time (6149 frames), close to halfway (approximately the 3074th frame) of the total fluctuation time (6149 frames) (the latter half).

In this embodiment, in the case of a variable number 10-15 fluctuation pattern that results in a miss in the latter half of the SP reach or the final reach, the post-fluctuation time is set longer, so the first display period of the Bakuchu group forecast is not configured to start in the first half (2000th frame) of the specified period from when the variable display starts until it is suggested that the variable display is a miss. However, even in the case of a variable number 10-15 fluctuation pattern that results in a miss in the latter half of the SP reach or the final reach, the first display period of the Bakuchu group forecast may be configured to start in the specified period from when the variable display starts until it is suggested that the variable display is a miss.

[Brightness data]
With reference to Figs. 62 to 86, the brightness data referred to by the performance control CPU 120 when controlling various lighting means in the pachinko game machine 1 according to this embodiment will be described. These brightness data tables are stored in the ROM 121. For example, the performance control CPU 120 moves the lighting (light-emitting) location of the game effect lamp in accordance with the display in the group notice based on the brightness data stored in the brightness data table. In this embodiment, the lighting location literally refers to a location that is lit, and for example, the location where a lit lamp is located among the multiple lamps included in the frame lamp is called the lighting location, and the location where other lamps that are not lit (i.e., lamps that are turned off) are located is not called the lighting location. In another example, the lighting location refers to a location that is lit with high brightness, and for example, the location where a lamp that is lit with high brightness is located among the multiple lamps included in the frame lamp is called the lighting location, and the location where a lamp that is lit with a brightness lower than the brightness of the lamp located at the lighting location is not called the lighting location.

More specifically, the data (also called elements) for turning on or off the lamps is specified by a brightness data table, and if data of 0 (for example, data of "000" corresponding to RGB) is stored in the storage area of the data referenced by a specific lamp in such a brightness data table, the specific lamp will be turned off. Also, if there is no storage area of the data referenced by a specific lamp in the brightness data table, or if the brightness data table itself does not exist, the specific lamp will be turned off. On the other hand, if there is a brightness data table referenced by a specific lamp, and one or more data (for example, "100", "010", "001" corresponding to RGB) is stored in the storage area of the data referenced by the specific lamp, the specific lamp will be turned on. Note that, for example, when a specific performance such as a big win notice performance is executed during a performance corresponding to a normal background, even if the data of the specific lamp is not specified in the brightness data table referenced in the specific performance, if the data of the specific lamp is specified in the brightness data table referenced in the performance corresponding to the normal background, the specific lamp will be turned on.

(Parent table in group preview brightness data table)
Fig. 62 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table in the group advance notice brightness data table. As shown in Fig. 62, in the parent table in the group advance notice brightness data table, the performance time of each of the lamps included in the game effect lamp 9, such as the frame lamp (frame right lamp 9R, frame left lamp 9L), the role lamp 9A, the board left lamp 9B, the board top lamp 9C, and the attack lamp 9E, is specified.

For example, each lamp in the game effect lamp 9 is controlled over a period of 3140 msec to match the group preview performance.

(Child table in group preview brightness data table)
Fig. 63 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table in the group notice brightness data table. As shown in Fig. 63, in the child table in the group notice brightness data table, the time of the group notice performance is subdivided for each lamp in the game effect lamp 9, and a grandchild table (also called a brightness data table) to be referred to in each time period is specified.

For example, during the first display period when the group preview performance is executed (the performance period shown in Figures 95 to 96 and 151 to 153 described below), grandchild tables W1 for the frame lamp, Y1 for the reel lamp 9A, L1 for the left panel lamp 9B, U1 for the top panel lamp 9C, and A1 for the attacca lamp 9E are provided. These grandchild tables used during the first display period correspond to the first brightness data table shown in Figure 59.

During the second display period (the period of the performance shown in Figures 97, 98, 154, and 155 described below) when the group preview performance is executed, grandchild tables W2 for the frame lamp, Y2 for the reel lamp 9A, L2 for the left panel lamp 9B, U2 for the top panel lamp 9C, and A2 for the attacca lamp 9E are provided. These grandchild tables used in the second display period correspond to the second brightness data table shown in Figure 59.

During the period when the group preview performance is executed, in the third display period (the period of the performance shown in Figures 99, 100, 156, and 157 described below), grandchild tables W3 for the frame lamp, Y3 for the reel lamp 9A, L3 for the left panel lamp 9B, U3 for the top panel lamp 9C, and A3 for the attacca lamp 9E are provided. These grandchild tables used in the third display period correspond to the third brightness data table shown in Figure 59.

As shown in FIG. 63, six types of brightness data tables are provided for the brightness data tables referenced in the group preview performance in the first, second, and third display periods: the frame left lamp 9L, the frame right lamp 9R, the role lamp 9A, the board left lamp 9B, the board top lamp 9C, and the attacca lamp.

The V lamp 9G is located in a position related to the direction in which the character moves in the group preview performance (for example, near where the character appears in the group preview performance), but since it is not used in the group preview performance, its grandchild table is not prepared. The V lamp 9G is a lamp that notifies the player that a round of jackpot gameplay in which a V win can occur is in progress, or that a V win has occurred, or that a jackpot has occurred. If it is lit in the group preview performance, the player will mistakenly think that a V win or jackpot has occurred. In order to avoid such inconvenience, the V lamp 9G is not used in the group preview performance. The V lamp 9G may be located in other positions, such as near the left panel lamp 9B, as a position related to the direction in which the character moves in the group preview performance, but even in this case, it should not be used in the group preview performance.

The stick controller lamp 9J on the stick controller 31A and the trigger button lamp 9K on the push button 31B are located in a position related to the direction in which the character moves in the group preview performance (for example, directly below where the character moves in the group preview performance), but are not used in the group preview performance, so their grandchild tables are not prepared. The stick controller lamp 9J is lit to encourage the player to pull the stick controller 31A in the operation performance (the performance shown in FIG. 132 (c91) described later), and the trigger button lamp 9K is a lamp that is lit to encourage the player to press the push button 31B in the PUSH performance (the performance shown in FIG. 93 (a19) described later), so if they were lit in the group preview performance, the player would mistakenly think that he or she could operate the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B. In order to avoid such inconvenience, the stick controller lamp 9J and the trigger button lamp 9K are not used in the group preview performance. The stick controller lamp 9J and trigger button lamp 9K may be located in other positions, such as near the left panel lamp 9B, as positions related to the direction in which the characters move during the group preview performance, but even in this case, they should not be used during the group preview performance.

The features of grandchild tables W1 to W3 used as grandchild tables in group preview performances can be summarized as follows. Specifically, W2 has a greater number of high-brightness lit spots than W1. As for the switching interval, W1 controls the lighting at equal intervals of 100 msec, while W2 controls the lighting at irregular intervals of 50 to 80 msec, which is shorter than W1, and W3 controls the lighting at a short interval of 10 msec for the frame left lamp 9L, but a long interval of 80 msec for the frame right lamp 9R.

For the lighting pattern, the brightness data for W1 is specified so that the lighting location moves in accordance with the direction of the group notice and lights up at high brightness, while the brightness data for W2 is specified so that the lighting is done at multiple locations and the brightness data for W3 is specified so that both the frame left lamp 9L and the frame right lamp 9R are turned off or turned on at low brightness in accordance with the direction of the group notice. For the first brightness data, the brightness data for W1 is specified so that all lamps are turned off or turned on at low brightness, while the brightness data for W2 and W3 is specified so that specified lighting locations are illuminated at high brightness. On the other hand, for the last brightness data, the brightness data for W3 is specified so that both the frame left lamp 9L and the frame right lamp 9R are turned off or turned on at low brightness.

Regarding the luminance data loop, W1 and W3 do not specify that the same luminance data is used repeatedly, whereas W2 specifies that the same luminance data is used repeatedly. Regarding the 10-minute luminance data for troubleshooting, W1 and W3 are specified, whereas W2 is not.

(Grandchild table for frame lamps in group preview brightness data table)
FIG. 64 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for frame lamps in a group notice brightness data table. Each lamp included in the frame lamp is an LED of multiple colors (in this example, three colors: red (R), green (G), and blue (B)), and the brightness is expressed as data in hexadecimal numbers from "0" to "F". "0" is data corresponding to turning off the light, and "1" to "F" are data corresponding to turning on the light. Of "1" to "F", "1" to "7" are data corresponding to low brightness lighting, and "8" to "F" are data corresponding to high brightness lighting. If turning off the light is included as a concept of low brightness, "0" is included in the data corresponding to low brightness.

As shown in FIG. 64(a), in the grandchild table W1 used in the first display period, RGB data is defined for each lamp over T1-1 to T1-10 at equal intervals of 100 msec, and furthermore, in the final time T1-11, data for 10 minutes (600,000 msec) is defined for malfunction countermeasures. In addition, in W1, the first luminance data is a combination of data for turning off or turning on each lamp included in the frame lamp at low brightness and data for turning on each lamp at high brightness for each time, and the combination of data for turning off or turning on each lamp at low brightness and data for turning on each lamp at high brightness is composed of second luminance data different from the first luminance data. For example, if the collection of data for each lamp corresponding to T1-2 is the first luminance data, the collection of data for each lamp corresponding to T1-3 can be the second luminance data. Predetermined luminance data is also defined for each other time.

In W1, in the first 100 msec (T1-1) of the first display period, a "1" indicating low brightness is set for "R" for all lamps included in the frame lamp, and a "0" indicating extinguishment is set for "G" and "B". As a result, as shown in Figures 94 (a22) and 151 (b43) described below, at the beginning of the first display period in the group preview performance, all lamps included in the frame lamp are extinguished or lit at a low brightness. This makes it easier for players to notice that the group preview performance is about to be executed. In this embodiment, in order to make the effect more effective by lighting each lamp mainly in red, "R" is assigned a "1" indicating low brightness, and "G" and "B" are assigned a "0" indicating off. However, for example, if each lamp is mainly lit in green, "G" can be assigned a "1" indicating low brightness, and "R" and "B" can be assigned a "0" indicating off. If each lamp is mainly lit in blue, "B" can be assigned a "1" indicating low brightness, and "R" and "G" can be assigned a "0" indicating off.

In addition, in W1, as shown by the dotted arrows, the brightness data is specified so that the location of the lamp that lights up at high brightness moves at equal intervals of 100 msec from near the frame right lamps 9R5-9R8 to the frame left lamp from T1-2 to T1-10. Here, the vicinity of the frame right lamps 9R5-9R8 corresponds to the location where the characters appear in the group preview, and the brightness data is specified so that the location of the lamp that lights up at high brightness moves in accordance with the direction in which the characters move. As for the frame left lamp, the brightness data is specified so that it is initially turned off or turned on at a low brightness, and as the location of the lamp that lights up at high brightness moves in accordance with the direction in which the characters move, it gradually lights up at a high brightness in stages. On the other hand, the brightness data is specified so that the frame right lamps 9R5-9R8, which were initially turned on at high brightness, are turned off or turned on at a low brightness as the location of the lamp that lights up at high brightness moves in accordance with the direction in which the characters move. As a result, as shown in Figures 94 to 96 and 151 to 153 described below, in the group preview, the frame lamps will also change position to light up at high brightness from the right side to the left side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in accordance with the performance in which the characters appear from the right edge of the screen and progress.

W1 also includes data for turning on one frame lamp at high brightness and turning off other frame lamps adjacent to that one, and the brightness data is specified so that the location of the lit lamps moves in stages. This makes it possible for W1 to move the location of the lamp that is lit at high brightness in accordance with the direction the character is moving.

In addition, in W1, luminance data for malfunction countermeasures is specified for the last 10 minutes (600,000 ms) (T1-11) of the first display period. During these 10 minutes, the luminance data is specified so that the frame lamps are lit sparsely at high luminance in accordance with the grandchild table W2 used in the second display period so that there is no sense of incongruity regarding the lighting state of the frame lamps when moving to the next second display period.

If this 10-minute data were not provided, when lighting control was performed using W1 and the transition to W2 did not occur due to some abnormality, the lamp lighting control would be performed again from T1-1, and even though the group preview character had already appeared and progressed, the location of the lamp that is lit with high brightness would move again from near the frame right lamps 9R5-9R8 from T1-2 to T1-10, as shown by the dotted arrow, giving the player a sense of incongruity. However, in this embodiment, since 10 minutes of data is provided at T1-11, even if lighting control was performed using W1 and the transition to W2 did not occur due to some abnormality, the frame lamp can be lit in a light emission mode that matches the grandchild table W2 for 10 minutes, so that no sense of incongruity can be created. And if the abnormality is resolved within these 10 minutes, the player can continue playing without feeling any particular discomfort.

In W1, the brightness data for the 10 minutes described above is specified as a countermeasure against malfunctions, so lighting control is not performed by repeatedly using the brightness data from T1-1 to T1-10.

The brightness data for troubleshooting a 10-minute malfunction specified in W1 is brightness data that turns on adjacent frame lamps in a regular order so that the lighting locations are shifted from the previous T1-10 state.

As shown in FIG. 64(b), in the grandchild table W2 used in the second display period, RGB data is defined for each lamp over T2-1 to T2-10 at non-uniform intervals of 50 to 80 msec. In addition, in W2, the first luminance data is a combination of data for turning off or turning on each lamp included in the frame lamp at low brightness and data for turning on each lamp at high brightness for each time period, and second luminance data is a combination of data for turning off or turning on each lamp at low brightness and data for turning on each lamp at high brightness that is different from the first luminance data. For example, if the collection of data for each lamp corresponding to T2-2 is the first luminance data, the collection of data for each lamp corresponding to T2-3 can be the second luminance data. Predetermined luminance data is also defined for each of the other times.

In W2, the brightness data is specified so that the lamps that are lit at high brightness vary sparsely (randomly), including brightness data that lights up one frame lamp at high brightness and other frame lamps adjacent to that one frame lamp at high brightness. For example, in W2, sparse high brightness data (e.g., "A") is specified so that the lamps are lit at high brightness in multiple locations. As a result, as shown in Figures 97, 98, 154, and 155 described below, during the second display period in the group preview performance, the frame lamps are lit at high brightness sparsely in accordance with the way the characters advance in a group in the group preview performance. Furthermore, W2 is designed to light more frame lamps at high brightness than W1.

In addition, because W2 does not have brightness data for troubleshooting purposes like W1, lighting control is performed by repeatedly using the brightness data from T2-1 to T2-10. If lighting control is performed using W2 and some abnormality prevents transition to W3, and the lamp lighting control is performed again from T2-1, the frame lamps will simply be repeatedly lit sporadically at high brightness, so the player will not feel uncomfortable.

Also, unlike W2, it is possible to provide all the data referenced at each time over the entire time without repeating the luminance data from T2-1 to T2-10, but this takes time to create each piece of data and time to confirm that the created data is correct, making this extremely inefficient. On the other hand, as in this embodiment of W2, by repeatedly using the luminance data from T2-1 to T2-10 to control the lighting, it is only necessary to create one set of data that is repeatedly referenced, improving time efficiency. The reason why one set of data is repeatedly used to control the lighting during the second display period in the group preview performance is that the second display period in the group preview performance is longer than the first display period and the third display period, and the second display period in the group preview performance is a time period in which the screen is filled with multiple characters and the multiple characters progress as a group, so that the lighting mode corresponding to such a performance can be achieved by simply repeating similar lighting.

As shown in FIG. 64(c), in the grandchild table W3 used in the third display period, RGB data is defined for the frame left lamp and frame right lamp over T3-1 to T3-6 at 80 msec intervals. After that, RGB data is defined for the frame left lamp over T3-7 to T3-38 at a short interval of 10 msec, and RGB data is defined for the frame right lamp over T3-7 to T3-38 at a subsequent long interval of 80 msec.

In addition, in W3, as shown by the dotted arrows, the number of lamps that are turned off or turned on at low brightness is increased from T3-2 to T3-30, so that the lamps that were lit at high brightness near the frame right lamps 9R5 to 9R8 are gradually turned off or turned on at low brightness in stages. In addition, for T3-7 to T3-38, the brightness data is specified at 80 msec intervals for the frame right lamps 9R2 to 9R12, while the brightness data is specified so that the frame left lamps 9L5 to 9L12 located in the direction in which the characters move in the group preview go from high brightness to off or low brightness at short intervals of 10 msec. As a result, as shown in Figures 99, 100, 156, and 157 described later, the frame lamps also change their positions from the right to the left of the pachinko game machine 1 to match the performance in which the characters disappear to the left edge of the screen in the group preview.

In addition, in W3, the brightness data is specified so that all lamps included in the frame lamps are turned off or lit at a low brightness during the transition to T3-30. Furthermore, in W3, like W1, brightness data for malfunction countermeasures is specified for the final 10 minutes (600,000 ms) (T3-39) of the third display period. During these 10 minutes, the brightness data is specified so that the frame lamps are turned off or lit at a low brightness so that there is no sense of incongruity regarding the lighting state of the frame lamps when transitioning to the next performance.

In W3, the brightness data for the 10 minutes described above is specified as a countermeasure against malfunctions, so lighting control is not performed by repeatedly using the brightness data from T3-1 to T3-38.

(Sub-table for feature lamps in group preview brightness data table)
FIG. 65 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a reel lamp in a group advance notice brightness data table. As described above, the reel lamp 9A is composed of a plurality of lamps such as reel lamps 9A1 to 9A4, and in the brightness data table shown in FIG. 65, the reel lamps 9A1 to 9A4 are sequentially represented as "RRRR" corresponding to the reel lamps 9A1 to 9A4. Each of the reel lamps 9A1 to 9A4 is a monochromatic (red in this example) LED, and the brightness is represented as data "0" to "6". "0" is data corresponding to turning off the light, and "1" to "6" are data corresponding to turning on the light. Of "1" to "6", "1" to "3" are data corresponding to low brightness lighting, and "4" to "6" are data corresponding to high brightness lighting. When turning off the light is included as a concept of low brightness, "0" is included in the data corresponding to low brightness. Note that a monochromatic LED has fewer filters that block light than a full-color LED, and therefore emits a stronger spectrum. For this reason, the brightness data corresponding to high brightness for a single-color LED is smaller than that for a full-color LED.

As shown in FIG. 65(a), in the grandchild table Y1 used in the first display period, brightness data is specified for each lamp over T1-1 to T1-10 at equal intervals of 100 msec, and furthermore, in the final time T1-11, data for 10 minutes (600,000 msec) is specified for troubleshooting purposes.

In Y1, during the first 100 msec (T1-1) of the first display period, a "1" indicating low brightness is set for all lamps included in the reel lamp 9A. As a result, as shown in FIG. 94 (a22) and FIG. 151 (b43) described below, at the beginning of the first display period in the group preview performance, all lamps included in the reel lamp 9A are turned off or lit at a low brightness. This makes it easier for the player to notice that the group preview performance is about to be executed.

In addition, in Y1, luminance data for malfunction countermeasures is specified for the last 10 minutes (600,000 ms) (T1-11) of the first display period. During these 10 minutes, the luminance data is specified so that the reel lamps 9A are lit sparsely at high luminance in accordance with the grandchild table Y2 used in the second display period so that there is no sense of incongruity regarding the lighting state of the reel lamps 9A when moving to the next second display period.

In Y1, the brightness data for the 10 minutes of malfunction countermeasures described above is specified, so lighting control is not performed by repeatedly using the brightness data from T1-1 to T1-10.

As shown in FIG. 65(b), in the grandchild table Y2 used in the second display period, brightness data is specified for each lamp of the accessory lamp 9A over T2-1 to T2-10 at non-equidistant intervals of 50 to 80 msec.

In Y2, the brightness data includes one lamp that is lit at high brightness, and other lamps adjacent to that lamp are also lit at high brightness, and the brightness data is specified so that the lamps that are lit at high brightness change sparsely (randomly). As a result, as shown in Figures 97, 98, 154, and 155 described below, during the second display period in the group preview performance, the role lamps 9A are lit sparsely at high brightness in accordance with the way the characters progress in a group in the group preview performance.

Note that Y2 does not have the same luminance data for troubleshooting purposes as Y1, so lighting control is performed by repeatedly using the luminance data from T2-1 to T2-10.

As shown in FIG. 65(c), in the grandchild table Y3 used in the third display period, brightness data is specified for the accessory lamp 9A from T3-1 to T3-6 at intervals of 80 msec. Then, brightness data is specified from T3-7 to T3-38 at short intervals of 10 msec.

Furthermore, in Y3, like Y1, luminance data for malfunction countermeasures is specified for the last 10 minutes (600,000 ms) (T3-39) of the third display period. During these 10 minutes, the luminance data is specified so that the reel lamp 9A lights up at a low luminance so that there is no sense of incongruity regarding the lighting state of the reel lamp 9A when moving to the next performance.

In Y3, the brightness data for the 10 minutes of malfunction countermeasures described above is specified, so lighting control is not performed by repeatedly using the brightness data from T3-1 to T3-38.

(Grandchild table for left lamp in group preview brightness data table)
FIG. 66 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for the left panel lamp in the group notice brightness data table. As described above, the left panel lamp 9B is composed of a plurality of lamps such as the left panel lamps 9B1 to 9B5, and in the brightness data table shown in FIG. 66, the left panel lamps 9B1 to 9B5 are sequentially represented as "WWWWW" corresponding to the left panel lamps 9B1 to 9B5. Each of the left panel lamps 9B1 to 9B5 is a single-color (white in this example) LED, and the brightness is represented as data "0" to "6". "0" is data corresponding to turning off the light, and "1" to "6" are data corresponding to turning on the light. Of "1" to "6", "1" to "3" are data corresponding to low brightness lighting, and "4" to "6" are data corresponding to high brightness lighting. When turning off the light is included as a concept of low brightness, "0" is included in the data corresponding to low brightness. In the case of the above-mentioned role lamp 9A, the LED is only red, but even in the case of an LED that is only white, such as the left panel lamp 9B, the value representing high brightness is set to a maximum of "6".

As shown in FIG. 66(a), in the grandchild table L1 used in the first display period, brightness data is specified for each lamp over T1-1 to T1-10 at equal intervals of 100 msec, and furthermore, in the final time T1-11, data for 10 minutes (600,000 msec) is specified for troubleshooting purposes.

In L1, during the first 100 msec (T1-1) of the first display period, a "1" indicating low brightness is set for all lamps included in the left panel lamp 9B. As a result, as shown in FIG. 94 (a22) and FIG. 151 (b43) described below, at the beginning of the first display period in the group preview performance, all lamps included in the left panel lamp 9B are turned off or lit at a low brightness. This makes it easier for players to notice that the group preview performance is about to be executed.

In addition, in L1, brightness data for malfunction countermeasures is specified for the last 10 minutes (600,000 ms) (T1-11) of the first display period. During these 10 minutes, the brightness data is specified so that the left panel lamps 9B light up sparsely at high brightness in accordance with the grandchild table L2 used in the second display period so that there is no sense of incongruity regarding the lighting state of the left panel lamps 9B when moving to the next second display period.

In L1, the brightness data for the 10 minutes described above is specified as a countermeasure against malfunctions, so lighting control is not performed by repeatedly using the brightness data from T1-1 to T1-10.

As shown in FIG. 66(b), in the grandchild table L2 used in the second display period, brightness data is specified for each lamp of the left panel lamp 9B over T2-1 to T2-10 at non-equidistant intervals of 50 to 80 msec.

L2 includes brightness data that lights one lamp at high brightness and also lights other lamps adjacent to that lamp at high brightness, and the brightness data is specified so that the lamps that light up at high brightness change sparsely (randomly). As a result, as shown in Figures 97, 98, 154, and 155 described below, during the second display period in the group preview performance, the left lamps 9B on the board light up sparsely at high brightness in accordance with the way the characters advance in a group in the group preview performance.

Note that L2 does not have the same luminance data for troubleshooting purposes as L1, so lighting control is performed by repeatedly using the luminance data from T2-1 to T2-10.

As shown in FIG. 66(c), in the grandchild table L3 used in the third display period, brightness data is specified for the left panel lamp 9B from T3-1 to T3-6 at 80 msec intervals. After that, brightness data is specified from T3-7 to T3-38 at short intervals of 10 msec.

Furthermore, in L3, like L1, brightness data for malfunction countermeasures is specified for the last 10 minutes (600,000 ms) (T3-39) of the third display period. During these 10 minutes, the brightness data is specified so that the left panel lamp 9B lights up at a low brightness so that there is no sense of incongruity regarding the lighting state of the left panel lamp 9B when moving to the next performance.

In L3, the brightness data for the 10 minutes described above is specified as a countermeasure against malfunctions, so lighting control is not performed by repeatedly using the brightness data from T3-1 to T3-38.

(Sub-table for on-board lamps in group preview brightness data table)
FIG. 67 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for the on-board lamp in the group notice brightness data table. As described above, the on-board lamp 9C is composed of a plurality of lamps such as the on-board lamps 9C1 to 9C13, and each of the on-board lamps 9C1 to 9C5 and 9C9 to 9C13 is a multi-colored (in this example, three colors: red (R), green (G), and blue (B)) LED, and the brightness is represented as data in hexadecimal numbers from "0" to "F". "0" is data corresponding to turning off the lamp, and "1" to "F" are data corresponding to turning on the lamp. Of "1" to "F", "1" to "7" are data corresponding to low brightness lighting, and "8" to "F" are data corresponding to high brightness lighting. If turning off the lamp is included as a concept of low brightness, "0" is included in the data corresponding to low brightness. On the other hand, each of the on-board lamps 9C6 to 9C8 is a single-colored (in this example, white) LED, and the brightness is represented as data in "0" to "6". "0" is data corresponding to off, and "1" to "6" are data corresponding to on. Of "1" to "6", "1" to "3" are data corresponding to low brightness, and "4" to "6" are data corresponding to high brightness. If off is included as a concept of low brightness, "0" is included in the data corresponding to low brightness. In this way, the high brightness value used in a multi-color LED is greater than the high brightness value used in a single-color LED. Note that, although the above-mentioned role lamp 9A was only a red LED, even in the case of a board lamp 9C that is only a white LED, the value representing high brightness is set to a maximum of "6".

As shown in FIG. 67(a), in the grandchild table U1 used in the first display period, brightness data is specified for each lamp over T1-1 to T1-10 at equal intervals of 100 msec, and furthermore, in the final time T1-11, data for 10 minutes (600,000 msec) is specified for troubleshooting purposes.

In U1, during the first 100 msec (T1-1) of the first display period, all lamps included in the role lamp 9A are set to "1" or "0", indicating low brightness. As a result, as shown in Figures 94 (a22) and 151 (b43) described below, at the beginning of the first display period in the group preview performance, all lamps included in the on-board lamp 9C are turned off or lit at a low brightness. This makes it easier for players to notice that the group preview performance is about to be executed.

In addition, in U1, brightness data for malfunction countermeasures is specified for the last 10 minutes (600,000 ms) (T1-11) of the first display period. During these 10 minutes, the brightness data is specified so that the panel lamps 9C light up sparsely at high brightness in accordance with the grandchild table U2 used in the second display period so that there is no sense of incongruity regarding the lighting state of the panel lamps 9C when moving to the next second display period.

In U1, the brightness data for the 10 minutes described above is specified as a countermeasure against malfunctions, so lighting control is not performed by repeatedly using the brightness data from T1-1 to T1-10.

As shown in FIG. 67(b), in the grandchild table U2 used in the second display period, brightness data is specified for each lamp of the on-panel lamp 9C over T2-1 to T2-10 at non-equidistant intervals of 50 to 80 msec.

In U2, the brightness data is specified so that one lamp is lit at high brightness and other lamps adjacent to that lamp are also lit at high brightness, and the lamps that are lit at high brightness change sparsely (randomly). As a result, as shown in Figures 97, 98, 154, and 155 described below, during the second display period in the group preview performance, the lamps 9C on the board are lit sparsely at high brightness in accordance with the way the characters advance in a group in the group preview performance.

Note that U2 does not have the same luminance data for troubleshooting purposes as U1, so lighting control is performed by repeatedly using the luminance data from T2-1 to T2-10.

As shown in FIG. 67(c), in the grandchild table U3 used in the third display period, brightness data is specified for the on-board lamp 9C from T3-1 to T3-6 at intervals of 80 msec. Then, brightness data is specified from T3-7 to T3-38 at short intervals of 10 msec.

Furthermore, in U3, similar to U1, luminance data for malfunction countermeasures is specified for the last 10 minutes (600,000 ms) (T3-39) of the third display period. During these 10 minutes, the luminance data is specified so that the on-board lamp 9C is turned off or lit at a low luminance so that there is no sense of incongruity regarding the lighting state of the on-board lamp 9C when moving to the next performance.

In U3, the brightness data for the 10 minutes described above is specified as a countermeasure against malfunctions, so lighting control is not performed by repeatedly using the brightness data from T3-1 to T3-38.

In addition, in U1, U2, and U3, only the data "0" is specified for the single-colored on-board lamps 9C6 to 9C8. In other words, on-board lamps 9C6 to 9C8 are not used in the group preview performance.

(Grandchild table for Attacka lamps in group preview brightness data table)
FIG. 68 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for the attacca lamp in the group notice brightness data table. Each of the attacca lamp 9E and the electric chute lamp 9H is a multi-colored LED (in this example, three colors: red (R), green (G), and blue (B)), and the brightness is represented as data in hexadecimal numbers from "0" to "F". "0" is data corresponding to turning off the light, and "1" to "F" are data corresponding to turning on the light. Of "1" to "F", "1" to "7" are data corresponding to low brightness lighting, and "8" to "F" are data corresponding to high brightness lighting. If turning off the light is included as a concept of low brightness, "0" is included in the data corresponding to low brightness. On the other hand, the V attacca lamp 9F is a single-colored (in this example, white) LED, and the brightness is represented as data in "0" to "6". "0" is data corresponding to turning off the light, and "1" to "6" are data corresponding to turning on the light. Of the "1" to "6", "1" to "3" are data corresponding to low brightness lighting, and "4" to "6" are data corresponding to high brightness lighting. If the concept of low brightness includes off, then "0" is included in the data corresponding to low brightness. In this way, the high brightness value used in multi-color LEDs is greater than the high brightness value used in single-color LEDs. Note that while the above-mentioned feature lamp 9A had only red LEDs, even in the case of a white-only LED such as the V-attacker lamp 9F, the value representing high brightness is set to a maximum of "6".

As shown in FIG. 68(a), in the grandchild table A1 used in the first display period, brightness data is specified for each lamp over T1-1 to T1-10 at equal intervals of 100 msec, and furthermore, in the final time T1-11, data for 10 minutes (600,000 msec) is specified for troubleshooting purposes.

In A1, during the first 100 msec (T1-1) of the first display period, all lamps are set to "1" or "0", indicating low brightness. As a result, as shown in Figures 94 (a22) and 151 (b43) described below, at the beginning of the first display period in the group preview performance, the attacca lamp 9E, electric chute lamp 9H, and V attacca lamp 9F are turned off or lit at a low brightness. This makes it easier for players to notice that the group preview performance is about to be executed.

Also, in A1, luminance data for malfunction countermeasures is specified for the last 10 minutes (600,000 ms) (T1-11) of the first display period. During these 10 minutes, the luminance data is specified so that the lamps are lit sparsely at high luminance in accordance with the grandchild table A2 used in the second display period so that there is no sense of incongruity in the lighting state of the lamps when moving to the next second display period.

In A1, the brightness data for the 10 minutes of malfunction countermeasures described above is specified, so lighting control is not performed by repeatedly using the brightness data from T1-1 to T1-10.

As shown in FIG. 68(b), in the grandchild table A2 used in the second display period, brightness data is specified for each lamp over T2-1 to T2-10 at non-equidistant intervals of 50 to 80 msec.

A2 includes brightness data that lights one lamp at high brightness and also lights other lamps adjacent to that one at high brightness, and the brightness data is specified so that the lamps that light up at high brightness change sparsely (randomly). As a result, as shown in Figures 97, 98, 154, and 155 described below, during the second display period in the group preview performance, the attacca lamp 9E, electric chute lamp 9H, and V attacca lamp 9F light up sparsely at high brightness in accordance with the way the characters advance in a group in the group preview performance.

Note that A2 does not have the same luminance data for troubleshooting as A1, so lighting control is performed by repeatedly using luminance data from T2-1 to T2-10.

As shown in FIG. 68(c), in the grandchild table A3 used in the third display period, brightness data is specified for each lamp from T3-1 to T3-6 at intervals of 80 msec. Then, brightness data is specified from T3-7 to T3-38 at short intervals of 10 msec.

Furthermore, in A3, like A1, brightness data for malfunction countermeasures is specified for the last 10 minutes (600,000 ms) (T3-39) of the third display period. During these 10 minutes, the brightness data is specified so that the attacca lamp 9E, electric chute lamp 9H, and V attacca lamp 9F are turned off or lit at a low brightness so that there is no sense of incongruity in the lighting state of the attacca lamp 9E, electric chute lamp 9H, and V attacca lamp 9F when moving to the next performance.

In A3, the brightness data for the 10 minutes is specified as a countermeasure against malfunctions as described above, so lighting control is not performed by repeatedly using the brightness data from T3-1 to T3-38.

(Parent table in reach line luminance data table)
Fig. 69 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table in the reach line brightness data table. As shown in Fig. 69, in the parent table in the reach line brightness data table, the presentation time of each of the lamps included in the game effect lamps 9, such as the frame lamp (frame right lamp 9R, frame left lamp 9L), the role lamp 9A, the board left lamp 9B, the board top lamp 9C, and the attack lamp 9E, is specified.

The reach line effect differs from the group preview effect in that it is an effect that predicts that the display result of the variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols will result in the display result of a jackpot symbol stopping, and is an effect that suggests (or informs) the player that a reach has been reached. In the reach line effect, as shown in Figures 89 to 92 and Figures 139 to 142 described below, a line of light (also called a reach line) appears with a flash of light from the center of the screen of the image display device 5, and the reach line expands and contracts inward and outward (left and right) to connect the left and right decorative symbols that make up the reach, and then the reach line disappears.

In the parent table of the reach line brightness data table, each lamp in the game effect lamp 9 is controlled over a period of 1500 msec to match the reach line presentation.

(Child table in reach line data table)
70 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table in the reach-line brightness data table. As shown in FIG. 70, in the child table in the reach-line brightness data table, the reach-line performance time is subdivided for each lamp in the game effect lamp 9, and a grandchild table (also called a brightness data table) to be referred to in each time period is specified.

For example, during the period when the reach line performance is being executed and a flash occurs (the period of the performance shown in Figures 89 (a8), (a9) and Figures 139 (a8), (a9) described below), grandchild tables W11 for the frame lamp, Y11 for the role lamp 9A, L11 for the left lamp 9B of the board, U11 for the top lamp 9C, and A11 for the attacca lamp 9E are provided.

During the period when the reach line performance is being executed, grandchild tables W12 are provided for the frame lamp, Y12 for the role lamp 9A, and L12 for the left panel lamp 9B during the period when the reach line occurs (period of performance shown in Figures 90 and 140 described below). Note that during the period when the reach line occurs, the top panel lamp 9C and the attacca lamp 9E are not used, so no grandchild tables are provided.

During the period when the reach line performance is being executed, during which the reach line expands and contracts inward and outward while spreading (the performance period shown in Figures 91 (a13) to 92 (b17) and Figures 141 (a13) to 142 (b17) described below), grandchild tables W13 for the frame lamp, Y13 for the role lamp 9A, L13 for the left lamp 9B of the board, U13 for the upper lamp 9C of the board, and A13 for the attacca lamp 9E are provided.

During the period when the reach line performance is being executed, when the reach line disappears (the performance period shown in Figures 92 (a18) and 142 (b18) described below), grandchild tables W14 are provided for the frame lamp, Y14 for the reel lamp 9A, L14 for the left lamp 9B of the board, U14 for the top lamp 9C, and A14 for the attacca lamp 9E.

As shown in Figure 70, six types of brightness data tables are provided for the brightness data tables referenced in the reach line performance during the period when a flash occurs, the period when the reach line expands and contracts inward and outward, and the period when the reach line disappears: the frame left lamp 9L, the frame right lamp 9R, the role lamp 9A, the board left lamp 9B, the board top lamp 9C, and the attacca lamp. On the other hand, four types of brightness data tables are provided for the brightness data tables referenced in the reach line performance during the period when the reach line occurs: the frame left lamp 9L, the frame right lamp 9R, the role lamp 9A, and the board left lamp 9B.

In this way, in the reach line performance, a brightness data table is provided for the same number of lamps as in the group preview performance or for a smaller number of lamps than in the group preview performance.

(Grandchild table for frame lamps in reach line brightness data table)
71 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for frame lamps in a reach line brightness data table. Each lamp included in the frame lamp is an LED of multiple colors (in this example, three colors: red (R), green (G), and blue (B)), and the data represents brightness in hexadecimal numbers "0" to "F.""0" is data corresponding to turning off the light, and "1" to "F" are data corresponding to turning on the light. Of "1" to "F,""1" to "7" are data corresponding to low brightness lighting, and "8" to "F" are data corresponding to high brightness lighting. If turning off the light is included as a concept of low brightness, "0" is included in the data corresponding to low brightness.

As shown in FIG. 71(a), in the grandchild table W11, only the brightness data of the frame left lamp 9L is specified, and the brightness data of the frame right lamp 9R is omitted, but the brightness data of the frame right lamp 9R uses common data symmetrically to the brightness data of the frame left lamp 9L. For example, the brightness data of each of the frame right lamps 9R2 to 9R12 is common to the brightness data of each of the frame left lamps 9L2 to 9L12. The reach line effect is an effect that suggests to the player that a reach has been reached, and is not an effect that stimulates the player's sense of expectation by suggesting a jackpot, as in the group notice effect. For this reason, the reach line effect does not perform elaborate lighting control such as setting different brightness data for the frame right lamp 9R and the frame left lamp 9L and controlling each lamp individually, as in the group notice effect, but sets common brightness data for the frame right lamp 9R and the frame left lamp 9L and controls each lamp together. Furthermore, because the reach line effect has a shorter execution time than the group preview effect, instead of using elaborate lighting control such as setting different brightness data for the frame right lamp 9R and the frame left lamp 9L and controlling each lamp individually as in the group preview effect, common brightness data is set for the frame right lamp 9R and the frame left lamp 9L and the lamps are controlled together.

In W11, brightness data is specified for each lamp from T11-1 to T11-2 at 30 msec intervals. In particular, as shown in Figures 89(a8) and 139(b8) described below, the brightness data is specified so that all lamps included in the frame lamp are lit at high brightness when a flash occurs.

As shown in FIG. 71(b), in the grandchild table W12, only the brightness data of the frame left lamp 9L is specified, and the brightness data of the frame right lamp 9R is omitted, but the brightness data of the frame right lamp 9R uses data that is symmetrical to the brightness data of the frame left lamp 9L. For example, the brightness data of each of the frame right lamps 9R2 to 9R12 is common to the brightness data of each of the frame left lamps 9L2 to 9L12.

In W12, brightness data is specified for each lamp from T12-1 to T12-2 at 30 msec intervals. In particular, as shown in Figures 90 and 140 (described later), while a reach line is occurring, the brightness data is specified so that, of the lamps included in the frame lamps, the frame left lamps 9L6, 9L7, 9R6, and 9R7 located on the left and right sides of the screen are lit at high brightness.

As shown in FIG. 71(c), in the grandchild table W13, only the brightness data of the frame left lamp 9L is specified, and the brightness data of the frame right lamp 9R is omitted, but the brightness data of the frame right lamp 9R uses data that is symmetrical to the brightness data of the frame left lamp 9L. For example, the brightness data of each of the frame right lamps 9R2 to 9R12 is common to the brightness data of each of the frame left lamps 9L2 to 9L12.

In W13, brightness data is specified for each lamp from T13-1 to T13-4 at 60 msec intervals. In particular, as shown in Figures 91 and 141 (described later), while a reach line is occurring, the brightness data is specified so that, of the lamps included in the frame lamps, the frame left lamps 9L6, 9L7, 9R6, and 9R7 located on the left and right sides of the screen are lit at high brightness.

As shown in FIG. 71(d), in the grandchild table W14, only the brightness data of the frame left lamp 9L is specified, and the brightness data of the frame right lamp 9R is omitted, but the brightness data of the frame right lamp 9R uses data that is symmetrical to the brightness data of the frame left lamp 9L. For example, the brightness data of each of the frame right lamps 9R2 to 9R12 is common to the brightness data of each of the frame left lamps 9L2 to 9L12.

In W14, brightness data is specified for each lamp over a period of 100 msec (T14-1), but the value is "0." As a result, the frame lamp goes out when the reach line disappears, as shown in FIG. 92 (a18) and FIG. 142 (b18) described later.

(Subtable for accessory lamps in reach line brightness data table)
FIG. 72 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a reel lamp in a reach line brightness data table. Each of the reel lamps 9A1 to 9A4 is a single-color (red in this example) LED, and the brightness is expressed as data from "0" to "F.""0" is data corresponding to turning off the light, and "1" to "F" are data corresponding to turning on the light. Of "1" to "F,""1" to "7" are data corresponding to low brightness lighting, and "8" to "F" are data corresponding to high brightness lighting. If turning off the light is included as a concept of low brightness, "0" is included in the data corresponding to low brightness.

As shown in FIG. 72(a), in the grandchild table Y11, brightness data is specified for the reel lamp 9A from T11-1 to T11-2 at 30 msec intervals. In particular, as shown in FIG. 89(a8) and FIG. 139(b8) described later, the brightness data is specified so that all lamps included in the reel lamp 9A are lit at high brightness when a flash occurs.

As shown in FIG. 72(b), in the grandchild table Y12, brightness data is specified for the reel lamp 9A from T12-1 to T12-2 at 30 msec intervals. In particular, as shown in FIG. 90 and FIG. 140 described later, the brightness data is specified so that all lamps included in the reel lamp 9A are lit at high brightness while the reach line is occurring.

As shown in FIG. 72(c), in the grandchild table Y13, brightness data is specified for the reel lamp 9A from T13-1 to T13-2 at 30 msec intervals. In particular, as shown in FIG. 91 and FIG. 141 described later, the brightness data is specified so that all lamps included in the reel lamp 9A are lit at high brightness while the reach line is occurring.

As shown in FIG. 72(d), in the grandchild table Y14, brightness data is specified for the reel lamp 9A for 100 msec (T14-1), but the value is "0." As a result, as shown in FIG. 92(a18) and FIG. 142(b18) described later, the reel lamp 9A also goes out when the reach line disappears.

(Grandchild table for left lamp in reach line brightness data table)
73 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for the left panel lamp in the reach line brightness data table. Each of the left panel lamps 9B1 to 9B5 is a single-color (white in this example) LED, and the brightness is expressed as data from "0" to "F.""0" is data corresponding to turning off the lamp, and "1" to "F" are data corresponding to turning on the lamp. Of "1" to "F,""1" to "7" are data corresponding to low brightness lighting, and "8" to "F" are data corresponding to high brightness lighting. If turning off the lamp is included as a concept of low brightness, "0" is included in the data corresponding to low brightness.

As shown in FIG. 73(a), in the grandchild table L11, brightness data is specified for the left panel lamp 9B over the period T11-1 to T11-2 at 30 msec intervals. In particular, as shown in FIG. 89(a8) and FIG. 139(b8) described below, the brightness data is specified so that all lamps included in the left panel lamp 9B are lit at high brightness when a flash occurs.

As shown in FIG. 73(b), in the grandchild table L12, brightness data is specified for the left panel lamp 9B from T12-1 to T12-2 at 30 msec intervals. In particular, as shown in FIG. 90 and FIG. 140 described later, the brightness data is specified so that all lamps included in the left panel lamp 9B are lit at high brightness while a reach line is occurring.

As shown in FIG. 73(c), in the grandchild table L13, brightness data is specified for the left panel lamp 9B over T13-1 to T13-4 at 60 msec intervals. In particular, as shown in FIG. 91 and FIG. 141 described later, the brightness data is specified so that all lamps included in the left panel lamp 9B are lit at high brightness while a reach line is occurring.

As shown in FIG. 73(d), in the grandchild table L14, brightness data is specified for the left board lamp 9B for 100 msec (T14-1), but the value is "0." As a result, as shown in FIG. 92(a18) and FIG. 142(b18) described later, the left board lamp 9B also goes out when the reach line disappears.

(Grandchild table for on-board lamps in reach line brightness data table)
FIG. 74 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for on-board lamps in a reach line brightness data table. Each of the on-board lamps 9C1 to 9C5 and 9C9 to 9C13 is a multi-color (in this example, three colors: red (R), green (G), and blue (B)) LED, and the brightness is represented as data from "0" to "F". Each of the on-board lamps 9C6 to 9C8 is a single-color (in this example, white) LED, and the brightness is represented as data from "0" to "F". "0" is data corresponding to turning off the lamp, and "1" to "F" are data corresponding to turning on the lamp. Of "1" to "F", "1" to "7" are data corresponding to low brightness lighting, and "8" to "F" are data corresponding to high brightness lighting. When turning off the lamp is included as a concept of low brightness, "0" is included in the data corresponding to low brightness.

As shown in FIG. 74(a), in the grandchild table U11, brightness data is specified for the on-board lamp 9C from T11-1 to T11-2 at 30 msec intervals. In particular, as shown in FIG. 89(a8) and FIG. 139(b8) described below, the brightness data is specified so that at the timing when a flash occurs, the lamps included in the on-board lamp 9C, other than the central on-board lamps 9C6 to 9C8, are lit at high brightness.

As shown in FIG. 74(b), in the grandchild table U13, brightness data is specified for the on-board lamps 9C over T13-1 to T13-4 at 60 msec intervals. In particular, as shown in FIG. 91 and FIG. 141 described later, the brightness data is specified so that, while a reach line is occurring, the lamps included in the on-board lamps 9C, other than the central on-board lamps 9C6 to 9C8, are lit at high brightness.

As shown in FIG. 74(d), in the grandchild table L14, brightness data is specified for the on-board lamp 9C for 100 msec (T14-1), but the value is "0." As a result, as shown in FIG. 92(a18) and FIG. 142(b18) described later, the on-board lamp 9C also goes out when the reach line disappears.

(Grandchild table for Attacka lamps in Reach Line Brightness Data Table)
FIG. 75 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for the Attacca lamp in the reach line brightness data table. Each of the Attacca lamp 9E and the electric chute lamp 9H is a multi-colored LED (in this example, three colors: red (R), green (G), and blue (B)), and the brightness is represented as data from "0" to "F". The V Attacca lamp 9F is a single-colored LED (in this example, white), and the brightness is represented as data from "0" to "F". "0" is data corresponding to turning off the light, and "1" to "F" are data corresponding to turning on the light. Of "1" to "F", "1" to "7" are data corresponding to low brightness lighting, and "8" to "F" are data corresponding to high brightness lighting. If turning off the light is included as a concept of low brightness, "0" is included in the data corresponding to low brightness.

As shown in FIG. 75(a), in the grandchild table A11, brightness data is specified for each lamp from T11-1 to T11-2 at 30 msec intervals. In particular, as shown in FIG. 89(a8) and FIG. 139(b8) described later, the brightness data is specified so that the attacca lamp 9E, the electric tube lamp 9H, and the V attacca lamp 9F light up at high brightness when a flash occurs.

As shown in Figure 75 (b), in the grandchild table A13, brightness data is specified for each lamp from T13-1 to T13-4 at 60 msec intervals. In particular, as shown in Figures 91 and 141 described below, the brightness data is specified so that the attacca lamp 9E, the electric chute lamp 9H, and the V attacca lamp 9F are lit at high brightness while the reach line is occurring.

As shown in Figure 75 (d), in the grandchild table A14, brightness data is specified for each lamp over 100 msec (T14-1), but the value is "0." As a result, as shown in Figures 92 (a18) and 142 (b18) described below, the Attacka lamp 9E, the Electric Tube lamp 9H, and the V Attacka lamp 9F also go out in conjunction with the disappearance of the reach line.

(Parent table of background preview brightness data table)
Fig. 76 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table in the background notice brightness data table. As shown in Fig. 76, in the parent table in the background notice brightness data table, the performance time of each of the lamps included in the game effect lamp 9, such as the frame lamp (frame right lamp 9R, frame left lamp 9L), the role lamp 9A, the board left lamp 9B, the board top lamp 9C, and the attack lamp 9E, is specified.

The background preview effect is different from the group preview effect in that it predicts that the display result of the variable display of special patterns and decorative patterns will result in a jackpot pattern stopping, and is an effect in which a specific character (for example, Jam-chan) is displayed with a specific background (for example, a starry sky background).

In the parent table of the background preview brightness data table, each lamp in the game effect lamp 9 is controlled over a period of 5,500 msec to match the background preview performance.

(Child table of background preview brightness data table)
Fig. 77 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table in the background notice brightness data table. As shown in Fig. 77, in the child table in the background notice brightness data table, the time of the background notice performance is subdivided for each lamp in the game effect lamp 9, and a grandchild table (also called a brightness data table) to be referred to in each time period is specified.

For example, during the first 2000 msec of the period during which the background preview performance is executed, grandchild tables W21 for the frame lamp, Y21 for the reel lamp 9A, L21 for the left lamp 9B, U21 for the upper lamp 9C, and A21 for the attacca lamp 9E are provided.

During the period of time during which the background preview performance is being performed, in the middle 100 msec, grandchild tables W22 for the frame lamp, Y22 for the reel lamp 9A, L22 for the left lamp 9B, U22 for the upper lamp 9C, and A22 for the attacca lamp 9E are provided.

During the final 600,000 msec period during which the background preview performance is executed, grandchild tables W23 for the frame lamp, Y23 for the reel lamp 9A, L23 for the left lamp 9B, U23 for the upper lamp 9C, and A23 for the attacca lamp 9E are provided.

As shown in FIG. 77, six types of brightness data tables are provided for the first 200 msec, the middle 100 msec, and the final 600,000 msec in the brightness data tables referenced in the background preview performance: the frame left lamp 9L, the frame right lamp 9R, the role lamp 9A, the board left lamp 9B, the board top lamp 9C, and the attacca lamp.

In this way, in the background preview performance, a brightness data table is provided for the same number of lamps as in the group preview performance.

(Sub-table for frame lamps in background preview brightness data table)
FIG. 78 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for frame lamps in a background notice brightness data table. Each lamp included in the frame lamp is an LED of multiple colors (in this example, three colors: red (R), green (G), and blue (B)), and the brightness is expressed as data in hexadecimal numbers from "0" to "F". "0" is data corresponding to turning off the light, and "1" to "F" are data corresponding to turning on the light. Of "1" to "F", "1" to "7" are data corresponding to turning on the light at low brightness, and "8" to "F" are data corresponding to turning on the light at high brightness. If turning off the light is included as a concept of low brightness, "0" is included in the data corresponding to low brightness.

As shown in FIG. 78(a), in the grandchild table W21, only the luminance data of the frame left lamp 9L is specified, and the luminance data of the frame right lamp 9R is omitted, but the luminance data of the frame right lamp 9R uses data that is symmetrical to the luminance data of the frame left lamp 9L. For example, the luminance data of each of the frame right lamps 9R2 to 9R12 is common to the luminance data of each of the frame left lamps 9L2 to 9L12. In W21, luminance data is specified for each lamp over T21-1 to T21-4 at 50 msec intervals.

As shown in FIG. 78(b), in the grandchild table W22, only the luminance data of the frame left lamp 9L is specified, and the luminance data of the frame right lamp 9R is omitted, but the luminance data of the frame right lamp 9R uses data that is symmetrical to the luminance data of the frame left lamp 9L. For example, the luminance data of each of the frame right lamps 9R2 to 9R12 is common to the luminance data of each of the frame left lamps 9L2 to 9L12. In W22, luminance data is specified for each lamp from T22-1 to T22-2 at 20 msec intervals.

As shown in FIG. 78(c), in the grandchild table W23, only the luminance data of the frame left lamp 9L is specified, and the luminance data of the frame right lamp 9R is omitted, but the luminance data of the frame right lamp 9R uses data that is symmetrical to the luminance data of the frame left lamp 9L. For example, the luminance data of each of the frame right lamps 9R2 to 9R12 is common to the luminance data of each of the frame left lamps 9L2 to 9L12. In W23, luminance data is specified for each lamp over T23-1 to T23-6, alternating between 240 msec and 230 msec.

(Subtable for feature lamps in background preview brightness data table)
FIG. 79 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a reel lamp in a background notice brightness data table. Each of the reel lamps 9A1 to 9A4 is a single-color (red in this example) LED, and the brightness is expressed as data from "0" to "F.""0" is data corresponding to turning off the light, and "1" to "F" are data corresponding to turning on the light. Of "1" to "F,""1" to "7" are data corresponding to low brightness lighting, and "8" to "F" are data corresponding to high brightness lighting. If turning off the light is included as a concept of low brightness, "0" is included in the data corresponding to low brightness.

As shown in FIG. 79(a), in the grandchild table Y21, brightness data is specified for the accessory lamp 9A over T21-1 to T21-4 at intervals of 50 msec.

As shown in FIG. 79(b), in the grandchild table Y22, brightness data is specified for the accessory lamp 9A from T22-1 to T22-2 at intervals of 20 msec.

As shown in FIG. 79(c), in the grandchild table Y23, brightness data is specified for the accessory lamp 9A over T23-1 to T23-6, alternating between 240 msec and 230 msec.

(Background preview brightness data table for left side lamp)
FIG. 80 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for the left panel lamp in the background notice brightness data table. Each of the left panel lamps 9B1 to 9B5 is a single-color (white in this example) LED, and the brightness is expressed as data from "0" to "F". "0" is data corresponding to turning off the lamp, and "1" to "F" are data corresponding to turning on the lamp. Of "1" to "F", "1" to "7" are data corresponding to low brightness lighting, and "8" to "F" are data corresponding to high brightness lighting. If turning off the lamp is included as a concept of low brightness, "0" is included in the data corresponding to low brightness.

As shown in FIG. 80(a), in the grandchild table L21, brightness data is specified for the left panel lamp 9B over T21-1 to T21-4 at 50 msec intervals.

As shown in FIG. 80(b), in the grandchild table L22, brightness data is specified for the left panel lamp 9B from T22-1 to T22-2 at 20 msec intervals.

As shown in FIG. 80(c), in the grandchild table L23, brightness data is specified for the left lamp 9B over T23-1 to T23-6, with 240 msec and 230 msec being repeated.

(Sub-table for on-board lamps in background preview brightness data table)
FIG. 81 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for the on-board lamp in the background notice brightness data table. Each of the on-board lamps 9C1 to 9C5, 9C9 to 9C13 is a multi-colored (in this example, three colors: red (R), green (G), and blue (B)) LED, and the brightness is represented as data "0" to "F". Each of the on-board lamps 9C6 to 9C8 is a single-colored (in this example, white) LED, and the brightness is represented as data "0" to "F". "0" is data corresponding to turning off the lamp, and "1" to "F" are data corresponding to turning on the lamp. Of "1" to "F", "1" to "7" are data corresponding to low brightness lighting, and "8" to "F" are data corresponding to high brightness lighting. When turning off the lamp is included as a concept of low brightness, "0" is included in the data corresponding to low brightness.

As shown in FIG. 81(a), in the grandchild table U21, brightness data is specified for the on-board lamp 9C over T21-1 to T21-4 at 50 msec intervals.

As shown in FIG. 81(b), in the grandchild table U22, brightness data is specified for the on-board lamp 9C from T22-1 to T22-2 at intervals of 20 msec.

As shown in FIG. 81(c), in the grandchild table U23, brightness data is specified for the on-board lamp 9C over T23-1 to T23-6, repeating between 240 msec and 230 msec.

(Background preview brightness data table for Attacka lamp)
FIG. 82 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for the Attacca lamp in the background notice brightness data table. Each of the Attacca lamp 9E and the electric tube lamp 9H is a multi-colored LED (in this example, three colors: red (R), green (G), and blue (B)), and the brightness is represented as data from "0" to "F". The V Attacca lamp 9F is a single-colored LED (in this example, white), and the brightness is represented as data from "0" to "F". "0" is data corresponding to turning off the light, and "1" to "F" are data corresponding to turning on the light. Of "1" to "F", "1" to "7" are data corresponding to low brightness lighting, and "8" to "F" are data corresponding to high brightness lighting. If turning off the light is included as a concept of low brightness, "0" is included in the data corresponding to low brightness.

As shown in FIG. 82(a), in the grandchild table A21, brightness data is specified for each lamp of the attacca lamp 9E, the electric tube lamp 9H, and the V attacca lamp 9F from T21-1 to T21-2 at intervals of 50 msec.

As shown in FIG. 82(b), in the grandchild table A22, brightness data is specified for each lamp of the attacca lamp 9E, the electric tube lamp 9H, and the V attacca lamp 9F from T22-1 to T22-2 at intervals of 20 msec.

As shown in FIG. 82(c), in the grandchild table A23, brightness data is specified for each lamp of the attacca lamp 9E, the electric tube lamp 9H, and the V attacca lamp 9F over T23-1 to T23-6, repeating between 240 msec and 230 msec.

(All lights on brightness data table)
Fig. 83 is a diagram for explaining an example of a data table of luminance when all lights are on. As shown in Fig. 83(a) to (h), in the data table of luminance when all lights are on, high luminance data (maximum value "F" in this example) is specified for each of the game effect lamps 9 such as the frame lamp, the accessory lamp 9A, the left panel lamp 9B, the upper panel lamp 9C, the attack lamp 9E, the V attack lamp 9F, the electric chute lamp 9H, the V lamp 9G, the stick controller lamp 9J, and the trigger button lamp 9K.

(Push effect brightness data table)
84 is a diagram for explaining an example of a luminance data table during a PUSH effect. The PUSH effect is an effect that prompts the player to press the push button 31B, as shown in FIG. 93 (a19) described later.

Figure 84 (a) shows the brightness data table S41 for the stick controller lamp 9J. In S41, brightness data is specified for the stick controller lamp 9J over T41-1 to T41-4 at 20 msec intervals. Note that the lighting color of the stick controller lamp 9J during a PUSH performance is the same color (red in this example) as the lighting color of the frame lamps and the like during the group preview performance.

Figure 84 (b) shows the brightness data table T41 for the trigger button lamp 9K. In T41, brightness data is specified for the trigger button lamp 9K over T51-1 to T512 at intervals of 150 msec. The color of the trigger button lamp 9K during a PUSH performance is the same color (red in this example) as the color of the frame lamps and the like that light up during the group preview performance.

(Child Table in Group Preview Luminance Data Table According to Modification)
Fig. 85 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table in the group notice brightness data table according to the modified example. As shown in Fig. 85, in the child table in the group notice brightness data table according to the modified example, the time of the group notice performance is subdivided for each lamp in the game effect lamp 9, and a grandchild table (also called a brightness data table) to be referred to in each time period is specified.

For example, during the period in which the group preview performance is executed, up to the middle of the first display period (2000 msec), grandchild tables are provided for the frame lamp W101, the role lamp 9A Y101, the left panel lamp 9B L101, the top panel lamp 9C U101, and the attacca lamp 9E A101. These grandchild tables correspond to the first brightness data table in the modified example.

During the period in which the group preview performance is executed, the remainder of the first display period, the second display period, and partway through the third display period (2790 msec), grandchild tables W102 for the frame lamp, Y102 for the reel lamp 9A, L102 for the left panel lamp 9B, U102 for the top panel lamp 9C, and A102 for the attacca lamp 9E are provided. These grandchild tables correspond to the second brightness data table in the modified example.

During the remaining period of the third display period (150 msec) during which the group preview performance is executed, grandchild tables W103 for the frame lamp, Y103 for the reel lamp 9A, L103 for the left panel lamp 9B, U103 for the top panel lamp 9C, and A103 for the attacca lamp 9E are provided. These grandchild tables correspond to the third brightness data table in the modified example.

In this way, in the group preview brightness data table relating to the modified example, in the first brightness data table, control of the game effect lamp 9 begins at a timing related to the start of the first display period and control of the game effect lamp 9 ends during the first display period, in the second brightness data table, control of the game effect lamp 9 begins during the first display period and control of the game effect lamp 9 continues during the second display period, control of the game effect lamp 9 ends during the third display period, and in the third brightness data table, control of the game effect lamp 9 begins during the third display period.

(Frame Lamp Grandchild Table in Group Pre-announcement Brightness Data Table According to Modification)
FIG. 86 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for frame lamps in a group notice brightness data table according to a modified example. Each lamp included in the frame lamp is an LED of multiple colors (in this example, three colors: red (R), green (G), and blue (B)), and the brightness is expressed as data in hexadecimal numbers from "0" to "F". "0" is data corresponding to turning off the light, and "1" to "F" are data corresponding to turning on the light. Of "1" to "F", "1" to "7" are data corresponding to low brightness lighting, and "8" to "F" are data corresponding to high brightness lighting. When turning off the light is included as a concept of low brightness, "0" is included in the data corresponding to low brightness.

As shown in FIG. 86(a), in the grandchild table W101, RGB data is specified for each lamp over T101-1 to T101-10 at equal intervals of 20 msec, and furthermore, in the final time T101-11, data for 10 minutes (600,000 msec) is specified for troubleshooting purposes.

As shown in FIG. 86(b), in the grandchild table W102, RGB data is specified for each lamp over T102-1 to T102-10 at non-uniform intervals of 50 to 80 msec. In W102, the brightness data is specified so that the lamps that are lit at high brightness vary sparsely (randomly), including brightness data that lights up one frame lamp at high brightness and other frame lamps adjacent to that frame lamp at high brightness. For example, in W102, sparse high brightness data (e.g., "A") is specified so that the lamps are lit at high brightness over multiple locations. As a result, in the group preview performance, the frame lamps are lit at high brightness sparsely in accordance with the way the characters advance in a group in the group preview performance. In addition, W102 is designed to light more frame lamps at high brightness than W101.

As shown in FIG. 86(c), in the grandchild table W103, RGB data is specified for the frame left lamp and frame right lamp over T103-1 to T103-6 at intervals of 14 msec. After that, RGB data is specified for the frame left lamp over T103-7 to T103-38 at a short interval of 2 msec, and RGB data is specified for the frame right lamp over T103-7 to T103-38 at a subsequent long interval of 14 msec.

In addition, in W103, from T103-2 to T103-30, the number of lamps that are turned off or turned on at low brightness is increased so that the lamps that were lit at high brightness near the frame right lamps 9R5 to 9R8 are gradually turned off or turned on at low brightness in stages. Also, for T103-7 to T103-38, the brightness data is specified at 14 msec intervals for the frame right lamps 9R2 to 9R12, while the brightness data is specified so that the frame left lamps 9L5 to 9L12, which are located in the direction in which the characters move in the group preview, go from high brightness to off or low brightness at short intervals of 2 msec. This causes the frame lamps to change their positions from the right to the left of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to match the performance in which the characters disappear to the left edge of the screen in the group preview.

In addition, in W103, brightness data is specified so that all lamps included in the frame lamps are turned off or lit at a low brightness during the transition to T103-30. Furthermore, in W103, similar to W101, brightness data for malfunction countermeasures is specified for the final 10 minutes (600,000 ms) (T103-39) of the third display period. During these 10 minutes, the brightness data is specified so that the frame lamps are turned off or lit at a low brightness so that there is no sense of incongruity regarding the lighting state of the frame lamps when transitioning to the next performance.

[Presentation Mode of Pachinko Game Machine 1]
Next, the performance of the pachinko game machine 1 during play will be described with reference to Figures 87 to 172. In this embodiment, the performance will be described when one of the main variation patterns 9, 12, 15, 20, 23, and 26, in which pseudo variations are performed twice, is selected. In the figures, the lighting and blinking of each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 is indicated by hatching.

(Performance on Stage A)
The performance aspects on stage A will be described with reference to Figures 87 to 109.

As shown in FIG. 87(a1), when the variable display starts based on one reserved memory, on the screen of the image display device 5, the decorative symbols are variably displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the fourth symbol 5J is variably displayed, and further, the small symbol 5M is variably displayed. On the screen, a background image including images of characters and scenery is displayed as the background during the variable display. In this embodiment, an image of Maid A (Yume Yume-chan) flying as a character appearing on stage A is displayed. During the variable display, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the variable display, and the performance sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the variable display.

As shown in FIG. 87(a2), when the pseudo consecutive performance is performed and the character "x2" is displayed, indicating that the second variable display will be performed, the second variable display will be performed as shown in FIG. 87(a3).

As shown in FIG. 88(a4), a pseudo consecutive performance is performed, and when the letters "x3" are displayed, indicating that a third variable display will be performed, as shown in FIG. 88(a5), a third variable display is performed. After that, as shown in FIG. 88(a6), when a "3" stops in the left decorative pattern display area 5L and also in the right decorative pattern display area 5R, the variable display mode becomes a reach mode.

As shown in FIG. 89(a7), a decorative pattern for the reach line effect is displayed to notify that the variable display mode has become the reach mode. As shown in FIG. 89(a8), the reach line effect starts. At this time, a flash of light appears from the center of the screen of the image display device 5. During the reach line effect, the lamps included in the game effect lamp 9 are lit in a mode corresponding to the reach line effect based on the brightness data table shown in FIG. 69 to FIG. 75. In the state shown in FIG. 89(a8), all the lamps included in the frame lamp are lit with high brightness. During the reach line effect, a performance sound corresponding to the reach line effect is output from the speakers 8L, 8R.

As shown in Figure 89 (a9), the decorative design in the center of the screen begins to rotate left and right, and the flashes of light get larger.

As shown in FIG. 90 (a10), the decorative pattern in the center of the screen continues to rotate left and right, the flash of light gets larger, and a reach line appears in the center of the screen. The reach line is a line of light (a ray of light) that connects the left and right decorative patterns that make up the reach state, and is colored a specific color such as blue or red. The display of the reach line can suggest to the player that the state of the variable display has become a reach state, or that it will become a reach state.

As shown in Figure 90 (a11), the decorative symbol in the center of the screen continues to rotate left and right, the flash of light gets larger, and the reach line in the center of the screen begins to extend left and right (outside) of the screen. As shown in Figure 90 (a12), the decorative symbol in the center of the screen returns to its original position, and the reach line in the center of the screen extends further left and right (outside) of the screen. As shown in Figure 90, during the reach line performance, the frame left lamps 9L6, 9L7, 9R6, and 9R7 located on the left and right of the screen light up at high brightness.

As shown in FIG. 91 (a13), the decorative pattern in the center of the screen gradually expands in stages, and the reach line in the center of the screen extends left and right (outside) of the screen. As shown in FIG. 91 (a14), the decorative pattern in the center of the screen expands further, and the reach line in the center of the screen extends further left and right (outside) of the screen. As shown in FIG. 91 (a15), the decorative pattern in the center of the screen expands further, and the reach line in the center of the screen extends further left and right (outside) of the screen. As shown in FIG. 91, during the reach line, the frame left lamps 9L6, 9L7, 9R6, and 9R7 located on the left and right of the screen are lit at high brightness.

As shown in Figure 92 (a16), the decorative pattern in the center of the screen now gradually shrinks in stages, and the reach line in the center of the screen begins to shrink left and right (inward) of the screen. As shown in Figure 92 (b17), the decorative pattern in the center of the screen shrinks further, and the reach line in the center of the screen shrinks further left and right (inward) of the screen, stopping in its original position. At this time, the frame left lamps 9L6, 9L7, 9R6, and 9R7 located on the left and right of the screen light up with high brightness. After that, as shown in Figure 92 (a18), the reach line in the center of the screen disappears. At this time, the game effect lamp 9 also goes out.

As shown in FIG. 92 (a18), after the reach line performance ends, if a group of six is announced, the performance will transition to that shown in FIG. 93 (a19); if a background is announced, the performance will transition to that shown in FIG. 102 (a101); and if a lamp is announced, the performance will transition to that shown in FIG. 103 (a111).

As mentioned above, the six-person group preview is a presentation that suggests that the display result of the variable display of the special pattern or decorative pattern will be a predetermined jackpot pattern, and is a presentation in which six characters dressed as maids proceed in a group. The background preview is a presentation that suggests that the display result of the variable display of the special pattern or decorative pattern will be a predetermined jackpot pattern, and is a presentation in which a specific character (for example, a main character, a rare character, etc.) is displayed with a specific background (for example, a starry sky background). The lamp preview is a presentation that suggests that the display result of the variable display of the special pattern or decorative pattern will be a predetermined jackpot pattern, and is a presentation in which a specific lamp (for example, the role lamp 9A, etc.) included in the game effect lamp 9 lights up or flashes. In the lamp preview, one or more of the lamps included in the game effect lamp 9 may light up or flash, or a lamp other than the game effect lamp 9 may light up or flash.

In stage A, a group announcement (for example, a six-person group announcement or a Boingo group announcement) is executed after the reach line performance of the previous change. For example, when a six-person group announcement is executed after the reach line performance, a PUSH performance is executed as shown in FIG. 93 (a19). When the PUSH performance is executed, an image showing the push button 31B and a meter image showing the time limit for the pressing operation are displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, and a text image of "PUSH!!" is displayed. Furthermore, during the PUSH performance, each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 is lit in a manner corresponding to the PUSH performance based on the brightness data table shown in FIG. 84. For example, during the PUSH performance, the stick controller lamp 9J and the trigger button lamp 9K are lit or flash. Note that during the PUSH performance, a sound effect urging the player to press the push button 31B may be output from the speakers 8L and 8R. In this way, in the PUSH presentation, the player is prompted to press the push button 31B by an image display, a lit or blinking lamp, or a sound.

As shown in FIG. 93 (a20), when the push button 31B is pressed during the PUSH effect, an effect occurs in which the image showing the push button 31B, the meter image, and the text image of "PUSH!!" that were displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5 disappear. In addition, when the push button 31B is pressed, a PUSH sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the button being pressed. The output of the PUSH sound allows the player to recognize that the push button 31B has been effectively pressed during the PUSH effect. The output of the PUSH sound from the speakers 8L and 8R ends before the group preview effect (in this example, a six-person group preview) begins. In addition, when the push button 31B is pressed, the game effect lamp 9 lights up or flashes in a manner corresponding to the button being pressed. In this example, all the frame lamps light up at high brightness.

As shown in FIG. 93 (a21), the display on the screen of the image display device 5 temporarily returns to displaying the normal background image, and the game effect lamp 9 lights up or flashes in a manner corresponding to the background.

As shown in FIG. 94 (a22), the six-person group preview begins, but before the characters appear, the game effect lamp 9 goes out. This draws the player's attention to the fact that the group preview performance is about to begin.

As shown in FIG. 94 (a23), in the first display period, the main character, maid A (Yume Yume-chan), appears as the first (initial) character. Note that the state shown in FIG. 94 (a23) corresponds to the state shown in FIG. 57 (a), and represents the first situation in which the main character, maid A (Yume Yume-chan), is not yet displayed in its entirety, but only part of maid A (in this example, part of her face) is displayed.

During the execution of the six-person group preview, the lamps included in the game effect lamp 9 are lit in a manner corresponding to the group preview performance based on the brightness data table shown in Figures 62 to 68. For example, in the first display period shown in Figures 94 to 96, the frame right lamps 9R5 to 9R8 located near the location where the character appears in the group preview begin to light up at high brightness, and then the location of the lamps that are lit up at high brightness moves in accordance with the direction in which the character moves. Note that when a group preview performance (six-person group preview, Bakuchu preview, Boingo preview described below) is executed, the brightness of images other than the images related to the group preview performance (for example, background images and images related to the SP reach first half preview performance) is reduced. The brightness of other images that has been reduced during the group preview performance gradually returns to its original brightness in stages during the third display period. On the other hand, the display of information related to games that are important to the player in terms of winning or losing or the degree of advantage, such as the fourth pattern 5J and small pattern 5M indicating the first and second reserved memory counts, and the first reserved memory display area 5D, the second reserved memory display area 5U, and the active display area 5A, is given a high priority and is not lowered in brightness even when the group preview performance is executed.

During the group preview performance, a performance sound corresponding to the group preview performance is output from speakers 8L and 8R. As shown in FIG. 59, the volume of the performance sound corresponding to the group preview performance starts to be output at a timing related to the start of the first display period, the volume of the performance sound is increased to a specific volume during the first display period, the volume of the performance sound is maintained at the specific volume during the second display period, and the volume of the performance sound is decreased during the third display period. When the group preview performance starts, a start sound indicating the start of the group preview performance is output from speakers 8L and 8R separately from the performance sound corresponding to the group preview performance, but the output of the start sound stops by the time the second character appears.

As shown in Fig. 94 (a24), the second character appears shortly after the first character appears. Note that the state shown in Fig. 94 (a24) corresponds to the state shown in Fig. 57 (b), and represents a second situation in which maid A, who is displayed first, is not yet displayed in its entirety, but part of said maid A is more visible than in the first situation, and maid B (Jam-chan), who is displayed second, is not yet displayed in its entirety, but part of said maid B (part of her face in this example) is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 95 (a25), an animation is displayed in which characters appear one after another and run from the left side of the screen to the right side. As shown in FIG. 95 (a26), an animation is displayed in which the second character to appear overtakes the first character to appear. As shown in FIG. 95 (a27), an animation is displayed in which characters appear one after another and run from the left side of the screen to the right side.

As shown in FIG. 96 (a28), the characters continue to progress, and eventually the second character to appear, who is running at the top (leading), reaches the left edge of the screen. As shown in FIG. 96 (a29), the second character to appear, who is running at the top (leading), begins to disappear from the left edge of the screen. As shown in FIG. 96 (a30), the second character to appear, who is running at the top, is the first to disappear from the left edge of the screen. This ends the first display period.

As shown in FIG. 97 (a31), during the second display period, an animation is displayed in which characters appear one after another and run from the left side of the screen to the right side. During the second display period shown in FIG. 97 and FIG. 98, the frame lamps are lit sparsely with high brightness in accordance with the way the characters advance in a group in the group preview performance. This causes the frame lamps to light up or flash in accordance with the animation display of the characters forming a group and running through. In addition, the performance sound corresponding to the group preview output from speakers 8L, 8R includes, for example, footsteps in accordance with the animation display of the characters running through. After that, as shown in FIG. 97 (a32) to FIG. 98 (a36), an animation is displayed in which characters appear one after another and run from the left side of the screen to the right side.

As shown in FIG. 99 (a37), in the third display period, the last character appears and an animation of the last character running from the left side of the screen to the right side with the other characters is displayed. Note that no new characters appear in the third display period. In the third display period, as shown in FIG. 99 and FIG. 100, in line with the performance in which the characters disappear to the left edge of the screen in the group preview, the frame lamps also change position from the right side to the left side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, either turned off or lit at a low brightness. Note that, as shown in FIG. 99 (a37), when the third display period begins, all of the game effect lamps 9 are temporarily lit at a high brightness.

As shown in FIG. 99 (a38), the frame lamps begin to go out as the character disappears to the left edge of the screen. In the example shown in FIG. 99 (a38), some of the right frame lamps 9R are out because no characters are displayed in the right half of the screen. As shown in FIG. 99 (a39), the number of right frame lamps 9R that are out increases as the character continues to disappear to the left edge of the screen.

As shown in Fig. 100 (a40) and (a41), the number of game effect lamps 9 that are turned off increases as the characters gradually disappear in stages. As shown in Fig. 100 (a42), when the last character disappears, the group preview performance ends.

Now, referring to FIG. 101, a comparative example of a six-person group preview will be compared with the six-person group preview according to this embodiment. In the comparative example shown in FIG. 101 (a201), similar to this embodiment shown in FIG. 94 (a23), the first situation is reached in which the main character, maid A (Yume Yume-chan), is not yet entirely displayed, while part of maid A (in this example, part of her face) is displayed.

In this embodiment shown in FIG. 94 (a24), the first maid A is not yet displayed in its entirety, but part of her is more visible than in the first situation, and the second maid B (Jam-chan) is not yet displayed in its entirety, but part of her (part of her face in this example) is displayed in the second situation, whereas in the comparative example shown in FIG. 101 (a202), the second maid B does not appear, but continues to run, and the whole of maid A is displayed. And in the comparative example shown in FIG. 101 (a203), the second maid B finally appears after the first maid A runs past the left side of the center of the screen. In this comparative example, only one character appears, and it does not look like a group preview performance.

In this embodiment, as shown in Figures 94 to 100, an animation is displayed in which multiple characters appear and run one after the other without any gaps, so that multiple characters progress as a group, creating a powerful presentation. Also, the number of characters overtaking other characters is smaller than the number of other characters that are overtaken by the overtaking character, which prevents the group preview presentation from becoming too complicated. Note that the number of characters overtaking other characters may be greater than the number of other characters that are overtaken by the overtaking character. In this case, a dynamic group preview presentation can be shown to the player.

When a background preview is executed after the reach line effect, a PUSH effect is executed as shown in FIG. 102 (a101). When the PUSH effect is executed, an image showing the push button 31B and a meter image showing the time limit for the pressing operation are displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, along with an image of the text "PUSH!!" Furthermore, during the PUSH effect, each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the PUSH effect, based on the brightness data table shown in FIG. 84.

As shown in FIG. 102 (a102), when push button 31B is pressed during a PUSH effect, the image indicating push button 31B, the meter image, and the text image of "PUSH!!" that were displayed in the center of the screen of image display device 5 disappear. In addition, when push button 31B is pressed, a PUSH sound is output from speakers 8L, 8R in a manner corresponding to the button being pressed. When push button 31B is pressed, game effect lamp 9 lights up or flashes in a manner corresponding to the button being pressed. In this example, all frame lamps light up at high brightness.

After that, as shown in FIG. 102 (a103), a specific character (in this example, Maid B (Jam-chan)) is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 together with a specific background (in this example, a starry sky background) as a background preview effect. Furthermore, during the background preview effect, the lamps included in the game effect lamps 9 are lit up in a manner corresponding to the background preview effect, based on the brightness data table shown in FIG. 68. In addition, sound effects are also output from speakers 8L, 8R in a manner corresponding to the background preview effect.

When a lamp notice is executed after the reach line effect, a PUSH effect is executed as shown in FIG. 103 (a111). When the PUSH effect is executed, an image showing the push button 31B and a meter image showing the time limit for which the push operation can be performed are displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, along with an image of the text "PUSH!!" Furthermore, during the PUSH effect, the lamps included in the game effect lamp 9 are lit up in a manner corresponding to the PUSH effect, based on the brightness data table shown in FIG. 84.

As shown in FIG. 103 (a112), when push button 31B is pressed during a PUSH effect, the image indicating push button 31B, the meter image, and the text image of "PUSH!!" that were displayed in the center of the screen of image display device 5 disappear. In addition, when push button 31B is pressed, a PUSH sound is output from speakers 8L, 8R in a manner corresponding to the button being pressed. When push button 31B is pressed, game effect lamp 9 lights up or flashes in a manner corresponding to the button being pressed. In this example, all frame lamps light up at high brightness.

After that, as shown in FIG. 103 (a113), a lamp preview is executed, and a specific lamp (such as a role lamp 9A) included in the game effect lamp 9 lights up or flashes. In addition, a performance sound is also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the performance of the lamp preview.

After the third display period of the group notice ends as shown in FIG. 100 (a42), or after the background notice shown in FIG. 102 (a103) or the lamp notice shown in FIG. 103 (a113) ends, the symbol forwarding effect is executed as shown in FIG. 104 to FIG. 108. The symbol forwarding effect is an effect that prompts the player to check whether the variably displayed decorative symbol (in this embodiment, the decorative symbol in the central decorative symbol display area 5C) will stop in the decorative symbol that has become a reach state, and whether the decorative symbol that stops is a decorative symbol that constitutes a jackpot symbol. During the symbol forwarding effect, each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 is lit in a manner corresponding to the symbol forwarding effect based on a predetermined brightness data table. In addition, a performance sound is also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the symbol forwarding effect.

As shown in FIG. 104 (a43), when the symbol advance performance starts, the variably displayed decorative symbol located in the central decorative symbol display area 5C is displayed large and begins to be variably displayed at a predetermined first speed (for example, a slow speed). At this time, the symbol advance performance starts from the same decorative symbol (i.e., the decorative symbol that constitutes a jackpot) as the decorative symbols located in the left and right decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R that are in a reach state, but the starting position is a position below and away from the decorative symbol that is in a reach state.

After that, as shown in Fig. 104 (a44) to Fig. 105 (a48), the decorative pattern in the middle continues to be variably displayed at a predetermined first speed (e.g., a slow speed). Then, as shown in Fig. 106 (a49) to Fig. 107 (a54), the speed of the variably displayed decorative pattern increases as the decorative pattern in the middle is variably displayed, and finally, as shown in Fig. 108 (a55) to (a57), the decorative pattern in the middle is variably displayed at a predetermined second speed (e.g., a speed faster than the first speed). As shown in Fig. 108 (a57), when the decorative pattern in the middle has been variably displayed for roughly two revolutions, the pattern advance performance ends.

After the symbol forwarding effect ends, as shown in Fig. 109 (a58) and (a59), the color of the image including the character image and the decorative symbol of "3" that has entered the reach state gradually turns white due to a performance effect called whiteout, and eventually the image including the character image and the decorative symbol of "3" that has entered the reach state becomes completely invisible. After that, as shown in Fig. 109 (a59), by gradually increasing the transparency of the entire screen on the front side that has turned white due to the whiteout, the performance image for the later change that was switched to on the back side appears on the screen.

(SP Reach First Half Presentation Mode)
With reference to Figures 110 to 118, the presentation pattern in the first half of the SP reach will be explained.

As shown in Fig. 110 (a61) and (a62), after the transition to the post-variation, a character animation is displayed until the title image of the SP Reach is displayed. The character may be a high-priority character such as the main character, or a character that appears in the SP Reach. As shown in Fig. 110 (a63), the title of the SP Reach is displayed. In this embodiment, the SP Reach is performed in which a maid character such as Yume-chan catches a Bakuchu, so the title "Catch a Bakuchu!" is displayed. During the first half of the SP Reach, the lamps included in the game effect lamp 9 are lit in a manner corresponding to the first half of the SP Reach based on a predetermined brightness data table. In addition, a performance sound is also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the first half of the SP Reach.

As shown in Figure 111 (c1), when the first half of the SP reach is performed, an image of Maid A (Yume Yume-chan) standing with her legs apart is displayed. After that, as shown in Figure 111 (c2), an image of the opposing character (enemy character), Bakuchu, looking surprised is displayed. After that, as shown in Figures 111 (c3) to 112 (c5), an animation of Maid A chasing a fleeing Bakuchu is displayed.

As shown in Figure 112 (c6), after an animation of Maid A jumping on the Bakuchu is displayed, if there is a miss (in the case of the fluctuation pattern of main fluctuation number 9), the presentation shown in Figure 113 (c11) will be displayed, if there is a jackpot (in the case of the fluctuation pattern of main fluctuation number 20), the presentation shown in Figure 115 (c21) will be displayed, and if there is a transition to the latter half of the SP reach (in the case of the fluctuation pattern of main fluctuation number 12, 23) or the final reach (in the case of the fluctuation pattern of main fluctuation number 15, 26), the presentation shown in Figure 118 (c31) will be displayed.

If a miss is confirmed in the first half of the SP Reach, the effect shown in FIG. 112(c6) is followed by the effect shown in FIG. 113(c11). In the effect shown in FIG. 113(c11), an image of Maid A looking depressed after not being able to catch the Bakuchu is displayed, and the missing symbol "4" stops as a decorative symbol located in the central decorative symbol display area 5C. After that, as shown in FIG. 113(c12), the color of the image including the character image and the missing decorative symbols "3", "4", and "3" gradually turns black due to a performance effect called blackout, and finally, as shown in FIG. 113(c13), the image including the character image and the missing decorative symbols "3", "4", and "3" completely disappears.

After that, as shown in Fig. 114 (c14) and (c15), as the transparency of the entire front screen that has turned black due to the blackout is gradually increased, the normal background effect image that was switched to on the back side becomes visible. Then, as shown in Fig. 114 (c16), the variable display of the decorative pattern stops completely, and the variable display of the small pattern 5M also stops completely, confirming the loss.

If a jackpot is confirmed in the first half of the SP reach, after the presentation shown in FIG. 112 (c6), the presentation will transition to that shown in FIG. 115 (c21). In the presentation shown in FIG. 115 (c21), an image of Maid A catching a Bakuchu and giving a peace sign is displayed, and the jackpot symbol "3" stops as a decorative symbol located in the central decorative symbol display area 5C.

After that, a fanfare effect is executed. In the fanfare effect, as shown in FIG. 115 (c22), the decorative pattern of "3", "3", and "3" gradually expands in stages, and as shown in FIG. 115 (c23), the decorative pattern is displayed so that it extends beyond the top of the screen. Then, as shown in FIG. 116 (c24) and (c25), an animation of the decorative pattern moving is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 116 (c26), the variable display of the decorative pattern stops completely, and the variable display of the small pattern 5M also stops completely, and the big win is confirmed.

After that, as shown in Fig. 117 (c27) to (c29), the face image of the main character, Maid A (Yume Yume-chan), is displayed large, and an animation of the words "FEVER!" appears.

When moving to the second half of the SP reach or the final reach, the effect shown in FIG. 112 (c6) is followed by the effect shown in FIG. 118 (c31). In the effect shown in FIG. 118 (c31), an image of maid A being depressed because she was unable to catch the Bakuchu is displayed, and the losing symbol "4" stops as a decorative symbol located in the decorative symbol display area 5C in the center. After that, as shown in FIG. 118 (c32), the color of the image including the character image and the losing decorative symbols "3", "4", and "3" gradually becomes black due to a blackout. Up to this point, the effect is the same as when the first half of the SP reach is a miss as shown in FIG. 113 (c11) and (c12). However, when moving to the second half of the SP reach or the final reach, as shown in FIG. 118 (c33), an effect is executed in which the movable body 32 falls, which did not occur when the first half of the SP reach is a miss.

After the effect of the movable body 32 falling is executed, if the game moves to the second half of the SP reach (in the case of the fluctuation pattern of main fluctuation numbers 12 and 23), the effect shown in FIG. 119 (c41) will be displayed, and if the game moves to the final reach (in the case of the fluctuation pattern of main fluctuation numbers 15 and 26), the effect shown in FIG. 126 (c71) will be displayed. In this way, the fluctuation patterns that result in a jackpot include a fluctuation pattern that initially appears to confirm a miss in the first half of the SP reach, and then transitions to the second half of the SP reach or the final reach. This allows the player to think that a miss is confirmed in the first half of the SP reach, and then transitions to the second half of the SP reach or the final reach through rescue, which can increase the excitement of the game.

(SP Reach Second Half Presentation Mode)
With reference to Figures 119 to 125, the presentation style in the latter half of the SP reach will be explained.

When moving to the second half of the SP reach, after the performance shown in FIG. 118 (c33), it transitions to the performance shown in FIG. 119 (c41). In the performance shown in FIG. 119 (c41), the character image and background image become completely invisible.

After that, as shown in FIG. 119 (c42), as the transparency of the entire front screen that has turned black due to the blackout is gradually increased, the image of the latter half of the SP Reach that was switched to on the rear side becomes visible. During the latter half of the SP Reach performance, the lamps included in the game effect lamps 9 light up in a manner corresponding to the latter half of the SP Reach based on a predetermined brightness data table. In addition, performance sounds are also output from speakers 8L, 8R in a manner corresponding to the latter half of the SP Reach.

As shown in Fig. 119 (c42), when the latter half of the SP reach is performed, an image is displayed of Maid A (Yume Yume-chan) and Maid B (Jam-chan) standing with their arms folded and declaring war on Bakuchu. After that, as shown in Fig. 119 (c43) to Fig. 120 (c45), an animation is displayed in which Maid A and Maid B chase after the fleeing Bakuchu.

As shown in Figure 119 (c46), after an animation of Maid A and Maid B jumping on the explosive chu is displayed, if there is a miss (in the case of the fluctuation pattern of main fluctuation number 12), the presentation shown in Figure 121 (c51) will be displayed, if there is a jackpot (in the case of the fluctuation pattern of main fluctuation number 23), the presentation shown in Figure 123 (c61) will be displayed, and if there is a transition to the final reach (in the case of the fluctuation pattern of main fluctuation number 15, 26), the presentation shown in Figure 126 (c71) will be displayed.

If a miss is confirmed in the latter half of the SP Reach, the effect shown in FIG. 120 (c46) is followed by the effect shown in FIG. 123 (c51). In the effect shown in FIG. 123 (c51), an image of Maid A and Maid B looking depressed after failing to catch the Bakuchu is displayed, and the missing symbol "4" stops as a decorative symbol located in the central decorative symbol display area 5C. After that, as shown in FIG. 121 (c52), the color of the image including the character image and the missing decorative symbols "3", "4", and "3" gradually turns black due to a blackout, and finally, as shown in FIG. 121 (c53), the image including the character image and the missing decorative symbols "3", "4", and "3" becomes completely invisible.

After that, as shown in Fig. 122 (c54) and (c55), the transparency of the entire front screen that has turned black due to the blackout is gradually increased, and the normal background effect image that was switched to on the back side becomes visible. Then, as shown in Fig. 122 (c56), the variable display of the decorative pattern stops completely, and the variable display of the small pattern 5M also stops completely, and a miss is confirmed.

If a jackpot is confirmed in the latter half of the SP reach, after the presentation shown in FIG. 120 (c46), the presentation will transition to that shown in FIG. 123 (c61). In the presentation shown in FIG. 123 (c61), an image of Maid A and Maid B catching Bakuchu and giving a peace sign is displayed, and the jackpot symbol "3" stops as a decorative symbol located in the central decorative symbol display area 5C.

After that, a fanfare effect is executed. In the fanfare effect, as shown in FIG. 123 (c62), the decorative pattern of "3", "3", and "3" gradually expands in stages, and as shown in FIG. 123 (c63), the decorative pattern is displayed so that it extends beyond the top of the screen. Then, as shown in FIG. 124 (c64) and (c65), an animation of the decorative pattern moving is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 124 (c66), the variable display of the decorative pattern stops completely, and the variable display of the small pattern 5M also stops completely, and the big win is confirmed.

After that, as shown in Figure 125 (c67) to (c69), the face image of the main character, Maid A (Yume Yume-chan), is displayed large, and an animation of the words "FEVER!" appears.

(Performance in the final reach)
With reference to Figures 126 to 136, the presentation mode in the final reach will be described.

When moving to the final reach, the effect shown in FIG. 126(c71) is displayed after the effect shown in FIG. 120(c46). When moving to the final reach, the entire screen suddenly goes black as shown in FIG. 126(c71), and a cross-shaped light effect is displayed in the center of the screen as shown in FIG. 126(c72). After that, as shown in FIG. 126(c73), an effect is executed to notify the start of the final reach, and the face image of the main character, Maid A (Yume Yume-chan), is displayed on the entire screen, along with a text image saying "Let's go!". The light effect display effect as shown in FIG. 126(c72) is intentionally inserted between the blackout effect shown in FIG. 126(c71) and the effect in which the face image of the main character is displayed as shown in FIG. 126(c73). This makes it easier for the player to understand that the final reach is about to develop by the effect shown in FIG. 126(c72).

After that, the final reach performance is executed. During the second half of the final reach performance, the lamps included in the game effect lamps 9 are lit in a manner corresponding to the second half of the final reach based on a predetermined brightness data table. In addition, performance sounds are also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the second half of the final reach.

As shown in Fig. 127 (c74), an image of Maid A giving a peace sign is displayed. After that, as shown in Fig. 127 (c75) to Fig. 127 (c78), images of one character are displayed at multiple timings, and as shown in Fig. 127 (c79), an image of the entire sentence is displayed to indicate the theme of the performance that will be executed in the final reach. In this example, it is displayed as "Everyone gather together."

After that, as shown in Figures 129 (c80) to 130 (c85), animations are displayed at multiple timings to introduce the characters that will appear in the final reach performance. For example, in this example, supporting characters appear in order, such as Maid F, Maid E, Maid D, Maid C, Maid B, and Maid A, and high priority characters such as the main character appear near the end (or in the latter half). Note that characters with high priority such as the main character may also appear in order. In other words, it is preferable for high priority characters such as the main character to appear at the beginning (or in the first half) or near the end (or in the second half) so that they stand out more than low priority characters such as supporting characters.

After that, as shown in Figure 131 (c86), when the final reach performance is executed, an image is displayed of the six characters who appeared in the six-person group preview standing with their arms around each other and declaring war on Bakuchu. After that, as shown in Figures 131 (c87) to 132 (c89), an animation is displayed in which the six characters chase after the fleeing Bakuchu.

As shown in Fig. 132 (c90), an animation of six characters chasing each other is displayed, and then, as shown in Fig. 132 (c91), a trigger effect is executed. When the trigger effect is executed, an image showing the stick controller 31A and a meter image showing the time limit for which the stick controller 31A can be operated are displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, along with an image of the text "GET BACK!!"

After the stick controller 31A is pulled during the trigger effect shown in FIG. 132 (c91), if there is a miss (in the case of the fluctuation pattern of main fluctuation number 15), the effect will transition to that shown in FIG. 133 (c101), and if there is a jackpot (in the case of the fluctuation pattern of main fluctuation number 26), the effect will transition to that shown in FIG. 134 (c111).

When a loss is confirmed in the final reach, the stick controller 31A is pulled during the trigger performance shown in FIG. 132 (c91), and then the performance shown in FIG. 133 (c101) is transitioned to. In the performance shown in FIG. 133 (c101), an image of six characters feeling down after failing to catch the Bakuchu is displayed, and the losing symbol "4" stops as a decorative symbol located in the central decorative symbol display area 5C. After that, as shown in FIG. 133 (c102), the color of the image including the character image and the losing decorative symbols "3", "4", and "3" gradually becomes black due to a blackout, and finally, as shown in FIG. 133 (c103), the image including the character image and the losing decorative symbols "3", "4", and "3" completely disappears.

After that, although not shown in the diagram, the transparency of the entire front screen, which has turned black due to the blackout, is gradually increased, and the normal background effect image that was switched to on the back side becomes visible. Then, the variable display of the decorative pattern stops completely, and the variable display of the small pattern 5M also stops completely, and the loss is confirmed.

If a jackpot is confirmed at the final reach, the presentation shown in FIG. 132 (c91) is followed by the presentation shown in FIG. 134 (c111). In the presentation shown in FIG. 134 (c111), an image of six characters catching Bakuchu is displayed, and the jackpot symbol "3" stops as a decorative symbol located in the central decorative symbol display area 5C.

After that, a fanfare effect is executed. In the fanfare effect, as shown in FIG. 134 (c112), the decorative pattern of "3", "3", and "3" gradually expands in stages, and as shown in FIG. 134 (c113), the decorative pattern is displayed so that it extends beyond the top of the screen. Then, as shown in FIG. 135 (c114) and (c115), an animation of the decorative pattern moving is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 135 (c116), the variable display of the decorative pattern stops completely, and the variable display of the small pattern 5M also stops completely, and the big win is confirmed.

After that, as shown in Figure 136 (c117) to (c119), the face image of the main character, Maid A (Yume Yume-chan), is displayed large, and an animation of the words "FEVER!" appears.

(Performance on Stage B)
The presentation on stage B will now be described with reference to Figures 137 to 157.

As shown in FIG. 137(b1), when the variable display starts based on one reserved memory, on the screen of the image display device 5, the decorative symbols are variably displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the fourth symbol 5J is variably displayed, and further, the small symbol 5M is variably displayed. On the screen, a background image including images of characters and scenery is displayed as the background during the variable display. In this embodiment, an image of Bakuchu is displayed as the character appearing on stage B. During the variable display, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the variable display, and the performance sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the variable display.

As shown in FIG. 137(b2), when the pseudo consecutive performance is performed and the character "x2" is displayed indicating that the second variable display will be performed, the second variable display will be performed as shown in FIG. 137(b3).

As shown in FIG. 137(b4), a pseudo consecutive performance is performed, and when the letters "x3" are displayed, indicating that a third variable display will be performed, as shown in FIG. 138(b5), a third variable display is performed. After that, as shown in FIG. 138(b6), when a "3" stops in the left decorative pattern display area 5L and also in the right decorative pattern display area 5R, the variable display mode becomes a reach mode.

As shown in FIG. 139(b7), a decorative pattern for the reach line effect is displayed to notify that the variable display mode has become the reach mode. As shown in FIG. 139(b8), the reach line effect starts. At this time, a flash of light appears from the center of the screen of the image display device 5. During the reach line effect, the lamps included in the game effect lamp 9 are lit in a mode corresponding to the reach line effect based on the brightness data table shown in FIG. 69 to FIG. 75. Note that the brightness data table shown in FIG. 69 to FIG. 75 is the same as the brightness data table used in the reach line effect of stage A. In the state shown in FIG. 139(b8), all the lamps included in the frame lamp are lit at high brightness. Note that during the reach line effect, a performance sound corresponding to the reach line effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

As shown in Figure 139 (b9), the decorative design in the center of the screen begins to rotate left and right, and the flashes of light get larger.

As shown in FIG. 140 (b10), the decorative pattern in the center of the screen continues to rotate left and right, the flash of light gets larger, and a reach line appears in the center of the screen. The reach line is a line of light (ray) connecting the left and right decorative patterns that make up the reach state, and is colored a specific color such as blue or red. The display of the reach line can indicate to the player that the state of the variable display has become a reach state, or that it will become a reach state. The reach line that appears in stage B may be the same as the reach line that appears in stage A, or may be different in color, shape, size, etc., for example.

As shown in FIG. 140 (b11), the decorative symbol in the center of the screen continues to rotate left and right, the flash of light gets larger, and the reach line in the center of the screen begins to extend left and right (outside) of the screen. As shown in FIG. 140 (b12), the decorative symbol in the center of the screen returns to its original position, and the reach line in the center of the screen extends further left and right (outside) of the screen. As shown in FIG. 140, during the reach line performance, the frame left lamps 9L6, 9L7, 9R6, and 9R7 located on the left and right of the screen light up at high brightness.

As shown in FIG. 141 (b13), the decorative pattern in the center of the screen gradually expands in stages, and the reach line in the center of the screen extends left and right (outside) of the screen. As shown in FIG. 141 (b14), the decorative pattern in the center of the screen expands further, and the reach line in the center of the screen extends further left and right (outside) of the screen. As shown in FIG. 141 (b15), the decorative pattern in the center of the screen expands further, and the reach line in the center of the screen extends further left and right (outside) of the screen. As shown in FIG. 141, during the reach line, the frame left lamps 9L6, 9L7, 9R6, and 9R7 located on the left and right of the screen are lit up at high brightness.

As shown in Figure 142 (b16), the decorative pattern in the center of the screen now gradually shrinks in stages, and the reach line in the center of the screen begins to shrink left and right (inward) of the screen. As shown in Figure 142 (b17), the decorative pattern in the center of the screen shrinks further, and the reach line in the center of the screen shrinks further left and right (inward) of the screen, stopping in its original position. At this time, the frame left lamps 9L6, 9L7, 9R6, and 9R7 located on the left and right of the screen light up with high brightness. After that, as shown in Figure 142 (b18), the reach line in the center of the screen disappears. At this time, the game effect lamp 9 also goes out.

After the reach line effect ends as shown in FIG. 142 (b18), the symbol forwarding effect is executed as shown in FIG. 143 to FIG. 147. During the symbol forwarding effect, the lamps included in the game effect lamps 9 are lit in a manner corresponding to the symbol forwarding effect based on a predetermined brightness data table. In addition, effect sounds are also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the symbol forwarding effect.

As shown in FIG. 143 (b19), when the symbol advance performance starts, the variably displayed decorative symbol located in the central decorative symbol display area 5C is displayed large and begins to be variably displayed at a predetermined first speed (for example, a slow speed). At this time, the symbol advance performance starts from the same decorative symbol (i.e., the decorative symbol that constitutes a jackpot) as the decorative symbols located in the left and right decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R that are in a reach state, but the starting position is a position below and away from the decorative symbol that is in a reach state.

After that, as shown in FIG. 143(b20) to FIG. 144(b24), the decorative pattern in the middle continues to be variably displayed at a predetermined first speed (e.g., a slow speed). Then, as shown in FIG. 145(b25) to FIG. 146(b30), the speed of the variably displayed decorative pattern increases as the decorative pattern in the middle is variably displayed, and finally, as shown in FIG. 147(b31) to (b33), the decorative pattern in the middle is variably displayed at a predetermined second speed (e.g., a speed faster than the first speed). As shown in FIG. 147(b33), when the decorative pattern in the middle has been variably displayed for roughly two revolutions, the pattern advance performance ends.

After the symbol forwarding effect has ended, as shown in Fig. 148 (b34) and (b35), the color of the image including the character image and the decorative symbol of "3" that has entered the reach state gradually turns white due to whiteout, and eventually the image including the character image and the decorative symbol of "3" that has entered the reach state becomes completely invisible. After that, as shown in Fig. 148 (b36), by gradually increasing the transparency of the entire screen on the front side that has turned white due to whiteout, the effect image for the later change that was switched to on the back side appears on the screen.

As shown in Figures 149 (b37) and (b38), after the transition to post-variation, character animation is displayed until the title image of the SP Reach is displayed. The character in question may be a high-priority character such as the main character, or it may be a character that appears in the SP Reach. As shown in Figure 149 (b39), the title of the SP Reach ("Catch the Bakuchu!") is displayed. During the performance of the first half of the SP Reach, each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the first half of the SP Reach based on a predetermined brightness data table. In addition, performance sounds are also output from speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the first half of the SP Reach.

In stage B, a group notice (for example, a Bakuchu notice or a Boingo group notice) is executed during the period when the title display of the first half of the SP reach of the later change is being performed. For example, when a Bakuchu group notice is executed during the period when the title display of the first half of the SP reach is being performed, a PUSH performance is executed as shown in FIG. 150 (b40). When a PUSH performance is executed, an image showing the push button 31B and a meter image showing the time limit during which the push operation can be performed are displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, and a character image of "PUSH!!" is displayed. Furthermore, during a PUSH performance, each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 is lit in a manner corresponding to the PUSH performance based on the brightness data table shown in FIG. 84. For example, during a PUSH performance, the stick controller lamp 9J and the trigger button lamp 9K are lit or flash. Note that during a PUSH performance, a sound effect urging the player to press the push button 31B may be output from the speakers 8L and 8R. In this way, in the PUSH presentation, the player is prompted to press the push button 31B by an image display, a lit or blinking lamp, or a sound.

As shown in FIG. 150 (b41), when the push button 31B is pressed during a PUSH effect, the image showing the push button 31B, the meter image, and the text image "PUSH!!" that were displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5 disappear. When the push button 31B is pressed, a PUSH sound is output from the speakers 8L, 8R in a manner corresponding to the button being pressed. The output of the PUSH sound allows the player to recognize that the push button 31B has been effectively pressed during the PUSH effect. The output of the PUSH sound from the speakers 8L, 8R ends before the group preview effect (in this example, the Bakuchu group preview) begins. When the push button 31B is pressed, the game effect lamp 9 lights up or flashes in a manner corresponding to the button being pressed. In this example, all the frame lamps light up at high brightness.

As shown in FIG. 150 (b42), the display on the screen of the image display device 5 temporarily returns to displaying the normal background image, and the game effect lamp 9 lights up or flashes in a manner corresponding to the background.

As shown in FIG. 151 (b43), the Bakuchu group announcement starts, but before the character appears, the game effect lamp 9 goes out. This draws the player's attention to the fact that the group announcement performance is about to be performed.

As shown in FIG. 151 (b44), the first character appears in the first display period. Note that the state shown in FIG. 151 (b44) represents a first situation in which the entirety of the character displayed first is not yet displayed, but part of the character displayed first (part of the face in this example) is displayed.

When the Bakuchu group preview is being performed, the lamps included in the game effect lamp 9 light up in a manner that corresponds to the group preview performance, based on the brightness data table shown in Figures 62 to 68. For example, in the first display period shown in Figures 151 to 153, the frame right lamps 9R5 to 9R8 located near where the character appears in the group preview start to light up at high brightness, and then the location of the lamps that are lit at high brightness moves in accordance with the direction the character is moving.

During the group preview performance, a performance sound corresponding to the group preview performance is output from speakers 8L and 8R. As shown in FIG. 59, the volume of the performance sound corresponding to the group preview performance starts to be output at a timing related to the start of the first display period, the volume of the performance sound is increased to a specific volume during the first display period, the volume of the performance sound is maintained at the specific volume during the second display period, and the volume of the performance sound is decreased during the third display period. When the group preview performance starts, a start sound indicating the start of the group preview performance is output from speakers 8L and 8R separately from the performance sound corresponding to the group preview performance, but the output of the start sound stops by the time the second character appears.

As shown in FIG. 151 (b45), the second character appears shortly after the first character appears. Note that the state shown in FIG. 151 (b45) represents a second situation in which the first character is not yet entirely displayed, but part of the first character is displayed in a manner similar to that shown in the first situation, and the second character is not yet entirely displayed, but part of the second character is displayed (in this example, part of the face).

As shown in Figure 152 (b46) to (b48), characters appear one after another, and an animation of them running from the left side of the screen to the right side is displayed. Note that the display area on the screen used in the group preview performance is larger than the display area for "Catch the Bakuchu!" in the SP first half title preview performance.

As shown in FIG. 153 (b49), the characters continue to progress, and eventually the first displayed character running in the lead (in the lead) reaches the left edge of the screen. As shown in FIG. 153 (b50), the first displayed character running in the lead (in the lead) begins to disappear from the left edge of the screen. As shown in FIG. 153 (b51), the first displayed character running in the lead is the first to disappear from the left edge of the screen. This ends the first display period.

As shown in FIG. 154 (b52), during the second display period, an animation is displayed in which characters appear one after another and run from the left side of the screen to the right side. During the second display period shown in FIG. 154 and FIG. 155, the frame lamps are lit sparsely with high brightness in accordance with the way the characters advance in a group in the group preview performance. This causes the frame lamps to light up or flash in accordance with the animation display of the characters forming a group and running through. In addition, the performance sound corresponding to the group preview output from speakers 8L, 8R includes, for example, footsteps in accordance with the animation display of the characters running through. After that, as shown in FIG. 154 (b52) to FIG. 155 (b57), an animation is displayed in which characters appear one after another and run from the left side of the screen to the right side.

When the characters run in a group from the left side of the screen to the right side, they cover the entire screen, making it difficult or impossible for the player to see the title display "Catch the Bakuchu!".

As shown in FIG. 156 (b58), in the third display period, the last character appears and an animation of the last character running from the left side of the screen to the right side with the other characters is displayed. Note that no new characters appear in the third display period. In the third display period, as shown in FIG. 156 and FIG. 157, in line with the performance in which the characters disappear to the left edge of the screen in the group preview, the frame lamps also change position from the right side to the left side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, either turned off or lit at a low brightness. Note that, as shown in FIG. 156 (b58), when the third display period begins, all of the game effect lamps 9 are temporarily lit at a high brightness.

As shown in FIG. 156 (b59), the frame lamps begin to go out as the character disappears to the left edge of the screen. In the example shown in FIG. 156 (b59), some of the right frame lamps 9R are out because no characters are displayed in the right half of the screen. As shown in FIG. 156 (b60), the number of right frame lamps 9R that are out increases as the character continues to disappear to the left edge of the screen.

As shown in FIG. 156, as the characters disappear to the left edge of the screen, the title display "Catch a Bakuchu!" gradually reappears in stages. At this time, if the SP first half title preview lottery is won, the display mode (e.g., color, pattern, shape, etc.) of the title display "Catch a Bakuchu!" changes, and the SP first half title preview is performed. For example, as shown in FIG. 149 (b39), before the Bakuchu group preview is executed, the text "Catch a Bakuchu!" in the title display in the first half of the SP reach is white, but as shown in FIG. 155 (b56), when the character image in the group preview is displayed on the layer in front of the layer in which the title display is being performed, the title display becomes difficult to see or becomes invisible. While the entire screen is covered by the character images in the group preview, the text "Catch the Bakuchu!" in the title display turns red, and as the characters in the group preview disappear to the left edge of the screen, the red title display gradually appears in stages, as shown in Figures 156 (b59) and (b60).

As shown in Figures 157 (b61) and (b62), the number of game effect lamps 9 that are turned off increases as the characters gradually disappear in stages. As shown in Figure 157 (b63), when the last character disappears, the group preview performance ends. After that, the performance transitions to the first half of the SP reach, as shown in Figure 111 (c1).

(Boingo Group Trailer)
The presentation of the Boingo Group announcement will be described with reference to Figures 158 to 167.

In the 6-person group preview and Bakuchu group preview mentioned above, multiple characters progress in groups from the right edge of the screen to the left edge. In this way, the 6-person group preview and Bakuchu group preview are presentations in which the characters progress in the X-axis direction on the X-Y plane shown in Figure 50. On the other hand, the Boingo group preview allows the character (Boingo) to move in the Z-axis direction of the screen as well. In other words, the Boingo group preview is a 3D presentation in which the character progresses in a three-dimensional, X-Y-Z space.

Figures 158 to 163 are diagrams for explaining the presentation mode when the Boingo Group Pre-Announcement is executed on Stage A. Note that when the Boingo Group is executed on Stage B, the presentation mode is the same as that shown in Figures 158 to 163. Also, although not shown, the Boingo Group Pre-Announcement performance also has a first display period, second display period, and third display period, just like the 6-person Group Pre-Announcement performance and the Bakuchu Group Pre-Announcement performance.

As shown in FIG. 158 (d1), the Boingo Swarm Prediction starts, but before the characters appear, the game effect lamp 9 goes out. This draws the player's attention to the upcoming execution of the Swarm Prediction performance.

When the Boingo Group Preview is being performed, for example, based on the brightness data tables shown in Figures 62 to 68, the lamps included in the game effect lamp 9 light up in a manner corresponding to the group preview performance. For example, the frame right lamps 9R5 to 9R8 located near the location where the characters appear in the group preview start to light up at high brightness, and then the location of the lamps that light up at high brightness moves in the direction the characters move in. Also, in the group preview performance, the frame lamps light up sparsely at high brightness in accordance with the way the characters move forward in a group. This allows the frame lamps to light up or flash in accordance with the animation display of the characters running through in a group. Also, the performance sounds corresponding to the group preview output from speakers 8L, 8R include, for example, footsteps in accordance with the animation display of the characters running through.

As shown in FIG. 158 (d2), a preliminary image with light effects is displayed as a prelude before a character (Boingo) appears at a specific position on the screen. The specific position is a group appearance point where a group of characters appears. After that, as shown in FIG. 158 (d3), the first character appears from the specific position that has been made difficult to see by the preliminary image with light effects.

After that, as shown in Fig. 159 (d4) and (d5), the second and third characters appear, and an animation is displayed in which each character gradually progresses toward the screen in stages. As shown in Fig. 159 (d6), as the first character displayed (the first character) is enlarged, the specific position where the character appears becomes difficult to see or cannot be seen due to the first character.

After that, as shown in Fig. 160 (d7) to (d9), the characters move in groups from the depth of the screen to the front, so that the entire screen is covered with characters. As shown in Fig. 161 (d10) to (d12), the last character appears and moves from the depth of the screen to the front.

After that, as shown in Fig. 162 (d13) and (d14), the last character moves from the depth of the screen to the front, covering most of the screen. Then, as shown in Fig. 162 (d15), the last character is enlarged and displayed over a range from one end of the screen to the other, until the entire screen is covered by the last character.

After that, as shown in Figures 163 (d16) and (d17), the original background image is displayed as the last character disappears from the screen, and as shown in 153 (d18), the group preview performance ends when the last character disappears.

Figure 164 is a diagram for explaining the details of the Boingo Group Notice. Figures 164 (A) to (F) correspond to Figures 158 (d3) to 159 (d6), 160 (d8), and (d9), respectively.

As shown in Figure 164 (A), the first character appears from the group emergence point, and as shown in Figures 164 (B) to (F), characters appear one after another from the group emergence points. Here, as the first character displayed (the first character) is enlarged, the specific position where the characters appear becomes difficult to see or cannot be seen due to the first character. For this reason, as shown in Figures 164 (E) and (F), even if a subsequent character image is placed in a position hidden by the first character, it will not be visible, so there is no need to place the subsequent character image.

Now, with reference to Figures 165 and 166, a comparative example of the Boingo swarm announcement will be compared with the Boingo swarm announcement according to this embodiment. In the comparative example shown in Figure 165, a character (Boingo) appears at a specific position on the screen (the swarm appearance point), but a prelude image with a light effect as shown in Figure 158 (d2) is not displayed. For this reason, in order to eliminate the sense of incongruity caused by the character suddenly appearing large, an animation must be created in which the character is displayed small and then gradually becomes larger in stages, as shown in Figures 165 and 166.

In the comparative example, the character must go through animation displays as shown in Fig. 165 (d101) to Fig. 166 (d105) before it can be displayed at the size shown in Fig. 158 (d3) as shown in Fig. 166 (d106), which takes extra time and requires the creation of images for the animation. In contrast, in the case of this embodiment, as shown in Figs. 158 (d2) and (d3), a pre-image with a light effect is displayed as a pre-image before the character appears, and by displaying the first character from a specific position that is difficult to see due to the display of the pre-image with this light effect, the character can be displayed from the beginning at a certain size (the size shown in Fig. 158 (d3) or Fig. 166 (d106)).

(A variation of the Boingo Group preview)
FIG. 167 is a diagram for explaining the performance mode when the Boingo group preview according to the modified example is executed. The example shown in FIG. 167 may be replaced with the example shown in FIG. 163. For example, as shown in FIG. 167 (d101) to (d103), the title image of the first half of the SP may be displayed as the last displayed character disappears. That is, as shown in FIG. 158 (d1), while the entire screen is covered by the character image in the group preview performance on the layer on the front side of the layer on which the image of the normal background is displayed, as shown in FIG. 167 (d103), the image of the normal background may be switched to the title image of the first half of the SP. In this way, the group preview performance may be executed during the execution of the preview performance such as the SP first half title preview performance.

The title image in the first half of the SP in the Boingo Group Preview may also be displayed in a different way to predict a big win, as shown in FIG. 157. Also, instead of the final character being enlarged to cover the entire screen, the background image used in the group preview performance may be animated to roll up like a scroll, switching to the next performance.

(Dog Pack Announcement)
The presentation of the dog pack announcement will be described with reference to Figures 168 to 170.

In this embodiment, the six-person group announcement, the Bakuchu announcement, and the Boingo group announcement are exemplified as group announcement effects, but the pachinko gaming machine 1 may also execute a group announcement effect called a dog group announcement, as shown in Figures 168 to 170.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 168(e1), the first character is displayed, and then, as shown in FIG. 168(e2), multiple dog characters appear one after another, until the screen area is covered by the characters, as shown in FIG. 168(e3).

After that, as shown in Figures 169 (e4) to (e6), the title image of the first half of the SP is displayed as the last character displayed disappears. That is, as shown in Figure 168 (e3), while the entire screen is covered by character images in the group preview performance on the layer in front of the layer displaying the normal background image, as shown in Figure 168 (e6), the normal background image is switched to the title image of the first half of the SP. Then, on the screen after the multiple characters located at the very end have passed, the title image of the first half of the SP, which corresponds to the performance of the first half of the SP reach, is displayed.

In addition, the title image in the first half of the SP in the dog pack prediction may predict a jackpot by changing the display mode as shown in FIG. 157.

As shown in FIG. 170, when comparing the six-person group forecast and the dog group forecast, the distance X2 between the first and last characters displayed in the dog group forecast (the length between them on the X-axis) is shorter than the distance X1 between the first and last characters displayed in the six-person group forecast (the length between them on the X-axis). Also, since the execution time is the same or approximately the same for both, the speed V2 at which the characters advance in the dog group forecast is slower than the speed V1 at which the characters advance in the six-person group forecast. Furthermore, the density D2 of multiple characters in the dog group forecast is greater than the density D1 of multiple characters in the six-person group forecast. Also, the dog group forecast performance has a higher expectation (reliability) of a jackpot than the six-person group forecast performance, and the dog group forecast performance has a lower appearance rate (execution probability) than the six-person group forecast performance.

(Execution of group preview performance during reach line performance)
With reference to Figures 171 and 172, we will explain the presentation mode when a group preview presentation is executed during a reach line.

As shown in FIG. 171 (f1), when a reach line effect is executed, a group preview effect is executed as shown in FIG. 171 (f2) to (f4), and then a symbol advance effect is executed as shown in FIG. 172 (f5) and (f6).

[Main components and effects]
Below, the technical effects obtained by the various configurations of the pachinko gaming machine 1 are listed individually.

(1-1) A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is favorable to a player when the display result of a variable display becomes a specific display result,
A group performance execution means (for example, a group preview performance) for executing a group performance that displays an image of a group of multiple characters proceeding (for example, the group preview execution process shown in FIG. 47, the six-person group preview performance shown in FIG. 94 to FIG. 100);
a congratulatory effect execution means (for example, a process for executing a fanfare effect by the effect control CPU 120) for executing a congratulatory effect (for example, a fanfare effect) for displaying an image for congratulating the fact that the display result of the variable display has become the specific display result;
The display period of the image in the group performance includes a first display period, a second display period, and a third display period (for example, the period shown in FIG. 59 ),
The first display period is a period from when the display of the first character in the group performance begins, when a new character is displayed, until the display of any character ends first (for example, the period shown in FIG. 94 (a23) to FIG. 96 (a30)),
The second display period is a period longer than the first display period, during which a state in which a new character is displayed and the display of a currently displayed character is terminated continues (for example, the period shown in FIG. 97 (a31) to FIG. 98 (a36)),
The third display period is a period during which the display of the currently displayed character is terminated without any new display of the character (for example, the period shown in FIG. 99 (a37) to FIG. 100 (a42)),
The celebration performance can be executed after the group performance (for example, the fanfare performance shown in FIG. 115 to FIG. 117 is executed after the six-person group notice performance shown in FIG. 94 to FIG. 100 is executed),
When the display result of the variable display is suggested to be a failure display result different from the specific display result (for example, in the case of the variable pattern of variable number 9), during a first predetermined period from the start of the variable display to the suggestion that the variable display is the failure display result (for example, the period T1 + T2 shown in Figure 60), the first display period starts in the latter half of the first predetermined period (for example, the examples shown in Figures 60 and 61),
When the display result of the variable display is suggested to be the specific display result (for example, in the case of the variation patterns of variation numbers 20, 23, and 26), in a second specified period from the start of the variable display to the time when it is suggested that the variable display is the specific display result (for example, the period T3+T4, the period T5+T6, or the period T7+T8), the first display period starts in the first half of the second specified period (for example, the examples shown in Figures 60 and 61).

In this way, in the group preview performance, the second display period during which characters appear one after another is designed to be longer than the first display period from when the character display first starts to when the character display first ends, thereby providing a suitable group preview performance. Also, while the sense of elation may fade over time until the result of the variable display is determined, in the case of a variation pattern in which the result of the variable display is a losing display result, the sense of elation can be sustained or reawakened by executing the group preview performance in the latter half of the variable display time. On the other hand, in the case of a variation pattern in which the result of the variable display is a winning display result, a fanfare performance, which is a celebration performance, is executed, so that a sense of elation can be provided by executing the group preview performance in the first half of the variable display time, and even if the sense of elation fades over time, the sense of elation can be sustained or reawakened by the celebration performance.

The "specific display result" is a display result that can be controlled to an advantageous state based on the display result of the variable display becoming the specific display result. In other words, even if the specific display result is derived, it is a display result for controlling the game state to an advantageous state. In this embodiment, a jackpot occurs when the combination of lighting modes in the special chart 1 variable display unit 9021 of the special chart LED board 9020 becomes a combination of lighting modes corresponding to a jackpot, and the combination of lighting modes corresponding to the jackpot becomes the specific display result. Also, a jackpot occurs when the combination of lighting modes in the special chart 2 variable display unit 9022 of the special chart LED board 9020 becomes a combination of lighting modes corresponding to a jackpot, and the combination of lighting modes corresponding to the jackpot becomes the specific display result. Furthermore, a jackpot occurs when the decorative pattern variably displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5 becomes a specific special pattern (for example, a jackpot pattern combination such as "3, 3, 3" or "7, 7, 7") and stops, and the display of the specific special pattern becomes the specific display result.

A "missing display result" is a display result that is different from the specific display result, and is a display result that is not controlled to an advantageous state based on the fact that the display result of the variable display has become the missing display result. In other words, even if a missing display result is derived, it is a display result that does not control the game state to an advantageous state. In this embodiment, when the combination of lighting modes in the special chart 1 variable display unit 9021 of the special chart LED board 9020 becomes a combination of lighting modes corresponding to a miss, the result of the game becomes a miss, and the combination of lighting modes corresponding to the miss becomes the missing display result. Also, when the combination of lighting modes in the special chart 2 variable display unit 9022 of the special chart LED board 9020 becomes a combination of lighting modes corresponding to a miss, the result of the game becomes a miss, and the combination of lighting modes corresponding to the miss becomes the missing display result. Furthermore, when the decorative patterns variably displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5 stop as a specific predetermined pattern (for example, a losing pattern combination such as "3, 2, 3"), the result of the game is a loss, and the display of the predetermined pattern becomes a losing display result.

An "advantageous state" is a state that is advantageous to the player, and is a gaming state in which the gaming value imparting rate (for example, the payout rate of gaming balls) is controlled to be equal to or greater than 1. In this embodiment, examples of advantageous states include a jackpot gaming state that is controlled when normal jackpots 1 and 2 and special jackpots 1 to 9 occur. The advantageous state may also be a small jackpot gaming state that is controlled when a small jackpot occurs, or it may be a special jackpot state or a time-saving state.

The "new display of a character" may be the same type of character as the character first displayed in the group preview performance, or it may be a different type of character than the character first displayed in the group preview performance.

A "congratulatory effect" is an effect that displays an image to congratulate the player that the display result of the variable display has become a specific display result, and is also an effect that displays an image to congratulate the player that the display result of the variable display has become a specific display result and will be controlled to an advantageous state based on that. "Congratulating" includes suggesting or informing the player that the display result of the variable display has become a specific display result or that it will be controlled to an advantageous state. "Congratulating" also includes increasing the player's anticipation of the advantageous state by suggesting or informing the player that the display result of the variable display has become a specific display result or that it will be controlled to an advantageous state. For example, the congratulatory performance includes displaying an image that suggests or informs the player that the combination of lighting modes in the special chart 1 variable display section 9021 of the special chart LED board 9020 has become a combination of lighting modes corresponding to a jackpot, that the combination of lighting modes in the special chart 2 variable display section 9022 of the special chart LED board 9020 has become a combination of lighting modes corresponding to a jackpot, or that the decorative patterns variably displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5 have become a specific special pattern (jackpot pattern), or that the game is controlled to a jackpot game state.

"The congratulatory performance can be executed after the group performance" includes a group preview performance being executed within a variable display based on one reserved memory, and then a congratulatory performance being executed within the variable display based on that one reserved memory. Also, "The congratulatory performance can be executed after the group performance" includes when a group preview performance is executed as a look-ahead performance that suggests or predicts that the display result of the variable display based on one reserved memory will be a specific display result before the display result of the variable display based on that one reserved memory is started, the group preview performance is executed, and then the variable display based on that one reserved memory is started and a congratulatory performance is executed within the variable display based on that one reserved memory.

The "first predetermined period" is the period from when the variable display starts until it is suggested that the display result of the variable display is a losing display result, and in this embodiment, it is exemplified by the period T1 + T2 shown in Figures 60 and 61. "It is suggested that the display result of the variable display is a losing display result" includes the combination of lighting modes in the special chart 1 variable display section 9021 of the special chart LED board 9020 becoming a combination of lighting modes corresponding to a loss, the combination of lighting modes in the special chart 2 variable display section 9022 of the special chart LED board 9020 corresponding to a jackpot becoming a combination of lighting modes corresponding to a loss, and the decorative patterns variably displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R of the image display device 5 becoming a specific predetermined pattern (losing pattern combination) and stopping. In addition, if the movable body 32 does not move at a specific timing when the display result of the variable display is a losing display result, but moves at a specific timing when the display result of the variable display is a winning display result, "suggesting that the display result of the variable display is a losing display result" includes suggesting or informing the player that the display result of the variable display is a losing display result by the movable body 32 not moving at the specific timing. Note that the specific timing may be a timing when an effect is performed that prompts the player to operate the operating means, such as the above-mentioned PUSH effect, and the movable body 32 moves when a jackpot is hit by the player operating the operating means.

The "second predetermined period" is the period from the start of the variable display until the display result of the variable display is suggested to be a specific display result, and in this embodiment, is exemplified by the periods T3+T4, T5+T6, and T7+T8 shown in Figures 60 and 61. "Suggestion that the display result of the variable display is a specific display result" includes the combination of lighting modes in the special chart 1 variable display section 9021 of the special chart LED board 9020 becoming a combination of lighting modes corresponding to a jackpot, the combination of lighting modes in the special chart 2 variable display section 9022 of the special chart LED board 9020 becoming a combination of lighting modes corresponding to a jackpot, and the decorative patterns variably displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5 becoming and stopping as a specific special pattern (a jackpot pattern combination). In addition, if the movable body 32 does not move at a specific timing when the display result of the variable display is a losing display result, but moves at a specific timing when the display result of the variable display is a winning display result, "suggesting that the display result of the variable display is a specific display result" includes suggesting or informing the player that the display result of the variable display is a specific display result by the movable body 32 moving at the specific timing. Note that the specific timing may be a timing when an effect is performed that prompts the player to operate the operating means, such as the above-mentioned PUSH effect, and the movable body 32 moves when the player operates the operating means to hit the jackpot.

(1-2) The second display period is longer than each of the first display period and the third display period, and the third display period is longer than the first display period (for example, each display period shown in FIG. 59).

As a result, by making the second display period during which characters appear one after another in the group preview performance the longest period, the group preview performance can be made more powerful. Furthermore, by making the first display period from when the first character appears to when the first character leaves the shortest period, it is possible to prevent the group preview performance that is suddenly executed from becoming boring.

(1-3) The character that is displayed first during the first display period is a character with a high priority in the content of the gaming machine (for example, Yume Yume, the main character).

As a result, the first character to appear in the group preview performance is a high priority character such as the protagonist, and is a character that the player is familiar with, but then characters that appear less frequently than the protagonist in other performances appear in the group preview performance, giving the player a surprise about the group preview performance or making the player feel that it is a rare performance, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

"High priority characters" include the main character and characters other than the main character who appear in the content used in the pachinko gaming machine 1 that have the highest priority, and also include characters that appear more frequently (number of times) in the performances executed in the pachinko gaming machine 1 than other characters.

(1-4) When the display result of the variable display is suggested to be the specific display result (for example, in the case of the variation patterns of variation numbers 20, 23, and 26), the timing at which the display of the characters first starts in the group performance is close to the halfway point of the second specified period within the first half of the second specified period (for example, the examples shown in Figures 60 and 61).

As a result, in the case of a variable pattern in which the result of the variable display is a winning display result, even if the group preview performance is executed in the first half of the variable display time, the group preview performance can be executed near the latter half of that first half, so that the aftertaste of the group preview performance can be extended even a little later.

(1-5) A pattern suggesting that the display result of the variable display is the specific display result (for example, a variable pattern of variable numbers 20, 23, and 26) includes a rescue pattern (for example, a variable pattern of variable numbers 23 and 26) in which the display result of the variable display is made to look like the failure display result, and then the variable display result becomes the specific display result,
Even in the rescue pattern, during the second specified period from when the variable display starts until it is suggested that the variable display is the specific display result, the first display period starts in the first half of the second specified period (for example, the examples shown in Figures 60 and 61).

As a result, even in the case of a rescue pattern in which the display result of the variable display appears to be a losing display result and then the display result of the variable display becomes a winning display result, a fanfare effect, which is a celebratory effect, is executed, so that a sense of elation is created by executing the group preview effect in the first half of the variable display time, and even if the sense of elation fades over time, the sense of elation can be maintained or rekindled by the celebratory effect.

(1-6) In a pattern that suggests that the display result of the variable display is the aforementioned failure display result (for example, the fluctuation pattern of main fluctuation numbers 9, 12, 15) and a pattern that suggests that the display result of the variable display is the aforementioned specific display result (for example, the fluctuation pattern of main fluctuation numbers 20, 23, 26), a common display is performed until it is suggested that the display result of the variable display is the aforementioned failure display result or the aforementioned specific display result (for example, the examples shown in Figures 87 to 136).

As a result, for example, a common presentation is executed between the variation pattern of variation number 9 and the variation pattern of variation number 20 until the display result is determined, a common presentation is executed between the variation pattern of variation number 12 and the variation pattern of variation number 23 until the display result is determined, and further, a common presentation is executed between the variation pattern of variation number 15 and the variation pattern of variation number 26 until the display result is determined, so that the player can be drawn to the fact that a group preview presentation is being executed while a common presentation is being executed.

In addition, a pattern that suggests that the display result of the variable display is the losing display result (for example, a fluctuation pattern of main variable numbers 9, 12, 15) and a pattern that suggests that the display result of the variable display is the specific display result (for example, a fluctuation pattern of main variable numbers 20, 23, 26) may be displayed differently until it is suggested that the display result of the variable display is the losing display result or the specific display result.

This allows players to focus on the fact that a group preview effect is being performed while different effects are being performed.

(1-7) The execution period of the group performance may overlap with the execution period of a preview performance (for example, a preview performance of the first half of the special program title) that is a performance different from the group preview and that predicts that the display result of the variable display will be the specific display result.
The preview performance ends after the third display period ends,
The display in the group performance has a larger display area than the display in the preview performance (for example, the examples shown in Figures 151 to 157).

This allows the player to see the SP first half title preview performance even if a group preview performance is executed while a preview performance such as the SP first half title preview performance is being executed.

(1-8) While the preview performance is being performed, the group performance is executed (for example, the examples shown in Figures 151 to 157).

This allows players to focus on the fact that a group preview performance will be executed when a preview performance such as the SP first half title preview performance is being executed. Note that a preview performance such as the SP first half title preview performance and a group preview performance will not start execution at the same time.

(1-9) When the group performance is executed, the probability that the display result of the variable display will be the specific display result is higher than when the preview performance is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 30, the group preview is more reliable than the SP first half title preview).

As a result, other preview effects that have a lower expectation of a jackpot than the group preview effect are not displayed in the foreground layer, which has a higher priority than the group preview effect, so that a jackpot can be appropriately hinted to the player. In this way, in this embodiment, effects with a low expectation of a jackpot are not overlaid on top of effects with a high expectation of a jackpot.

(1-12) While the group performance is being performed, the brightness of both the background display and the display in the preview performance is reduced, but the brightness of the display of information related to the game (for example, the fourth pattern 5J and small pattern 5M indicating the first and second reserved memory counts, and the first reserved memory display area 5D, second reserved memory display area 5U, and active display area 5A) is not reduced.

As a result, when a group preview performance is executed, the brightness of the background display and images related to other preview performances (for example, images related to the SP first half title preview performance, which has a lower expectation level than the group preview performance) is lowered, while the display of information related to games that are important to the player in terms of winning or losing the game or the degree of advantage is given a higher priority, and the brightness is not lowered even when a group preview performance is executed, so that important information can be shown to the player as much as possible.

(2-1) A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is favorable to a player when the display result of a variable display becomes a specific display result,
A group performance execution means (for example, a group preview performance) for executing a group performance that displays an image in which a plurality of characters progress in a group (for example, a group preview execution process shown in FIG. 47, a six-person group preview performance shown in FIG. 94 to FIG. 100) is provided;
The display period of the image in the group performance includes a first display period, a second display period, and a third display period (for example, the period shown in FIG. 59 ),
The first display period is a period from when the display of the first character in the group performance begins, when a new character is displayed, until the display of any character ends first (for example, the period shown in FIG. 94 (a23) to FIG. 96 (a30)),
The second display period is a period longer than the first display period, during which a state in which a new character is displayed and the display of a currently displayed character is terminated continues (for example, the period shown in FIG. 97 (a31) to FIG. 98 (a36)),
The third display period is a period during which the display of the currently displayed character is terminated without any new display of the character (for example, the period shown in FIG. 99 (a37) to FIG. 100 (a42)),
During the first display period, a first situation in which a part of the first displayed character is displayed changes to a second situation in which a part of the first displayed character is displayed further than the first situation and a part of the second displayed character is displayed (for example, the examples shown in Figures 57 and 94).

As a result, in the group preview performance, the second display period during which characters appear one after another can be designed to be longer than the first display period from when the character display first starts to when the character display first ends, thereby providing a suitable group preview performance. Also, since there is no situation in the group preview performance where only one person is displayed, it is possible to prevent doubts as to whether or not it is a group preview performance, or the misconception that only one person will appear.

The "first situation in which a part of the initially displayed character is displayed" includes a situation in which the initially displayed character is not yet entirely displayed on the screen of the image display device 5, but part of the character is displayed at the edge of the screen of the image display device 5, as shown in FIG. 57(a), or a situation in which the initially displayed character is not yet entirely displayed in the display area visible to the player when the gaming machine frame 3 covers the screen of the image display device 5, but part of the character is displayed at the edge of the display area visible to the player, as shown in FIG. 94(a). In other words, the second situation includes a situation in which the initially displayed character is not completely visible, but part of the initially displayed character is visible.

The "second situation in which a part of the first displayed character is displayed more than in the first situation and a part of the second displayed character is displayed" includes a situation in which, as shown in FIG. 57(b), the first displayed character is not yet entirely displayed on the screen of the image display device 5, while a part of the character is displayed more than in the first situation at the edge of the screen of the image display device 5, and the second displayed character is not yet entirely displayed, while a part of the character is displayed at the edge of the screen of the image display device 5, or a situation in which, as shown in FIG. 94(b), the first displayed character is not yet entirely displayed in the display area visible to the player when the gaming machine frame 3 covers the screen of the image display device 5, while a part of the character is displayed more than in the first situation at the edge of the display area visible to the player, and the second displayed character is not yet entirely displayed, while a part of the character is displayed at the edge of the display area visible to the player. In other words, the second situation includes a situation in which the second character appears following the first character before the first character is completely visible.

(2-2) In the group performance, the first character displayed and the second character displayed have different position coordinates on the Y axis along the vertical direction on the screen.

This ensures that the first and second characters do not overlap on the Y axis, preventing the mistaken impression that only one character is appearing.

(2-3) Motion blur processing is applied to the display of characters in the group performance (for example, the example shown in Figure 55).

This has the effect of making each character appear as multiple characters, making it less likely that there will be a mistaken impression that only one character is appearing.

(2-4) The sound indicating the start of the group preview performance is output while the first character in the group performance is being displayed, but ends before the second character begins to be displayed (for example, the example shown in FIG. 94).

This allows the player to be notified that the group preview performance has been executed by outputting a sound indicating the start of the group preview performance and the appearance of the first character, while at the same time providing an optimal group preview performance by ending the starting sound before the second character appears.

The start sound may be output before the first character appears, or may be output at the same time as the first character appears, but will end before the second character appears.

(2-5) The multiple characters displayed in the group performance include characters whose entire bodies are displayed within the display area of the screen, and characters whose entire bodies are displayed such that some parts do not fit within the display area of the screen, but other parts do fit within the display area of the screen (for example, the example shown in FIG. 53).

This allows more characters to appear in the group preview performance in a limited display area.

(2-6) The plurality of characters displayed in the group performance include a first character (e.g., maid A) and a second character (e.g., maid B) of a different type from the first character,
In each of the first display period, the second display period, and the third display period, a mixture of the first character whose entire body is displayed to fit within the display area of the screen and the first character whose entire body is displayed to fit within the display area of the screen but whose other parts do not fit within the display area of the screen are displayed (for example, the example shown in FIG. 53).

This creates the illusion that a larger variety of characters are appearing in the group preview performance in a limited display area.

(2-7) A part of the screen is covered by an obstruction (for example, a gaming machine frame 3), and the display of the character to be displayed first in the group presentation starts at the position where the obstruction is covering, and then the display of the character to be displayed second starts,
Even when the screen is viewed with the obstruction covering it, the first situation changes to the second situation during the first display period (for example, the example shown in FIG. 57).

This means that there will be no situation in which only one person is displayed in the group preview performance, even in the display area of the screen that the player actually sees, so there will be no doubt as to whether it is a group preview performance or not, or the mistaken impression that only one person will appear.

(2-8) When the gaming machine is viewed from the side, facing between the screen and the obstruction, it is possible to see the edge of the screen (for example, the example shown in FIG. 57).

As a result, even if a player views the pachinko gaming machine 1 from the side and sees the edge of the screen, there is no situation in which only one person is displayed in the group preview performance, so there is no doubt as to whether or not it is a group preview performance, or the mistaken idea that only one person will appear.

(2-9) In the design stage, a display relating to the group performance is created on a screen of a specified size with a mask covering the area corresponding to the position of the obstruction, and further, a display relating to the group performance is created up to the area corresponding to the larger size so that it can be applied to a size larger than the specified size of the screen (e.g., 19 inches) (e.g., 20 inches).

This allows the created group preview performance data to be applied even if the design of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is suddenly changed to use a size larger than the specified size.

(2-10) The plurality of characters displayed in the group presentation include low importance characters (e.g., maids C to F) that are low in importance in the content of the gaming machine, and high importance characters (e.g., maids A and B) that are more important in the content of the gaming machine than the low importance characters,
The high importance characters are less likely to have their faces not fit within the display area of the screen and the rest of their bodies fit within the display area of the screen (for example, the example shown in Figure 53) than the low importance characters.

This makes it easier to recognize the faces of characters with high importance, such as the protagonist, in the group preview performance than characters with low importance, such as supporting characters, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

(3-1) A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is favorable to a player when the display result of a variable display becomes a specific display result,
A performance execution means for executing a performance (for example, a performance control CPU 120 for executing a group notice execution process shown in FIG. 47 ) is provided,
The performance executed by the performance execution means includes a group performance (for example, a group preview performance shown in FIG. 94 to FIG. 100) in which an image of a plurality of characters proceeding in a group is displayed,
The display period of the image in the group performance includes a first display period, a second display period, and a third display period (for example, the period shown in FIG. 59 ),
The first display period is a period from when the display of the first character in the group performance begins, when a new character is displayed, until the display of any character ends first (for example, the period shown in FIG. 94 (a23) to FIG. 96 (a30)),
The second display period is a period longer than the first display period, during which a state in which a new character is displayed and the display of a currently displayed character is terminated continues (for example, the period shown in FIG. 97 (a31) to FIG. 98 (a36)),
The third display period is a period during which the display of the currently displayed character is terminated without any new display of the character (for example, the period shown in FIG. 99 (a37) to FIG. 100 (a42)),
The group presentation is a presentation that has the largest number of characters displayed among the presentations that can be executed by the presentation execution means.

As a result, in the group preview performance, the second display period during which characters appear one after another is designed to be longer than the first display period from when the display of the characters first starts to when the display of the characters first ends, making it possible to provide a suitable group preview performance. Also, since the group preview performance features the largest number of characters out of all the performances, it is possible to make the player aware that a variable display that is likely to lead to a jackpot is being performed.

"The group performance is the performance with the largest number of characters displayed among the performances that can be executed by the performance execution means" includes the performance with the largest number of characters displayed on one screen among all the performances executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 being the group preview performance. Also, "The group performance is the performance with the largest number of characters displayed among the performances that can be executed by the performance execution means" includes the performance with the largest number of characters displayed on one screen among the performances executed during the period when variable display based on one reserved memory is being performed, such as the performance during variable display of decorative patterns, the performance during reach, the pseudo consecutive performance, and the performance when a jackpot occurs, among all the performances executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1. Also, "The group performance is the performance with the largest number of characters displayed among the performances that can be executed by the performance execution means" includes the performance with the largest number of characters displayed on one screen among the performances executed during the jackpot game state and the subsequent probability change state and time-saving state being the group preview performance. In the above example, the group preview effect does not have to be the effect with the greatest number of different characters displayed.

Furthermore, "the group performance is the performance with the largest number of characters displayed among the performances that can be executed by the performance execution means" includes the performance with the largest total number of characters displayed on all screens during the performance among all performances executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1, which is the group preview performance. Also, "the group performance is the performance with the largest total number of characters displayed among the performances executed by the performance execution means" includes the performance with the largest total number of characters displayed on all screens during the performance among all performances executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1, which is the group preview performance among the performances executed during the period when variable display based on one reserved memory is being performed, such as the performance during variable display of decorative patterns, the performance during reach, the pseudo consecutive performance, and the performance when a jackpot occurs. Also, "the group performance is the performance with the largest number of characters displayed among the performances that can be executed by the performance execution means" includes the performance with the largest total number of characters displayed on all screens during the performance among the performances executed during the jackpot game state and the subsequent probability change state and time-saving state, which is the group preview performance. In the above example, the group preview effect does not have to be the effect with the greatest number of different characters displayed.

(3-2) A specific effect in which a number of characters are displayed is executed, in which a smaller number of characters are displayed than in the group effect (for example, the latter half of the SP reach or the final reach effect).

This allows for a wide variety of effects to be performed, with the largest number of characters appearing in the group preview effects.

Note that the specific effect may display a greater number of different characters than the group preview effect.

(3-3) The number of characters displayed during the second display period of the group performance is greater than the number of characters displayed in the specific performance.

This allows players to see a powerful presentation during the second display period, which is the longest period of the group preview presentation.

The number of character types displayed during the second display period of the group preview performance may be greater than the number of character types displayed in the specific performance.

(4-1) A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is favorable to a player when the display result of a variable display becomes a specific display result,
A group performance execution means (for example, a group preview performance) for executing a group performance that displays an image in which a plurality of characters progress in a group (for example, a group preview execution process shown in FIG. 47, a six-person group preview performance shown in FIG. 94 to FIG. 100) is provided;
The display period of the image in the group performance includes a first display period, a second display period, and a third display period (for example, the period shown in FIG. 59 ),
The first display period is a period from when the display of the first character in the group performance begins, when a new character is displayed, until the display of any character ends first (for example, the period shown in FIG. 94 (a23) to FIG. 96 (a30)),
The second display period is a period longer than the first display period, during which a state in which a new character is displayed and the display of a currently displayed character is terminated continues (for example, the period shown in FIG. 97 (a31) to FIG. 98 (a36)),
The third display period is a period during which the display of the currently displayed character is terminated without any new display of the character (for example, the period shown in FIG. 99 (a37) to FIG. 100 (a42)),
In the group performance,
A help message will be displayed to show that the character is progressing.
When the display of a first character and the display of a second character overlap, the display of the first character is given priority over the display of the second character, whereas when the auxiliary display corresponding to the first character and the display of the second character overlap, the display of the second character is given priority over the auxiliary display corresponding to the first character (for example, the example shown in FIG. 54).

This allows the second display period, during which characters appear one after another in the group preview performance, to be longer than the first display period, which is from when the display of the character first starts to when the display of the character first ends, providing a suitable group preview performance. Also, by displaying auxiliary characters for the characters, a more dynamic group preview performance can be shown to the player, but because the auxiliary display does not impede the visibility of other characters, more characters can be clearly seen by the player.

An "auxiliary display" may be any display that indicates that a character is progressing, such as an image display that emphasizes that a character is progressing as shown in FIG. 54 (for example, an image display of dust), an image display that shows traces of a character's passage (for example, an image display of a character's footprints), or an image display attached to the character itself (for example, an image display that shows the character's aura). An "auxiliary display" may be any image display that is displayed in the vicinity of a character in relation to the character's progression.

(4-2) The characters displayed in the group performance and the auxiliary display in the group performance are displayed on different layers on the screen (for example, as shown in FIG. 52, the image of the dust is placed on layer 1, and the character images are placed on layers 2 and onwards).

This allows the character images and auxiliary displays to be displayed optimally to the player during group preview performances.

(4-3) The plurality of characters displayed in the group performance include a plurality of characters of the same type (for example, character C of layers 9 and 10),
The video data corresponding to the group performance includes first character data (e.g., video data of character C on layer 9) and second character data (e.g., video data of character C on layer 10) corresponding to each of a plurality of characters of the same type,
The first character data and the second character data have different parameter values relating to the character's moving speed, but have the same animation parameter values relating to the character's actions.

This allows the animation parameter values related to character movements to be standardized even when changing the character's movement speed, reducing the amount of work required to design group preview effects.

(4-4) In the group performance, multiple characters are not placed at the same timing and speed at coordinates arranged on the screen (for example, the example shown in Figure 52).

This ensures that multiple characters do not move in the same way in the same position, allowing the group preview performance to be shown to players in an optimal way.

(5-1) A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is favorable to a player when the display result of a variable display becomes a specific display result,
A group performance execution means (for example, a group preview performance) for executing a group performance that displays an image in which a plurality of characters progress in a group (for example, a group preview execution process shown in FIG. 47, a six-person group preview performance shown in FIG. 94 to FIG. 100) is provided;
The display period of the image in the group performance includes a first display period, a second display period, and a third display period (for example, the period shown in FIG. 59 ),
The first display period is a period from when the display of the first character in the group performance begins, when a new character is displayed, until the display of any character ends first (for example, the period shown in FIG. 94 (a23) to FIG. 96 (a30)),
The second display period is a period longer than the first display period, during which a state in which a new character is displayed and the display of a currently displayed character is terminated continues (for example, the period shown in FIG. 97 (a31) to FIG. 98 (a36)),
The third display period is a period during which the display of the currently displayed character is terminated without any new display of the character (for example, the period shown in FIG. 99 (a37) to FIG. 100 (a42)),
In the first display period, the display of a newly displayed character (e.g., the second displayed character) ends before the display of the first displayed character ends (e.g., the examples shown in Figures 95 and 96).

The "newly displayed character" may be the second character to appear in the group preview performance as shown in Figures 94 to 96, or it may be the third or subsequent character to appear in the group preview performance. Considering that the group preview performance is a performance in which multiple characters progress as a group, it is preferable for the "newly displayed character" to be the second character to appear in the group preview performance positioned immediately after the first displayed character, and for the second character to overtake the first displayed character, which creates a sense of dynamism and realism.

As a result, in the group preview performance, the second display period during which characters appear one after another can be designed to be longer than the first display period from when the character display first starts to when the character display first ends, providing a suitable group preview performance. Also, because the second character to appear overtakes the first character to appear and disappears at the top, the player can see a dynamic group preview performance.

(5-2) The plurality of characters displayed in the group performance include a character that overtakes another character,
The number of the overtaking characters is either greater than or less than the number of the other characters to be overtaken by the overtaking character.

This makes it possible to present the group preview performance to players in an optimal way, such as preventing the group preview performance from becoming too complicated and presenting a dynamic group preview performance to players.

(5-3) When the overtaking character overtakes the other character, and the display of the overtaking character overlaps with the display of the other character, the outline of the overtaking character is displayed thicker than the outline of the other character (for example, the example shown in FIG. 56).

This allows the player to easily see how one character overtakes another.

(6-1) A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is favorable to a player when the display result of a variable display becomes a specific display result,
A group performance execution means (for example, a group preview performance) for executing a group performance that displays an image of a group of multiple characters proceeding (for example, a group preview execution process shown in FIG. 47, a six-person group preview performance shown in FIG. 94 to FIG. 100);
and a suggestion effect execution means (for example, a process for executing a PUSH effect by the effect control CPU 120) for executing a suggestion effect (for example, a PUSH effect) that displays a suggestion image (for example, an image showing the push button 31B, a meter image, and a text image of "PUSH!!") that suggests the execution of the group effect,
The display period of the image in the group performance includes a first display period, a second display period, and a third display period (for example, the period shown in FIG. 59 ),
The first display period is a period from when the display of the first character in the group performance begins, when a new character is displayed, until the display of any character ends first (for example, the period shown in FIG. 94 (a23) to FIG. 96 (a30)),
The second display period is a period longer than the first display period, during which a state in which a new character is displayed and the display of a currently displayed character is terminated continues (for example, the period shown in FIG. 97 (a31) to FIG. 98 (a36)),
The third display period is a period during which the display of the currently displayed character is terminated without any new display of the character (for example, the period shown in FIG. 99 (a37) to FIG. 100 (a42)),
The display of the suggestive image ends before the first display period in the group performance begins (for example, the example shown in Figure 93).

The "suggestion image" may be any image that suggests the execution of a group preview performance, and may be an image that prompts the player to operate the operating means as shown in FIG. 93, or an effect image such as a light or pattern that is executed before suggesting the execution of a group preview performance, or a clock image in a timer performance that measures the time until the group preview performance is executed, or a text image that suggests the execution of a group preview performance (for example, the text image of "group"). In addition, a timer performance may use a clock image to measure the time until the group preview performance is executed, and when the measured time reaches a predetermined time, a text image (the text image of "group") that suggests the execution of a group preview performance may be displayed.

As a result, by designing the second display period during which characters appear one after another in the group preview performance to be longer than the first display period from when the character display first starts to when the character display first ends, it is possible to provide a suitable group preview performance. It is also possible to make it easier for players to notice the first character appearing.

(6-2) After the display of the effect related to the suggestive image (for example, an effect indicating that push button 31B has been pressed) has ended, the display of the character begins for the first time in the first display period (for example, the example shown in FIG. 93).

This makes it easier for players to notice the character appearing for the first time.

(6-3) the suggestion image includes an image that prompts the player to operate the operation means (for example, an image showing the push button 31B, a meter image, and a text image of "PUSH!!");
The output of a sound (e.g., a push sound) when the operating means is operated while the suggestive image is being displayed ends before the character first starts to be displayed in the first display period (e.g., the example shown in Figure 93).

This makes it easier for players to notice the character appearing for the first time.

(6-4) When the operating means is operated while the suggestive image is being displayed, one of a number of effects including the group effect (for example, a six-person group preview, a background preview, a lamp preview) is executed (for example, the examples shown in Figures 93, 102, and 103).

This allows multiple effects to be executed based on the player's operation, making the game more entertaining.

(7-1) A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is favorable to a player when the display result of a variable display becomes a specific display result,
A group performance execution means (for example, a group preview performance) for executing a group performance that displays an image in which a plurality of characters progress in a group (for example, the group preview execution process shown in FIG. 47, the six-person group preview performance shown in FIG. 94 to FIG. 100, and the dog group preview performance shown in FIG. 168 to FIG. 170) is provided,
The display period of the image in the group performance includes a first display period, a second display period, and a third display period (for example, the period shown in FIG. 59 ),
The first display period is a period from when the display of the first character in the group performance begins, when a new character is displayed, until the display of any character ends first (for example, the period shown in FIG. 94 (a23) to FIG. 96 (a30)),
The second display period is a period longer than the first display period, during which a state in which a new character is displayed and the display of a currently displayed character is terminated continues (for example, the period shown in FIG. 97 (a31) to FIG. 98 (a36)),
The third display period is a period during which the display of the currently displayed character is terminated without any new display of the character (for example, the period shown in FIG. 99 (a37) to FIG. 100 (a42)),
The group performance includes a first group performance (e.g., a six-person group preview performance) and a second group performance (e.g., a dog group preview performance),
The plurality of characters displayed in the first group performance each move at the same or substantially the same first speed (for example, speed V1);
The plurality of characters displayed in the second group performance each move at the same or substantially the same second speed (for example, speed V2);
The first speed is greater than the second speed,
The first group presentation is configured so that the straight-line distance from the first character to the last character displayed is longer than in the second group presentation (for example, the example shown in FIG. 170).

The "straight-line distance from the first displayed character to the last displayed character" is the straight-line distance (distance on the X-axis) from the edge of the first displayed character to the edge of the last displayed character in a group preview performance such as a six-person group preview performance or a dog group preview performance, as shown in FIG. 170. If T is the time from when the first character is displayed from the edge of the screen of the image display device 5 to when the last character is displayed, and V is the speed of each character, then this straight-line distance can be calculated by multiplying the time T by the speed V (T x V).

As a result, by designing the second display period during which characters appear one after another in the group preview performance to be longer than the first display period from when the display of the character first starts to when the display of the character first ends, it is possible to provide a suitable group preview performance. Also, two types of group preview performances can be shown to the player in a suitable manner.

(7-2) The execution time of the first group performance (e.g., X1/V1) is the same as or approximately the same as the execution time of the second group performance (e.g., X2/V2) (e.g., the example shown in FIG. 170).

This allows two different types of group preview performances to be performed using the same or approximately the same amount of time.

(7-3) When the second group performance is executed, the probability that the display result of the variable display will be the specific display result is higher than when the first group performance is executed;
The probability of executing the second group of effects is lower than the probability of executing the first group of effects.

In this way, by making the character speed slower for the dog pack preview performance, which has a lower probability of execution and higher expectations than the six-person preview, it is possible to, for example, increase the opportunities for the player to take a photo of the characters in the dog pack preview performance.

(7-4) The degree of crowding of the multiple characters displayed in the second group performance (e.g., crowding degree D2) is greater than the degree of crowding of the multiple characters displayed in the first group performance (e.g., crowding degree D1).

This allows characters to be positioned at an appropriate density during the group preview performance, taking into account the speed and distance traveled of the characters, providing players with a group preview performance that is ideal.

(7-5) In the second group performance, a plurality of characters located at the rear end are arranged from the bottom to the top of the screen,
After the rearmost characters have passed, a display corresponding to the subsequent performance is displayed on the screen (for example, the example shown in FIG. 169).

This allows the image for the next performance to be shown to the player when the group preview performance is triggered, increasing the excitement of the game.

(8-1) A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is favorable to a player when the display result of a variable display becomes a specific display result,
A group performance execution means (for example, the group notice execution process shown in FIG. 47, the Boingo group notice performance shown in FIG. 158 to FIG. 167) is provided for executing a group performance (for example, a group notice performance) that displays an image in which a plurality of characters progress in a group,
The display period of the image in the group performance includes a first display period, a second display period, and a third display period (for example, the period shown in FIG. 59 ),
The first display period is a period from when the display of the first character in the group performance begins, until a new display of a character is performed, until the display of any character ends first,
the second display period is a period longer than the first display period, and is a period during which a state in which a new character is displayed and the display of a currently displayed character is terminated continues;
the third display period is a period during which a state in which the display of a currently displayed character is terminated without a new display of the character;
during the first display period, display of the character is started from a specific position such that the character progresses from the back side to the front side on the screen;
At a timing related to the initial start of the display of the character at the specific position, a front-stage display (for example, display of a front-stage image using light effects) is performed to make the display of the character at the specific position difficult to see (for example, the example shown in Figure 158).

"Front display" may be any display that makes the display of a character difficult to see, and includes displays that hide the specific location where a character appears (for example, displaying an effect image such as light or a pattern). "Difficult to see" includes a state where the player cannot see the specific location at all, a state where the player can see the specific location but has difficulty seeing it, a state where the player can see the specific location but cannot see the character appearing from the specific location, and a state where the player can see the specific location and can see the character appearing from the specific location but has difficulty seeing it.

"Timing related to the initial start of the display of a character at a specific position" includes timing that is the same as the initial start of the display of a character at a specific position, or timing within a specified period before or after the initial start of the display of a character at a specific position (this specified period is a period that gives the player the illusion that it is the initial start of the display of a character at a specific position).

This allows the second display period, during which characters appear one after the other in the group preview performance, to be longer than the first display period, which is from when the display of the characters first starts to when the display of the characters first ends, providing a suitable group preview performance. Also, because the first character is displayed from a specific position that was made difficult to see by the display of the previous image, the characters can be displayed at a certain size from the beginning, and the player does not experience the discomfort of suddenly seeing a large character.

(8-2) during the first display period, the character is enlarged and displayed so as to progress from a depth direction to a front direction on the screen;
The enlarged display of the character makes it difficult to see the character displayed at the specific position (an example is shown in FIG. 164).

This creates the visual effect of multiple characters appearing one after the other from a position of depth.

(8-3) The character that is displayed last in the group performance is enlarged and displayed over an area that extends from at least one end of the screen to the opposite end (example shown in FIG. 162).

This allows you to conveniently switch to the performance after the group preview performance by using the image display of the last character.

(8-4) In conjunction with the action of the character that is displayed last in the group performance, the background display displayed in the third display period is switched to the background display that corresponds to the subsequent performance (for example, the examples shown in Figures 162 and 163).

This allows you to conveniently switch to the performance after the group preview performance by using the image display of the last character.

(8-5) The character that is last displayed in the group performance is enlarged and displayed over a range extending from at least one end of the screen to the other end opposite the one end,
No other characters in the group performance are displayed behind the last character displayed (for example, the example shown in Figure 164).

As a result, even if a subsequent character image is placed in a position hidden by the first character, it will not be visible, so there is no need to place the subsequent character image, creating a visual effect as if multiple characters are appearing one after the other from a position with depth.

(9-1) A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player when a display result of a variable display becomes a specific display result,
A group performance execution means (for example, a group preview performance) for executing a group performance that displays an image of a group of multiple characters proceeding (for example, the group preview execution process shown in FIG. 47, the six-person group preview performance shown in FIG. 94 to FIG. 100);
A sound output means (e.g., speakers 8L, 8R) for outputting sound,
The display period of the image in the group performance includes a first display period, a second display period, and a third display period (for example, the period shown in FIG. 59 ),
The first display period is a period from when the display of the first character in the group performance begins, when a new character is displayed, until the display of any character ends first (for example, the period shown in FIG. 94 (a23) to FIG. 96 (a30)),
The second display period is a period longer than the first display period, during which a state in which a new character is displayed and the display of a currently displayed character is terminated continues (for example, the period shown in FIG. 97 (a31) to FIG. 98 (a36)),
The third display period is a period during which the display of the currently displayed character is terminated without any new display of the character (for example, the period shown in FIG. 99 (a37) to FIG. 100 (a42)),
The sound output means starts outputting a performance sound corresponding to the group performance at a predetermined volume at a timing related to the start of the first display period, and thereafter sets the volume of the performance sound to a specific volume higher than the predetermined volume during the first display period, sets the volume of the performance sound to the specific volume in the second display period as well, and outputs the performance sound so that the volume of the performance sound is lower than the specific volume during the third display period.

In this way, the second display period during which characters appear one after another in the group preview performance can be designed to be longer than the first display period from when the display of the characters first starts to when the display of the characters first ends, thereby providing a suitable group preview performance. Also, by raising the volume to a specific volume during the first display period and maintaining the sound output at the specific volume during the second display period, the group preview performance can be livened up at the specific volume before the second display period, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

The volume may be controlled by the sound output means to increase or decrease it, or the volume control of the sound output means may be constant but the volume may increase or decrease because the increase or decrease in the volume is specified in the sound data referenced by the sound output means.

(9-2) The fade-in time from when the performance sound is output to when the volume of the performance sound rises to a specific volume during the first display period is shorter than the fade-out time from when the volume of the performance sound starts to decrease to when the volume of the performance sound disappears during the third display period (for example, the example shown in FIG. 59).

As a result, the sounds produced during the group preview performance fade in over a short period of time and fade out over a longer period of time, allowing the sounds produced during the group preview performance to be output optimally.

(10-1) A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player when a display result of a variable display becomes a specific display result,
A group performance execution means (for example, a group preview performance) for executing a group performance that displays an image of a group of multiple characters proceeding (for example, the group preview execution process shown in FIG. 47, the six-person group preview performance shown in FIG. 94 to FIG. 100);
A plurality of lighting means (for example, game effect lamps 9 such as frame lamps),
The display period of the image in the group performance includes a first display period, a second display period, and a third display period (for example, the period shown in FIG. 59 ),
The first display period is a period from when the display of the first character in the group performance begins, when a new character is displayed, until the display of any character ends first (for example, the period shown in FIG. 94 (a23) to FIG. 96 (a30)),
The second display period is a period longer than the first display period, during which a state in which a new character is displayed and the display of a currently displayed character is terminated continues (for example, the period shown in FIG. 97 (a31) to FIG. 98 (a36)),
The third display period is a period during which the display of the currently displayed character is terminated without any new display of the character (for example, the period shown in FIG. 99 (a37) to FIG. 100 (a42)),
a luminance data table composed of a plurality of luminance data for lighting each of the plurality of lighting means includes a first luminance data table corresponding to the first display period (e.g., a grandchild table W1 for a frame lamp shown in FIG. 64(a)), a second luminance data table corresponding to the second display period (e.g., a grandchild table W2 for a frame lamp shown in FIG. 64(b)), and a third luminance data table corresponding to the third display period (e.g., a grandchild table W3 for a frame lamp shown in FIG. 64(c));
Each of the first luminance data table and the second luminance data table is composed of first luminance data which is a combination of data for lighting the lighting means at a low luminance and data for lighting the lighting means at a high luminance, and second luminance data which is a combination of data for lighting the lighting means at a low luminance and data for lighting the lighting means at a high luminance different from the first luminance data (for example, an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp shown in FIG. 64 ).
The second brightness data table is set to light more of the lighting means at high brightness than the first brightness data table (for example, the grandchild table W2 for the frame lamp stores high brightness data ("0" to "F") for more lamps than the grandchild table W1 for the frame lamp).

As a result, in the group preview performance, the second display period during which characters appear one after another is designed to be longer than the first display period from when the display of the characters first starts to when the display of the characters first ends, thereby providing a suitable group preview performance. Also, a brightness data table corresponding to each display period is provided, and the second brightness data table is designed to light the lamp at a higher brightness than the first brightness data table, so that during the first display period, weaker footsteps can be expressed when multiple characters appear, and during the second display period, stronger footsteps can be expressed when multiple characters appear one after another, providing the player with a more suitable group preview performance.

The "data for turning on the lighting means at low brightness" and "data for turning on the lighting means at high brightness" are lighting data (lighting elements) for each time period for multiple lighting sections (for example, RGB in the frame left lamp 9L1, and WWW in the panel lamp 9C) included in each lighting means. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 64(a), it is the data (100) for the frame left lamp 9L1 (RGB) at T1-1. Note that, for the RGB data, data corresponding to turning off the light is "000", data corresponding to turning on the light at low brightness is "100", and data corresponding to turning on the light at high brightness is "F00".

The "brightness data" is the lighting data for each lighting means (for example, the frame lamp, the panel lamp 9C) for each hour, and is a collection of "data for lighting the lighting means at low brightness" and "data for lighting the lighting means at high brightness" for each hour. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 64(a), it is the data for the frame left lamp 9L and the frame right lamp 9R at T1-1.

The brightness data table is a collection of "brightness data" for a specific period (for example, the lighting time specified in the parent table or child table). For example, in the example shown in FIG. 64(a), it is data for the frame left lamp 9L and frame right lamp 9R at T1-1 to T1-11.

(10-2) The first brightness data table has a longer interval for switching brightness data than the second brightness data table (for example, as shown in FIG. 63, the grandchild table W1 for the frame lamp switches at intervals of 100 msec, and the grandchild table W2 for the frame lamp switches at intervals of 50 to 80 msec).

This makes it possible to show that the characters are running faster during the second display period than during the first display period, providing a suitable group preview presentation.

(10-3) The first luminance data table has equal intervals for switching the luminance data, whereas the second luminance data table does not have equal intervals for switching the luminance data (for example, as shown in FIG. 63, the grandchild table W1 for the frame lamp switches at 100 msec intervals, and the grandchild table W2 for the frame lamp switches at 50 to 80 msec intervals).

As a result, during the second display period, it is possible to express that multiple characters are running more out of step with each other than during the first display period. This makes it possible to provide a suitable group preview presentation.

(11-1) The first brightness data table includes brightness data that moves the lighting location in the direction in which the characters move in the group performance (for example, as shown in FIG. 63, the frame lamp grandchild table W1 lights up with high brightness in accordance with the direction of the group preview),
The second brightness data table includes brightness data that does not move the lit areas in the direction in which the characters move in the group performance (for example, as shown in Figure 63, the grandchild table W2 for frame lamps lights up at high brightness over multiple points).

This allows a character to appear during the first display period, and multiple characters to appear one after another during the second display period. This allows for an ideal group preview presentation.

(11-2) The first brightness data table includes brightness data for lighting the lighting means located near the character first displayed in the group performance at high brightness in accordance with the progression position of the character, and turning off or lighting the lighting means located near a location that the character has not reached at low brightness (for example, an example of the frame lamp grandchild table W1 shown in Figure 64 (a)).

As a result, the lamps light up at high brightness as the first-displayed leading character progresses, and the lamps are turned off or light up at low brightness for areas that have not yet been reached, so the lighting of the lamps can be used to express the progress of the leading character. This makes it possible to provide an ideal group preview presentation.

(11-3) The first brightness data table includes brightness data that causes the lighting means to light up at high brightness and then turns off the lighting means or lights it up at low brightness as the character first displayed in the group performance progresses (for example, an example of the grandchild table W1 for frame lamps shown in FIG. 64(a)).

As a result, the lamps light up at high brightness as the first-displayed leading character progresses, and the lamps are turned off or light up at low brightness for areas that have not yet been reached or have already been passed, so the lighting of the lamps can be used to express the progress of the leading character. This makes it possible to provide an ideal group preview presentation.

(11-4) The first brightness data table includes brightness data for lighting the lighting means at high brightness and then lighting the lighting means located in the direction in which the characters move in the group performance at high brightness (for example, an example of the frame lamp grandchild table W1 shown in FIG. 64(a)),
The second brightness data table includes brightness data that lights up the lighting means at high brightness and then does not light up the lighting means located in the direction in which the characters move in the group performance at high brightness (for example, an example of a grandchild table W2 for a frame lamp shown in Figure 64 (b)).

As a result, during the first display period, the lamp lights up at high brightness as the first-displayed leading character progresses, and the lamp is turned off or lights up at low brightness for areas that have not yet been reached or areas that have already been passed, so the lighting of the lamp can be used to express the progression of the leading character. Also, during the second display period, it is possible to express the progression of multiple characters one after another. This makes it possible to provide an ideal group preview presentation.

(11-5) the first luminance data table includes luminance data for turning on the lighting means at high luminance and turning off the lighting means adjacent to the lighting means (for example, an example of the frame lamp grandchild table W1 shown in FIG. 64(a)),
The second brightness data table includes brightness data for lighting the lighting means at high brightness and for lighting the lighting means adjacent to the lighting means (for example, an example of a frame lamp grandchild table W2 shown in Figure 64 (b)).

As a result, during the first display period, the lamp lights up at high brightness as the first-displayed leading character progresses, and the lamp is turned off or lights up at low brightness for areas that have not yet been reached or areas that have already been passed, so the lighting of the lamp can be used to express the progression of the leading character. Also, during the second display period, it is possible to express the progression of multiple characters one after another. This makes it possible to provide an ideal group preview presentation.

(12-1) The third brightness data table includes brightness data that increases the number of lighting means that are turned off in accordance with the progress of the characters in the group performance (for example, as shown in FIG. 63, the frame lamp grandchild table W3 is turned off or lit at a low brightness in accordance with the direction of progress of the group preview).

As a result, during the third display period, the lamps are turned off or lit at a low brightness in accordance with the progress of the characters, so the progress of the characters can be expressed by turning the lamps off or on. This makes it possible to provide an ideal group preview presentation.

(12-3) In the third brightness data table, the switching interval of the brightness data in the lighting means arranged on the frame of the gaming machine located in the direction in which the character advances in the group presentation is shorter than the switching interval of the brightness data in the lighting means arranged on the frame of the gaming machine located opposite the direction in which the character advances in the group presentation (for example, as shown in FIG. 63, the switching interval of the frame left lamp 9L is 10 msec, and the switching interval of the frame right lamp 9R is 80 msec).

As a result, during the third display period, it is possible to express the characters moving from the right side to the left side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and disappearing. This makes it possible to provide an ideal group preview presentation.

(13-1) In the first luminance data table, control of the lighting means starts at a timing related to a start of the first display period, and control of the lighting means ends during the first display period,
The second luminance data table indicates that control of the lighting means starts during the first display period and continues during the second display period, and that control of the lighting means ends during the third display period,
The third luminance data table starts control of the lighting means during the third display period (for example, the example of the group preview luminance data table shown in FIG. 85).

As a result, halfway through the first display period, the lamps are lit with high brightness in the same way as in the second display period, so the progress of the characters from before the second display period can be expressed with excitement by the lighting of the lamps. This makes it possible to provide an ideal group preview performance.

(13-2) The second luminance data table is set to have a control period of the lighting means longer than those of the first luminance data table and the third luminance data table,
The first luminance data table is set to have a longer control period for the lighting means than the third luminance data table (for example, the example of the group preview luminance data table shown in FIG. 85).

This allows multiple characters to appear one after the other during the first display period to be displayed for an appropriate length of time, providing an ideal group preview presentation.

(14-1) The brightness data initially specified in the first brightness data table is the brightness data that turns off or lights at a low brightness the multiple lighting means used in the group performance (for example, as shown in FIG. 63, in the grandchild table W1 for frame lamps, the initial brightness data for all lamps is turned off or lights at a low brightness).

This allows the lamps to light up when the group preview performance is executed after a break, without mixing with the lamps that were turned on before the group preview performance was executed, providing a more suitable group preview performance.

(14-2) The brightness data initially specified in each of the second brightness data table and the third brightness data table is brightness data that does not turn off the multiple lighting means used in the group performance or light them at low brightness (for example, as shown in FIG. 63, in the grandchild tables W2 and W3 for frame lamps, the lamps are lit at high brightness for the initial brightness data).

As a result, when characters are progressing one after another after a group preview performance has been executed, the flow of the performance is emphasized, and the group preview performance can be shown to the player without being interrupted by turning off all the lamps or turning them on at a low brightness. This makes it possible to provide a suitable group preview performance.

(14-3) The last luminance data specified in the third luminance data table is luminance data that turns off or lights at a low luminance the multiple lighting means used in the group performance (for example, as shown in FIG. 63, in the grandchild table W3 for frame lamps, the last luminance data for all lamps is turned off or lights at a low luminance).

As a result, when the group preview performance ends, all lamps are turned off or turned on at a low brightness, allowing the player to recognize that the group preview performance is ending. This makes it possible to provide a suitable group preview performance.

(15-1) The first luminance data table is designed not to repeat luminance data of the same control content, while the second luminance data table is designed to repeat luminance data of the same control content (for example, as shown in FIG. 63, luminance data is not defined so that the same luminance data is repeatedly used in the grandchild table W1 for the frame lamp, and luminance data is defined so that the same luminance data is repeatedly used in the grandchild table W2 for the frame lamp).

This allows the data volume to be reduced for the brightness data during the second display period, which is set over a long period of time. This makes it possible to provide a suitable group preview presentation.

(15-2) The third luminance data table is designed not to repeat luminance data with the same control content (for example, as shown in FIG. 63, in the grandchild table W3 for the frame lamp, luminance data is not specified so that the same luminance data is used repeatedly).

As a result, for the brightness data in the third display period, which is set to be no longer than the second display period, the brightness data can be specified as is, increasing the degree of freedom in design. This makes it possible to provide an ideal group preview performance.

(16-1) The first luminance data table is designed not to repeat luminance data of the same control content, while the second luminance data table is designed to repeat luminance data of the same control content (for example, as shown in FIG. 63, in the grandchild table W1 for the frame lamp, luminance data is not defined so that the same luminance data is repeatedly used, and in the grandchild table W2 for the frame lamp, luminance data is defined so that the same luminance data is repeatedly used).
In the first brightness data table, brightness data for malfunction countermeasures is specified at the end, while in the second brightness data table, brightness data for malfunction countermeasures is not specified at the end (for example, as shown in FIG. 63, 10-minute data for malfunction countermeasures is specified in the grandchild table W1 for the frame lamp, and 10-minute data for malfunction countermeasures is not specified in the grandchild table W2 for the frame lamp).

This makes it possible to reduce the data volume for the brightness data in the second display period, which is set over a long period of time. On the other hand, for the brightness data in the first display period, the brightness data is specified as is, but instead, 10 minutes of data is specified for troubleshooting purposes, allowing troubleshooting to be done during those 10 minutes. This makes it possible to provide an ideal group preview performance.

(16-2) The luminance data for malfunction countermeasures is the luminance data for which the longest time is specified among the luminance data constituting the first luminance data table, and is the luminance data for preventing the lighting means from being controlled from the beginning of the first luminance data table (for example, as shown in FIG. 63, 10-minute data for malfunction countermeasures is specified in the grandchild table W1 for the frame lamp).

This makes it possible to prevent lamp lighting control from being performed from the beginning of the first brightness data table by using the 10-minute data for troubleshooting purposes, thereby providing an optimal group preview performance.

(16-3) The luminance data for fault countermeasures is luminance data that turns on adjacent lighting means in a regular order (for example, as shown in FIG. 64(a), the luminance data for fault countermeasures for 10 minutes is luminance data that turns on adjacent frame lamps in a regular order so that the lighting locations are shifted from the previous state).

As a result, even if a malfunction occurs, adjacent frame lamps are lit in order and in a regular pattern so that the lighting locations are shifted from the previous state, preventing the appearance from becoming poor and providing an ideal group preview performance.

(17-1) The lighting means includes a single-color lighting means (e.g., on-board lamps 9C6 to 9C8) that lights up in a single color and a multi-color lighting means (e.g., on-board lamps 9C1 to 9C5, 9C9 to 9C13) that lights up in a plurality of colors,
the luminance data for lighting the monochromatic lighting means at a specific high luminance includes a specific value (e.g., "6") corresponding to the lighting at the specific high luminance;
The brightness data for lighting the multi-color lighting means at the specific high brightness includes a value (for example, "8" to "F") larger than a specific value as a value corresponding to the lighting at the specific high brightness.

This allows the light variation between lamps that are lit at high brightness to be adjusted by setting an appropriate value for the type of light-emitting means, thereby providing an optimal group preview performance.

(17-2) The single-color lighting means includes a first-color lighting means (e.g., the board-up lamps 9C6 to 9C8) that lights up in a first color, and a second-color lighting means (e.g., the board-left lamps 9B1 to 9B5) that lights up in a second color,
Regardless of the brightness data for lighting either the first color lighting means or the second color lighting means at the specific high brightness, the brightness data includes the specific value (e.g., "6") as a value corresponding to the specific high brightness lighting.

This allows the light variation to be adjusted even between lamps that are lit in the same single color, providing an ideal group preview presentation.

(18-1) The first brightness data table and the second brightness data table each include different brightness data for each of the lighting means provided on the left and right sides of the gaming machine (for example, a frame lamp table shown in FIG. 64 ),
The brightness data table used in a preview performance, which is a performance different from the group performance and which predicts that the display result of the variable display will become the specific display result, includes common brightness data for each of the lighting means provided on the left and right sides of the gaming machine (for example, the grandchild table for a frame lamp shown in Figure 71).

As a result, by individually controlling the lighting of the frame left lamp 9L and the frame right lamp 9R during the group preview performance, more detailed lighting patterns can be achieved, and a suitable group preview performance can be provided.

(19-1) During the execution of a preview effect (for example, a reach line effect) that is a different effect from the group effect and that predicts that the display result of the variable display will be the specific display result, the group effect may be executed in an interrupt manner,
Even when the group performance is interrupted and executed, the lighting means continues to light up according to the brightness data table corresponding to the preview performance (for example, the examples shown in Figures 171 and 172),
The lighting means used in the group performance is the same as the lighting means used in the advance notice performance, or includes the lighting means used in the advance notice performance and the lighting means not used in the advance notice performance (for example, as shown in Figure 70, in the reach line performance, there is a period during which the on-board lamps and attacca lamps which are always used in the group advance notice performance are not used).

As a result, even if a group preview performance is executed by interrupting another preview performance, the common lamps are lit, so that a performance with lighting can be realized without any sense of incongruity, and a suitable group preview performance can be provided. For example, if a group preview performance is executed by interrupting another preview performance, the lighting of the lamps in the group preview performance and the lighting of the lamps in the other preview performance will be mixed. If the lamps lit in both performances were different, the large number of lamps will be lit in a cumbersome manner, which may look unsightly and cause the player to feel uncomfortable. In this regard, if the lighting of the lamps in the group preview performance and the lighting of the lamps in the other preview performance are common, it is possible to prevent the lighting of many lamps in a cumbersome manner.

(19-2) The preview performance ends during the execution of the group performance, and a predetermined performance (for example, a symbol forwarding performance) different from the preview performance is executed (for example, the examples shown in FIGS. 171 and 172),
The lighting means used in the group performance is the same as the lighting means used in the specified performance, or includes the lighting means used in the specified performance and the lighting means not used in the specified performance (for example, the examples shown in Figures 171 and 172).

As a result, even if the group preview performance switches to another performance, the common lamp remains lit, so the performance can be realized without any sense of incongruity, and a suitable group preview performance can be provided.

(19-3) The group performance is executed with a predetermined execution probability of less than 100% (for example, the group preview lottery shown in FIG. 30).

As a result, whether or not the group preview performance is executed is determined by lottery, regardless of other performances, which reduces the processing burden related to the execution of the group preview performance and allows for the provision of a suitable group preview performance.

(20-1) The lighting means includes a specific lighting means (for example, a V lamp 9G) located at a position related to a direction in which the characters move in the group performance,
The specific lighting means can be lit when controlled to the advantageous state, and is not lit when not controlled to the advantageous state (for example, the V lamp 9G is lit to notify that a round of a jackpot game state in which a V win can occur is in progress or that a V win has occurred),
The first luminance data table and the second luminance data table do not include luminance data for lighting the specific lighting means (for example, the example of the luminance data table shown in FIG. 63).

This prevents the lamps located in positions related to the direction in which the characters move during the group preview performance from lighting up during the group preview performance, which could lead the player to mistakenly believe that they have been controlled to an advantageous state, such as a jackpot. This makes it possible to provide an ideal group preview performance.

(20-2) The lighting means includes specific lighting means (for example, a stick controller lamp 9J, a trigger button lamp 9K) located at a position related to a direction in which the characters move in the group performance,
The specific lighting means indicates to the player that the operation of the operating means is valid by lighting (for example, the stick controller lamp 9J lights up to encourage the player to pull the stick controller 31A, and the trigger button lamp 9K lights up to encourage the player to press the push button 31B).
The first luminance data table and the second luminance data table do not include luminance data for lighting the specific lighting means (for example, the example of the luminance data table shown in FIG. 63).

This prevents the player from mistaking that the lamp in the position related to the direction in which the characters move during the group preview performance for the lamp to light up during the group preview performance, leading the player to believe that the lamp is prompting the player to operate the operating means. This makes it possible to provide an ideal group preview performance.

[Modification]
A modified example of the above-mentioned pachinko gaming machine 1 will now be described.

(About the display period of the group preview performance)
In this embodiment, the third display period is longer than the first display period, but the first display period may be longer than the third display period.

This allows the first character to appear in the first display period to be shown for a longer period, making it easier to draw attention to the fact that a group preview performance suggesting a jackpot has been performed.

(Regarding the timing of the group preview performance)
In this embodiment, in the case of a variation pattern in which the result of the variable display is a failure display result, the group advance notice performance is executed in the latter half of the time of the variable display with a probability of 100%, but this is not limited to this. For example, in the case of a variation pattern in which the result of the variable display is a failure display result, the group advance notice performance may be executed with a higher probability in the latter half of the time of the variable display than in the first half of the time of the variable display.

In addition, in this embodiment, in the case of a variation pattern in which the result of the variable display is a winning display result, the group preview performance is executed in the first half of the variable display time with a 100% probability, but this is not limited to this. For example, in the case of a variation pattern in which the result of the variable display is a winning display result, the group preview performance may be executed with a higher probability in the first half of the variable display time than in the second half of the variable display time.

(About the characters appearing in the group preview performance)
In this embodiment, the main character, maid A (Yume Yume-chan), appears as the first (initial) character in the first display period, but the main character, maid A (Yume Yume-chan), may be the character that appears most frequently in the second display period.

This allows the player to see the main character frequently during the second display period, which is the longest, and increases the player's interest in the game.

The character displayed first during the first display period may be a premium character.

This allows the premium character to be shown to the player first during the initial first display period, making the group preview presentation more impactful. Note that if the first character displayed during the first display period is a premium character, this may guarantee a jackpot. Furthermore, in this case, the lighting pattern of each lamp, such as the frame lamp, may be a pattern that includes rainbow (seven colors).

The premium character may be a character that appears least frequently in all states and effects, or a character that does not appear except in group preview effects. The premium character may also be a character whose appearance suggests a higher chance of a jackpot than other characters.

(About lighting control during group preview performances)
In this embodiment, the luminance data is defined as shown in the frame lamp grandchild table in Fig. 64, but the luminance data may be defined as follows: That is, there may be first specific luminance data that combines data for turning on the lighting means at low luminance and data for turning on the lighting means at high luminance, and second specific luminance data that includes data for turning on the lighting means at low luminance but does not include data for turning on the lighting means at high luminance, and the first luminance data table may not use the first specific lighting data, and the second luminance data table may use the second specific lighting data.

In this way, during the first display period, data for lighting at high brightness is not specified, so the lamps are lit at low brightness, making it possible to express the appearance of multiple characters approaching, and during the second display period, data for lighting at high brightness is specified, making it possible to express the appearance of multiple characters advancing one after another.

The third brightness data table may also include brightness data that turns off all of the lighting means that were turned on in the second brightness data table.

In this way, the character's progression and disappearance during the third display period can be expressed by the lamp going off.

Further, the lighting means includes specific lighting means at a position related to a direction in which the characters advance in the group performance,
A specific member capable of transmitting light is disposed on the front side of the specific lighting means,
When the specific lighting means is turned on, the color visually recognized through the specific member becomes the specific color,
the first luminance data table and the second luminance data table include luminance data for lighting the lighting means in a color different from the specific color;
The first luminance data table and the second luminance data table may not include luminance data for lighting a specific lighting means.

In this way, it is possible to prevent a lamp located in a position related to the direction in which the characters move during the group preview performance from turning on during the group preview performance, causing the color seen through the specific transparent member located in front of the lamp to become a specific color not used in the group preview performance, which would interfere with the color of the group preview performance. Therefore, it is possible to provide a suitable group preview performance.

(About the video data for the group preview performance)
In this embodiment, as shown in Fig. 52, video data in which the character to be operated and the action content (action pattern) of the character are associated in advance is created in the design stage, and the video data is stored in the RAM 122 or ROM 121. In the pachinko game machine 1, the performance control CPU 120 plays the video data stored in the RAM 122 or ROM 121 when it is time to execute the group advance notice performance based on the variation pattern command received from the CPU 103. However, the video of the group advance notice performance may be played in a manner different from the above.

For example, data on the character to be acted on and data indicating the action content (action pattern) may be stored as separate data in RAM 122 or ROM 121. Then, in the pachinko game machine 1, the performance control CPU 120 may select the character data and the data indicating the action pattern stored in RAM 122 or ROM 121 when it is time to execute the group preview performance based on the variation pattern command received from CPU 103, combine the two to create video data, and play the created video data.

More specifically, in RAM 122 or ROM 121, multiple data of characters A, B, and C running and walking are stored in memory area 1, and video data of multiple arbitrary characters showing multiple movement patterns related to the group preview performance, although the characters are not fixed, is stored in memory area 2. When the time comes to execute the group preview performance, the performance control CPU 120 extracts the characters from memory area 1 and further extracts the video data related to the group preview performance from memory area 2, combines them to create one video data of the group preview performance, and plays the created video data.

(When the group preview performance overlaps with other preview performances)
In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 156 and FIG. 169, when the execution period of the group preview performance overlaps with the execution period of the other preview performance, the display area of the image in the group preview performance is larger than the display area of the image in the other preview performance, and the display of the image in the group preview performance is prioritized over the display of the image in the other preview performance (for example, the display layer of the image in the group preview performance is on the front side of the display layer of the image in the other preview performance). However, this is not limited to this. For example, when the execution period of the group preview performance overlaps with the execution period of the other preview performance, the display area of the image in the other preview performance may be larger than the display area of the image in the group preview performance, and the display of the image in the other preview performance may be prioritized over the display of the image in the group preview performance (for example, the display layer of the image in the other preview performance is on the front side of the display layer of the image in the group preview performance). Alternatively, when the execution period of the group preview performance overlaps with the execution period of the other preview performance, the display area of the image in the group preview performance may be larger than the display area of the image in the other preview performance, and the display of the image in the other preview performance may be prioritized over the display of the image in the group preview performance (for example, the display layer of the image in the other preview performance may be on the front side of the display layer of the image in the group preview performance). Also, when the execution period of the group preview performance overlaps with the execution period of the other preview performance, the display area of the image in the other preview performance may be larger than the display area of the image in the group preview performance, and the display of the image in the group preview performance may be prioritized over the display of the image in the other preview performance (for example, the display layer of the image in the group preview performance may be on the front side of the display layer of the image in the other preview performance). Note that cases in which the display area of images in other preview performances is larger than the display area of images in the group preview performance include cases in which preview images that catch the player's attention, such as images suggesting a jackpot, are hidden by images in the group preview performance, but images located around the preview image (for example, images showing flames or an aura surrounding the preview image) are not hidden by images in the group preview performance and can be seen.

(Example of time-saving control without going through a hit)
Next, an example of executing time-saving control without going through a hit (a big hit, a small hit, etc.) as a time-saving state will be described.
(Example of time-saving control using time-saving symbols)

(A1) In each of the above-mentioned features and variations, the transition to the time-saving state (high base state) is exemplified as always passing through a big win state or a small win state in which the special variable winning ball device 7A is activated, but this invention is not limited to this. For example, when a time-saving pattern is derived and displayed as a special pattern, the transition to the time-saving state (high base state) may be made without activating the special variable winning ball device 7A. In other words, the time-saving state may be controlled to not pass through a win (big win, small win, etc.).

(A2) In addition, the time-saving symbols described above may be part of the losing symbols or part of the small winning symbols.

(A3) In addition, when performing lottery processing for the derivation and display of time-saving symbols, the lottery may be performed using a random number dedicated to the lottery of time-saving symbols, or the lottery may be performed using a random number for other lotteries, such as a lottery random number for a losing symbol, a lottery random number for a jackpot symbol, a lottery random number for a small jackpot symbol, a random number for judging a jackpot, or a lottery random number for a fall lottery.

(A4) Furthermore, these time-saving symbols may be of multiple types, and may be used in combination with other symbols such as small win symbols and loss symbols. In this case, the small win symbol used in combination may determine whether or not to transition to the time-saving state. However, when a time-saving symbol is selected, no further lottery is conducted to determine whether or not to transition to the time-saving state, and no lottery is conducted to determine the number of times the time-saving state will be used.

(A5) In addition, when a lottery is held for the time-saving symbols and the setting value can be changed, the probability of drawing the time-saving symbols does not change according to the setting value. In other words, the probability of drawing the time-saving symbols is the same for all setting values, but the probability of drawing these time-saving symbols may be different for the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

(A6) In addition, the timing of obtaining the random number when drawing the time-saving pattern may be when the ball enters the start hole (first start hole, second start hole), regardless of whether a dedicated random number is used or another random number is used.

(A7) In addition, for winning when a lottery for a time-saving pattern is conducted, if a dedicated random number (time-saving lottery random number) is used, the result of the lottery using the dedicated random number (time-saving lottery random number) is the winning value, if a small win pattern random number is used to draw the time-saving pattern, a specific small win pattern random number value is the winning value, and if a random number for a fall lottery judgment value is used to draw the time-saving pattern, the random number for the fall lottery judgment value is the winning value. Also, a lottery using a structure, for example, a time-saving area may be provided inside the special variable winning ball device 7A, and the passage of the game ball through the time-saving area may be the winning of the time-saving pattern.

(A8) In addition, when the lottery for the time-saving symbol is performed using a structure and the small winning symbol is used in combination with the time-saving symbol, the variable display count of the time-saving state (time-saving count) is set so as not to change depending on whether or not the time-saving area is passed through.

(A9) In addition, when a lottery is held for the time-saving pattern, if a losing pattern random number is used to draw the time-saving pattern, a specific losing pattern random number value can be the winning value, and if a winning pattern random number is used to draw the time-saving pattern, a specific winning pattern random number value can be the winning value. However, when these random numbers are used as the winning value, this is only possible for machines whose settings cannot be changed, since performance other than the probability of winning varies depending on the settings.

(A10) The timing of determining the result of the lottery for the time-saving symbol may be performed after the determination of a jackpot. The lottery for the time-saving symbol is not performed in the time-saving state (high base) or when there is a high probability, regardless of the random number value used in the lottery, but is performed only in the low probability low base state. However, when the time-saving symbol is derived and displayed when the time-saving state is already established, the number of times the time-saving symbol is reset or the lottery is not performed, as long as it is determined for each gaming machine.

(A11) In addition, the number of times the time-saving symbol is displayed when it is derived can have multiple predetermined times depending on the winning value (symbol) and the game state. In addition, the conditions for granting the time-saving symbol can be different for each time-saving symbol.

(A12) In addition, when the number of times the time-saving pattern is used varies depending on the time-saving pattern, the lottery for allocating the time-saving pattern can be changed between special pattern 1 and special pattern 2.

(A13) In addition, even when the same time-saving symbol is derived and displayed, the number of time-saving times awarded may differ depending on the game state at that time. However, this must be determined in advance for the game state.

(A14) In addition, the lottery result for the time-saving pattern in a low-probability, low-base state can include the lottery result of "0 time-saving times."

(A15) In addition, a lottery for deriving a time-saving end pattern (time-saving end lottery) may be executed, and the number of time-saving times may be set to the number of times after the start of the time-saving period until the time-saving end pattern is derived and displayed, or until the jackpot pattern is derived and displayed. In other words, the number of time-saving times may not be set, and may be unlimited in principle.

(A16) In addition, the number of time-saving times and the conditions for granting the time-saving times may be different between the time-saving times controlled by the time-saving symbols and the time-saving times controlled by the occurrence of a jackpot.

(A17) In addition, when a time-saving symbol is derived and displayed, the timing at which the time-saving state is controlled is the point at which the symbol determination time for the time-saving symbol has elapsed. However, when a small win symbol random number is used to select the time-saving symbol, if a small win is won and the time-saving state is entered, the timing at which the time-saving state is controlled is the end of the small win operation.

(A18) In addition, the timing at which the time-saving state is controlled in the case of a lottery using a structure is the timing at which the operation of the structure ends in a game state in which the structure is operated (for example, a small win state).

(A19) In addition, in the case of a gaming machine that is controlled to a high-probability, low-base state for a predetermined number of variable displays after a jackpot (a so-called specified-number-of-times-variable-game machine (ST machine)), the gaming machine may be in the high-probability, low-base state when the gaming center opens, and after the high-probability, low-base state has ended after the specified number of variable displays have been executed, it may be controlled to a time-saving state.

(A20) In addition, if a time-saving limiter function is installed and a time-saving pattern is derived and displayed, the number of times the time-saving limiter is activated is updated.

(A21) The time required for the time-saving symbol to be determined may also be different from the time required for the other symbols to be determined.

(Other examples of time-saving control using time-saving symbols)
As another time-saving control using the time-saving symbol, the control described below may be executed.

(B1) In the normal state, game control may be performed to transition from the normal state to the time-saving state (special state) based on the display of the variable display result of the time-saving pattern with a special pattern (special display result), and game control may not be performed to transition from the time-saving state to a similar time-saving state based on the display of the variable display result of the time-saving pattern with a special pattern in the time-saving state (even if the time-saving pattern is displayed, game state switching control such as overwriting the time-saving state (such as the time-saving state occurring again) may not be performed). In addition, different effects may be performed when the variable display result of the time-saving pattern with a special pattern is displayed in the normal state and when the variable display result of the time-saving pattern with a special pattern is displayed in the time-saving state (for example, for decorative patterns, a special pattern is displayed as the time-saving pattern in the normal state and a general losing pattern is displayed in the time-saving state). This allows suitable control depending on the state when the variable display result of the time-saving pattern is displayed (for example, the interest is increased by executing effects depending on whether the state is changed or not).

(B2) In a gaming machine controlled as in (B1), when the display result of a special symbol is a time-saving symbol, the special symbol may be a time-saving symbol that is common in both the normal state and the time-saving state, and the decorative symbol may be a different symbol displayed as the display result in the normal state and the time-saving state (for example, the decorative symbol may be a special symbol that corresponds to the time-saving symbol in the normal state, but a symbol that simply corresponds to the time-saving symbol may be displayed in the time-saving state, such as a missing symbol). This prevents the player from feeling that they have lost out due to the display result of the decorative symbol in the time-saving state, and suppresses a decline in interest in the game.

(B3) In a gaming machine controlled as in (B1), in the normal state, a presentation is executed that suggests whether the display result of the decorative pattern will be a special pattern (time-saving pattern), but in the time-saving state, the presentation that suggests whether the display result of the decorative pattern will be a special pattern (time-saving pattern) may not be executed. This prevents the player from feeling that they have lost out due to the display result of the decorative pattern due to the presentation in the time-saving state, and suppresses a decrease in interest in the game.

(B4) In a gaming machine controlled as in (B1), the fixed display time of the decorative symbols (the time for which the display state is maintained after the fixed surface result is displayed) may be controlled to be different between the normal state and the time-saving state. This prevents the player from feeling that they have lost out due to the presentation of the decorative symbols in the time-saving state, and suppresses a decrease in interest in the game.

(B5) After the first variable display using the first special pattern has been performed, and after the second variable display using the second special pattern has been performed, the state can be controlled to be advantageous to the player, and game control may be performed to transition from the normal state to the time-saving state (special state) based on the display of a variable display result of a time-saving pattern using a special pattern (special display result) in the normal state, and game control may not be performed to transition from the time-saving state to a similar time-saving state based on the display of a variable display result of a time-saving pattern using a special pattern in the time-saving state (game state switching control may not be performed to overwrite the time-saving state (such that the time-saving state occurs again) even if a time-saving pattern is displayed). The second variable display has a higher rate of displaying the variable display result of the time-saving pattern than the first variable display, and information about the variable display is stored as reserved memory information, and different effects can be executed depending on whether the reserved memory information is stored when the time-saving state ends (such as a display of continued time-saving when switching to time-saving control, and an effect that can identify that time-saving control is not being executed when switching to time-saving control is not switched to), and during the time-saving state, right-hit play is performed in response to a right-hit notification (an indication instructing right-hit), until all variable displays based on the reserved memory information stored when the time-saving state ends are completed. It is also possible to disable a left-hit notification (an indication instructing left-hit). This allows for suitable control depending on the state when the variable display result of the time-saving pattern is displayed (for example, interest is increased by executing an effect depending on whether the state is switched or not).

(B6) After the first variable display using the first special pattern has been performed, and after the second variable display using the second special pattern has been performed, the state can be controlled to be advantageous to the player, and game control may be performed to transition from the normal state to the time-saving state (special state) based on the display of a variable display result of a time-saving pattern using a special pattern (special display result) in the normal state, and game control may not be performed to transition from the time-saving state to a similar time-saving state based on the display of a variable display result of a time-saving pattern using a special pattern in the time-saving state (game state switching control may not be performed to overwrite the time-saving state (such that the time-saving state occurs again) even if a time-saving pattern is displayed). The second variable display has a higher rate of displaying the variable display result of the time-saving pattern than the first variable display, and information about the variable display is stored as reserved memory information, and different effects can be executed depending on whether the reserved memory information is stored when the time-saving state ends (such as a display of continued time-saving when transitioning to time-saving control, and an effect that can identify that time-saving control is not being executed when not transitioning to time-saving control), and during the time-saving state, right-hitting play is performed in response to a right-hitting notification, until all variable displays based on the remaining reserved memory information stored when the time-saving state ends are completed. It is also possible to disable a left-hitting notification (a notification instructing left-hitting). This allows for suitable control depending on the state when the variable display result of the time-saving pattern is displayed (for example, interest is increased by executing effects depending on whether the state is transitioned or not).

(B7) A left hit notification may be executed in the variable display (first variable display) that is executed after the variable display (second variable display) based on the remaining reserved memory information stored when the time-saving state ends is completed. This allows the game to proceed smoothly because instructions on how to hit are displayed appropriately, and the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

(B8) The notification mode of the right-hit notification executed in response to a win may be different between when the display result of the time-saving pattern is displayed in the variable display (second variable display) based on the remaining reserved memory information stored when the time-saving state ends and when a win (small win, big win) occurs in the variable display (first variable display) in the normal state other than when the variable display based on the remaining reserved memory information is executed. This prevents the player from feeling like they have lost out due to the display result of the decorative pattern through the presentation of the notification mode of the right-hit notification, and suppresses a decrease in interest in the game.

(B9) In the remaining reserved memory information stored when the time-saving state ends, when there is reserved memory information that displays the display result of a time-saving pattern and when there is no reserved memory information, it may be possible to execute a different effect after executing a common effect (for example, when the fourth of four remaining reserved memories has reserved memory information that displays the display result of a time-saving pattern, a common effect that suggests whether or not to return to the time-saving state can be executed up to the variable display based on the third reserved memory information, and a time-saving state return effect different from the common effect can be executed with the variable display based on the fourth reserved memory information). This prevents the player from feeling that they have lost out due to the display result of the decorative pattern due to the effect of the notification mode of the right-hit notification, and suppresses a decrease in interest in the game.

(B10) The notification mode of the right-hit notification executed in response to a win may be different between the presentation at the time of transition to the time-saving state based on the display result of the variable display (second variable display) based on the remaining reserved memory information stored when the time-saving state ends and the presentation at the time of transition to the time-saving state based on the display result of the variable display (first variable display) in the normal state other than when the variable display based on the remaining reserved memory information is executed. This allows the presentation to change depending on the game state, thereby increasing interest in the game.

(B11) The final display time (the time from when the finalized surface result is displayed to when the display state is maintained) of the display result in the variable display (second variable display) based on the remaining reserved memory information stored when the time-saving state ends may be the same as the final display time of the display result in the variable display (first variable display) in the normal state other than when the variable display based on the remaining reserved memory information is executed. This can suppress an increase in control data.

(B12) During the period in which the variable display (second variable display) based on the remaining reserved memory information stored when the time-saving state ends is executed, the right-hit notification may not be executed, and when the time-saving pattern display result is displayed in the variable display based on the remaining reserved memory information, the right-hit notification may be executed during the initial period at the start of the next variable display. This allows the player to play smoothly because the instructions on how to play are given appropriately, and the interest in the game can be improved.

(B13) In the normal state, a game is controlled to transition from the normal state to the time-saving state (special state) based on the display of a variable display result (special display result) of a time-saving pattern with a special pattern, and a common specific effect (reach effect, advance notice effect) can be executed when the variable display result is a winning pattern (specific display result) such as a small win pattern or a big win pattern, and when the variable display result is a time-saving pattern (special display result), and the rate at which the time-saving pattern (special display result) is displayed may differ depending on which of the multiple types of common specific effects is executed. And when the display result of the time-saving pattern is displayed in the variable display, a right-hit notification may be executed during the initial period at the start of the next variable display. This allows the effect to be controlled appropriately depending on the game state when the time-saving pattern (special display result) is displayed.

(B14) After executing the common specific effect, the display result may be a winning pattern (specific display result) or a time-saving pattern (special display result). This increases the variety of variable display results, making the game more interesting.

(B15) The game control CPU 103 can select a common variation pattern for when a winning symbol (specific display result) is obtained, when a time-saving symbol (special display result) is obtained, or when a losing symbol (predetermined display result) is obtained, and the presentation control CPU 120 can execute different presentations in the variable display depending on the type of pattern designation command that designates the display result, even when it receives a command designating the same variation pattern from the game control CPU 103. This increases the variety of presentations in the variable display, making the game more interesting.

(B16) After the common specific effect is executed, a special effect can be executed when a time-saving pattern (special display result) is obtained. This makes it possible to increase the interest of the game by the special effect after the execution of the common specific effect.

(B17) Depending on the type of common specific effect, a special effect that can be executed when a time-saving pattern (special display result) is achieved may or may not be executed (for example, a special effect may not be executed when an effect with a higher expectation of a win among multiple types of super reach effects is executed). This allows the expectation of a win to be maintained without excessively encouraging the time-saving state, thereby improving the interest of the game.

(B18) The expectation (proportion) of the time-saving symbol (special display result) appearing when the special effect is executed may be different depending on the type of common specific effect. This allows the expectation of a win to be maintained without executing an effect that excessively stimulates only the time-saving state, thereby improving the interest of the game.

(B18) The expectation (proportion) of the time-saving symbol (special display result) appearing when the special effect is executed may be different depending on the type of common specific effect. This allows the expectation of a win to be maintained without executing an effect that excessively stimulates only the time-saving state, thereby improving the interest of the game.

(B19) The expectation level (proportion) of a time-saving pattern (special display result) may be different depending on the presentation mode of a predetermined presentation different from the common specific presentation (for example, a presentation that displays an active display (a display that has moved from the display position of a pending display to another display position, and that performs a presentation that can suggest the expectation level of a hit corresponding to the currently active variable display) that can change the display mode depending on the expectation level of a hit)). This allows for an increase in interest in the game, as a presentation that excessively stimulates only the time-saving state is not executed and the expectation of a hit is maintained.

(B20) In a special effect that can be executed when a time-saving symbol (special display result) is reached, an effect that indicates a winning symbol (specific display result) (such as a special jackpot with a higher play value than the time-saving state) may be executed after an effect that suggests the time-saving symbol (special display result) is reached (such as a time-saving suggestion effect). This increases the interest in the game because the expectation of a win is maintained without excessively emphasizing only the time-saving state.

(B21) The game control CPU 103 can control a time-saving state (special state) with a different number of time-saving times (duration of time-saving times) depending on the type of the multiple types of time-saving patterns (special display results) provided (for example, first time-saving pattern: 50 time-saving times, second time-saving pattern: 100 time-saving times, etc.), and the presentation control CPU 120 can execute a presentation in which the number of time-saving times (duration) granted when the time-saving pattern stops varies depending on the type of presentation executed (for example, the type of reach presentation, etc.). This allows the player's attention to be focused on the number of time-saving times that will follow depending on the type of presentation, thereby increasing interest in the game.

(B22) In the normal state, a game control is performed to transition from the normal state to the time-saving state (special state) based on the display of a variable display result (special display result) of a time-saving pattern with a special pattern, and a command is sent from the game control CPU 103 (game control means) that controls the progress of the game, and the performance control CPU 120 (performance control means) that receives the command can execute a performance based on the command. The command sent includes a special command that can specify the transition (control) from the normal state to the time-saving state (special state), and when the performance control CPU 120 receives multiple types of commands including a special command, it may limit the execution of the pre-reading preview performance for the reserved memory information that occurs after the reserved memory information that is specified to execute a variable display that can transition to the time-saving state (special state) based on the pre-reading of the reserved memory information (such as not executing it at all or allowing it to be executed rarely). This allows the performance control to be executed appropriately according to the game state when the time-saving pattern (special display result) is displayed.

(B23) It is also possible to restrict the execution of a pre-reading preview performance for reserved memory information that occurs after reserved memory information that has been identified as a variable display that can transition (control) to a jackpot gaming state (specific gaming state) based on a pre-reading of the reserved memory information. In addition, it is also possible to make it possible to execute a performance of a common aspect as a pre-reading preview performance during the execution restriction of such a pre-reading preview performance. In this way, it is possible to suppress a decline in interest in the game by restricting the execution of performance control that does not correspond to the actual gaming state as the gaming state transitions.

(B24) In both cases where the variable display based on the reserved memory information for the pre-reading target is a variable display that displays a time-saving pattern (special display result) and a variable display that appears to display a time-saving pattern (special display result) but does not, the execution of the pre-reading preview performance for the reserved memory information that occurs after the reserved memory information may be restricted. This makes it possible to prevent a decline in interest in the game by restricting the execution of performance control that does not correspond to the actual game state as the game state changes.

(B25) During the execution restriction of the above-mentioned look-ahead preview performance, the look-ahead preview performance does not execute a performance with a higher expectation level than a specific expectation level (for example, when the expectation level of the color of the reserved display is blue < green < red, the color of the reserved display is not changed to red). This restricts the execution of performance control that does not correspond to the actual game state as the game state changes, thereby preventing a decline in interest in the game.

(B26) During the execution restriction of the above-mentioned look-ahead preview performance, the look-ahead preview performance does not execute a specific type of performance (for example, when the expected color of the reserved display is blue < green < red, the color of the reserved display is not changed to red). This restricts the execution of performance control that does not correspond to the actual game state as the game state changes, thereby preventing a decline in interest in the game.

(Example of time-saving control using the number of variable display times resulting in a predetermined display result, such as the number of variable display times of failure)
Next, an example of time-saving control using the number of variable displays (the number of times that a variable display that has become a miss) that have resulted in a predetermined display result (such as a miss display result, a small hit display result that does not result in a big hit, etc.) in the normal state will be described. As described below, the time-saving state (special state) may be executable on the condition that the number of times that a variable display that has become a predetermined display result (such as a miss display result, a small hit display result that does not result in a big hit, etc.) has continued has reached a special number (for example, 1000 times). Note that, as the predetermined result, the time-saving state (special state) may be executable on the condition that the number of times that a variable display that has become a miss display result has continued has reached a special number.

(C1) After the first variable display by the first special symbol is performed and after the second variable display by the second special symbol is performed, the game can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to the player based on the fact that the variable display result has become a specific display result, and the numerical information of the number of times the variable display has been executed that has become a predetermined display result (such as a miss display result, a small win display result that does not become a big win, etc.) in the normal state is updated, and when a special condition is established in which the number of times the variable display that has become the predetermined display result (the number of times it continues) has reached a special number (for example, 1000 times, etc.) based on the numerical information, the game can be controlled to transition from the normal state to a time-saving state (special state). The numerical information may be updated both when the predetermined display result is achieved in the first variable display and when the predetermined display result is achieved in the second variable display. As a result, the numerical information of the number of times the predetermined display result has been achieved continues to be updated regardless of whether the first variable display or the second variable display is executable, making it easier for the player to be rescued by the time-saving state and increasing the player's motivation to play. This makes it possible to optimally rescue players by reducing the time.

(C2) The special condition may be established when it is determined based on the numerical information that a predetermined display result different from the specific display result has been displayed a special number of times (e.g., 1000 times) in succession. This allows the player to be rescued by transitioning to a time-saving state (special state) when a series of display results unfavorable to the player are displayed, thereby preventing a decline in interest in the game.

(C3) The numerical information may be updated when a variable display is executed even in a state other than the normal state (a high probability state, a time-saving state). This allows the player to be appropriately rescued when a series of display results that are unfavorable to the player are displayed.

(C4) The numerical information may be initialized when a predetermined initialization condition is met. Such an initialization condition may be met by control to the advantageous state. This makes it possible to suppress rescue when there is no longer a need to rescue the player, such as when an advantageous state is reached that is advantageous to the player, and to prevent the player's gambling tendency from increasing more than necessary.

(C5) When a special display result (time-saving pattern) different from the specific display result is displayed as a variable display result in the normal state, control for transitioning to a time-saving state (special state) can be executed, and the predetermined condition may be established when the special display result is displayed. This makes it possible to suppress rescue when there is no longer a need to rescue the player, such as when the time-saving state (special state) that is advantageous to the player is reached, and to prevent the tendency to gamble more than necessary.

(C6) The predetermined condition may be satisfied when the variable display is executed a special number of times. This effectively makes it possible to control the game to a time-saving state (special state) until the next advantageous state occurs, thereby increasing the degree of relief for the player.

(C7) When the power is cut off due to a power outage or the like, various data including the numerical information can be backed up and stored, and when a specific condition such as an initialization operation at power-on is met, the backed up and stored data can be initialized, and the numerical information can be initialized when the specific condition is met. This prevents the numerical information backed up in the event of a power outage from being initialized and remaining when the data is initialized, thereby preventing the amusement center from being disadvantaged.

(C8) The time-saving state (special state) for a period of more than the special number (for example, 1000 times or more) can be controlled based on the numerical information becoming the special number (for example, 1000 times or more), and during the time-saving state (special state), the time-saving state (special state) can be controlled again based on the numerical information becoming the special number, and different effects can be executed in the first time-saving state (special state) and the second time-saving state (special state). As a result, in a game in an extremely unfavorable state such as being controlled in the second time-saving state (special state), it is possible to change the appearance of the effects, such as shortening the variable display time in the second time-saving state more than in the first time-saving state, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game. It is also possible to execute similar effects in the first time-saving state (special state) and the second time-saving state (special state) without executing such effects. This makes it possible to prevent players from being overly aware that they are in an extremely unfavorable state, such as being controlled to the second time-saving state (special state), and prevents a decline in interest in the game.

(C9) When the value of the special chart process flag is a first value (0 to 2), a first process related to variable display is executed, when the value of the special chart process flag is a second value (4 or more) different from the first value, a second process related to an advantageous state (jackpot game state) is executed, and when the value of the special chart process flag is a third value (3) different from the first and second values, a third process for controlling to a time-saving state (special state) based on the establishment of the special condition is executed. Also. The game ball can be hit into the first path (left game area) and the second path (right game area), and in the normal state, the game ball is hit into the first path, and in the time-saving state (special state), the game ball is hit into the second path to play. And, during the execution of the third process, although it is not controlled to the time-saving state (special state), a notification that the ball should be shot into the second path (for example, a right-hit notification by a right-hit lamp, etc.) may be issued. In addition, during execution of the third process, a notification effect may be given to indicate that the game will transition to a time-saving state (special state). This allows for suitable control even if new functions are added to the gaming machine and the specifications become more complex. For example, by turning on the right-hit lamp using the gaming control CPU 103, it is possible to execute a notification effect regarding the launch direction early (before the actual time-saving fluctuation begins) when the game actually transitions to the time-saving state (special state).

(C10) When the specific display result is displayed in a variable display where the special condition is met, the second process may be executed after the first process is executed, and the third process may not be executed. This gives priority to control to an advantageous state over control to a time-saving state (special state) based on the fulfillment of a special condition, so that the result is not more advantageous to the player, and it is possible to prevent a decline in the player's interest in the game.

(C11) The numerical information is updated when the variable display starts, and based on the updated numerical information becoming a specific value corresponding to the special number of times, the time-saving state (special state) is controlled after the variable display in which the numerical information has become a specific value ends (next fluctuation starts, waiting for customers) and when the updated numerical information becomes a specific value corresponding to the special number of times, the special information (special number of times reached flag) is changed from a first value to a second value (flag set), and when controlling to the time-saving state (special state), the special information is changed from the second value to the first value (flag reset). This makes it possible to preferably execute control to transition to the time-saving state (special state) by managing the special information.

(C12) The game control CPU 103 may select and determine a variation pattern of the variable display, and may select and determine a variation pattern of the symbol determination time that differs when the special information is the first information and when the special information is the second information. This makes it possible to preferably execute a performance when the variable display of the special number of times is executed.

(C13) When the value of the special chart process flag is a first numerical value (0 to 2), a first process related to variable display is executed, when the value of the special chart process flag is a second numerical value (4 or more) different from the first numerical value, a second process related to an advantageous state (jackpot game state) is executed, and when the value of the special chart process flag is a third numerical value (3) different from the first numerical value and the second numerical value, a third process for controlling to a time-saving state (special state) based on the establishment of a special condition is executed. Also. A command is transmitted from the CPU 103 (game control means) for game control that controls the progress of the game, and a performance based on the command can be executed by the CPU 120 (performance control means) for performance control that receives the command. And, it may be possible to transmit specific information (background designation, variable pattern) according to when the value of the special chart process flag is the second numerical value and when it is the third numerical value when in the special state. This makes it possible to perform suitable control even if a new function is installed in the gaming machine and the specifications become complicated. For example, different game states can be suitably identified, making game control easier. Then, by varying the command depending on the game state identified at that time, the presentation control CPU 120 (presentation control means) can execute suitable presentation control depending on the game state.

(C14) When the special condition is established during the time-saving state (special state), the value of the special chart process flag may be set to a fourth value different from the first value, the second value, and the third value, so that the time-saving state (special state) can be controlled again. This makes it possible to perform suitable control even if new functions are installed in the gaming machine and the specifications become more complex.

(C15) During the time-saving state (special state), different effects may be executed depending on whether the time-saving state (special state) is entered based on the display of the specific display result (winning symbol) or whether the special condition (condition for the variable display count) is met and the time-saving state (special state) is entered (for example, when the time-saving state is entered under the condition that the variable display count is equal to or greater than the special count, a time-saving state effect with a shorter fluctuation time is executed than when the time-saving state is entered after the end of a jackpot game state). This makes it possible to execute effects for the time-saving state (special state) according to the game situation, thereby increasing interest in the game.

(C16) During the time-saving state (special state), it may be possible to execute similar effects when the time-saving state (special state) is entered based on the display of the specific display result (winning symbol) and when the special condition (condition for the variable display count) is met and the time-saving state (special state) is entered (for example, a time-saving state effect with a similar variable time may be executed when the time-saving state is entered because the variable display count is equal to or greater than the special count and when the time-saving state is entered after a jackpot has ended). This does not require new performance data, so development costs do not increase, and interest in the game can be increased by not confusing the player.

(C17) During the time-saving state (special state), different effects may be executed depending on whether the time-saving state (special state) is entered based on the display of the special display result (time-saving pattern) or whether the special condition (condition for the number of variable displays) is met and the time-saving state (special state) is entered (for example, when the time-saving state is entered under the condition that the number of variable displays is equal to or greater than the special number, a time-saving state effect with a shorter fluctuation time than when the time-saving state is entered after the end of a jackpot is executed). This makes it possible to execute effects for the time-saving state (special state) according to the game situation, thereby increasing interest in the game.

(C18) During the time-saving state (special state), it may be possible to execute the same effects when the time-saving state (special state) is entered based on the display of the special display result (time-saving pattern) and when the special condition (condition for the variable display count) is met and the time-saving state (special state) is entered (for example, when the time-saving state is entered under the condition that the variable display count is equal to or greater than the special count, a time-saving state effect with a shorter fluctuation time than when the time-saving state is entered after the end of a jackpot is executed). This does not require new effect data, so development costs do not increase, and interest in the game can be increased by not confusing the player.

(C19) In the event of a power outage or other power outage, various data including the numerical information can be backed up and stored, and when the power is turned on, the game control CPU 103 can send predetermined information (a RAM clear command at cold start, and a command notifying the number of variable displays until the end of the time-saving state at hot start) to the presentation control CPU 120 based on the backed up data, and the presentation control CPU 120 can execute suggestive presentations (such as a different early morning number roll, a different background image, or a presentation that suggests whether a 100-spin variation is far or close) regarding the number of times the variable display has been executed in a predetermined period after the power is turned on, based on receiving the predetermined information. This gives players a motivation to play early in the morning, increasing the operating rate of the gaming machine while preventing an increase in the processing burden.

(C20) The game control CPU 103 may transmit specific information (a command capable of identifying information related to the time-saving state) to the presentation control CPU 120 in relation to the execution of the variable display, and the presentation control CPU 120 may execute a special presentation (such as a presentation suggesting the end of the time-saving state count) in relation to the control to the special state based on the establishment of a special condition based on the specific information. The specific information may include first specific information (first background designation, dedicated countdown presentation information) capable of identifying that the difference between the number of times the variable display has been executed and the special number is less than a predetermined value (for example, 127), and second specific information (such as a command to count down every 100 spins) capable of identifying that the difference between the number of times the variable display has been executed and the special number is greater than a predetermined value (for example, 127). This can reduce the risk of the player unknowingly losing money by periodically suggesting a function to the player, and can also suitably realize command processing.

(C21) The presentation control CPU 120 can execute a suggestion presentation (for time-saving state suggestion presentation control) that suggests that the game will be controlled to a time-saving state (special state) when a special condition is met, based on the execution of a first predetermined number of variable displays (e.g., 300 times) that are less than the special number of times, and can execute a suggestion presentation each time a second predetermined number of variable displays (e.g., 100 times) that are less than the first predetermined number are executed before the execution of the special number of variable displays. This reduces the risk of the player unknowingly incurring losses by periodically suggesting functions to the player.

(C22) When the power is cut off due to a power outage or the like, various data including the numerical information can be backed up and stored, and the game control CPU 103 can initialize the backed up data when a specific condition such as an initialization operation at power-on is met, and the presentation control CPU 120 executes different presentations (such as different presentations when transitioning to the time-saving state) when it is controlled to the time-saving state (special state) based on the establishment of the special condition (condition for variable display count) before the specific display result is displayed after the backup-stored data is initialized and before the specific display result is displayed, and when it is controlled to the special state based on the establishment of the special condition after the backup-stored data is initialized. This makes it possible to perform suitable control even if new functions are installed in the gaming machine and the specifications become complicated. In addition, because the difference in the presentation allows the player to know whether the backed-up data has been initialized, for example, in the case of a gaming machine in which the setting of the jackpot probability can be changed, the player can know that the setting may have been changed, which increases the number of factors for guessing the setting and improves the interest in the game.

(C23) When the power is cut off due to a power outage or the like, various data including the numerical information can be backed up and stored, and the game control CPU 103 can initialize the backed up data when a specific condition such as an initialization operation at power-on is met, and the performance control CPU 120 executes different performances after being controlled to the time-saving state (special state) (e.g., different performances after transitioning to the time-saving state) when the time-saving state (special state) is controlled based on the establishment of the special condition (condition for the variable number of displays) before the specific display result is displayed after the backup-stored data is initialized and before the specific display result (winning pattern) is displayed and the special state is controlled based on the establishment of the special condition after the backup-stored data is initialized. This makes it possible to perform suitable control even if new functions are installed in the gaming machine and the specifications become complicated. In addition, because the difference in the presentation allows the player to know whether the backed-up data has been initialized, for example, in the case of a gaming machine in which the setting of the jackpot probability can be changed, the player can know that the setting may have been changed, which increases the number of factors for guessing the setting and improves the interest in the game.

(D1) The execution rate of the group preview effect may be different depending on whether the result of the variable display is a time-saving pattern, a jackpot, or a miss.

This invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described above, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of this invention. Each configuration related to the features of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be combined as appropriate with some or all of each configuration related to other features. Features combined in this way, or individual features that are not combined, may be combined as appropriate with some or all of each configuration related to other features.

The above-mentioned pachinko gaming machine 1 is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of gaming media as prizes when a winning prize is won, but it may also be an enclosed type gaming machine that encloses gaming media and awards points when a winning prize is won.

Only one type of pattern (for example, a symbol showing "- ") may be displayed during the variable display of the special pattern, and the variable display may be achieved by repeatedly displaying and extinguishing the pattern. Furthermore, even if the pattern is displayed during the variable display, the pattern may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the display result may not include the symbol showing "- ").

In the above explanation, a pachinko gaming machine 1 was shown as the gaming machine, but the invention can also be applied to slot machines (for example, slot machines equipped with one or more of big bonus, regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, CZ (hereinafter, bonus, etc.)) that can play a game in which medals are inserted and a predetermined bet amount is set, multiple types of symbols are rotated in response to the player's operation of the control lever, and when the symbols are stopped in response to the player's operation of the stop button, a specific combination of symbols is formed, and a predetermined number of medals is paid out to the player.

In this specification, expressions of comparison of various percentages such as the execution percentage of a performance (such as "high", "low", "different", etc.) may include one being a percentage of "0%". For example, this also includes one being a percentage of "0%" and the other being a percentage of "100%" or a percentage less than "100%".

The embodiments disclosed herein should be considered to be illustrative and not restrictive in all respects. The scope of the present invention is indicated by the claims, not the above description, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope of the claims.

1 Pachinko game machine, 2 Game board, 3 Game machine frame, 5 Image display device, 5C, 5L, 5R Decorative pattern display area, 6A Winning ball device, 6B Variable winning ball device, 8L, 8R Speaker, 9 Game effect lamp, 10 General winning port, 11 Main board, 12 Performance control board, 13 Sound control board, 14 Lamp control board, 15 Relay board, 9020 Special pattern LED board, 21 Gate switch, 22A First start port switch, 22B Second start port switch, 23 Count switch, 24 V winning switch, 30 Ball hitting operation handle, 31A Stick controller, 31B Push button, 32 Movable body, 35A Controller sensor unit, 35B Push sensor, 41 Passing gate, 9050 Fourth pattern unit, 81, 82, 83 Solenoid, 100 Game control microcomputer, 101, 121 ROM, 102, 122 RAM, 104, 124 random number circuit, 106 RTC, 110 switch circuit, 111 output circuit, 123 display control unit.

Claims (1)

A gaming machine capable of executing variable display and controlling the display to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A light emitting means capable of emitting light;
A display means capable of displaying a specific display corresponding to the variable display;
A performance execution means is provided for executing a specific display performance for displaying the specific display and a specific light emission performance for causing the light emission means to emit light based on the establishment of a start condition,
the effect execution means executes the specific light-emitting effect so that light emission from the light-emitting means is recognizable by a player before the display of the specific display is completed in the specific display effect;
The rate at which the specific light-emitting performance is controlled to an advantageous state is higher when the specific light-emitting performance is executed than when the specific light-emitting performance is not executed,
The specific light-emitting performance is a performance in which, during a first period from when the specific light-emitting performance is started to a predetermined timing, the light-emitting means emits light in a predetermined manner that is a manner corresponding to the specific light-emitting performance, and during a second period from the predetermined timing to a specific timing of a variable display that is a target of the specific light-emitting performance, the light-emitting means emits light in a specific manner that is less emphasized than the predetermined manner,
The second period includes a period before the variable display that is the target of the specific light-emitting performance is executed and a period during which the variable display that is the target of the specific light-emitting performance is executed,
The specific timing is a timing prior to a timing at which a variable display result in a variable display that is a target of the specific light-emitting performance is derived,
The light emitting means includes a first light emitting means and a second light emitting means different from the first light emitting means,
The second light-emitting means emits light in a predetermined manner during the first period, and emits light in a specific manner different from the predetermined manner during the second period.

Images